Home

Thermo iPCM12-Rev 2

1. Basic cabinet assemblics sccsscsssseccssssssssssccsssssssssessssecssscesssssesssssscsssssssssssscsssessesessesesesesssseres iPCMI2A Open booth Type S715 A ccsssssesessssessseseceessesassseseesssessasssesesseeecsstsnessesees iPCM12B Closed booth Type 57194 ene enne eene eene iPCM12C Closed booth with doors Type 5719A Optional AE02224A gamma kit iiie eere toner ettet fo RR HERE Electronics display chassis D92520 A eese essen eese teens tne atas tasas tns en senta Main processor board Type 57124 X Channel GPIO Board Type 57074 Battery Controller Board Type 57034 DC DC Converter Board Type 5714B esee Scintillation HV and Amplifier Type 42543 0223 FHT681 eese Annunciators Type 5711A and 5672A ccsssscscssssscsssseessnsssssscssesesnssssessssesesessssessssssesesssseseseees 2 4 Scintillation Detectors Type 5708A amp 5717A eee eese eee eese esee tnen 2 5 Chapter 3 Specification rsvcssccsssececssseccsceeescnesceeseniceccdassssessassiaasanacsianeasinisnateonicassacancs Operational Parameters ssscsssceccsssssesssececsssssssssssseccsssssesssessesssscsessssssesesscssesesssssssesesessssesees NO EVAXO n OI M Default Messages Background Capability Detec
2. 930 rus 166662 SCALE THIRDANGLE PRovection IE IN DOUBT ASK oN OuG Fn 702796 MAINS a Gm ti H H im HB oj i ah INLET f GE F NETWORK SOCKET b a EHe a lk sail eom SOARD ill Pon UPPER PLINTH EH 32601 E i T e o e Lr o jo le o o P P o B e T 5 ej le ED m TOUCH SCREEN O CONTROLLER us b sz e PL7 B92602 A M KEY GREEN LED sj LCD SUB ASSY e a as LOCATED UNDER ETX BOARD 5712 E Th ss EI amp 8 ir ip E ge 8 To 8 g2 E 0 0 ag P BACKLIGHT 9 ipm on INVERTER E 0 D ej S le ee yw on R O e b i 2 ROCKER m 2 o g SWITCH B91918 A Os NO E 5 DC DC BOARD MITES 11705242 PL3 3 omal 9 UPPER PLINTH S M E 8 sooo ROTE 8 8 B92596 A a E S222 CONNECT BOARD TO ve F amp ce BATTERY TERMINAL D 2 lt 8 S3233 a z cce 2222 92059 IN LINE 8 a 56566 FUSE PCB 2 ce ve vel d B e ZE 25 oma gee g o P 228 92165 z 5 12V BATTERY 208 E 5703A Egge E S 2 8 ZEE a 3 i 5589 e aa 6468 g Fupz Miss A Mllo 2882 o o 25 2 9 JRD DISPLAY g lt gt BOARD 5228 5711
3. HIR ERE P Battery Controller Type 57034A essent eene nennenne nennen X Channel Battery Controller PCB Type 5720A Gas Chassis D92610 A X Channel Gas Flow Sensor Board Type 5709A IUUENIS UICE User Guidance Display Board Type 57114A sss Five Way LED Cluster Board Type 5672A Gas Flow Alpha Beta Detectors 4 e eere ee eese esee teen ente sin tn status tatu senses tne s tasa est nio Quad Gas Flow a B Detector Type 5710A sess X Channel Quad Charge Amplifier Type 5704A Scintillation Gamma Detectors eere eese esee tnentn annus Scintillation Gamma Detectors Type 5708A and 5717A Scintillation HV and Amplifier Type 42543 0223 8 2 14 Chapter 3 Specification pc 3 1 Operational Parameters cccssccsssssscssssssccccssssssssccnsssssssnssnssecsssccsessescesscssssesssssscessesssssesersesseses 3 3 Software Options Default Messages Background Capability Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor vii Contents Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Issue 2 0 Gas Flow Detector Scintillation Detector Options Scintillator ConstFetlons eie ra one a ade en PORE RT S Ee Alpha and Beta Detection Efficienci
4. 12 1 Spares List Basic Components IPCM12A sessessesessossessoesesesooesesoreeesesoreeesosoceeososoeeeososocoeososeee 12 1 Spares List Optional Components csssssssssssscsssssescsscessccsssssscsssssscsssesnsssssssssssssessesnsseee 12 3 Available Spare Parts Kits scsssssssssssssssscssscssssssscssscssssssssssersssesnssessesnssnssessessesssssssessesssseses 12 4 Accessories LiSt g 12 5 Drawing Appendix raiione eee cee 13 1 Drawings List by Assembly eeeeeee esee esee en eee tntn tnn tasto ones inen eto en enean insane 13 1 alossary Of rioris Sic or nun d E S Rd cn eio G 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor xi Tables Issue 2 0 Tables Table 1 Probability Sigma and 46 wo ce ee eeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeseeeees 6 22 xii iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Figures Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 Typical Detector Performance Graph Figure 2 Example of iPCM12 User Screen Figure 3 Example of Result display on the iPCM12 User Screen 5 102 Figure 4 Elliptical phantom esses Figure 5 Perfect layout of alpha beta detector sss Figure 6 iPCMI2 alpha beta detector layout in one step Figure 7 iPCMI2 detector layout includin
5. te ab ah ne PH CA e Ene Gias ConnectiOnS 51 eret ere d ede ta e een eade Bode to tec Gas Ew qu Purging the System eee SERERE ERR ET A EES Gas Flow Rate Normal Operation Orientation and Positioning of the iPCM12 with Scintillation Detection Option AE0222A Known as iPCM12C Choice of Location Optimum Orientation within Directional Background Fields sss 4 11 Operating Instructions eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene eene nennen nennen nennen 5 1 Operational NIPIT S Selecting Detectors Setup Menu odes eee A Pur rii ete eter e e Diagnostics MET oie ROO Ra SEE HEC GRENIER Calibration Menu E Interfaces x t oaa Re qa eR AO E De d e ER e D ie Dee aq is Data 2 eee RE m pre E e RUE RIEN System Menu T jr H h M Personnel Monitoring T Entering c reete P ER HR UN Rei cone Commence Monitoring PU RO PRSE AG 5 96 Monitoring Result Exiting tlie Portals au RU er UU Battery Mains Supply Indicator SWitch Off P Technical Descript
6. Figure 13 Monitoring Statistics showing Operational Margin Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 32 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 e Id 9 49 49 e ayey Juno sso15 9 cV EV IS Q9 9 9 a 9 9 Vo S Nx on 9 T OT m ae E EM v q w SS 8250000 SOL v8 0L ov cv 00 S0 S6 e2uepuuo 100 0 jane esie uiie wepy d uon ejeg JO qo4d 1 Buuoyuopy 3 y euifis uue y espe punojByxy2eg g ej punoibyseg e Figure 14 Monitoring Statistics showing Minimum 2 Monitoring Time 6 33 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Circuitry Chapter Technical Description Circuitry Description page 2 1 provides a general background to the following description and should be read before proceeding Introduction This section outlines the operation and function of all the major electronic assemblies which comprise the iPCM12 Description of all assemblies is restricted to general operation and specification since detailed circuit operation may be the subject of design confidentiality The main circuit boards described here include 5703A 5704A 5709A 5711A 5712A 5713A 5714B Battery Controller Controls and monitors charging discharging of battery
7. Beta Detector BORON npa Apply Cancel POM 12 Vem and Creme ney Scans Serbo Thermo Select the Apply button to save the Scan Press the Cancel button to quit without saving or press the Back button to return to the Start new scan screen Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 51 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If Detector System y is selected and the All Detectors button is pressed the user is able to setup the individual detectors prio Select a detector to select its individual settings Tick the Drag Cursor box to enable the HV Setting by either dragging the cursor to the required value or setting the required value directly into the XU box This enables the Apply BUE moro Cursor button RaoTUI2 Rao TATA Select the Table button to view the HV Settings as chart values To view the HV Scan as a Table press the Table button to display the scan results To view the HV Scan as a Graph press the Graph button to display the scan results To view the current Scan for all detectors press the Current HV Scan button to display the scan results 5 52 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions To view the last saved HV Scan press the Last HV Scan button to display the scan results See Performing the HV Scan page 9 4 for more i
8. Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor PPCM 12 OVerVIeW loea Eo EYES Key Nomenclature Codes eese Option GT cp Chapter 2 Description ETE iPCM12 Cabinet Assemblies essessssseoseseosososeseoseseesoscsessoseseososoeeseoseseosesosessosessoseseerososeseesesesresesese iPCM12A Basic Open Booth Cabinet Type 5715A sss IPEM Band C ERR ERR E HERE DER Hua eaten sarees Closed Booth Cabinet Type 57 19 Xe NDA D Closed Booth Door and or Barrier qe PAG HU U M7 Closed Booth Full Body Gamma Kit sss Electronics Chassis D92520 A sssssssccssssssssssscrsscsssessssesssscscssssssscessseccessssssssssessessssesessesecessesersres X Channel Processor Board Type 5712A LCD Display and Touch Screen Assembly DC DC Converter Board Type 5714C sse Us r Accessories Panel cei ence tentent inte tane re de Dati vienen eee pec eh Bn ccIBBRI gs A X Channel HV Generator PCB Type 5713A 2 6 X Channel GPIO Board Type 5707A Power Chassis P AC Mains Power Supply uec Etre rb
9. The archive files were successfully written to ES Contaminated Instrument Contamination Cleared System Actions System Administrator Login Shutdown e 0c au To clear a contamination press the Contamination Cleared button To exit the iPCM12 application press the Exit to Application Login button A confirmation message will be displayed Select OK to close the application To shutdown the entire system press the System Shutdown button A confirmation message will be displayed Select OK to shut the entire system down This action will close the application Are you sure you want to do this This action will shut the entire system down Are you sure you want to do this Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Select System Setup to set the HZ emgage location volume date time and Ga time zone Location Not Set IP Address 10 210 140 90 Volume CECI Date Time 26 02 2009 10 36 Time Zone OMT Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London To change the Location enter the location using the alpha numerical field Note that the IP address is displayed on this screen To adjust the volume move the orange bar to the left to decrease the volume and to the right to increase the volume To test the volume press on the loudspeaker icon See Notes regarding Volume Levels page
10. rT1 LOWER LEG DETECTOR OUTER HAND DETECTOR LEFT FOOT DETECTOR RIGHT FOOT DETECTOR ISO THREADS CLASS 69 6H DATE DOIMOD THIS DOCUMENT INCLUDING ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREIN IS OWNED BY ThermoFisher SCIENTIFIC AND MUST BE KEPT IN CONFIDENCE AND USED SOLELY FOR THE OWNER S SPECIFIED PURPOSES THIS DOCUMENT MUST NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED NOR DIVULGED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE OWNER S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT EAR 29 09 08 SPEC 1 t 2 DEC PL 0 15 20 04 09 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE GAS SYSTEM SCHEMATIC DIMENSIONS IN ThermoFisher Bath Road Beenham Reading MILLIMETRES SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND unesssrarco E nts INTERCONNECTION DI
11. 5 5 L1 R1 e SC SC L2 R2 901 5 5 L3 R3 Mnemonic Detector SCHD Scintillation Head SCL1 Scintillation Left Body 1 SCL2 Scintillation Left Body 2 SCL3 Scintillation Left Body 3 SCRI Scintillation Right Body 1 SCR3 Scintillation Right Body 3 SCHA Scintillation Hand SCFT Scintillation Foot SCR2 Scintillation Right Body 2 6 32 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 O0LCOLQ 86 96 6 CELE 68 18 G8 r8 28 8 aey4unog ss019 222192 9 89 99 9 9 2 EF LGGGESIC Se 0 To 90 80 41 ec06c9 0 SOL SL 9 v ev 00L 60 96 100 0 9 e 1 uue y es e 3 uien UJe v 3s E 4 d uonoejeq Jo qoJd L auL Buuoyuow 3 euifis uuejy as e 4 83ey punolByoeg Figure 17 Monitoring Statistics showing Operational Margin 6 33 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics M a c G QUOC SUO ayy 55020 5 29 CV ev cv v9 59 go 29 co 29 cM 4 5 9 99 4 v 8 5000 0 S9 L v8 0L ov cv 00
12. Anode Double Sums Figure 5 Co Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Grille 64 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Vertical Position cm 0 0 Vertical Position cm 0 0 Horizontal Scans Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Vertical response to Co 60 Gross window Max Detector Max Triple Sum Centroid Av Triple Max Quad Sum 5 096 10 096 15 096 20 096 25 0 30 0 35 0 4pi Efficiency Figure 6 Co Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Vertical response to Cs 137 Gross window Max Detector Max Triple Sum Centroid MELLE Av Triple Max Quad Sum 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 10 0 12 0 14 0 16 0 4pi Efficiency Figure 7 Cs Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Figures 8 and 9 show the variation of response for a point beta source placed at 5 cm from the closest detector and moved in a horizontal plane around the phantom The figures refer to Co 60 and Cs 137 respectively These response curves are for a source on the lower half of the body at the height of maximum efficiency in the vertical plane Figures 10 and 11 illustrate the horizontal response to gamma emissions from Co 60 and Cs 137 respectively at a height of 110 cm iPCM User Manual 6 5 Technical Description Physics 6 6 iPCM User Manual 160 170
13. 7 5 Middle NOTE If the efficiency is very different from the expected value and the background is stable perform an HV scan see Performing the HV Scan page 9 4 and repeat this procedure The Instrument Configuration Report see Reports page 5 63 will provide a hard copy of the set up and calibration results Calibration for Other Nuclides The iPCM12 will allow calibration streams to be set which will include a number nuclides and their associated percentage in the mix The iPCM12 will take account of the respective efficiency of the nuclide and the percentage to evaluate the overall efficiency of the iPCM12 to the mix Note that even when the iPCM12 is calibrated to a single nuclide such as 3 CI this is still treated as a single nuclide stream Only those nuclides to which the iPCM12 has been calibrated may be included in the mix Calibration page 5 16 and Cal Streams page 5 45 illustrate how to create the mix for a new calibration stream It is not essential that the percentage of all the nuclides entered adds up to 100 In this situation the iPCM12 will assume the unidentified percentage is due to undetectable nuclides such as and adjust the overall percentage efficiency to the mix appropriately iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 10 5 Calibration Procedure Issue 2 0 10 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Cha
14. eese 11 27 LCD Keypad Inoperative or Not Aligned esee 11 27 x iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Contents Will not Enter Background Mode Or Locked in Background Mode 11 28 Locked in Measurement Mode essere eene eene 11 28 USB Output Data is Corrupted sesenta 11 28 Barriers will not OPEN CLOSE Unreliable Door Operations 11 29 Chapter 12 Recommended Spares 12 1 Spares list basic components 1PCM124A eeeeeeeee reete eee tne ntn tnn tns tn status insta tse ta sensn nao 12 1 Spares list optional sen senses tosta o 12 2 Drawings list by assembly Accessories LISE cssessscosccoosncnssassescesnssssosaecdavessecgaroseoseasonsasentenssdessonessecsoncconstonssesessceseesssusdaseasensnpsasoa Chapter 13 Glossary of Terms aii rrr eared cee 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual xi Tables Issue Beta Issue 1 Tables Table 1 Probability Sigma and sse 6 21 xii iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Figures Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 Typical Detector Performance Graph Figure 2 Example of iP
15. 4 B ra E gog tf Eng oui gug 58 8288 8958 4 OFF RX amp TX CABLE ASSY 225E B92600 888 25u2 P 56 2968 2550 S838 Saabs 2 zm zo ir ay iB LH FOOT RH FOOT z297 RECEIVER RECEIVER 335 5585 3250 zi Seri zs ISO THREADS CLASS 6g 6H 2 Eu e MATL TOLERANCES UNLESS DRAWN AAS DATE DOWMOD 149 STATED agg NUM 29 09 08 DOboox 1986 855 cree 2DEC PL 0 15 20 04 09 5529 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG g H aa FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE 8 HE DNE Fisher Bath Road Beenham Reading 3292 SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND Eod USER POSITION SENSOR CONNECTION SCHEMATIC ETE i J umess staten INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM SHT 6 8558 MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED FOR iPCM12A D9259 1 OF6 T Z THIS DOCUMENT INCLUDING ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREIN IS OWNED BY ThermoFisher SCIENTIFIC AND MUST BE KEPT IN CONFIDENCE AND USED SOLELY FOR THE OWNER S SPECIFIED PURPOSES THIS DOCUMENT MUST NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED NOR DIVULGED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE OWNER S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE DO NOT SCALE THIRDANGLE PRovecTION IF IN DOUBT ASK SEE DRAWING D92589 A SEE DRAWING C92588 A SEE 5715 om ie a mr OUTER HAND DETECTOR ASSEMBLY 1 2 ISLAND ASSEMBLY ITEM 18 REMOVED FOR CLARITY SEE DRAWING D92586 A Be2
16. Issue 2 0 20 Det Gross Det Win Triple Gross gt Triple Win 7 7 Av Det Gross Av Triple Gross 160 470 180 160 170 Figure 14 Co Gamma Horizontal Scan Det Gross ti Triple Gross Av Det Gross Av Triple Gross 70 70 80 80 90 90 7 100 110 110 120 6 8 150 160 170 180 150 160 170 Figure 15 Cs Gamma Horizontal Scan iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Body Efficiencies Summing Radon Rejection Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Following the procedures identified in IEC 61098 the overall Beta efficiency to activity in the body region is evaluated by combining 1 the mean to peak ratio of the vertical scan Figures 8 to 11 and 2 the mean polar response obtained from the horizontal scans Figures 12 to 15 Body Average Efficiency BAE is expressed in terms of activity 47 and is given by Mean Peak Vertical Ratio x mean Horizontal polar efficiency The BAE for key radionuclides is shown in Alpha and Beta Detection Efficiencies page 3 8 A full type test report is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific on request As can be seen from all Figures 8 to 15 there are areas of low
17. Max Detector Max Triple Sum Centroid Av Det lv we we Av Triple Max Quad Sum 60 40 20 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 10 0 12 0 14 0 16 0 Efficiency Figure 11 Cs Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Horizontal Scans Figures 12 and 13 show the variation of response for a point beta source placed at 5 cm from the closest detector and moved in a horizontal plane around the phantom The figures refer to Co 60 and Cs 137 respectively These response curves are for a source on the lower half of the body at the height of maximum efficiency in the vertical plane Figures 14 and 15 illustrate the horizontal response to gamma emissions from Co 60 and Cs 137 respectively at a height of 110 cm 6 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics Peak Anode Double Sums Peak Average Double Sum Average 180 Figure 12 CI Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille 20 20 30 1696 30 40 1496 40 Peak Anode Double Sums Paak Average Double Sum Average 140 140 150 150 160 160 170 170 180 Figure 13 Co Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 7 Technical Description Physics 20 1025 0
18. Open sequence Speedo 0 Simultaneous opening Close sequence Speedo 0 Simultaneous closing MANUAL CONTROL During closing Disabled Enabled When locked Collision Support during closing Cumulative Final bang Slowly cumula tive Slowly final bang Active sensors 515 disabled SIS enabled Closing speed CONTROL PANEL X Mach panel 3 Pos AUTO Manual Automatic Cont open 4 Positions Automatic Manual Cont open Locked 3 Pos OFF A 3 Pos OFF M Automatic Manual OFF OFF Cont open Cont open 3 Pos Lock A Automatic Locked Cont open 3 Pos Lock M Manual Locked Cont open BDE D submenu Language English Keyboard OFF Mode Contrast BDE 1 Contrast BDE 2 Light time LOCKING Locking function Normally locked Always locked Lock type Standard Locking bolt VRR manually Enabled Start delay INPUT AUX1_IN Disabled BEA Bodyguard x AKA_IN Disabled BEA Bodyguard Test closed Test open Order number M x AUX1_OUT M X Push to actuate M Disabled Normal motored Slow motored HB with sensors Programming by end customer changes GF this parameter overview shows all possible settings Depending on drive type and configuration the access is restricted Page 12 of 20 Initials Rev B 11 2006 O
19. gt Nav Cw where Cay is the rolling average count rate within the monitoring cycle up to the point of the check Cy is the counts registered in the last time slice Ny is the Changing Conditions variable see Monitoring page 5 12 It is not recommended that should be set below 3 00 The first Changing Conditions check will take place after 2T and then after every second within the monitoring cycle where T is the Changing Conditions period time slice variable see Monitoring page 5 12 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 15 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 Contamination Alarm After monitoring a user for the prescribed monitoring time Timon the effective contamination alarm level Ceffect is calculated as follows 1 1 Ceffect cps P B eff T MON The total system background count rate is then subtracted from the total system gross contamination count rate Cgross and the remaining net contamination count rate compared with the alarm level So an alarm condition exists if Coss zl B er gt Ceffect Zone Summation if alarm count rate for two zones summed together is the required square root of the sum of the squares of the alarm count rate of the individual zones i e new summed alarm count rate Cum is given by C Coens t Figure 12 shows the alpha beta sum zones Calculation of Activity and
20. 2 a E amp E g 2 E 8 z m ie Al Al L 4 A lt 2 ee V lt x g S gt e e S 5 R F a 2 9 i g E 5 e LEFT FOOT DETECTOR RIGHT FOOT DETECTOR SIDE OF SHOE DETECTOR LOWER LEG DETECTOR OUTER HAND DETECTOR a i OPTIONAL AE0221A 2 z E a 5 3 8 i ISO THREADS CLASS 6g 6H pe eee rds E STATED 29 09 08 DObcox SPEC 1 DEC PL 04 20 04 09 ICP a NETWORK DATA CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE 2 DEC PL 0 15 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG DIMENSIONS IN Bath Road Beenh Reading MILLIMETRES Fisher Bath Road Beenham Reading SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND unesssrarco E nts INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM 2 11 OFF 703024KF 0 8m OWNED BY ThermoFisher SCIENTIFIC AND MUST BE KEPT IN CONFIDENCE AND USED SOLELY FOR THE OWNER S SPECIFIED PURPOSES THIS DOCUMENT MUST NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED NOR DIVULGED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE OWNER S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTE
21. Self Test Screens ud ee Ede t rte i iei e tede et deese He Ee EI ONE E ae Device Error Messages Operational Self Tests Servicing of the Electronic Assemblies Access to Electronic Chassis sese Removal of the Electronics Chassis from the Corner Frame Removal and Replacement of the Power Supply Mains Inlet Filter amp Isolator eese eene nente nennen nnns Battery Removal and Replacement seen Hard Disk Drive Removal and Replacement Battery Controller Board Type 5703A Removal and Replacement ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and DC DC Converter 5714A Removal and Replacement eee FHT681 cards as used in gamma option iPCM12B amp iPCM12C Removal and Replacement er RE RIBERA NNI 11 11 LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller amp Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement cere Dee t DR IDE I C n Ense re RTI eive be ass 11 13 Display guidance 5711A and LED cluster board 5672A Removal amp Replacement 11 14 Sensor Assemblies Removal amp Replacement sees Gas flow detector Removal and Replacement eere eee entes ee etes estne Array Detectors 12 Top of Foot Detector 1 us Island Doors Leg Detectors 2 rtt bete e Het eddie tied Shoulder Side of Head Inner amp Outer Hand Detectors 4 Side
22. system will display the level of radioactive contamination Associated Uncertainty both on and in the user The activity is displayed in multiples of the Alarm level along with the zone that triggered the alarm on the body mimic The derived activity in the appropriate activity units and its associated uncertainty is stored in the instrument database for later review Only those numerical values that are in excess of the MDA are stored The activity is calculated using the following formula Z Eon B eff Act E mix R Act where Raa refers to the activity in the selected unit le nuclide mix Emix Ej However where the user has created a mix with multiple nuclides E pix E Ts where Enuc is the efficiency of the system to a specific nuclide Pauc is the proportion of the specific nuclide within the total mix 6 16 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics The uncertainty of the activity measurement is calculated as follows conf B eff Cod E mix T mon where Neonr is the number of confidence levels Quickscan Quickscan applies to beta and gamma measurements only Quickscan is a method used to identify within the monitoring time Tmon whether the user is either clearly contaminated or clear referred to as real dirty or real clean Quickscan is enabled in Detection Options page 5 16 It is only activated when Tyon
23. 2 If User Can Cancel Alarm Sound is ticked the User can acknowledge the alarm prior to the Alarm During After Exit timeout Cancel Alarm 3 If Failure Display requires Supervisor Acknowledge is ticked the alarm will display sound until the Supervisor acknowledges the alarm The Alarm Duration After Exit timeout is ignored in this case Residual Contamination Following an alarm if the Check Residual Contamination Check after Alarm option is ticked see Operation page 5 11 the Residual Contamination Count is performed 4 SECONDS REMAINING See Notes Regarding Residual Contamination Check page 5 109 for more information 5 108 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Notes Regarding Residual The Residual Contamination Contamination Check Check is run under the following circumstances Residual Contamination Count If the Residual Contamination Check after Abandoned Measurement option is set see 5 SECONDS REMAINING Operation page 5 11 If Residual Contamination Check after Alarm option is set see Operation page 5 11 Count The Residual Contamination Check will verify that the current background count rate does not Ready exceed the Background Count Rate before the alarm by a statistically significant amount If no contamination is found the Ready OK to Enter message displ
24. Exit Only LH e AE0240B Manual Swing Door Kit Exit Only RH e AE0238B Manual Swing Door Kit Inlet and Exit Pair e AE0239A Powered Swing Door Kit Exit Only LH e AE0240A Powered Swing Door Kit Exit Only RH iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 1 5 Introduction Issue 2 0 e AE0238A Powered Swing Door Kit Inlet and Exit Pair e AE0237A Powered Barrier Kit Inlet or Exit See Specification page 3 1 for more information 1 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Description Chapter2 Description iPCM12A Basic Open Booth Cabinet Type 5715A Thermo Fisher Scientific IPCM12 Cabinet Assemblies The basic iPCM12A cabinet type 5715A is an Open booth style of construction allowing users open and free access from the front and sides It is a sturdy sheet metal folded and welded fabrication with an industrial lightly textured powder coat paint finish It contains integral features and fixings to accommodate up to 24 large area gas flow detectors and electronics assemblies The basic Open cabinet also has the mechanical infrastructure required to accommodate Gamma detector and shielding options and to attach the optional rear extension which is required to form the Closed Booth models The instrument cabinet is built on a heavy gauge fabricated steel Base Plinth that accommodates two large area gas flow detectors to independe
25. Low Background Limit is exceeded or when Quick Scan indicates real dirty the Contaminated message displays indicating that contamination is present Cobalt Result See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal A A instructions Facing In Facing Out This message is user definable See Messages page 5 25 for more information See Cancel Alarm page 5 108 for more information on clearing the alarms Alarm Display If the a High Alarm is triggered the information displays as a Result follows Facing In 5 106 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions If the B High Alarm is triggered the information displays as B Result follows SERE Facing In Facing Out If the y High Alarm is triggered the information displays as R It follows Facing In Facing Out If the Co High Alarm is triggered the information E Cobalt Result displays as follows Facing In Facing Out Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 107 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Cancel Alarm For more information about setting of Alarm configurations see Alarms page 5 19 When an Alarm displays and sounds it can be cleared in the following instances 1 The alarm will automatically timeout after the Alarm Duration After Exit setting
26. Out Of Service Notes Regarding High The Out Of Service High Background Background message displays if a high background condition Out Of Service exists See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions A Temporary Error Has Occurred Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 113 Operating Instructions Notes Regarding Low Background Issue 2 0 As each new set of background count is processed the monitoring time will be determined If the calculated sample monitoring time exceeds the user specified Maximum Monitoring Time see Monitoring page 5 14 a high background condition exists and further measurements are not possible The instrument will enter the Out of Service state with an indication of the reason for being out of service e g High Background Conditions Background measurements will continue as described until the background count rate drops to a level where the calculated monitoring time is acceptable It is also possible to exit the high background condition if an administrator increases the Maximum Monitoring Time or decreases the Measurement Certainty The Out Of Service Temporary Error has Occurred f message displays if a low Out Of Service background condition exists See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions A Temporary Error Has Occurred Out
27. To calculate the Alarm Levels in terms of count rate the following assumptions are made The surface emission rate of the clothing or body is assumed to be half of the activity This will only be true for a perfect source with zero backscatter and self absorption In practice the operator may wish to make allowance for these effects when setting the count rate alarm levels especially where alpha and low level beta contamination is being monitored The following formula is used to Calculate the Alarm Countrate C for alpha Beta and gamma Contamination Cz Vo Aa Enc where A is the alarm Activity per unit area required to give an alarm typically in UK 40 Bq cm 2400 for y dpm cm 4Bq cm 240dpm cm for B 0 4 24 dpm cem for a iPCM User Manual 6 19 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 Note that in USA a typical beta activity alarm limit is 5000 dpm averaged over 100 cm i e 0 83 Bq em a is the area over which the Contamination activity is averaged normally 300 cm for both sides of the Hand and sole of the foot and 100 cm for Body including the head is detector efficiency to nuclide of interest For Hand and Feet alpha and beta detectors this is expressed in terms of S E R 2x Body average efficiencies for Beta and Gamma body detectors are expressed in terms of activity 47 therefore C Aa Enuc Examples Co Beta on Hands standard grille If A
28. teet Co 60 Window Monitoring eese enhn ene Residual Contamination Level Automatic Calculation of Calibration Monitoring Time Calculation of Alarm Levels eere eerte ee tntnonenn Assumptions eee Probability Sigma and 96 sse Setting of Alarm Levels False Alarm Rates and Probabilities Effect of Probability of False Alarm F eee Effect of Probability of Detection PoD essere Monitoring Time Calculation of the Minimum Monitoring Time High aae atten is Operational Margin end ertt e der n AP iei e re Etras User Throughput Detector Naming eee Gas Flow Detector Naming Scintillation Detector Technical Description na 7 1 Inani Electronic Display Chassis D92520 A ETX Controller Board Type 5712A Summary of 5712 Functions eeuna aara tenentem nennen enne COMT Ports E ces Battery Controller Board Type 5703A Keyswitch Operation ere oem rette en e ern 5710A Gas Flow Counter and 5704A Quad Amplifier eese eese esee te aenea tnan 7 6 5709A Gas Control Board 5713A HV Generator Board eee
29. Alarm Out Of Service When a new Background has been established the Ready OK to Enter message displays Ready The iPCM12 is now ready to start monitoring See Entering the Portal page 5 94 for more information Ready Clear If more than 15 minutes of continuous operation have elapsed since Normal Updating Background Background Monitoring has commenced the iPCM12 will acquire a new background and the Updating Background Soveconds message displays Ready Clear 2 j Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 93 Operating Instructions Notes Regarding Changing Background Entering the Portal User ID Issue 2 0 When a changing background has been detected or the instrument does not have a valid background e g at System Startup the system establishes a new background radiation measurement Each one second Background count for each detector is checked against user defined statistical limits for variance from the stored average for that channel If the count is acceptable it is incorporated into the stored average otherwise the stored average for all channels is discarded the blue Alarm lamp lights and the Updating Background Please Wait message displays while a fresh 100 second Background is accumulated see Background Update page 6 13 for more information NOTE If Quick Background is selected the length of time taken to acq
30. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES NOT TO SHORT THE BATTERY TERMINALS or DAMAGE THE FOOT DETECTOR WHILST THE FOOT TREAD PLATE IS REMOVED The battery is a sealed lead acid jelly type construction and does not require regular maintenance Batteries should be periodically tested for capacity and will probably need replacing after 3 4 years If however it requires replacement proceed as follows 1 Switch off the iPCM12 keyswitch switch off the PSU Rocker switch disconnect the external mains supply top plinth Disconnect battery cables from 5703A control board PL5 amp PL7 2 Remove the angle bracket two screws covering the battery holder remove the battery compartment top cover four screws Lift out metal brackets 3 The battery may be tilted out to reveal the connecting cables 4 Disconnect the thermistor assembly from the negative BLACK terminal marked taking care not to short it to the terminal 5 Disconnect the red wire from the positive RED terminal taking care not to short it to the terminal 6 Remove the battery Dispose of it safely as required The battery should be replaced only with one of a similar type or operation of the iPCM12 may be impaired When refitting the battery make sure the mounting bracket is properly secured Reconnect the red wire to the RED terminal first Reconnect the thermistor card to the BLACK terminal last Failure to do this may impair chargi
31. S0 S6 e2uepuuo 100 0 Jona esie j uiie ese d 40 Gold 1 Buuoyuopy 3 wejy euifis uue y espe punojByx2eg g ej punoibyseg Figure 18 Monitoring Statistics showing Minimum Monitoring Time Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 34 Issue 2 0 Technical Description Circuitry Chapter Technical Description Circuitry Description page 2 1 provides a general background to the following description and should be read before proceeding Introduction This section outlines the operation and function of all the major electronic assemblies that comprise the iPCM12 Description of all assemblies is restricted to general operation and specification because detailed circuit operation may be the subject of design confidentiality The main circuit boards described here include 5703A 5704A 5709A 5711A 5712A 5713A 5714B Battery Controller Quad Amplifier Board Gas control Board Guidance Display ETX Processor Board HV Generator Board DC DC Converter Board Controls and monitors charging discharging of battery Proportional gas amplifier with four channels Monitors and controls flow of gas through system Provides guidance to user for correct positioning and time for monitoring Main processor board Generates the HV for the Gas proportional counters Produces 5 an
32. When measuring low energy beta emitters and alpha emitters small body movements will drastically affect the sensitivity a movement of a few centimeters may change the sensitivity by up to an order of magnitude This variation would be far more significant than stringent selection of probability of detection iPCM User Manual 6 25 Technical Description Physics 6 26 Monitoring Time T High Background iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Judicious setting of the Probability of False Alarm and Probability of Detection as described previously will keep monitoring times to a minimum and maintain personnel throughput Calculation of the Minimum Monitoring Time Consider Figure 13 As discussed earlier the left hand vertical line represents effective background count adjusted to achieve the required measurement False alarm rate F in this instance 1 in 1 000 in the monitoring time T Also as discussed earlier the right hand vertical line is the alarm level count rate adjusted to achieve the required Probability P of detecting exactly one alarm level of contamination in this instance 1 65 sigma 95 in the monitoring time T The positive separation between the modified background and alarm counts indicates that the set of conditions presented in Figure 6 10 can be achieved in a 15 second monitoring time with an Operational Margin This operational margin would therefore accommodate a more stringent
33. White Lamp Face Forwards Amber Lamp Reverse Digital Display 0 99 Second Count Down Display Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 15 Specification Issue 2 0 Charging LED Green LED AC Mains presence and battery charging status Constantly Lit The instrument is on and the battery is charging Slow Flash instrument is on and running on battery Fast Flash instrument is off and the battery is charging Fast Slow Flash SOS there is a battery fault Audible Indications Chime Measurement with a CLEAR result Single Tone End of a parameter counting sequence OR Measurement Aborted Periodic Tones Operator sequence ERROR Rapid Tones Measurement exceeding ALARM ACTIVITY Dual Tone Measurement exceeding HIGH LEVEL ALARM Alarm Warble Measurement Aborted In addition to the audible indications given above the following voice prompts are given if enabled see Setup MenulUI Options page 5 9 Enter identification If User ID Required is ticked the user is requested to enter their ID before entering the portal see User ID page 5 94 Illegal Entry Please leave If User ID Required is ticked and the user the portal enters the portal without entering their ID see User ID page 5 94 Please return to position If during measurement the user moves from the specified position see Violations during Monitoring page 5 98 Ilegal Exit P
34. acquire a new background will rect be much shortened see Notes fire regarding Normal Background Monitoring page 5 76 55 Seconds Remaining If the background changes during the establishment of a new background the process will be restarted iPCM User Manual 5 73 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 If the portal is entered when the iPCM12 is establishing a new background background Exit counting stops the Warning Portal is busy message is displayed and an audible alarm will sound To continue with the process the portal must be vacated Please Leave the Portal Alarm Out Of Service When a new Background has been established the Ready OK to Enter message is Ready displayed The iPCM12 is now ready to start monitoring contamination Ready Clear 1 5 74 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Normal Background Thermo Fisher Scientific Monitoring Operating Instructions This is the normal dormant state of the system Normal Background Monitoring is continuous until 1 One or more of the position sensors are triggered probably as part of a measurement cycle see Entering the Portal page 5 78 for more information 2 A change in background is detected see Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring e page 5 76 for more information d 3 A high background condition is detected see Notes
35. sss Calibration for Other Nuclides erect Calibration GR DR Maintenance and Trouble Shooting sess 11 1 Messages Power up Screens Self Test Screens LE Device Error Messages ici gre rt GAE E ARAE RO EEA 11 2 Operational Self Tests Servicing of the Electronic Assemblies ssssseseosseseseoesososeeesosoeeeososoeeeososoeorososoeorososseeeossesoeeeesssoe 11 3 Access to Electronics Housing aie eeaeee E E E EEE 11 3 Removal of the Electronics Chassis Top Left Cabinet Corner sss 11 4 Removal and Replacement of the Power Supply sess 11 6 AC Mains IEC Socket Filter IEC Replacement 11 6 Battery Removal and Replacement eese eene 11 7 Hard Disk Drive Removal and Replacement seen 11 8 Battery Controller Board Type 5703A and 5720A Removal and Replacement 11 8 ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement 11 10 DC DC Converter Type 5714C Removal and Replacement sess 11 12 Gas Flow HV Generator Type 5713A Removal and 1 11 12 Scintillation HV Amplifier Type FHT681 Removal and Replacement 11 13 LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight
36. 28 detector efficiency to 41 Am 2 then C x 0 4 x 150 x 0 28 8 4 cps Alpha and Beta Feet values are calculated similarly using a as 300 2 cm Co Beta on Feet If 4 a 300cm assumed area of sole of one foot Exc 35 Detector Efficiency Co 2 then C 2 2 x 4 x 300 0 30 210 cps 41 Am Alpha on Feet If A 0 4 Bq cm 300cm assumed area of sole of one foot Exe 32 detector efficiency to l Am 2n then C 2 2 x 0 4 300 x 0 32 19 cps Co Beta on Body unsummed standard grille UK limit If A 4 100cm over body 5 5 Body Average Efficiency 4 then C 4 x 100 x 0 055 22 cps Co Beta on Body unsummed standard grille US limit If 0 83 100cm over body Ene 5 5 Body Average Efficiency 41 then C 0 83 x 100 x 0 055 4 6 cps Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 21 Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 Co Gamma Gross on Body unsummed If A 40 Bg cm 100cm over body Ewe 10 Body Average Efficiency 4 then 40 x 100 x 0 1 400 cps Probability Sigmaand Table I Probability Sigma and Sigma Probability 0 0 50 00 0 1 53 98 0 2 57 93 0 3 61 79 0 4 65 54 0 5 69 15 0 6 72 57 0 7 75 80 0 8 78 81 0 9 81 59 1 0 84 13 1 1 86 43 1 2 88 49 1 3 90 32 1 4 91 92 1 5 93 32 1 6 94 52 1 7 95 54 1 8 96 41 1 9 97 13 2
37. 702847JB BARRIER ARM Red White 11705321 DOOR OPERATOR 127 12708334 DOOR SLIDE ARM 127808183 DOOR POWER SUPPLY 127808165 NET127 DOOR PROCESSOR 127808231 MODULE DFA127 DOOR CONTROL U NIT 903808321 BDE D DOOR SIDE CAP WITH BDI 127808171 SWITCH DOOR SIDE CAP BLANK 127109451 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 12 3 Recommended Spares List PART NUMBER SPAREKIT BIPCM12 SPAREKIT EIPCMI2 SPAREKIT CIPCM12 11705234 5659B 5672A 5703A 5704A 5709A 5710A 5711A 5713A 5714C 702260ND 702947KJ A92169 D A92452 B92412 A 503073KJ D92583 A D92615 A 5708A 5717A B92763 J FHT681 425430223 with door option iPCMI2B or C with door option 51 5 Available Spare Parts Kits BASIC ENHANCED OPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION BASIC SPARE PARTS KIT ENHANCED SPARE PARTS KIT IPCM12C SPARE PARTS KIT GAMMA OPTION KEY SWITCH BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR 5 WAY LED CLUSTER BOARD BATTERY CONTROLLER BOARD QUAD GAS PROPORTIONAL AMP BOARD GAS FLOW CONTROL BOARD QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR GUIDANCE DISPLAY BOARD HV GENERATOR BOARD DC DC CONVERTER BOARD PHOTOSENSOR RX TX PAIR POWER MODULE 150W iPCM12 SECURITY DONGLE PANEL LOCK amp KEY QUAD GAS FLOW WINDOW FOIL ASSEMBLY SEALED BATTERY LCD ASSEMBLY ETX PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY GAMMA SCINTILLATION DETECTOR HAND amp FOOT GAMMA SCINTILLATION DETECTOR BODY CABLE ASSY MHV MHV 8 METERS FHT681 GAMMA CH
38. Adjacent Horizontal RB1A 2 RB1B 2 RB1C 2 RB1D 2 RB2A 2 RB2B 2 RB2C 2 RB2D 2 RB3A 2 RB3B 2 RB3C 2 RB3D 2 RB4A 2 RB4B 2 RB4C 2 RB4D 2 SHA 2 SHB 2 SHC 2 SHD 2 ARA 2 ARB 2 ARC 2 ARD 2 SL1A 2 SL1B 2 SL1C 2 SL1D 2 SL2A 2 SL2B 2 SL2C 2 SL2D 2 Vertical Quadrants Right RB1A RB1B RB1C RB1D RB2A RB2B RB2C RB2D RB3A RB3B RB3C RB3D RB4A RB4B RB4C RB1B RB1C RB1D RB2A RB2B RB2C RB2D RB3A RB3B RB3C RB3D RB4A RB4B RB4D Vertical Quadrants Right RB1A 2 RB1B 2 RB1C 2 RB1D 2 RB2A 2 RB2B 2 RB2C 2 RB2D 2 RB3A 2 RB3B 2 RB3C 2 RB3D 2 RB4A 2 RB4B 2 RB4C 2 RB1B 2 RB1C 2 RB1D 2 RB2A 2 RB2B 2 RB2C 2 RB2D 2 RB3A 2 RB3B 2 RB3C 2 RB3D 2 RB4A 2 RB4B 2 RB4C 2 RB4D 2 Right Hand Back HBA HBA 2 HBB HBB 2 Top Right Toe TTC TTD Full Toe Right TTC TTD Sole Right step 1 RFA RFB Sole Right step 2 LFA 2 LFB 2 Side Foot Right SFA SFB Total Head Step 2 THA 2 THB 2 Right Top Head THA 2 THB 2 HBC HBC 2 RFA RFC LFC 2 SFC THC 2 THC Issue Beta Issue 1 Adjacent Side with Opposing detectors on next SHA SHB SHC SHD ARA ARB SLIA SL1B SL1C SLID SL2A SL2B SL2C SL2D SHA 2 SHB 2 SHC 2 SHD 2 ARA 2 ARB 2 ARC 2 ARD 2 SL1A 2 SL1B 2 SL1C 2 SL1D 2 SL2A 2 SL2B 2 SL2C 2 SL2D 2 Vertical SHA SHB SHC SHD ARA ARB ARD SL1A SL1B SL1C SLID SL2A SL2B
39. Left Body Bottom Center Body Bottom Right Body Bottom Side of Leg Lower Hand Palm Hand Back Top of Foot Left Foot Sole Right Foot Sole Side of Foot Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Menu Roles Operating Instructions The following options are available depending on the role selected See Page Physicist Technician UA Nn lon nln N N UA N Timed Counts 5 29 Information 5 29 Alarm Check 5 31 Position Sensors 5 31 Variance Test 5 32 Attenuation 5 34 5 35 5 36 Barriers Gas Flow Calibration Efficiencies 5 38 Cal Check 5 39 Cal Streams 5 45 Thresholds 5 54 ources and Fixtures 5 55 Y 4 E E FEET STE EET E e E 181 co 7 v Eds Exe v EIER lea eae ET las Em Lom com Lum EN Em iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 7 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 See Page Interfaces Plug ins 5 57 Y Camera 5 62 Y Name Physicist Technician james gt ew wem 5 memes s pense 5 Exiting the Administration To exit Administration mode press on 12 in the Mode bottom left hand corner of the touch screen Login to the Administration mode see Gaining Access
40. Temporary Error If a High Background event see Notes Regarding High Background page 5 113 or Low e gt Background Count Rate see Notes Regarding Low Background page 5 114 is detected the Out of Service A Temporary Error Has Occurred Background Error displays During this state normal background monitoring will continue If the fault clears without intervention the instrument will resume normal operation Out Of Service See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions 5 112 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Gas Flow If a Low or High Gas Flow is detected see Gas Flow page 5 22 the Out of Service Gas Out Of Service flow is too low high If the fault clears without intervention the instrument will resume normal operation Gas flow is too low See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions Out Of Service iA Barrier Error the iPCM12 detects an error with the Door or Barrier the Out of Service Door Barrier Out Of Service Failure error message displays During this state normal background monitoring will continue Door Barrier Failure If the fault clears without intervention the instrument will resume normal operation See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions
41. The following AE kits are available for the above options Unit Type Open Closed Top Head Gas Flow Y Side Foot Gas Flow Spare Purged Detector Side Head scint y EPD Reader Barcode Reader Pull down Head Detector Integrated Small Articles Monitor Y Multiple door and barrier options Gas Generator and Power system Y y Extended life power system V iPCM User Manual 3 1 Specification 3 2 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Operational Parameters See Monitoring page 5 12 for information regarding the settings and defaults for the Operational Parameters Software Options See UI Options page 5 8 and Operation page 5 10 for information regarding the settings and defaults for the Software Options Default Messages See Messages page 5 24 for information regarding the settings and defaults for the Software Options Background Capability Background capability is related to alarm threshold and statistical certainty requirements Alpha and Beta Gamma background subtraction is included in the Monitor s measuring routines When any of the Operational Parameters are changed the monitoring time required will be automatically reassessed in relation to the measurement certainty required and the prevailing Background conditions Since the gas flow detectors have a high gamma r
42. These items may include Articles containing liquids Articles with significant shielding Articles containing large magnets Articles with known radioactive content Articles containing liquids may have different release criteria Articles of large weight or significant shielding may require different procedures requiring Health Physics intervention Articles with a magnetic pull of more than four pounds may influence the accuracy of the monitor The iPCM12 weighs between 0 75 and 1 ton The monitor should only be installed and used on a Suitably robust and stable base The monitor should never be moved with the lead installed WARNING AGAINST IMPROPER USE The protection provided by this equipment may be impaired if used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer The user must adhere to all the safety precautions noted overleaf and to individual warnings contained within this manual iv iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific WARNING SYMBOLS The following is an explanation of the warning symbols seen on the iPCM12 Please read this information before using and or maintaining this equipment As seen on the top of the iPCM12 frame and FHT681 covers CAUTION Isolate the mains supply and wait one minute before removing this cover CAUTION Isolate HV supply to the printed circuit board before removing cover With power connected and unit switched on a max voltage of 1500V
43. eese Trouble Shooting Operational 5 es Normal Start up Boot up Operation sss Unit Dead Will Not Boot up and Charging LED is OFF Unit Dead Will Not Boot up and Charging LED is ON sese Starts up but Display is Blank and Fails Self Tests No Chimes 11 28 Starts up Passes Self Tests and Runs but Display is 11 29 Will Not Run and Displays Out Of Service Low Background Counts 11 29 Will Not Run and Displays Of Service High Background Conditions 11 30 Fails Lamp or LED onte oo eee RD bios Oe tena ted INE Ser en s Fails Loudspeaker Test t ee xe eigene en qe drehen Fails the LCD Display Test detener ite pee eire tede eee ende Display Backlight Failure ettet tenete tene rien e iin eene iege Will Not Accept Valid Passwords LCD Keypad Inoperative or Not Aligned Will not Enter Background Mode Or Locked in Background 11 34 Locked in Measurement Mode sess ennt enne nennen 11 34 USB Output Data Is Corrupted eese 11 34 Barriers will not OPEN CLOSE Unreliable Door Operations 11 35 Recommended Spares
44. iPCM12A Open booth Type 5715A iPCM12B Closed booth Type 5719A iPCM12C Closed booth with doors Type 5719A Optional AE0222A gamma kit Thermo Fisher Scientific Description Description Basic cabinet assemblies The basic iPCM12A open booth cabinet 5715A is manufactured from a sturdy fabricated steel construction which contains the brackets required for attaching the gas flow detectors and electronics The basic iPCMI2B closed booth cabinet 5719A contains the brackets required for attaching the gas flow detectors and electronics plus the optional gamma detectors and lead shielding The closed booth iPCM12C has additional mounting frames and adaptors to support the power door option Mounted within the right hand side of the main frame is the Electronics Display Chassis containing the ETX processor 5712A 5713A HV generator 5714B DC DC Converter Gas control chassis with 5709A gas controller the LCD and touchscreen Under the LCD display is an optional EPD reader and access is provided for four USB sockets A network connector is provided at the top plinth Operational lamps are fitted on the front amp side faces and a numerical two digit count down status display is fitted on the internal left side The main power input is from the top of the portal to an IEC connector An isolator accessed behind the right hand panel door has also been provided for removing power from the equipment The right
45. where Bav is the rolling average for any one detector C is the counts registered in the last one second background update N is the Gross Changing Background variable see Monitoring page 5 12 It is not recommended that N should be set below 3 00 The former expression detects gross changes in any single channel while the latter guards against significant drift in all channels Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 13 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 Calculation of the After every successful background update the average Monitoring Time Toca background for each channel is updated The eight average backgrounds are then summed and a new monitoring time is re calculated as follows Cops EZ act where Act is one of the units below Zac 15 the corresponding multiplier Units Unit Multiplier Z4 Bq 1 kBq 1000 Dpm 0 01666 pCi 0 037 nCi 37 pCi 3 7E4 mCi 3 7E7 Ci 3 7E10 Teal found by solving B B B B TG 1 1 1 Gc F off off 2 P off off p F Py f TA cal 4 B cal In practice the software solves this expression using a numerical substitution for and iterative binary search technique The value of which provides the solution is then rounded up to the nearest whole second and compared to the user programmed minimum and maximum monitoring times The actual monitoring time Tmon used when monitoring is then set according to the fol
46. 10 without summing 16 with summing Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 HV settings Energy Window LCD Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification Scintillation Detectors Operating voltages should normally be set up using the NBR method page 9 8 although they may also be set up using the Figure of Merit FOM method for gamma scintillation detectors page 9 8 to yield the operating Photomultiplier voltages These settings are determined and set using the HV Scan feature Calibration HV Scan page 5 41 The recommended values based on the NBR optimization method can be found in the Calibration certificate for each individual instrument This can have all thresholds adjustable under software control Programmable Threshold 1 0 4095mV in 1 mV steps Programmable Threshold 2 0 4095mV in 1 mV steps Programmable Threshold 3 0 4095mV in 1 mV steps Programmable Threshold 4 0 4095mV in 1 mV steps Programmable Threshold 5 0 4095mV in 1 mV steps Control Instrument ON OFF operation is via a momentary key switch on the side panel Entering the portal activates a sensor and suspends background monitoring until the portal is vacated Entering the portal indicates a user is ready to be monitored and initiates a time out period see Entering the Portal page 5 78 Exiting the portal during monitoring aborts the measurement see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 Data entry and diagnostic functions a
47. 180 160 170 Issue Beta Issue 1 Peak Anode Double Sums Peak Average Double Sum Average Figure 8 Cl Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille 10 18 10 20 18 20 30 16 30 40 14 40 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 120 120 130 140 140 150 150 160 160 170 180 170 Peak Anode Double Sums Peak Average Double Sum Average Figure 9 Co Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 10 25 0 150 470 180 170 7140 150 160 Technical Description Physics Det Gross Det Win Triple Gross gt Triple Win 7 7 Av Det Gross Av Triple Gross Figure 10 Co Gamma Horizontal Scan 20 1014 0 20 150 160 170 180 170 150 160 Det Gross ti Triple Gross Av Det Gross 7 Av Triple Gross Figure 11 Cs Gamma Horizontal Scan Body Efficiencies Following the procedures identified IEC 61098 the overall Beta efficiency to activity in the body region is evaluated by combining 1 the mean to peak ratio of the vertical scan Figures 4 to 7 and 2 the mean polar response obtained from the horizontal scans Figures 8 to 11 Body Average Efficiency BAE is expr
48. 7 Foot 514keV Beta 48 96 SPY Hand 2280keV Beta 40 50 96 SPY Foot 2280keV Beta 43 lam 5 5MeV Alpha 28 40 Am Foot 5 5 MeV Alpha 32 2380 42 Alpha 23 30 ST Foot 4 2MeV Alpha 21 96 In accordance with IEC 61098 body detection efficiencies are measured and quoted as Body Average Efficiency 50 mm from the detector window which accounts for body contours and is more meaningful than contact efficiencies Source Energy Type Grilles Un Summed Summed Double Detectors 156keV Beta Std Rugged 0 9 1 0 709keV Beta Std Rugged 6 7 7 6 Co 318keV Beta Std Rugged 3 6 96 4 1 96 Gamma Detection Efficiencies Detection Efficiencies have been determined in accordance with the procedures defined by International Electrotechnical Commission Standard for Installed Personnel Warning Assemblies IEC 61098 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 9 Specification Issue 2 0 Hand amp Foot Gamma Hand efficiencies are measured with sources placed Gamma Efficiency inside the hand mechanism in contact with the protective Typical Activity 4 grilles Foot efficiencies are measured with sources placed in contact with the Right foot high efficiency hex treadplate Source Detector Energy Type 4 Efficiency Co Hand 122 keV Gamma 1 9 Co Foot 122 keV Gamma 3 7 96 xs Hand 662keV Gamma 34 7 Foot 662keV Gamma 8 4 9 o Hand 1250keV Gamma 77 96 Co Foot 1250keV Gamma 1
49. IP rating ii eere peter Environmental restrictions essent entm ene retener nennen Unpacking and Installation ceres 4 1 Operating Instructions coiere kn oven kx er eR Ka xd ana 5 1 Operational States eerie ee eee eee esee ettet Selecting Detectors Setup Menu Diagnostics Mer reae ar ted pae Pa pe e b du eed o aO aree t Calibration Menus ccc see ee eee erede inea tei ene eee e eee de e ee deese Interfaces Data Menus toc tet IM at ME ER System Mehl s ratae bone am pede User Mode Switch On Personnel Monitoring Entering the Portal Commence Monitoring Monitoring Result Exiting the adel RR CI EO OF SELVICE EEEE A EEEE E TT Battery Mains Supply Indicator SWItch ir M T LEES Technical Description Physics 6 1 Performance Characteristics Introduction Spatial Response are ctod m cuente are e Ge eere ec Body ETfICIenCies oee re Te t xa ere e Radon Rejection Explanation of the Operational Calculations eere eret eee enint nennen tna tn atn sn atn sensa stan Intt dUctioti Lm ede ee E
50. SL2C Vertical SHA 2 SHB 2 SHC 2 SHD 2 ARA 2 ARB 2 ARC 2 ARD 2 SL1A 2 SL1B 2 SLIC 2 SL1D 2 SL2A 2 SL2B 2 SL2C 2 HBD HBD 2 RFB RFD LFD 2 SFD THD 2 THD step LB1A 2 LB1B 2 LB1C 2 LB1D 2 LB2A 2 LB2B 2 LB2C 2 LB2D 2 LB3A 2 LB3B 2 LB3C 2 LB3D 2 LB4A 2 LB4B 2 LB4C 2 LB4D 2 LB1A LB1B LB1C LB1D LB2A LB2B LB2C LB2D LB3A LB3B LB3C LB3D LB4A LB4B LB4C LB4D Quadrants Sid SHB SHC SHD ARA ARB ARC ARD SL1A SL1B SL1C SLID SL2A SL2B SL2C SL2D Quadrants Sid SHB 2 SHC 2 SHD 2 ARA 2 ARB 2 ARC 2 ARD 2 SL1A 2 SL1B 2 SLIC 2 SL1D 2 SL2A 2 SL2B 2 SL2C 2 SL2D 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics Scintillation Detector Naming 00 5 5 L1 R1 n p _ 5 5 L2 R2 mul _ re SC SC L3 R3 I m Scintillation Hand Scintillation Foot Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 31 Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics EOLZOLOL 86 96 6 6 V6 68 18 G8 F8 C8 8 2 55010 221292 9 89 99 9 9 EF 265 56 6 169 Sv OF HH 06290 SOL SL o t ev 00L S0 S6 100 0 9A97 UUE Y esje4 uibseyy wery as e 4 q uonoejeq Jo qo4d 1 3 euifis uuejy as e 4 8
51. Shielding for Full Body AE0222A Gamma Option IPCM12C Detector shielding all types 10 mm low background lead Rear side shadow shield wall 20 mm low background lead Base shield whole footprint 20 mm low background lead Environmental Temperature and Humidity Operational Temperature Range 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Storage Temperature Range 10 C to 50 C 14 F to 122 F Humidity Range up to 95 RH non condensing CAUTION USE BELOW 0 C 32 F IS NOT RECOMMENDED THE LCD DISPLAY WILL BECOME SLUGGISH BELOW THIS TEMPERATURE DO NOT STORE ABOVE 60 C 122 F Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 19 Specification Magnetic Shielding IP Rating Environmental Restrictions Count rate 1400 Issue 2 0 There is no magnetic shielding Large external magnetic fields may reduce the measured value IP50 e Not for use in flammable or explosive atmospheres e For installation in drip free locations only e Do not expose to excessive dust pollution levels s Operating point Am 241 Betas in Alpha Channel Beta Backaround 180 1800 1700 1800 1900 2000 Voltage Figure 1 Typical Detector Performance Graph 3 20 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Unpacking and Installation Chapter4 Unpacking and Installation Unpacking Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12A Open Units WARN
52. Specification 3 4 Gas Flow Proportional Counters iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Detectors The alpha beta detectors in the standard iPCM12 are Gas Flow Proportional counters All detectors with the exception of the foot detectors are fitted with either the standard rugged with a square pattern grille and an open area of 50 or an optional high efficiency heaxagina patter grille with open area of 65 Optionally additional gamma sensitive Plastic Scintillation counters may be fitted The counts from every detector in the system are routed back to the main controller where they are processed individually All Gas Flow Proportional counters have Quad Amplifier and Discriminators type 5704A attached All Gas Flow counters have the following common data Operating Voltage 1850 V for 5 Methane in Argon at Sea level 1900 V for 7 5 Methane in Argon recommended 950 V for 10 Methane in Argon 2000V for 10 in Argon 100V for 20 in Argon Window Material Single Mylar sheet aluminised both sides Standard weight is 0 9 mgm cm NOTES gas flow efficiencies are Typical for P772 gas 1900V amp sea level e Efficiency variations up to 10 are possible for beta contaminants e Efficiency variations up to 15 are possible for alpha s where manufacturing tolerances are more critical e Please read note regarding Detector Maintenance in Maintenance and Trouble Shooting page 11
53. Typical 40 3 11 Mini SAM Scintillator 3 8 Monitoring 5 14 Monitoring Area 3 19 Motherboard 3 12 Moving through the Menus 5 5 N NBR method 9 6 Non recoverable 5 112 Normal Background Monitoring 5 91 Notes regarding Changing Background 5 94 Notes regarding High Background 5 113 Notes regarding Low Background 5 114 Notes regarding Monitoring 5 103 Notes regarding Normal Background Monitoring 5 92 Notes regarding Regular Expressions for Barcode 5 60 Notes regarding Residual Contamination Check 5 109 Notes regarding Volume Levels 5 80 Number Functions 5 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions 5 1 Operation 5 11 Option Kits 3 2 Out of Calibration 5 88 Overhead Detector 1 11 23 P P 6 12 Passwords 5 80 Performing the HV Scan 9 4 Physical Installation All iPCM12 Variants 4 5 Plug ins 5 57 Position Sensors 5 31 Positioning 4 5 5 97 Power ON OFF 3 14 Pre defined Functions 5 2 R Raa 6 13 Radon 5 26 Recommended Spares List 12 1 Recount Required 5 104 Replacement of the Battery Controller PCB 11 9 Replacement of the DC DC Converter board 11 12 Replacement of the ETX Motherboard 11 10 Replacement of the ETX Processor Module 11 11 Replacement of the FHT681HV Amps 11 14 Replacement of the Hard Disk 11 8 Replacement of the LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter 11 16 Replac
54. Wh in iO Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 SCL3 Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 amp Wh SCR1 Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 of Why SCR2 Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ao amp Wh SCR3 Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Page 1 Of 1 oF Wh Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 55 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Configuration Report This report lists the current Instrument Configuration settings Please note that the report below is an example and does not display all the information Configuration Settings on 26 February 2009 Instrument IPCM 002 Configuration Item Value Alarm Requires Supervisor Acknowledge No AlphaAlarmsEnabled Yes AlphaBodyPod 3 1 AlphaBodyPodkKey 3 1 AlphaBodyPofa 1 65 AlphaBodyPofalkey 1 55 AlphaDetectionEnabled Yes AlphaFootPod 3 1 AlphaFootPodkcey 3 1 AlphaF ootPofakey 1 65 AlphaF ootPofay 1 65 AlphaHandPod 3 1 AlphaHandPodkey 3 1 AlphaHandPofa 1 55 AlphaHandPofakey 1 65 AlphaHighBackgroundLimit 10000 AlphaLowBackgroundLimit 0 AlphaPurgeDuration 30 Fortal Approach Time s 2 BackgroundPeriod 200 Background Logging Interval hours 2 BackgroundStability Ratio 0 5 BetaAlarmsEnabled Yes BetaBodyPod 3 1 BetaBodyPodkey 3 1 BetaBodyPofa 1 645 BetaBodyPofakey 1 55 BetaDetectionEnabled Yes BetaFootPod 3 1 BetaFootPodkKey 34 1 65 BetaFootPofa
55. been enabled If unsuccessful then it will be necessary to exercise the doors via the integral controller found in the upper section of the door control attached to the upper iPCM12 frame See Appendix A Automatic Folding Door System section Functions of electronic BDE E9 2 for key functions panel reproduced below 1 level operating modes Key functions t Programming increment down Kp reco Programming increment up One way operation RECORD RECORD amp e Winter mode TIME DELAY Automatic mode Ga 1 R E Continuously open IER ED 4 gt ore speen 25002 3 aA Locked CLOSING a amp Lock Time Programming SPEED n e SN CLOSED or If this is not the case and a LED is flashing then please refer to Appendix A Automatic Folding Door System section Status and Fault Signals to identify the fault mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Service department will need to be contacted for assistance iPCM User Manual 11 29 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue Beta Issue 1 If the LED correctly registers the status of the door e g OPEN then pressing the Close button will close the door and illuminate the closed LED If this is correctly happening then suspect a problem with the GPIO 5707A card and its interconnection cables IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE USER LEAVES THE DOOR IN A CLOSED POSITION THE CONTROL PANEL OR OPERATION FROM THE iPCM12 APPLICATION WILL BE INHIBITED SIMILA
56. by internal back pressure 3 Using a length of purged gas tubing quickly disconnect the spare detector and link its two gas connectors to create a sealed detector assembly This assembly can be transported to the repair site without air ingress NOTE Once access to the relevant detector is achieved as detailed below the following detector changing procedure is common to all locations 1 Undo the blue gas connector collect at each end of the detector and slide back onto the tube do not disconnect the pipes yet 2 Obtain a suitable length of blue Festo PL3 tubing and one or two Festo bulkhead connectors as necessary Quickly disconnect the detector gas pipes and create a gas jumper link to bypass the damaged detector the pressure in the system will expel the air from the jumper 11 18 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Body and Top of Foot Detectors Side of Leg Inner Hand and Side of Foot Detectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting tube the bypass link will prevent air ingress into the rest of the iPCM12 system Observing relevant precautions above disconnect the HT lead red network cables yellow and any sensor wiring red black Release the EMC earthing straps and bend them well clear Release the two Velcro retaining straps and withdraw the detector Ensure all pipes cables connectors and EMC st
57. check for leaks and or blockages Perform 10 second Test Counts at half hour intervals until all gas flow detectors show similar and consistent count rates A normal countrate will be approximately 7 to 8 cps in a low background equivalent to 80 to 100Sv h cps uSw h for body hand amp foot detectors Set the Mode switch to Normal which places the restrictor in circuit Note that the typical Inlet flow rate will be between 20 and 25 cc min for leak free beta only systems The flow rate may be set to 50cc min for more robust operation and peak alpha efficiency Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Procedure Calibration Procedure This section deals in detail with primary system calibration It includes background source and efficiency checks on individual detectors to check detector balance as well as overall system efficiency Primary system calibration by the Health Physicist is only usually necessary on initial installation and on a periodic audit basis More frequent overall system calibration checks can be quickly carried out by Technician user level using the Cal Check facility see Cal Check page 5 34 For more information regarding the user roles see Foreword page xv and Menu Roles page 5 6 Note Throughout this section examples are given in Bq However by first selecting nCi s from the Options Menu see UI Options page 5 8 as
58. days Default Calibration Accuracy 96 Default Calibration Confidence 96 CalWamTime Camera Fitted Gross Changing Background Sigma Changing Conditions Sigma Detector Changing Background Sigma Changing Conditions Check Period s CleanOnRAdonOnlyKey Page 1 Of Issue 2 0 1 65 1 751 1 65 1 751 10000 Yes we Yes N This report lists the Event History details between the selected Start and End dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Date and Changing Background all the information Event History Instrument UKFER 2L3MN3J EventTime Description 14 12 2009 3 New Calibration Saved 15 07 48 14 12 2009 Recovered From Out Of Service 15 02 07 14 12 2009 Out of Service Recoverable 15 02 00 14 12 2009 High a Background Rate TF B 15 02 00 14 12 2009 2 Instrument Parameters 13 36 08 Changed 14 12 2009 New Calibration Saved 13 34 22 14 12 2009 3 New Calibration Saved 11 48 49 14 12 2009 New Calibration Saved 11 48 00 14 12 2009 4 Instrument Parameters 09 06 48 Changed 14 12 2009 4 Amplifier HV levels changed 08 38 32 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Location Not Set Additional Info NOTE The report below is an example and does not display Category Info Info Info Info Info Cal Source Id 3 Info Info Info Info Info Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific 14 12 2009 0
59. efficiency at the interface between two anode zones for the beta detectors for beta and detectors for gamma Therefore if we add the efficiency of two adjacent zones together we achieve a much better efficiency This improvement in efficiency is however off set by the fact that with two zones detectors the background count rate is doubled Because the performance in terms of minimum detectable activity is proportional to the square root of the background summing of the efficiency of adjacent counters is only advantageous if the sum is J2 greater than either of the individual efficiencies Similarly for gamma detectors summing the results of four detectors meeting at a point has advantages only if the scan is twice that due to any individual counter or 2 times the sum of two adjacent counters Nuisance Alarms can occur due to naturally occurring Radon gas Radon gas from the ground and concrete constructions tends to be statically attracted to hair and clothing particularly in dry and poorly ventilated areas The primary alpha and beta daughter emissions are readily detected by gas flow counters in close proximity to the body Radon alpha decay typically has two associated beta daughter emissions within approx 62 us of each alpha emission This beta alpha ratio of 2 1 is only approximate because the precise nature of radon changes with its age area of origin and climatic conditions throughout the course of the day
60. implementing those functions that the iPCM12 X Channel application requires The plug in PC module conforms to the international Embedded Technology Extended ETX standard Therefore any ETX PC of suitable computing capacity may be fitted to overcome natural obsolescence to implement advancing technology or otherwise to enhance performance if increased application functionality is required Currently an ETX PM C 1 5 GHz Celeron processor is used with 512 Mb of RAM and a real time clock An industrial grade 40 Gbyte hard disk is used to store Embedded Windows XP operating system the application software and iPCM monitoring data Additionally a 256 Mbyte Compact Flash backs up system calibration and configuration data In addition to the plug in PC module both the hard disk and the compact flash module are mounted on connectors allowing quick on site service replacement The processor board is retained by six hex pillars and all system connections use easy release connectors facilitating easy board removal and replacement if necessary The 5712A motherboard interfaces directly to all other boards and external devices in the system e The application software is retrieved from a 40 Gbyte minimum hard disk drive via SK10 The drive also provides non volatile storage for all data e PL15 provides a flash card storage medium for long term storage of important data e 4x USB port on SK4 11 15 16 SK4 feeds the USB hub 24
61. m The curves are calculated using to the following formula J 1 3 x mx b Standard arms J max 65 kgm Key J mass moment of inertia Slide arms J max 65 kgm m door leaf weight kg b door leaf width m Page 4 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power EN Construction and Function 4 4 Construction 12 3 4 5 6 7 15 9 9 oi UE E TT 8 EN 3 E s 1234567 s 101102 em 10 19 222 m cU 13 12 14 11 10 9 8 16 Key to illustration 1 Mains connection terminals 9 Slide switch S1 rotating direction 2 Fine wire fuse 10 Multifunctional switch MF on STG 3 Power supply NET 11 Closing spring 4 Drive unit ATM 12 Vision panel adjust spring tension 5 Control unit STG 13 Adjusting screw for spring tension 6 Connection terminals control unit 14 Connectors for arms both sides 7 Motor print MOT 15 Standard switch BDI 8 ATE drive unit terminals 16 Status signal and Reset button Do not change any settings or adjustments These operations are re served exclusively for trained and authorized persons 4 2 Components The record DFA 127 swing door operator forms part of an electromechanical swing door system and comprises the following main components Control unit STG Intelligent learning microprocessor controlled control system Driving unit ATE Low ma
62. of lead shielding Additionally the rear and left side walls of the closed cabinet extension are clad with 20 mm 3 4 of lead shielding to produce a background shadow shield wall WARNING DUE TO THE SIGNIFICANT QUANTITY OF LEAD SHIELDING THE iPCMI2 C VARIANT WEIGHS 1700 KG 3 700 LBS SPECIFIC ATTENTION SHOULD BE PAID TO FLOOR LOADING CONSIDERATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION AND THE iPCMI2 MUST NEVER BE MOVED WITH THE LEAD SHIELDING FITTED See the warnings in Unpacking and Installation page 4 1 of this manual iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 3 Description X Channel Processor Board Type 5712A Issue 2 0 Electronics Chassis D92520 A The Electronics Chassis is located on the upper left side of the Service Bay It is a complete sub assembly mounted directly onto the iPCM12 cabinet and retained by ten hex pillars facilitating easy removal for servicing It comprises the Gas Chassis Drg D92610 A LCD Display assembly Main Processor PCB type 5712A DC DC Converter PCB type 5714C four port USB hub User Accessories Panel High Voltage Generator PCB type 5713A and optionally a GPIO PCB type 5707A required to drive barrier and door options X Channel Processor Board type 5712A is located near the top of the Electronics Chassis mounted on the back of the color LCD touch screen assembly It is effectively a motherboard hosting a modular PC decoding the PC signal sets and
63. or is corrupted in any way check the following possible causes 1 If no output whatsoever is received check the data cable connections see Displays page 3 7 2 Ifa USB printer is involved perform a printer self test to determine whether the printer itself is at fault The following section applies to iPCM12C with door barrier options only 11 28 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Barriers will not OPEN CLOSE Unreliable Door Thermo Fisher Scientific Operations Maintenance and Trouble Shooting If the entry Barrier fails to Close UP or DOWN then select the Diagnostic Barriers page 5 22 function to exercise the arm Should this be successful then check that the front barrier has been Enabled and Closed for one of the three options If un successful then it will be necessary to verify that power is reaching the motor by examining the voltages on the motor connector when it is asked to close open see Barriers page 5 22 If power exists the motor assembly needs examining to decide whether the motor itself is at fault or the integral microswitches are damaged misaligned If no problem is found with the motor assembly and its cabling then suspect the GPIO card Replacing the 5707A should resolve the fault If the Powered Doors malfunction then use Diagnostic Barriers page 5 22 function to exercise the doors Should this be successful then check that the rear doors have
64. overall system efficiency which should be within 10 of the 47 efficiencies noted below which are measured at the contact face of the gas flow detector grille located nearest to the gamma detector Nuclide Upper Lower Hand y Foot y Head y body y body y BICs 11 0 5 9 3 4 8 4 17 4 662 keV Co 12 21 5 12 596 7 7 15 8 25 0 MeV If the overall system efficiency or any individual detector efficiency is too low or too high consider the efficiency values at the next HV step review the background Criteria in Tests 1 amp 2 and the Source Criteria in Test 3 Repeat this process if necessary NOTE The Minimum Detectable Activity MDA is proportional to the square root of the Background lower background improves reduces the MDA Therefore Squeezing a few extra source counts at the expense of a significant background increase will be detrimental Please also refer to iPCM12 Specification page 3 1 and Technical Description Physics page 6 1 for details of Body average efficiencies and setting of operational Alarm levels iPCM User Manual 9 9 Setting Up Procedure 9 10 Gas Supply Leakage Checks iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Setting the Gas Flow detector High Voltage Select the Gas Flow Detector Voltage parameter from the main menu and set the correct working voltage to the nominal figures shown This varies with
65. page 5 34 Minimum Clean This is the minimum number of clean samples Samples required to apply the Attenuation Factors Maximum Clean This is the maximum number of clean samples Samples required to apply the Attenuation Factors Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 53 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Field Name Description Baseline Date This is the date from which the number of Attentuation Factors apply Thresholds Select Calibration Thresholds to MZ Gi Gite set the Detector Thresholds Loss non M lt Detector System 0 pig mi ES pan B BERE 7 AAS Apply Cancel Settings Changes o aum This screen allows the individual voltage of any detector to be viewed and updated To change any of the settings press on the detector field and update the value Press the Apply Settings button to save or the Cancel Changes button to quit without saving To copy from a selected Detector highlight the detector to copy from and press the Copy From Selected button Select the detector s to paste to and press the Paste to All Selected button NOTE No threshold value should be set to a voltage that is less than that of the preceding threshold For example Threshold 5 must be set greater than or equal to Threshold 4 Failure to follow this advice may invalidate measurements Please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific before changing th
66. page 5 10 is ticked the measurement will be restarted If Restart Measurement on Sensor Break is not ticked the measurement will resume If the user does not return to the correct position within the Exit Barrier Delay see Operation page 5 10 the Measurement Abandoned message is sounded Insert Right Hand See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions If during measurement the user exits the portal before the measurement is complete the Positioning Positioning message is displayed If the user re enters the portal Face In Head turned Left then the measurement will be Insert Left Foot resumed If the user does not Insert Right Foot return to the correct position within the Exit Barrier Delay see Operation page 5 10 the Measurement Abandoned message is sounded Recount See Voice Prompts page 5 69 amp for information regarding verbal instructions Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions If the user presses the panic button during the measurement the Panic Button Pressed I Attention message will be displayed and the instrument will be disabled Intervention by an Administrator is necessary to clear the message Panic Button hes been Preesed Out Of Service Following an abandonment if the RCC after Abandoned Measurement option is ticked Residual Contamination Count see Operation page 5 10
67. securing the chassis to the panel Hold the assembly and lift out so that it is clear of the top left corner frame When refitting the Electronics display chassis into the top left corner frame ensure All the cards are securely screwed down ETX assembly and heat sink are correctly fixed Disk drive cable is correctly fitted All ten M6 fixing bolts are fitted and tightened All cables are returned to their associated plugs sockets connect battery cables last refer to D92591 sheet 1 as necessary All earthing points are restored and securely tightened iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 5 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Removal and Replacement of the Power Supply AC Mains Power Supply Replacement Adjustment of PSU AC Mains IEC Socket Filter EC Replacement Issue 2 0 e Restore the cable harnesses to their original wrapped condition IMPORTANT Before any work starts ensure that the AC Mains supply is disconnected from the iPCM12 and the iPCM12 is powered off at the front panel keyswitch Unlock the right hand side service access door The AC mains power supply PSU is mounted on the Power Chassis in the lower left section of the main frame 2 Disconnect the external AC mains supply at the IEC connector on the iPCM12 top plinth locate the PSU assembly and switch the rocker switch to OFF Remove the two screws retaining the rocker switch cover protective lid 3 Remove t
68. single detector at the same time Preparation for Calibration First the user must enter the Calibration Menu page 5 33 Select HV Scan page 5 41 and check the detector HV s are set correctly for the Calibrating isotope If these are not known they must be determined as described in Detector HV Selection page 9 4 before proceeding with the calibration The iPCM12 is then ready for calibration Calibration Ensure the background is stable and any calibration sources are well away from the iPCM12 1 Ensure the portal is empty and the unit is on and ready 2 Login to the Administration mode using the Health Physicist role see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 4 See Cal Check page 5 34 for more information To check the calibration the Cal Check button is selected This does not allow the calibration factor to be changed but a comparison is made between the old and new factor To recalibrate the instrument i e adjust the calibration factor for a particular nuclide the Calibrate button is selected The calibration process should be repeated for a number of nuclides that would be found in typical contamination As a minimum a calibration to an alpha emitter Am and a beta emitter should be undertaken At the end of the calibration the user is prompted to PASS or FAIL the calibration See Specification page 3 1 for more information regarding the various iPCM12 types Thermo F
69. view current Calibration and create new customised Calibrations Active Calibration a Am 241 Calibration Stream Active Calibration B CI 36 Calibration Stream Active Calibration y Co 60 Calibration Calibration Nuclide Am 241 Calibration Stream Am 241 4 L Syst n ans rer Calibrated For a Active Calibration Nuclide Percentage Calibrated paat S Create New amp Delete Mix Apply Settings Note that the Active Calibration is displayed in the top box To change the Active Calibration use the direction arrows to select a Calibration Once selected press Make Active button The selected Calibration will be displayed in the top box To edit a Calibration Mix select a Calibration Press in the Calibration field to edit the Calibration name In the Calibration Mix section use the drop down list to change the Nuclide Press in the Percentage field to edit the percentage When complete press Apply Settings button to save or Cancel button to quit without saving To create a new Calibration Mix highlight in an empty Calibration Mix window or an existing Calibration Mix to overwrite and click on the Create New Mix button Press in the Calibration field to create a new Calibration name In the Calibration Mix section use the drop down list to add a new Nuclide Press in the Percentage field to edit the percentage When complete press Apply Settings
70. window support plate 3 Remove the damaged window foil and discard Take care not to damage the internal anode wires and not to allow dust or moisture ingress 4 Carefully place a new pre foiled window carrier B92412 A over the O ring 5 Taking care not to damage or puncture the new window replace the screws in the window support plate 6 Connect the repaired detector to the spare gas circuit inside the iPCM12 service door or otherwise to a test purge gas installation to purge out the air for immediate re use 1 Log in 2 Select the Setup menu and X Channel tab Select the detector graphic and enter the new detector X Channel node address this is the serial number of the Amplifier fitted to the detector Scintillation Detector Removal and Replacement Optional Scintillation Gamma detectors can be fitted to all variants of the iPCM12 However the Full Body gamma option AE0222 and other options requiring the rear lead shadow shielded wall can only be fitted to the Closed iPCMI2B and iPCM12C variants NOTE Scintillation detectors are light sensitive and are wrapped in a light tight jacket Care must be exercised at all times not to damage the light tight jacket as subsequent damage to the photomultiplier tube will result iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 21 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue 2 0 If it is necessary to remove lead shielding observe the following precautions Remov
71. 0 97 72 2 1 98 21 2 2 98 61 2 3 98 93 2 4 99 18 2 5 99 38 2 6 99 53 2 7 99 65 2 8 99 74 2 9 99 81 3 0 99 87 3 1 99 90 32 99 93 3 3 99 95 3 4 99 966 6 22 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Sigma Probability 3 5 99 977 3 6 99 984 3 7 99 989 3 8 99 993 3 9 99 995 4 0 99 997 NOTE This probability refers to either the Probability of Detection or the Probability of NOT triggering a False Alarm These probabilities are calculated and displayed in Detection Options page 5 17 Setting of Alarm Levels False Alarm Rates and Probabilities Contamination Alarm Levels and associated averaging areas are generally driven by legislation However programming of statistical detection certainty Probability of Detection and False Alarm rates are often local site decisions that impact on the Monitoring Time and equipment credibility with the users High false alarm rates quickly lower user confidence in the integrity of the measurement while too stringent statistical requirements extend monitoring times which results in low throughput and queues of frustrated users The following discussion is intended to draw attention to the issues involved their consequences and practical solutions These scenarios are similar for most common nuclide types and energies but particularly acute
72. 1 e Depth dimension includes head amplifier unit and gas connections e Working voltages may be reduced by 200V at 8 000 feet above sea level Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Specification Gas Flow Counter 5710A 21 per IPCM12 Overall Dimensions 466 5 x 181 x 25 mm Active Area 455 5 x 160 mm 728 cm Gamma Response approx 60 cps in a uniform field of 1uSv h due to 660 keV photons Typical performance to sources with 150 cm of traceable surface emission rate placed in contact with the Array Grille Standard Rugged Grille Alpha Efficiency Americium 241 28 of SER Beta Efficiency Carbon 14 22 of SER Cobalt 60 31 Chlorine 36 37 Strontium Yttrium 90 39 High Efficiency Grille Alpha Efficiency Americium 241 40 of SER Beta Efficiency Carbon 14 30 of SER Chlorine 36 50 Gas Flow Foot Counter Overall Dimensions 466 5 x 181 x 25 mm type 5710A 2 per iPCM12 Active Area 455 5 x 160 mm 728 cm Gamma Response approx 60 cps in a uniform field of 1uSv h due to 660 keV photons Typical performance to sources with 150 cm of traceable surface emission rate placed on Foot Plinth Tread Plate Window Support frame in contact with stainless steel foot grille Alpha Efficiency Americium 241 of SER Beta Efficiency Carbon 14 25 35 43 43 of SER Cobalt 60 Chlorine 36 Strontium Yttrium 90 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 3 5 Specification Optional Plastic S
73. 2 CB2A 2 2 2 RB2A 2 RB2B 2 ARA 2 ARB 2 LB2B 2 LB2C 2 CB2B 2 CB2C 2 RB2B 2 RB2C 2 ARB 2 ARC 2 LB2C 2 LB2D 2 CB2C 2 CB2D 2 RB2C 2 RB2D 2 ARC 2 ARD 2 LB2D 2 LB3A 2 CB2D 2 2 RB2D 2 RB3A2 ARD 2 SL1A 2 LB3A 2 LB3B 2 CB3A 2 2 RB3A 2 RB3B 2 SL1A 2 SLIB 2 LB3B 2 LB3C 2 CB3B 2 2 RB3B 2 2 5018 2 SL1C2 LB3C 2 LB3D 2 CB3C 2 CB3D 2 RB3C 2 RB3D 2 SL1C 2 SL1D 2 LB3D 2 LB4A2 CB3D 2 CB4A 2 RB3D 2 RB4A 2 SL1D 2 SL2A 2 LB4A 2 LB4B 2 CB4A 2 CB4B 2 RB4A 2 RB4B 2 51242 SL2B 2 LB4B 2 LB4C 2 CB4B 2 4 2 RB4B 2 RB4C 2 SL2B 2 SL2C2 LB4C 2 LB4D 2 CB4C 2 4 2 RB4C 2 RB4D 2 SL2C 2 512 2 Right Hand Palm Right Hand Back HPA HPB HPC HPD HBA HBB HBC HBD Left Hand Palm HPA 2 HPB 2 HPC 2 HPD 2 HBA 2 HBB 2 HBC 2 HBD 2 Top Left Toe Top Right Toe TTA TTB TTC TTD Full Toe Left Full Toe Right TTA TTB LFA LFB TTC TTD RFA RFB Sole Left step 1 Sole Right step 1 LFA LFB LFC LFD RFA RFB RFC RFD Sole Left step 2 Sole Right step 2 RFA 2 RFB 2 RFC 2 RFD 2 LFA 2 LFB 2 LFC 2 LFD 2 Side Foot Left Side Foot Right SFA 2 SFB 2 SFC 2 SFD SFA SFB SFC SFD Total Head Step 1 Total Head Step 2 THA THB THC THD THA 2 THB 2 THC 2 THD 2 Left Top Head Right Top Head THA THB THC 2 THD 2 THA 2 THB 2 THC THD Figure 16 Gas Detector Sum Zones Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 31 Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 Scintillation Detector Naming
74. 3 It is therefore vital that the construction standard is maintained at all times particularly when replacing parts and during servicing Earthing is particularly important for continued EMC and Safety performance Hard earthing of the mains inlet filter assembly and LCD display tail the HV Amplifier FHT68 1 screening can and the frame earth are particularly important Refer to the relevant Servicing instructions for details The instrument should only be operated with all earthing connections securely made and all screening covers fitted 7 10 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Routine Checks Chapters Routine Checks iPCM12 Mounting Arrangement Battery Charge State Thermo Fisher Scientific This section describes the routine checks required to ensure the correct operation of the iPCM12 Most mechanical and electronic failures if they occur will become apparent during normal operation and do not require checking Therefore they are not included in this section Mechanical Checks During calibration or more frequently if required check any mechanical structure on which the iPCM12 may be mounted The iPCM12C with the gamma option kit includes 1 cm and 2 cm areas of shadow lead shielding and is very heavy Mounting arrangements including the base spreader plate should be inspected for signs of deterioration instability or any other factor that may aff
75. 5 No 1 10 the user is asked to leave the portal You are required to See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions enter your Id Ready Clear If User ID Required is not ticked the PM displays the Ready OK to Enter message Ready The user enters the portal to commence the measurement process Ready Clear When the user steps into the portal and is correctly in position the count commences Cou nting See Positioning page 5 81 7 Seconds Remaining Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions If Camera s is are installed see 105 Camera page 5 49 a digital picture of the user is automatically taken as they enter the portal depending on the Camera on Alarm option set in UI Options page 5 8 Camera The iPCM12 is able to recognise when the camera is used by detecting which beam has been broken see Position Sensors page 5 28 Commence Monitoring The Personnel Monitor can be configured to use a two step measurement with the user facing the detector array for the first step and then rotating 180 degrees to face away from the measurement array for the second step See Positioning page 5 81 Positioning If Complete Both Steps is enabled the user is instructed to position themselves correctly in Positioning the Portal One or a combination of the following messages are displayed depending on whether the sensor
76. 5 63 To change the Date press on the date field and select a date Note that the format of the date depends on the Language type selected in Options screen see UI Options page 5 8 Select the Apply Settings button to save To change the Time use the Up Down buttons to change the hours and minutes Select the Apply Settings button to save To change the Time Zone press on the TimeZone field and select a time zone from the pre defined list Select the Apply Settings button to save Notes regarding Volume For guidance 85dBA is obtained at about 35 volume control Levels level and 100dBA at 100 volume control level Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 63 Operating Instructions 5 64 Version Passwords iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Select System Version to view 35020358295 the File version information os no haga including the iPCM12 Issue and POM 12 Venin02 Database Version 26 Version numbers purus Select System Passwords to EEUU change the passwords forthe 0002 current User Level and levels Change Password below Select User and enter a new password Select User Health Physicist Enter Password Confirm Password OK Cancel o Teme There are three levels of user Health Physicist Technician and ThermoFisher The iPCM12 is supplied with unique default passwords for each level as follows User Password Health Physicist hp Technician t
77. 5 89 Events Report 5 70 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 Index F Exiting the Administration Mode 5 8 F F 6 12 Figure of Merit FOM method for gamma scintillation detectors 9 7 File Location Functions 5 3 Five Light System 5 84 Foot Detector 1 11 23 Foot Detector Type 5710A 2 per iPCM12 3 6 G Gaining Access to the Administration Mode 5 3 Gamma Body Average Efficiency 140 3 10 Gas Flow 5 22 5 37 5 113 Gas Flow Amplifier Thresholds 3 13 Gas Flow HV Generator 3 12 Gas Flow Quad Detector Type 5710A 3 5 Glossary of Terms 1 Guidance System 5 85 H Hand amp Foot Alpha Beta Contact Efficiency Typical SER 2 3 8 Hand amp Foot Gamma Efficiency Typical Activity 4 3 10 Hand Detector 1 11 24 Hand Foot amp Head Scintillator 3 7 Horizontal Scans 6 6 HV Gen 5 26 5 35 HV Scan 5 46 HV Scan Report 5 72 IDS Camera 5 59 Information 5 29 Instrument Contaminated 5 110 Introduction 1 1 IP Rating 3 20 iPCM12A Battery Backup 3 17 iPCM12A Installations 4 6 1 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 iPCM12C Installations Fitted with Lead Shielding for Scintillation Options 4 6 Items Required 4 3 K Keyboard Emulating Id Provider 5 59 L Lamps 5 34 Language Options 3 1 Maa 6 13 Magnetic Shielding 3 20 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 11 1 Menu Roles 5 7 Messages 5 25 Mini SAM Efficiency
78. 800 3579 2891 528 2 206 5 7 0 820 771 3701 2930 5283 112 7 26 0 B40 BOF 3874 3067 600 8 35 7 88 0 860 856 3998 3140 631 6 10 5 24 8 880 905 4095 3190 650 6 49 64 7 900 970 4258 3288 694 2 3 2 45 5 920 1037 4457 3430 762 9 2 6 15 2 940 1132 4772 3640 565 6 2 3 5 9 960 1225 4990 3765 921 5 2 1 3 1 990 1341 5347 4006 2039 5 2 1 2 1 1000 1440 5727 4207 2 181 9 2 0 1 6 1020 1552 6067 4515 2 295 6 2 0 15 1040 1615 6357 4742 2410 7 2 0 14 1060 1761 6802 5041 2557 5 2 0 1 3 1080 1830 7157 5337 2711 7 2 1 1 3 1100 1912 7546 5634 2 865 0 2 1 13 Detector 5 12000 10000 8000 6000 Net Counts 4000 Background FOM 2000 0 700 800 900 1 000 1 100 Voltage v Voltage Background Source Net Figure Of TI T2 T2 T4 Counts Counts Counts Merit 700 309 4577 4268 2 737 5 853 6 13 720 3 3 5213 4840 3072 1 4840 0 1 740 420 5671 5251 3312 1 5251 0 00 760 453 6120 5657 3 554 3 2828 5 10 760 525 6571 6046 3 760 7 2 015 3 10 800 586 6966 6379 3 929 9 2 126 3 15 Fage 1 Of 3 5 74 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Results Report Operating Instructions This report lists the Activity Results between the selected Start and End dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Dates by the last n results enter 0 for unlimited results Alarms Only Person ID and Show Raw Counts Results Summary ResultID Person ID Result Date Result Type 3 14 12 2009 13 40 Cl
79. Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Positioning If Complete Both Steps is enabled the user is instructed to position him herself correctly in Positioning the Portal One or a combination of the following messages displays depending on whether the sensors are broken see Position Sensors page 5 31 Face In Head turned Left Insert Left Foot Insert Right Foot e Face In Head turned Left e Insert Left Foot e Insert Right Foot e Insert Right Hand Ready Clear hir e Move Right Hip Closer See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions When the user is in the correct position measurement starts Counting Once monitoring commences the iPCM12 displays the Counting message with an indication of the measurement time remaining d Seconds Remaining If Complete all Steps see Operation page 5 11 is not ticked and contamination is detected the result displays at this stage and the measurement process is terminated see Alarm Result page 5 104 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 97 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If the front measurement is satisfactory then the user is instructed to turn around One or Positioning a combination of the following messages displays depending on whether the sensors are broken see Position Sensors page 5 310 e Face In
80. Counter Failure e Amplifier Counter Overflow e Amplifier HV Over Current e Amplifier HV Over Voltage e Amplifier HV Under Current e Amplifier HV Under Voltage e Amplifier Dead Time Saturation e Amplifier EEPROM failure e Lamp Control Failure e X Channel Failure e X Channel Failure Node 0 The fault messages produced while in the application will typically result in the OUT of SERVICE and Critical Error messages displaying Reference to Out of Service page 5 112 may assist to clear this fault and allow continued operation 11 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Access to Electronics Housing Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting An extreme failure may result in the Window s blue screen halting further activity This will require rebooting the software However continued occurrence of this fault would suggest a serious problem that needs reporting to the Thermo Fisher Scientific service department Servicing of the Electronic Assemblies The Electronics and Display Chassis Drawing D92520 A is mounted on the upper left side of the Electronics Housing accessed via the locked service door It comprises the ETX processor module and Motherboard 5712A HV generator 5713A DC DC converter 5714C USB Hub Gas Control Chassis and LCD Touchscreen sub assembly CAUTION AS A MATTER OF GENERAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND FOR CONTINUED EMC PERFORMANC
81. DC witha maximum short circuit power of 825 milliwatts is present CAUTION Risk of electric shock Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor WEEE COMPLIANCE This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermofisher com WEEERoHS CAUTION THIS INSTRUMENT UTILIZES GAS FLOW PROPORTIONAL COUNTERS MIXED GAS ARGON METHANE IS THE RECOMMENDED COUNTING GAS ITS MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET MSDS IS REFERENCED IN CHAPTER 13 DRAWING APPENDIX AND CONTAINED ON THE MANUAL CD ROM CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO FOLLOW ALL RECOMMENDATIONS ON THE MSDS WHEN HANDLING THIS GAS vi iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Contents Contents Manual Revision History Foreword Chapter 1 Initroduellon reete titre nins ce eph heo eect epe
82. EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THERE ARE DANGEROUS HAZARDOUS LIVE AC AND DC VOLTAGES AROUND AND WITHIN THE AC MAINS POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5713A HV GENERATOR FHT 681 HV AMPLIFIER AND THE LCD BACKLIGHT INVERTER MODULE THERE ARE ALSO HIGH DC VOLTAGES PRESENT IN THE 5710A GAS FLOW DETECTOR AND ON THE 5704A QUAD AMPLIFIER BOARDS THE 12 VOLT BATTERY STORES CONSIDERABLE ENERGY IT CAN DELIVER IN EXCESS OF 400AMPS SO CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN 11 26 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting AT ALL TIMES NOT TO SHORT THE TERMINALS PLEASE READ THE CAUTIONARY NOTES IN Servicing of the Electronic Assemblies page 11 3 SERVICING AND REPAIR OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD ONLY BE UNDERTAKEN BY SUITABLY QUALIFIED AND COMPETENT PERSONNEL AWARE OF THE HAZARDS AND RELEVANT PRECAUTIONS Normal Start up Boot up In general a successful start or boot up when the iPCM12 Operation key switch is turned is indicated by e Momentary LCD backlight flash and speaker crackle e Series of System Self Test display messages e Series of lamp tests each accompanied by a beep tone e Series of internal invisible self tests e Single chime ding dong on satisfactory completion Unit Dead Will Not Boot If the display remains blank and unlit no lamps are lit and no up and Charging LED is sound is heard assuming the volume has not been turned off OFF
83. Fault _ Close B Transit Activations O Emergency Lj Panic Entry Request Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Flow To test the opening closing of the barriers tick the Open Close buttons The display will indicate with a green box if the barrier has opened closed or is in Transit or whether the barrier is blocked or faulty as follows To test the Activations press the Emergency Panic or Entry Request buttons This is a view only table Select DiagnosticslGas Flow to view the current status of the Gas Flow Controller Status Mode Resume Stabilization on exit from Admin Mode iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Operating Instructions Left O Blocked O Closed O Faut _ Cose Bl In Transit Activations O Emergency Panic 1 Entry Request Status Measured Values o eng Bier LowFlow O HighFlow O Leak Detected CO Compressor Running O o Configuration Error 5 Normal 17 comin 9 Purge Resume Stabilisation on exit from Admin Mode The Status options indicate whether there is an error with the Gas Flow The Mode option indicates whether the Gas Flow is in Normal or Purge Mode This 1s ticked if the Stabilization was interrupted by access to the Administration Mode 5 37 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Calibration Menu Efficiencies Select CalibrationlEfficiencie
84. If the fault remains with the original gas flow channel the fault is in the 5710A counter and this should be replaced using the pre gassed hot spare if available For iPCM12C gamma options swap the faulty scintillation detector MHV connection from the relevant HV Amplifier to that of a working channel Perform a further 10 second count and note the counts in each channel If the fault moves with the detector into a previously working channel the fault is in the detector assembly and should be replaced as defined in FHT68 1 Removal and Replacement page 11 13 If the fault remains with the original HV Amplifier channel the fault is in the HV and Amplifier PCB and this should be replaced as defined in FHT681 Removal and Replacement page 11 13 Will Not Run and Displays This condition occurs when the Background activity prevents Out Of Service High the iPCM12 from discriminating the pre set alarm levels o and Background Conditions for gas flow detectors and y for gamma option with the required confidence within the Maximum Monitoring Time allowed It may be necessary to consult Health Physics for clarification Enter a valid password and proceed as follows 1 Select Setup IMonitoring page 5 14 and check that the Maximum Monitoring Times are set to reasonable values Adjust upwards if necessary Select Setup lAlarms page 5 19 and check that the Normal Alarm levels are set to reasonable values Adjust up
85. Life includes initial System purging No access is required from rear of cabinet allows the 2 to be installed against a wall or back to back with another iPCM12 Front Cabinet Access is required for the hinged array frame to service detectors The array protrudes 97 mm beyond the base No direct service access is required to the left side of the cabinet Clearance of 141 mm is required on left hand side for the vertical detector array frame to hinge open Clearance of 400 mm is required on right hand side for access to main electronics assemblies service bay Clearance of at least 200 mm is required to access the head detector and door closer mechanisms adjusters Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Specification Dimensions Approximate iPCM12A iPCM12B iPCM12C Overall Dimensions open Closed closed gamma Excluding LOD but Height 87 5 2220 87 5 2220 88 5 2240 Including Foot plate oe RB Width 37 940 mm 37 940 mm 37 940 mm Depth 29 735 mm 46 5 1330mm 46 5 1330 mm Monitonng Area Height 2020 mm max Width of Array 520 mm Total Monitoring 15300 cm basic unit Area 16700 cm with optional detectors Weight iPCM12A standard open unuit approx 300 kg 660 Ibs iPCM12B standard closed unit no approx 500 kg 1100 165 doors iPCM12B with two doors Approx 600 kg 1320 lbs iPCM12C includes gamma option approx 1700 kg 3750 Ibs and full lead shielding
86. Margin in Too Save Cancel Settings Changes Enter the required settings and press OK Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 63 Operating Instructions Alarm Check Report Issue 2 0 The Print button sends the report to the printer The Save button displays the Drive selection window to allow you to select a Drive for the saved report The report will be saved as an Excel spreadsheet with the following name Report Type gt lt Y YMMDDHHMM xls e g ResultsReport0902261 151 xls Stop Stop cancels the processing of the report Back returns the user to the previous screen This report shows the Alarm Check Summary information between the selected Start and End Dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Date Alarm Check Summary ID Test Start Time Source Name Measurement Count y 04 10 2007 Standard 21 11 35 31 Press on one of the ID records to display the Background Measurement Detail for the selected Measurement ID Background Variance Test Results Detail Test Date 04 10 2007 11 35 31 Detector Normal Normal Alarm High High Alarm Cobalt Cobalt Alarm Alarms Multiplier Alarms Multiplier Alarms Multiplier 1 2 2 32 0 0 00 0 0 00 2 2 2 48 0 0 00 0 0 00 3 2 2 38 0 0 00 0 0 00 4 2 2 31 0 0 00 0 0 00 5 2 1 93 0 0 00 0 0 00 6 2 2 45 0 0 00 0 0 00 2 2 23 0 0 00 0 0 00 8 2 2 24 0 0 00 0 0 00 5 64 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monito
87. Methane Other Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 13 Operating Instructions Monitoring Select Set UplMonitoring to customize the first set of Operational Parameters Issue 2 0 Low Background Limit cps Max Zero Count Time 200 _ s High Background Limit Roo 0000 10000 cps RCC Contamination Threshold 7 100 000 Minimum Monitoring Time i5 s Maximum Monitoring Time 100 s Background Period 100 5 Measurement Confidence 2 95 450 Detector Changing Background 5 c 100 000 Detector Changing Background 7 100 000 Changing Conditions fa c 99 994 Changing Conditions Period pound Background Stability Factor Ro Background Stability Factor P ratio a Rate Check Over Full Background B Rate Check Over Full Background Apply Cancel Settings Changes Description of options Field Name Description Low Background Limit f y cps If a background measurement falls below this value counts per second a detector failure will occur Values 0 to 99 999 cps 0 to disable Default 50 cps Max Zero Count Time a s High Background Limit a y cps RCC Contamination Threshold Minimum Monitoring Time s If no counts are received within the Max Zero Count Time the instrument will go Out of Service with a Low Alpha Background Values 0 to 99 999 cps 0 to d
88. Of Service If the count rate falls below the Low Background limit see Monitoring page 5 14 the Out of Service Low Background Counts Detector message displays For alpha and beta counts this is evaluated over the 10 second accumulated background For gamma counts this is evaluated for each 1 second background count The iPCMI2 will remain in this state until the background count rate once again exceeds the threshold on all detectors 5 114 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Emergency Mode Emergency Mode displays if the system is put into Emergency Mode Emergency Mode Out Of Service If the portal is entered during the Emergency Mode the Please leave the Portal message Emergency Mode displays See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions Out Of Service Battery Mains Supply Indicator On the main screen an icon displays on the bottom edge of the screen that indicates whether the iPCM12 is running on battery or mains supply as follows 1 Indicates that the iPCM12 is running on battery See Battery page 5 36 for more information regarding Battery Status including remaining battery life This icon indicates that the iPCM12 is running on mains supply Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 115 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Switc
89. Purge Mode selected on screen adjust the manual needle valve labeled PURGE on the gas chassis to set an INPUT PURGE flow of 200 cc min 5 In this Mode the restrictor circuit is bypassed by solenoid Note that turning the valve clockwise reduces the flowrate Allow the gas system to stabilise for 10 minutes With Normal Mode selected on screen the iPCM12 gas circuit reverts to normal flow rates Adjust the manual needle valve labeled NORMAL on the gas chassis to set in INPUT NORMAL flow of 25 cc min 20 After allowing the gas system to stabilise for 20 minutes the inlet and outlet flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Gas flow parameters Purge and Operational Thermo Fisher Scientific Flow Setting Up Procedure meters should indicate identical flow rates In practice however small discrepancies due to calibration errors pressure changes and very small leaks are likely to exist An outlet flow rate up to 10 less than the inlet flow rate is acceptable A larger discrepancy indicates a leak which may be isolated by linking out sections of the gas circuit referring to Gas Schematic D92591 sheet 4 or ideally by using a gas sniffer The hot spare detector may be utilized to minimize instrument downtime when a detector is changed Note The thin detector windows allow a rapid rise in the gas temperature and hence the volume as the gas moves through the system This can cause the outle
90. Quad Amplifier Proportional gas amplifier with four Board channels Gas control Board Monitors and controls flow of gas through system Guidance Display Provides guidance to user for correct positioning and time for monitoring ETX Processor Board Main processor board HV Generator Board Generates the HV for the Gas proportional counters DC DC Converter Produces 5 and 12V for system Board from unregulated battery backed DC power Reference to General Assembly D92591 and family tree D92425 shows the interconnections between the main iPCM12A modules 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Electronic display chassis assembly D92520 A see Electronics display chassis D92520 A page 2 2 This is the processing centre for the iPCM12 which includes the power management circuitry Guidance display assemblies 5711A and 5672A see Annunciators Type 5711A and 5672A page 2 4 This includes LED cluster indicators iPCM User Manual 7 1 Technical Description Circuitry 7 2 iPCM User Manual 3 Issue Beta Issue 1 Sensor assemblies and interconnections Gas sensor data is connected via the local network cabling Positioning sensors are powered and controlled via adjacent 5704A detector electronics and data is communicated via the local network cabling Detector assemblies 5710A see 5710A Gas Flow Counter and 5704A Quad Amplifier page 7 6 Each rectangular gas flow detector has 4 discrete detector regions each wir
91. Risk of electric shock Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual Contents WEEE COMPLIANCE This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol E E Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive available at www thermofisher com WEEERoHS vi iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Contents Contents Manual Revision History ssssssssssssssssssssessssssccsssesessescesssssssesssssecsessssessseesessssesssssnesesssesesssseres xiv FOLCWOT Xv Chapter T ec ER SuFe bun c eua do Rua Sur Fauno Te Qus s Fnac sese 1 1 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor cccccsssscssscccesscccesseccsssecesscccsssccensccsssecesssceeess 1 1 CAG GS E e E THREE ERE PES VN TREE 1 3 ChapterZ 5
92. Scan Period below Default OFF Quick Background Tick this option to reduce the time taken to establish Enabled a background i e background is considered valid as soon as alarm requirements are met If this option is not ticked the time taken to establish a background is 100 seconds Default OFF Residual Tick this option to enable a Residual Contamination Contamination Check Check to perform automatically following an after Alarm Alarm For more information regarding Residual Contamination Checks see Residual Contamination Check page 5 108 RCC after Abandoned Tick this option to enable a Residual Contamination Measurement Check to perform automatically following an abandoned measurement see Violations during Monitoring page 5 98 For more information regarding Residual Contamination Checks see Residual Contamination Check page 5 108 Auto Recount Tick this option to enable an automatic recount to take place if the measurement recorded as an alarm Complete Both Steps During a measurement the first step has the user face the detector array and the second step has the user rotate 180 degrees to face away from the detector array Tick this option for the user to perform the second step of the measurement iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 11 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Field Name Description Restart Measurement on Sensor Break Disable Body Sensor Disable Ri
93. Scan to run see UI Options page 5 8 Values 3 to 60 s Default 10 s Select a Gas Type from one of the following radio buttons Argon Methane Monitoring Select Set Up Monitoring to customise the first set of Operational Parameters g e i Low Background Limit 5 100 cps Max Zero Count Time 100 5 High Background Limit 1000 1000 1000 cps RCC Contamination Threshold 100 000 Gamma Low Energy Threshold 100 Minimum Monitoring Time 5 s Maximum Monitoring Time 100 s Background Period fo s Measurement Confidence bud 95 450 Gross Changing Background 4 99 994 Detector Changing Background lo 100 000 Changing Conditions B o 99 994 Changing Conditions Period 2 5 Background Stability Factor ia ratio Background Stability Factor Bo ratio Apply Cancel Settings Changes 5 12 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Description of options Field Name Description Low Background Limit B y cps Max Zero Count Time a s High Background Limit a y cps RCC Contamination Threshold 6 Gamma Low Energy Threshold ratio Minimum Monitoring Time s If a background measurement falls below this value counts per second a detector failure will occur Values 0 to 99 999 cps 0 to disable Default 50cps If no counts are received w
94. Total Average Background Count Rate Counter s Contamination Alarm Level Cobalt Coincidence Monitoring Contamination Alarm Count rate Effective Alarm Count rate Curie Counts per minute Door s Detection limit Disintegrations per minute Efficiency Correction Factor Act of Exiting Probability of False Alarm Figure of Merit Person Persons or Team responsible for setting up day to day running and maintenance of the iPCM Health Physicist High Voltage Act of Entering Keyboard Emulating Id Provider kiloBecquerel Another term for USB Barcode Reader Lead Large Articles Monitor Liquid Crystal Display iPCM User Manual G 1 Glossary of Terms LED LED LVD MAct mCi MDA NBR NE110 equivalent nCi NORM pCi PM PoFA Quickscan RAct RCC SAM Technician tB Tcal ThermoFisher Tmax Tmin Tmon User V G2 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Directive Minimum Detectable Activity Milli Curie Minimum Detectable Activity Natural Background Reduction Term referring to a specification of plastic nanocurie Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material Probability of Detection Printed Circuit Board picocurie Personnel Monitor or Portal Monitor Probability of False Alarm Method used to identify within the monitoring time see Tmon whether the article is either clearly contaminated or clear referred to as real dirty or real clea
95. UP OF CONTAMINATION AND SMALL BACKGROUND CHANGES THEREFORE IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT A REGULAR FRISKING PROCEDURE IS ADOPTED AND OR AN INSPECTION OF THE BACKGROUND REPORT SHOULD INDICATE A BUILD UP OF ACTIVITY SEE Reports page 5 63 Notes Regarding Monitoring Measurement Cycle During the measurement the amount of measurement time remaining displays on the screen see Personnel Monitoring page 5 94 and on the Guidance System page 5 85 QuickScan It is possible to determine quickly during a measurement that the sample is either clean or contaminated and if the count rate is sufficiently low or high This is known as QuickScan This feature is enabled separately for beta and gamma it is not applicable to alpha see Operation page 5 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 103 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Recount Required If the user moves out of position during the measurement cycle the count is halted and the user is Recount prompted to move back into position The following Recount Required message displays If the user moves back DIL e into position then the count resumes If the user leaves the portal then the measurement is abandoned Alarm Result See Alarms page 5 19 and Alarm Display page 5 106 for more information regarding the Alarm displays If the measurement is partially complete and the a Low Background Limit is exceeded o
96. a fault with a peripheral device is indicated Normal operation of the IPCMI2 can be continued when action has been taken to rectify or circumvent the problem PRINTER NOT ACCEPTING DATA The printer refused to accept data for over ten seconds This may be due to the printer being disconnected off line or turned off Check the printer and the connection to the iPCM12 see Network Communications page 3 9 Whilst the iPCM12 is in Background Checking mode certain aspects of the instrument s operation are tested repeatedly Ifa fault is detected the iPCM12 will display the appropriate message as follows 1 Amplifier Failure Amplifier Counter Failure Amplifier Counter Overflow Amplifier HV Over Current Amplifier HV Over Voltage Amplifier HV Under Current Amplifier HV Under Voltage Amplifier Dead Time Saturation Amplifier EEPROM failure 100 cp gy 10 Lamp Control Failure 11 X Channel Failure 12 X Channel Failure Node 0 The fault messages produced whilst in the application will typically result in the OUT of SERVICE and Critical Error messages being displayed Reference to OUT OF SERVICE page 5 97 may assist to clear this fault and allow continued operation An extreme failure may result in the Window s blue screen halting further activity This will require rebooting the Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Access to Electronic Chassis Thermo Fisher Scientific Mai
97. additional Quickscan checks will be undertaken at periods that are integer multiples of To e g 2To until the end of the monitoring period The Quickscan period is set in Operation page 5 11 If the Quickscan formula refer to Thermo Fisher Scientific is satisfied at any of the Quickscan checks then the monitoring cycle will terminate with the appropriate clean or contaminated indication Quickscan applies to beta and gamma measurements only Quick background is a method that evaluates the shortest possible background monitoring time while still satisfying the statistical criteria Quick Background is enabled in Operation page 5 11 The formula used to evaluate the Calculated Monitoring Time is used The system will re evaluate the value of Tea after every second of the background update where the Background Update Time tg is a variable When the value of Tu lt Tmax then the system will return to service Since the system acquires background counts at any time it is not in use then the value of will reduce until a count rate from the previous 100 seconds has been acquired The Co 60 window only applies to gamma measurements A specific alarm for Co contamination may be set if enabled in Alarms page 5 19 This alarm is based upon monitoring only those high energy photons which cannot be associated with radionuclides that emit lower energy photons such as 7 Therefore it is also possible for ot
98. and Sigma Probability 0 0 50 00 0 1 53 98 0 2 57 93 0 3 61 79 0 4 65 54 0 5 69 15 0 6 72 57 0 7 75 80 0 8 78 81 0 9 81 59 1 0 84 13 1 1 86 43 1 2 88 49 1 3 90 32 1 4 91 92 1 5 93 32 1 6 94 52 1 7 95 54 1 8 96 41 1 9 97 13 2 0 97 72 2 1 98 21 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 21 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 Sigma Probability 2 2 98 61 2 3 98 93 2 4 99 18 2 5 99 38 2 6 99 53 2 7 99 65 2 8 99 74 2 9 99 81 3 0 99 87 3 1 99 90 3 2 99 93 3 3 99 95 3 4 99 966 3 5 99 977 3 6 99 984 3 7 99 989 3 8 99 993 3 9 99 995 4 0 99 997 This probability refers to either the Probability of Detection or the Probability of NOT triggering a False Alarm These probabilities are calculated and displayed in Detection Options page 5 16 Setting of Alarm Levels False Alarm Rates amp Probabilities Contamination Alarm Levels and associated averaging areas are generally driven by legislation However programming of statistical detection certainty Probability of Detection and False Alarm rates are often local site decisions which impact on the Monitoring Time and equipment credibility with the users High false alarm rates quickly loose user confidence in the integrity of the measurement while too stringent statistical requirements extends monitoring times resulting in low throughput and frustrated queues of users The following dis
99. and select OK See Foreword page xv for more information regarding the roles Technician ThermoFisher a OK Cancel In the Entering Admin Mode window select OK for the ENTER PASSWORD window see below the Alphanumeric keyboard displays ENTER PASSWORD Select User Technician Password Enter the password using the keyboard and select OK to enter the Administration Mode Note that the Diagnostics Detector window initially displays see Passwords page 5 80 for details The various options available in the Administration Mode displays in Menu Roles page 5 7 Entering an invalid password will display the following message Invalid Password a Press OK to re display the Enter Admin Mode screen 5 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Moving through the Menus Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions cat Detection 4 UI Options Monitoring Calibration gt B Quick Scan Enabled y Quick Scan Enabled Quick Background Enabled Residual Contamination Check after Alarm RCC after Abandoned Measurement Auto Recount iv Complete Both Steps Restart Measurement on Sensor Break Disable Body Sensor Disable Right Toe Sensor Iv Enable Radon Detection Clean On Radon Only Portal Approach Time Exit Barrier Delay Background Logging Interval Out of Service Recovery Interval Quick Scan Period Cam
100. and previous calibrations are stored to a backup compact flash These backups take place automatically after every calibration and when requested by the User It is recommended that the backup is undertaken after every voltage scan and calibration This backup may be retrieved if for any reason the hard drive on the instrument needs replacement Selection of Detector Operating Parameters The following sections assume that the instrument is set to the factory defaults Note that for all variants of iPCM12 the gas flow detector working voltages are the same depending on the gas medium used whereas gamma detector working voltages are specifically set for each PM tube scintillator Detector HV Selection The Test and Performance Certificate supplied with each instrument lists the recommended High Voltage settings for each detector for the optimum detection HV Scan page 5 41 describes the setting of the detector HVs If however it is required to ascertain the optimum operating voltages by measurement e g due to new detectors the procedure described in Derivation of the Optimum Operating Voltage page 9 5 should be followed Calibration for other nuclides and nuclide mixes is described in Calibration Procedure page 10 1 9 4 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Derivation of the Optimum Operating Voltage Performing the HV Scan Thermo Fisher Scientific Setting Up Procedure The iPCM12 is des
101. are required to lift and fit the lead sections into the iPCM12 cabinet WARNING iPCMI2s FITTED WITH LEAD SHIELDING MUST NEVER BE MOVED IN ANY WAY WHATSOEVER LEAD SHIELDING MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE TRANSPORTING 4 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Electrical Installation Thermo Fisher Scientific Unpacking and Installation Before proceeding with the electrical installation ensure the iPCM12 has been mechanically installed as described in Mechanical Installation page 4 5 Due to the many possible variations in cable length and installation requirements the iPCM12 is supplied with an IEC Power Cord with European Color Coded Conductors and a free end The iPCM12 is fitted with a standard IEC connector designed to meet the harmonized European standard BS4491 EN60320 When selecting a suitable power connector only IEC sockets complying with this standard should be used The Mains port and network ports are located on the top of the iPCM12 Refer to D92620 for a detailed picture The iPCM12 is fitted with an auto ranging switch mode power supply When selecting a suitable power cable and installation point the electrical supply must adequately meet the following requirements Input Voltage 85 264V Input Power 360 V A Input Frequency 45 440Hz Fuse T3 15A 250V The mains inlet to the iPCM12 is located on the top of the unit The location is detailed in
102. array system is achieved around the upper half of the iPCM User Manual 6 1 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 body and eight vertical arrays surround the lower half of the body The size of the operator has little effect on sensitivity A In the case of alpha monitoring the range of alpha particles in air is only a few centimetres dependent on alpha energy and so many parts of the body will not be sufficiently close that contamination can be detected However alpha monitoring may be thought worthwhile for those parts of the body and legs in near contact with the detectors The form of detector layout again provides the best arrangement for the detection of alpha contamination with a static system In the case of gamma monitoring although good counting geometry is required closeness of the body to avoid air absorption is not required so detector arrays behind the beta detectors give very uniform response KA The iPCM12 combines the results from adjacent detectors to provide sum zones which monitor for distributed contamination over more than one detection area This leads to an excellent overall spatial response on all regions of the body Spatial Response Great difficulty is experienced in determining the actual performance of the equipment for the monitoring of personnel because of variation of height and shape of the users The standard IEC 61098 Installed personnel surface contamination monitoring a
103. button to save or Cancel button to quit without saving Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions To delete an existing Calibration Mix highlight the Calibration Mix for deletion and press the Delete Mix button HVScan SelectCalibrationHV HI GC Ecce view and create HV Scans Iti 699 CE ESSI also possible to set HVs for detector amplifiers The scan allows repeated counts at an increasing or decreasing to Be ae be recorded to ascertain detector igre a operating point and efficiency Detector System 0 6 CY New HV Last HV Scan Scan Detector System ay Note that if Detector System y is selected the following window is displayed Advice 1 Select Detector system to scan 2 Start a new HV scan or 3 View the last performed scan 4 View the latest scan for all detectors New HV Last HV All Scan Scan Detectors To start a new HV Scan press Please enter scan parameters the New HV Scan button to display the Please enter scan Pani ash Maximum Voltage 3600 Parameters window Step Size 20 Step Duration 10 5 Start Back Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 41 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Description of options Field Name Description Minimum Voltage V Enter a minimum voltage Maximum Voltage Enter a maximum voltage V Note that this value should at least be
104. ee W S938 ARRAY HINGE SECTION o cenerator Owes 5713A 2828 gay q 3288 Ferusren Baad BOARD Sore 5672A ISO THREADS CLASS 6g 6H TES DATE DOI MOD UPPER PLINTH 8 8E NL 29 09 08 DOboox 9525 _ e Seg 2 DEC PL 015 20 04 09 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG g H aa FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE E Bos ThermoFisher Bath Road Beenham Reading 5 SCIENTIFIC IDET CTOR Hv SUPPLYI Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND 2508 SEE SHEETS 283 OF 6 SCALE TME DRGN 2955 ELECTRONICS POWER amp DISPLAY CONNECTION DIAGRAM SEE SHEETS 283 OF 6 J untess stated NTS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ae SS i D92591 955 amp MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED FOR iPCM12A OF6 T Z ars Lesced DONOTSCALE THIRDANGLE PRovectiON 2 IF IN DOUBT ASK oN OuG DOM EE ee Se TOP OF HEAD DETECTOR OPTIONAL AE0223 FULL DETECTOR CONFIGURATION EXCL ARRAY SIDE OF HEAD DETECTOR SN TA E a 1 64 e m _ _ le ry Ei Ou n 1 a DETECTOR INNER HAND DETECTOR IH iai SHOULDER DETECTOR off MAE i di T F AE Igi L OUTER HAND BODY ARRAY DETECTOR x12 TOP OF HEAD DETECTOR OPTIONAL AE0223A H V CABLE TABLE CABLES POSITIONED AS LISTED P
105. ee e eee eee ee esent esent tata tasa tus en sensus enata sen ets essen stas tneun 7 1 5714B DC DC Converter Board eee ee eee ente eene an 7 7 5711A Guidance Display and 5672A LED Cluster Indicator scccsscsscssssssscsssssnssesssneees 7 7 iPCM12B or iPCM12C with Gamma Kit Including FHT681 Scintillation HV and HV and Amplifier Connections Mains Power Module Assembly 702947K J eee eee eere eee eee ee eene ene snas instet es eine tu sens aotus 7 9 LCD Display and Controller I F and Backlight Inverter Module Assembly D92583 A 7 9 iPCM12C Option GPIO Controller Card 57074 eere eerie eee eee enitn tenent entes inania sain 7 9 General Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Considerations cerent 7 10 Routine Checks rne eta 8 1 IU zoiEIntcIEO zo CR 8 1 iPCMI2 Mounting Arrangement cece cece ee ennt enne 8 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor ix Contents Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Issue 2 0 Electrical Checks sssssscssssssscsssscssscssscsssesssssssssscssssssnscsssessessesessescesssssscessscsssossessssossessesesnesneses Battery Charge State ES Display C
106. emission rate placed on Foot Plinth Tread Plate Window Support frame in contact with stainless steel foot grille Smaller sources will yield higher efficiencies Standard Hex Tread Plate 70 Transmission Alpha Efficiency Americium 241 32 of SER Beta Efficiency Carbon 14 25 of SER Cobalt 60 35 Chlorine 36 43 Strontium Yttrium 90 43 NOTES e All gas flow efficiencies are Typical for P7 2 gas 1 700 V Q sea level e Efficiency variations up to 10 are possible for beta contaminants e Efficiency variations up to 15 are possible for alphas where manufacturing tolerances are more critical e Please read note in Gas Flow Quad Detectors Removal and Replacement page 11 17 3 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Scintillator Construction Hand Foot amp Head Scintillator Body Scintillator Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification e Depth dimensions include head amplifier and fixing screws e Working voltages may be reduced by 200 V at 8 000 feet above sea level Scintillation Detector Options All iPCM12 A B and C variants can be fitted with a range of Scintillation Detector Gamma options Some however due to the lead shielding required are restricted to the Closed B and C cabinet styles See table in Option Kits on page 3 2 All Scintillation Detectors used in iPCM12 Option Kits utilize Embedded Photomultiplier techn
107. event of residual contamination being detected the iPCM12 will enter an Out of Service state and monitoring will not be possible see Notes regarding Residual Contamination Check page 5 94 Intervention by a password holder will be required to terminate the fault status see Instrument Contaminated page 5 95 6 18 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Automatic Calculation of Calibration Monitoring Time Assumptions Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics The Calibration technique see Calibration Menu page 5 33 uses flash 10 second background and source counts to automatically calculate the count time for the user The Calibration Accuracy and the associated confidence level are set in Calibration page 5 15 The count confidence level has a default setting of 30 99 7 which is a generally accepted Confidence level that produces acceptable count times Then Calibration Count Time where Neon 3 Count Confidence Level of 99 7 Flash source background Count cps b Flash Background Count cps Calibration Accuracy ratio e g 5 0 05 The calculated count time is rounded up to the nearest whole second and T is limited to 10 000 seconds T2N2 n4 nb conf p s ny Sec s Calculation of Alarm Levels This section describes the Calculation of alarm levels for Parameter data entry Alarm levels may be set in terms of activity or count rate cps
108. exhaust gas in the vicinity of the iPCM12 makes leak detection with a gas sniffer impossible In any case a minimum of 10 meters 30 feet of tubing should be attached to the Exhaust Bulkhead This effectively creates a gas reservoir which prevents air from being drawn back into the system in the event of the internal gas volume shrinking due to sudden temperature drop e g due to external doors opening Observe the Warning above The gas supply pressure must be externally regulated usually by a regulator at the gas bottle The input pressure to the iPCM12 must be regulated to between 14 and 34 5 kPa 2 to 5 psi 0 15 to 0 35 Bar The flow rate through the iPCM12 gas circuit is controlled by a flow control valve located on the gas chassis This can be accessed through the GUI Setup detailed Gas Flow page 5 22 The pressure within the iPCM12 gas system is very low a few mm water gauge On initial installation and after a major repair the entire gas system must be thoroughly purged of all air To do this the security dongle must be inserted into the system USB to access the setup screens on the LCD Once in the setup screens select Diagnostics on the top tab From there select Gas Flow A series of inlet flow and exhaust flow rates are shown There is a dialog box with radio buttons stating Normal and Purge Select the Purge box and the system will begin to purge These instructions are detailed in Diagn
109. expanding number of language translations are optionally available The major User messages displayed and spoken can be translated into local languages as required for example e Languages o E English o DE German o C Chinese See standard Nomenclature Codes in the Introduction page 1 1 Additionally a number of AE Option Kits are available for the iPCM12 They provide additional Gas Flow detectors and ancillary equipment to the standard alpha beta units and also a range of Scintillation detectors for simultaneous gamma monitoring Many options are suitable for both cabinet styles but some are restricted to Closed B and C Variants only See options table below iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 1 Specification Issue 2 0 Option Kits Option Kit Option Description Closed B and AE 0221A GF Side of Foot Detector 4 AE 0223A GF Top of Head Detector GF Back of Shoulder 1A Detector AE 0229A GF Spare purged Detector Ed grille Kit AE 0243A Gamma Hand Detector Kit 0253 Gamma Mini SAM een Fisca o ID AE 0244A USB Bar Code Reader Kit EE ee AE 02XXA Heavy Duty Power System AE 0239A Door Exit Only 0240 Powered Door Exit Only R H AE 0238A Powered Door Inlet and Exit Pair AE 0237A Powered Barrier Inlet and Exit AE 0239B ee Door Exit Only AE 0240B a Door Exit Only a AE 0238
110. graphs of the scans There are two methods for determining the optimum operating voltage for the gamma detectors either using the NBR method which optimizes the pulse height threshold settings to obtain energy information or the classic way by reviewing the Figure of Merit at each voltage setting The recommended method is the NBR method which typically will also provide an operating voltage that satisfies the Figure of Merit criteria The NBR method must be used if the Co window or low energy indications are enabled The NBR method requires the use of a Cs calibration source for voltage optimization When the graph of the voltage plots displays press the detector on the screen mimic and the respective graph for that detector which will expand to fill the screen Select the NBR button a ratio against operating voltage graph displays The optimum operating voltage is that which has a T1 T2 ratio of between 30 and 35 In order to find this press the Table button the data displays From the table identify the operating voltage that has the correct T1 T2 If you have to interpolate between two 9 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Figure of Merit FOM Method for Gamma Scintillation Thermo Fisher Scientific Detectors Setting up Procedure voltages assume a linear change Enter this value into the HV Setting box and then press the Back button The v
111. gt Tmin It will never be activated if the alpha monitoring time Tmona is greater than or equal to the beta and or gamma monitoring time The Quickscan period is the time period after the beginning of the monitoring cycle at which the first time slice check is undertaken Subsequently further Quickscan checks will be undertaken at periods that are integer multiples of Tg e g 2To until the end of the monitoring period The Quickscan period is set Operation page 5 10 If the Quickscan formula refer to Thermo Fisher Scientific is satisfied at any of the Quickscan checks then the monitoring cycle will terminate with the appropriate clean or contaminated indication Quick Background Quickscan applies to beta and gamma measurements only Quick background is a method that evaluates the shortest possible background monitoring time while still satisfying the statistical criteria Quick Background is enabled in Operation page 5 10 The formula used to evaluate the Calculated Monitoring Time is used The system will re evaluate the value of after every second of the background update where the Background Update Time tg is a variable When the value of Tua lt Tmax then the system will return to service Since the system acquires background counts at any time it is not in use then the value of will reduce until a count rate from the previous 100 s has been acquired Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM
112. iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 9 Technical Description Physics Introduction Description of Parameters 6 10 Used in Calculations Issue 2 0 Alarms detected with a beta alpha radio of approximately 2 1 can therefore be associated with nuisance Radon In addition if the system identifies the timing between the alpha and beta events filtering should be possible to remove Radon Thoron events In practice site specific beta alpha Radon ratios are determined and a minimum maximum ratio may be set as a parameter within the application Genuine Alarms take precedence over possible Radon alarms Alarms within the defined ratio range area deemed possible nuisance alarms trigger an ALARM possibly due to Radon message to the user Usually re monitoring after 15 20 minutes will allow any Radon to decay and a clear result to be obtained Explanation of the Operational Calculations It is a requirement to measure personnel contamination as quickly and accurately as possible Optimum detection efficiencies are required with minimum statistical error in giving alarm indications Measurement of contamination is dependent on ambient background level Accuracy of measurement of both background and contamination is dependent on respective background and contamination monitoring times background attenuation and also on chosen probability of false alarm and probabilities of detection This section sum
113. iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2C only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCM User Manual PANEL LOCK amp KEY SEALED BATTERY LOUDSPEAKER PWR MODULE 150W 12 1 TFT LCD BACKLIGHT INVERTER COMPACT FLASH TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER TOUCH SCREEN HEX TREADPLATE KEYSWITCH Issue Beta Issue 1 A92452 503073KJ 11705242 702947KJ 702548ND 702549ND 702275KM 702632ND 702633ND C92479 11705234 Spares list optional components HV amp AMPLIFIER BOARD FHT681 HAND FOOT SHOULDER SCINTILLATION DETECTOR BODY SCINTILLATION DETECTOR GPIO CARD DYNODE CHAIN PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE Drawings list by assembly 5713A 5659B 5703A 5672A 5714B 5712 1 12 FAMILY TREE See attached diagram at back of document HV GENERATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR BRD BATTERY CONTROLLER BRD 5 WAY LED CLUSTER DC DC CONVERTER BOARD ETX PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY ETX PROCESSOR BOARD GAS CONTROL CHASSIS 425430223 5708A 5717 5707 A3 54040 B35246 D92425 E92359 A C91794 B D92313 A D91956 A C92356 A D92615 A E92353 A D92610 A Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Recommended Spares List 5709A GAS FLOW BOARD E96362 A 5711A GUIDANCE DISPLAY BOARD C92349 A 5707 12 GPIO CARD 92343 5710 QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR D92413 A ASSEMBLY iPCM12A
114. in the measured background count rate from the mean will cause the iPCM12 to discard the current mean value and restart background monitoring see UserModelChanging Background page 6 14 If due to continuous operation the iPCM12 has been unable to measure background for 15 minutes a 10 second background count is performed immediately after the current monitoring sequence If no significant change is detected the machine will be available for further monitoring If a change in background is detected further background measurements are performed until the iPCM12 detects a stable background see UserModelChanges to the Normal Background Monitoring page 5 92 When the mandatory full background count has been accumulated the monitoring time required to achieve the specified alarm level is calculated Providing the monitoring time calculated falls within the maximum and minimum limits see Monitoring page 5 14 the instrument will be ready for monitoring If however the monitoring time calculated is greater than the maximum allowed a high background condition exists and monitoring will be inhibited A high background condition indicates that the alarm level set and statistical certainties required are not achievable under the current background conditions This condition will auto recover when the background falls or otherwise more suitable relaxed operational parameters are entered by the Health Physicist It is advisable to
115. information regarding verbal instructions Note that this message is user definable See Messages page 5 24 for more information See Cancel Alarm page 5 93 for more information on clearing the alarms If the a High Alarm is triggered the information is displayed as a Result follows Facing In iPCM User Manual 5 91 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 If the B High Alarm is triggered the information is displayed as follows B Result uen SERE pane LLLA YA TETT Facing In Facing Out If the y High Alarm is triggered the information is displayed as y Result follows pian Facing In If the Co High Alarm is triggered the information is displayed as follows Cobalt Result Facing In Facing Out 5 92 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Cancel Alarm Residual Contamination Thermo Fisher Scientific Check Operating Instructions For more information about setting of Alarm configurations see Alarms page 5 18 When an Alarm displays sounds it can be cleared in the following instances 1 The alarm will automatically timeout after the Alarm Duration After Exit setting 2 If User Can Cancel Alarm Sound is ticked the User can acknowledge the alarm prior to the Alarm During After Exit timeout Cancel Alarm 3 If Failure Display requires Supervisor Acknowledge is tic
116. is a view only field Confidence This factor affects the monitoring time of calibration Values 0 1 to 4 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 2 Deviation from If the percentage difference for the a and detectors Previous between the current and previous calibration is more than this value the calibration is to be reviewed Values 5 to 100 Default 5 Detection Options Select Set Up Detection Options GZ Gi CQ CL ea to customise the Alarm and LECCE MAMLA Detection compare Options a Detection Enable Poisson Gaussian F B Detection Enable F a B Sum Zones Enable F y Detection Enable y Sum Zones Enable F Reduce Sum Zone Sensitivity F High Alarms Enable High Alarm Multiple F _ ANN False Alarm Detection Alpha Body i95 165 990 B1 AlphaHand 495 165 o 0990 9 31 c Alpha Foot 495 165 9990 31 Beta 495 1 65 9990 31 Beta 495 165 9990 31 Beta Foot Gos 165 B1 Gamma Body 495 165 990 31 Gamma Hand 495 165 9990 31 Gamma Foot 595 165 o 9990 31 5 16 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Description of options Field Name a Detection Enable Poisson Gaussian Detection Enable Sum Zones Enable y Detection Enable y Sum Zones Enable Desc
117. is also important to reset the time and date see SystemlSetup page 5 79 because these are used when checking the calibration due dates and also by the Data option A listing of all the parameters is available by selecting Configuration Report page 5 68 This report should be either printed or saved to USB memory stick when the instrument is first set up and again when significant changes of configuration are undertaken The iPCM12 will be delivered optimized with a valid HV Scan and optimum operating voltages stored If the HV Scan needs to undertaken for any reason follow the procedure described in Detector HV Selection page 9 4 The details of the current and previous calibrations are stored to a backup compact flash These backups take place automatically after every calibration and when requested by the User It is recommended that the backup be undertaken after every voltage scan and calibration This backup may be retrieved if for any reason the hard drive on the instrument needs replacement Selection of Detector Operating Parameters The following sections assume that the instrument is set to the factory defaults NOTE For all variants of iPCM12 the gas flow detector working voltages are the same depending on the gas medium used whereas gamma detector working voltages are specifically set for each PM tube scintillator iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 9 3 Setting up Procedure Detector HV Select
118. long x 158 mm wide x 57 mm thick Detection Area 679 cm 105 in Detection Vol 3873 236 Alpha and Beta Detection Efficiencies Detection Efficiencies have been determined in accordance with the procedures defined by International Electrotechnical Commission Standard for Installed Personnel Warning Assemblies IEC 61098 Hand amp Foot Alpha Beta Alpha and Beta Hand detection efficiencies are measured with Contact Efficiency sources placed inside the hand mechanism in contact with the Typical SER 2z protective grilles iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Foot detection efficiencies are measured with sources placed directly in contact with the standard High Efficiency hex tread plate The sources used to derive these efficiencies have an area of 100 or 150 cm Smaller area sources will yield larger efficiencies Source Detector Energy Type 2 Efficiency Rugged Hi Eff Grille Grille Fe Hand 5 0keV X ray 20 SFe Foot 5 9 keV X ray 27 Ni Hand 67 keV Beta 5 0 96 Ni Foot 67 keV Beta 3 6 HG Hand 156keV Beta 22 31 Foot 156keV Beta 25 o Hand 709keV Beta 37 50 96 Foot 709 keV Beta 43 Co Hand 318keV Beta 31 96 41 96 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Alpha Beta Body Average Efficiency Typical 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification Source Detector Energy Type 2 Efficiency Rugged Hi Eff Grille Grille Co Foot 318 keV Beta 35 BICs Hand 514keV Beta 40 96 53
119. low energy beta efficiency A minimum flow rate of 25 cc min 1 5 L hr is required in leak free beta only detection systems Flow rates below 25 cc min are not recommended because flow meter calibration below 50 cc min is non linear and of questionable accuracy Also too low of a flow through the system will result in air ingress and reduction in counting efficiency particularly alpha efficiency The flow rate should not exceed 100 cc min with the restrictor in circulate purge switch OFF Leaks should be repaired as soon as possible 4 10 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Choice of Location Optimum Orientation within Directional Background Fields Thermo Fisher Scientific Unpacking and Installation Orientation and Positioning of the iPCM12 with Scintillation Detection Option AE0222A Known as iPCM12C While gas flow proportional counters have a high gamma rejection the large area Plastic Scintillation detectors fitted in the above options are very sensitive to high levels and changes in the gamma background Therefore it is recommended that the installation site be chosen for lowest possible stable background to minimize the effect of statistical fluctuations See Background Capability page 3 3 for the background capability of the iPCM12C It is recommended that the iPCM12C be installed away from active areas to suit both these needs If the background fi
120. min for at least four hours is preferable alternatively a minimum purge of 12 hours overnight at 50 cc min may be used Proceed as follows 1 Via the HP menu access select the Diagnosis menu and Gas Flow submenu Observe that the INLET PURGE flow is now set at about 200 cc min although the restrictor is bypassed it will take about 10 minutes before the EXHAUST flow reaches this level Note that a gas leak fault will be indicated temporarily 2 Wait 10 minutes and check that the outlet flow is 50 cc min If this is not the case check for leaks and or blockages 4 Perform 10 second Test Counts at half hour intervals until all gas flow detectors show similar and consistent count rates 5 Anormal count rate will be approximately 4 to 5 cps in low background equivalent to 50 to 60 cps uSv h for body hand and foot detectors 6 Set the Mode switch to Normal which places the restrictor in circuit NOTE The typical Inlet flow rate will be between 20 and 25 cc min for leak free beta only systems The flow rate may be set to 50 cc min for more robust operation and peak alpha efficiency 9 10 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Calibration Procedure Chapter 10 Calibration Procedure This section deals in detail with primary system calibration It includes background source and efficiency checks on individual detectors to confirm detector balance as well as
121. model used has variations which makes it a closer approximation of the Poisson distribution at the very low count rates associated with alpha measurements 6 24 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Effect of Probability of False Alarm F Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics This is the probability of a false alarm occurring due to natural background fluctuations The Background B for each detector is continuously monitored on a 100 second rolling average represented by the sharply defined left hand peak in Figure 13 It is centered about the average background B and is a relatively tight distribution because it is measured over 100 seconds statistically accurately known and thus has a relatively small effect on monitoring time However statistical background fluctuations during the relatively short often less than 10 seconds monitoring time are significant and unless corrected for are likely to cause false alarms In Figure 13 the wider left hand peak represents the distribution about the 5 cps average background B in the monitoring time T False alarm correction is achieved by the probability of false alarm factor F operating on the stored average background B This effectively produces a modified value of the background for use in the statistical calculations beyond which the probability of natural fluctuation is known to be acceptab
122. op a oe SIDE OF HEAD DETECTOR v e 7 x H e B arrun o p 8 ej m i z e EL 5 Ses e V d Al Al OF HEAD DETECTOR lee e OPTIONAL AE0223A i ool th CF a a sk 702270 2 NR E a 8 dol g pe INSTALL REGARDLESS OF OPTION B a ts Is Kd D 5712 E S uM n d T 3 g _ INNER HAND DETECTOR UPPER LEG DETECTOR maa E A ge E a S 3 z i i d Tb m ME p niv E Q D i OF SHOE DETECTOR AER e o amp m i 8 EK e e OP og a Pg R 3 E ia 5 5 e S 8 u e e d od od 4 e E E E Fog w Oa s e E 2 V SHOULDER DETECTOR x E g a a g a x 3 2 i S 3 E i E M z 1 V d 702270 2 b b LLL a 1 N 7 a ee fet N os E A E v 3 amp 2 702269KF 1m os FOR AE0221A ONLY a C n R d op Q H
123. operating instructions close to the automatic slid ing door Product designation Automatic swing door operator Product name record DFA 127 FP EU or record DFA 127 FP GG EU Serial number please complete when installing Page 2 of 20 Rev 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power WA Safety instructions The record DFA 127 swing door operator has been constructed in accordance with the latest state of the art and the recognised technical safety regulations including limiting of forces and speeds Nevertheless danger can arise for the user if not used as intended Installation maintenance and repairs to the record DFA 127 must only be performed by qualified and authorized personnel technicians 2 1 Use as intended The DFA 127 swing door operator is constructed exclusively for normal service with swing doors in dry rooms and must be installed within or inside buildings A different application or use extending beyond this purpose is not considered use for the intended purpose The manufacturer declines all responsibility for resulting damage the operator alone shall bear the associated risk Use for the intended purpose also includes observation of the operating conditions specified by the manufacturer including use and adjustment of the correct type of arms in addition to regular maintenance and repair Unauthorised modifications to the automatic door operator exclude any liability of the manufact
124. overall system efficiency Primary system calibration by the Health Physicist is usually necessary only on initial installation and on a periodic audit basis More frequent overall system calibration checks can be quickly carried out by Technician user level using the Cal Check facility see Cal Check page 5 39 For more information regarding the user roles see Foreword page xv and Menu Roles page 5 7 NOTE Throughout this section examples are given in Bq However by first selecting DPM from the Options Menu see UI Options page 5 9 as the operating units all values may be entered in these units Of course the equations remain unchanged though care must be taken to ensure that the units are consistent Calibration Validity The iPCM12 is capable of undertaking a calibration validity check This check will evaluate the number of days between the last valid PASS calibration check If this number of days exceeds the maximum acceptable recalibration interval then the iPCMI2 will put itself Out of Service see Out of Service page 5 112 To define the period between calibrations checks set the Calibration Required Interval parameter in Calibration page 5 16 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 10 1 Calibration Procedure Gas Flow Detectors Gamma Scintillation Detectors Issue 2 0 Equipment Required 1 1 A radioactive source of known nuclide and activity w
125. page 7 6 DC DC converter 5714B see 5714B DC DC Converter Board page 7 7 HV Generator module 5713A see 5713A HV Generator Board page 7 7 150W PSU module Battery control board 5703A see Battery Controller Board Type 5703A page 7 5 Quad USB outputs ETX Controller Board Type 5712A This controller board comprises all the interface buffers and connections necessary to communicate between all peripherals and the proprietary on board plug in the ETX processor The assembly has the following facilities used by the system 1 5GHz Pentium M processor 512 megabytes of RAM Dual RS232 Serial communication interface Real time clock supported by an off board Lithium battery The RTC provides microprocessor access to year month day hour minute seconds It also provides several interrupt periods from one year down to 0 01 seconds Quad USB hub Single Ethernet interface LCD and CRT drivers Dual IDE ports Flash Card interface Audio synthesizer iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 7 3 Technical Description Circuitry 7 4 USB power controllers Summary of 5712A Functions External Network Primary X channel2 bus Auxiliary X channel2 bus X channel bus SK3 PL6 PL7 PL8 9 SK4 11 15 16 SK201 SK1 6 7 1 4 PLS PL12 Issue 2 0 Destination Comments Display interface available for diagnostics Lower LCD Provides independent paneling power sou
126. portal enters the portal without entering their ID see User ID page 5 79 Please return to position If during measurement the user moves from the specified position see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 Illegal Exit Please re enter If the user exits the portal during the portal measurement see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 Clear Please leave the If the measured contamination is below portal alarm levels the user is advised to leave the portal see CLEAR result page 5 88 3 8 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Power Requirements Battery Backup Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification Measurement abandoned If the user exits the portal on the ingress side before the measurement is complete see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 Instrument Out of Service If the portal is entered when the unit is out of service the user is advised to leave the portal see Out Of Service page 5 97 Measurement Incomplete If the user exits the portal on the egress Please re enter the portal side before the measurement is complete and start again see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 Please leave and re enter the If the user does not fully exit the portal portal to start measurement on completion of measurement see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 Note The speaker volume is user adjustable in System Setup page 5 62 Networ
127. purge conditions controlled via the iPCM12 menu the inlet and exhaust solenoids are activated thus bypassing the gas restrictor tubing PL5 provides connections for initial IC13 and IC14 flash memory device programming PL10 and PL11 provide X channel interfacing Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Circuitry 5713A HV Generator Board IC2 DAC calibration circuits and HV clock from the on board processor IC13 provide a step up transformer input to generate the polarizing voltage for the gas flow detectors Under software control a Cockroft Walton style voltage tripler circuit boosts the generated output HV up to 4kV Two filtered HV outputs are provided for use within the iPCM12 PL1 and PL2 provide X channel interfacing PL5 provides connections for initial IC13 and IC14 flash memory device programming 5714B DC DC Converter Board Regulated and filtered power lines of 5V and 12V and 12V are produced via 3 DC DC converters mounted on this board The output is routed to the adjacent ETX 5712A board 5711A Guidance Display amp 5672A LED Cluster Indicator The upper plinth is fitted with a 5676A LED cluster board with 5 indicators showing the real time status of the IPCM12 GREEN Ready Clear WHITE Count YELLOW Recount RED Alarm BLUE Out of service Buffered drivers are provided at PL9 on the 5712A control board The 5711A guidance display board has a two digit LED indicat
128. purging Servicing Access Prone Reat Sides Top No access is required from front or back of the cabinet so the iPCM12 can be installed against a wall or another iPCM12 Clearance of 400 mm is required on right hand side for access to main electronics assemblies Vlearance of 300 mm is required on right hand site to allow opening of the hinged array frame Clearance of at least 200 mm is required to access the electronics and door closer adjusters Dimensions approximate Overall Dimensions open excluding LCD but including foot plate iPCM12A iPCM12B iPCM12C Closed closed gamma Height 87 5 2220 mm 87 5 2220 mm 88 5 2240 mm Width 37 940 mm 37 940 mm 37 940 mm Depth 29 735 mm 46 5 1330 mm 46 5 1330 mm Monitoring Area Height 2020 mm max Width of Array 520 mm Total Monitoring 15300 cm basic unit Area 16700 cm with optional detectors 3 10 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Specification Weight iPCM12A standard open unuit approx 300 kg 660 Ib iPCM12B standard closed unit no approx 500 kg 1100 Ib doors iPCM12B with 2 doors iPCM12C includes gamma option approx 1700 kg 3750 Ib and ful lead shielding Shielding for Gamma Booth front and back shield consist of 20 mm of lead Monitoring Version Option Environmental m i 0 459 Temperature and Humidity Operational Temperature Range 0 to 45
129. same calculate the Mean Source Counts Sm for all detectors The value of the net source counts S for each detector does not differ by more than 2596 from the mean value of Sm for all If any detector exceeds any of these limits alter the relevant HV by 10 V and check that the FOM is not significantly different than the original A total adjustment of 75 V is permissible This is a rough guide and individual circumstances may demand wider variations Test 3 When the background and source values are satisfactory calculate the 4x gamma detector efficiencies at the chosen HV setting Calculate the overall system efficiency which should be within 20 of the 4 efficiencies noted below These are measured iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 9 7 Setting up Procedure Issue 2 0 at the contact face of the gas flow detector grille located nearest to the gamma detector Upper Lower Hand y Foot y Head y body y body y 137Cg 662 keV 9 0 5 9 3 4 8 4 17 4 Co 1 2 MeV 21 5 12 5 7 196 15 896 25 0 If the overall system efficiency or any individual detector efficiency is too low or too high consider the efficiency values at the next HV step review the background Criteria in Tests 1 amp 2 and the Source Criteria in Test 3 Repeat this process if necessary NOTE The MDA is proportional to the square root of the Background lower background improves reduces t
130. set of parameters which in practice is likely to be an increase in the background B However for the set of conditions presented the user is being monitored beyond the precision and certainty required thus effectively wasting time which reduces throughput Therefore the iPCM12 software continuously adjusts the monitoring time T to the minimum required to achieve the statistical requirements as the background changes This is reflected in Figure 14 which shows that the monitoring requirements can be achieved in less than 11 s Note that the iPCMI2 rounds the monitoring time up to the nearest whole second The point where the two vertical lines just meet is the absolute limit of detection effectively the alarm trigger point above the average background Any change in background B will result in a monitoring time adjustment If a background increase requires the monitoring time to exceed the iPCM12 user programmed maximum Tmax a high background condition exists In graphical terms the two vertical lines have crossed over into a negative separation condition and the monitoring time can no longer be increased to restore the balance In this situation either the maximum monitoring time Tmax must be increased the Alarm count increased or the statistical requirements P and or F must be relaxed for the instrument to resume operation This is a non fatal condition from which Thermo Fisher Scientific Is
131. signals with a W are warnings For these the fault relay contact output is not connected Elimination of the irregularity leading to the status signal is per formed according to section 8 2 A status can usually be deleted by pressing the key for 5 s Reset This pro duces a new start in the control unit If however the cause of the fault has not been eliminated the status message will appear again if the fault occurs again Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 15 of 20 Action in case of faults 8 2 Error elimination The majority of faults can be eliminated by consulting the following table If the fault cannot be eliminated even after working through the table please contact the service centre Please also contact the service centre directly when no recom mended action is specified in the table Status Symptom fault Cause Action door behaviour consult service if no recommend action 03 Door remains open E device inside active longer than 05 Door remains open E device outside active longer than 06 Door does not unlock Unlocking fault 23 Control unit SLAVE defective Reset by service fitter 25 MASTER SLAVE connection interrupted Reset by service fitter Release EMERGENCY 31 Door stops EMERGENCY STOP button operated STOP button 37 Door stops Faulty motor current 38 Door changes to manual Besse tempera
132. system followed by the iPCM12 application During this time the Thermo Scientific banner will be displayed see below ee Once the application has loaded the application will initialise see Start Up Checks page 5 71 The system will automatically pass into the User Mode In this mode the user will not have access to any operational parameters In order to set up the instrument the user requires a security dongle which should be placed in the USB port of the iPCM12 When this dongle is in place the touch screen is activated and the user will have access to the Administrator Mode page 5 1 iPCM User Manual 9 1 Setting Up Procedure Issue Beta Issue 1 Setting Passwords There are three user levels Technician Health Physicist and Thermo Fisher The lowest level is Technician and allows the user to view some parameters and undertake calibration checks The Health Physicist level gives access to all parameters that are used for calibration and setup of the instrument The top level Thermo Fisher is reserved for the expert user since it gives access to specialised calibrations settings that fundamentally affect the performance of the instrument and should only be set at the Thermo Fisher factory or by a Service engineer See Passwords page 5 64 for details regarding the default passwords The menu options that are available to each user levels are summarised in Menu Roles page 5 6 Passwords pa
133. the furnishing of this manual or the use of this manual in operating the equipment or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated IMPORTANT NOTICE All units produced after the 1st January 1996 must by law conform to the rules and regulations governing Electro magnetic compatibility EMC In order to meet the requirements and CE mark the units described in this manual any maintenance carried out must ensure the correct re assembly of all parts especially the earth straps Furthermore particular attention should be made to the correct mounting of the mains filter Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual iii WARNING Personnel may trigger an alarm on a iPCM12 who have recently been subject to radiotherapy treatments that involve the injection or ingestion of radioactive isotopes The monitor is not able to distinguish these isotopes from those generated via on on site process However the monitor does have the ability to indicate the presence of low energy photon emitting isotopes which are typical of radiotherapy treatments The iPCM12 monitor should be primarily used for monitoring personnel Other objects and articles should be monitored with a monitor that is designed for their monitoring such as a SAM12 However if articles are passed through the monitor operational procedures should contain warnings regarding inappropriate articles These items may include Articles containing liquids Articles
134. the gas mixture in use and the recommended working voltages are indicated in Specification page 3 1 Typically for the recommended gas mixture P7 5 7 5 Methane 92 5 Argon the working voltage is 1775V Details are shown on the configuration print out for the instrument at the time of manufacture Note The voltage quoted here is valid within 300 m 1000 ft of sea level The working voltage may reduce by as much as 25 V 300 m 1000 ft above sea level Gas System The Gas supply should be regulated 3 to 5 psi or 14 to 35 KPa or 0 15 to 0 35 Bar Gas is Argon Methane at mixture between 90 10 P10 and 95 5 PS 92 5 7 5 P7 5 is recommended Ensure that the Gas flow detector HV settings are correct for the gas mixture as noted in the previous section The gas inlet purge and flow rates are set using needle valves on the gas control chassis Both needle valves need to be adjusted to bring the gas system fully into service Asa default the gas controller can only deliver gas at the reduced normal gas flowrate even if the purge rate has not been set This avoids any possibility that the purge rate is inadvertently set at maximum so if an iPCM12 is switched on without any gas adjustment there is no gas detector damage due to overpressure The gas controller board holds the exhaust solenoid open and the restrictor is bypassed indefinitely Select Diagnosis and Gas Flow sub menu to view the current gas status With the
135. the iPCM12 be positioned in the lowest stable background surroundings High background fields will reduce sensitivity and fluctuating backgrounds may cause false alarms and operational delays during background update periods Reasonable ventilation should be provided around the iPCM12 although there are no specific requirements on positioning The iPCM12 must be placed on a flat surface with a maximum height deviation of 2 mm over the length and width of the footprint of the iPCM12 Allow sufficient space around the cabinet for maintenance e 392 mm minimum on side Right hand side if facing an iPCM12A for Gas and Power chassis access e 200 mm minimum Top clearance for electronics access and door closer adjustment e 141 mm minimum on side opposite the gas and power chassis Left hand side if facing an iPCM12A iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 4 5 Unpacking and Installation Issue 2 0 Under normal circumstances external access to the front and rear of the cabinet is not required allowing iPCM12s to be installed against a wall or back to back in multiple installations See Drawing D92620 for iPCM12A iPCM12A Installations iPCMI2A cabinets can be unstable under certain environmental circumstances such as an earthquake if installed free standing Therefore the following installation procedure details how to fasten the iPCM12 to the floor e In order to fasten the iPCM12 to the floor threaded mini
136. the outer hand arm and side of head gas flow detectors The bulkhead on the right side of the Service Bay provides mounting facilities for up to five scintillation HV Amplifiers for the gamma detector options An optional purged spare gas flow detector can be accommodated on the inside of the service door The electronics and display assemblies are mounted within the Service Bay The main Electronics Chassis is mounted on the upper left side of the Service Bay immediately behind the color LCD and touch screen assembly It comprises the Main Processor board a DC DC Converter PCB a USB hub User Accessories Panel High Voltage Generator PCB and optional General Purpose Input Output GPIO Door Barrier control PCB Below the Electronics Chassis is a separate Power Chassis comprising an AC mains power supply a Battery Controller PCB and a 12 Volt Gel cell mounted on the cabinet base plinth An optional high capacity 12 Volt battery can be accommodated behind the right hand bulkhead plate A Gas Chassis comprising gas control valves and a Gas Controller PCB is mounted above the Electronics Chassis 2 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 iPCM12B and C Closed Booth Cabinet Type 5719A iPCM12 Closed Booth Door and or Barrier Kits iPCM12 C Closed Booth Full Body Gamma Kit Thermo Fisher Scientific Description A cabinet extension is attached to the basi
137. the processor board 5712A 5 If check 1 above has not revealed the problem a fault in the LCD module or Controller board 56914 is indicated 6 Temporarily connect a spare LCD module to the Controller board PL6 and PL7 the back light is required If the message becomes visible the fault is in the LCD display module This is not user serviceable and should be replaced with the back light as described in LCD Display Touch 11 32 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Display Backlight Failure Will Not Accept Valid Passwords LCD Keypad Inoperative or Not Aligned Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement page 11 15 If no message appears the fault is in the processor board which should be replaced as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 A power on Self Test switches on the back light and produces a series of Self Test Messages and beeps If the back light fails to light proceed as follows 1 Check the cabling from the back light inverter enclosure to PL7 on the processor board 2 Verify that five volts appear across the pins of PL7 when the back light should be on If 5 volts is apparent then a fault in the LCD or back light inverter is indicated These items are not user serviceable and should be replaced as
138. ticked Tick this option to prevent entry into the iPCM while the Residual Contamination Count is performed see Residual Contamination Check page 5 93 Ingress Closed Note that this option is greyed out unless the Enable During Out Of Front and or Rear Barrier options are ticked Service Tick this option to prevent entry into the iPCM while the unit is Out of Service see Out Of Service page 5 97 Ingress Closed When Note that this option is greyed out unless the Enable Ready Front and or Rear Barrier options are ticked Tick this option to prevent entry into the iPCM while the unit is Ready see Normal Background Monitoring page 5 75 Note that the Barrier Settings are only displayed when logged in as ThermoFisher see Menu Roles page 5 6 The Barrier Settings are displayed if the Enable Left and or Right Barrier option is ticked Entry Side Set either Left or Right as the Entry side for the iPCM Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Mode Transit time x 100ms Low Current Limit mA High Current Limit mA Evaluate Limits Operating Instructions Entry Settings Left and Right Use the pre defined window to select the type of Barrier that may be attached to the unit PCF Disabled Doors Barrier Unpowered Doors Turnstile Normally Locked Turnstile Normally Unlocked This is the time that is allowed for the worker to pass through the barrier Valu
139. to be in the 5712A board which should be replaced as described in Replacement of the ETX processor board page 11 10 Will not Enter Background If after power up or after exiting from the main menu the Mode iPCM12 displays Cannot Measure Background Please Exit Or Locked in Background the Portal a fault with the Infra Red links is likely Proceed as Mode follows 1 Check that the Links are working correctly by selecting Diagnostics Sensor The switch and links can be tested for correct operation 2 Check the continuity of the cable connecting the Sensor s to the adjacent 5710A detector boards Replace the processor board as described in ET X processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 if the switches are working correctly Locked in Measurement If the iPCMI2 becomes stuck in a monitoring cycle with the Mode display showing Count Time Remaining xx seconds it is likely that microprocessor has crashed Power down and check again Continual crashing may indicate that the processor board needs replacing as described in ET X processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 It is possible that the hard disk may have suffered some damage in this area of the program If the problem persists even after changing the processor board a new disk should be considered USB Output Data is If USB data output from the iPCM12 to a serial printer or Corrupted external computer contains spurious characters
140. to select a unit from one of the following dpm Bq kBq pCi nCi mCi Ci This changes the displayed activity units for the iPCM12 Default dpm Use the pre defined window to select a language This changes the displayed language for the iPCM 12 This option ensures that the user must enter his ID using the barcode reader before the portal will operate The following message is displayed See User ID page 5 79 for information on how this is implemented in the Monitoring process Default OFF Tick this option to enable voice prompts to be audible For more information regarding the prompts and where they are used see Audible Indications page 3 8 Default OFF This option allows the user to press the Alarm Acknowledge button when an alarm has taken place See Cancel Alarm page 5 93 for more information on clearing the alarms Default OFF iPCM User Manual 5 9 Operating Instructions 5 10 iPCM User Manual Operation Failure Display requires Supervisor Acknowledge Alarm Duration after Exit Id Timeout Period s Issue Beta Issue 1 This option ensures that a supervisor has to insert a dongle and press the Alarm Acknowledge button when a failure or alarm has taken place Note that the alarm will continue to display and sound until the supervisor acknowledges it See Cancel Alarm page 5 93 for more information on clearing the alarms Default OFF This is the le
141. to the Administration Mode page 5 3 Select the System main menu option and select the Actions sub menu option Select the Exit Application button A warning message asking for confirmation displays This action will close the application Are you sure you want to do this Select OK to exit and Cancel to abandon the exit process For more information see Actions page 5 78 Upon exiting from the Keypad Parameter Mode a Cold Start mode will run if the configuration has been changed see Cold Start State page 5 85 5 8 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Setup Menu Ul Options Select Set UplUI Options to customize the iPCM12 s operation Activity Units Ba Language English United Kingdom User id Required F Voice Prompts Enabled F User Can Cancel Alarm Sound r Failure Display Requires Supervisor Acknowledge Alarm Duraton After Exit 10 s ld Timeout Period no 5 Appty Cancel Settings Changes Eu Description of options Field Name Activity Units Language Description Use the pre defined window to select a unit from one of the following This changes the displayed activity units for the iPCM12 Default dpm Use the pre defined window to select a language This changes the displayed language for the iPCM12 User Id Required Thermo Fisher Scientific This option ensures that the user mu
142. unique default passwords for each level as follows User Password Health Physicist hp Technician tech ThermoFisher Contact Thermo Fisher Scientific To change the Password for a select User press in the Select User field to display the user roles Select a User and select OK Enter a Password and confirm the Password 5 80 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Ensure each password level has a unique Password under no circumstances should all three roles be assigned the same password Data Retention Select SystemlData Retention to Danes isis save the specified data fora st MAc number of months Relerwon Background Data Retention 12 months Results Data Retention 6 months Calibration Data Retention 24 months Cal Check Data Retention 3 months Event Log Data Retention 6 months Apply Cancel Settings Changes Enter the length in time months for how long each type of data is to be retained Data that is older than the specified time will be deleted automatically The following data types display e Background Data Retention months e Results Data Retention months e Calibration Data Retention months e Cal Check Data Retention months e Event Log Data Retention months Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 81 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 User Mode The basic operation of the iPCM12 i
143. value is highlighted in red Average Over samples f When touching the screen in an alpha numerical field the following keyboard appears 18 21 e nee When touching the screen in a pre defined field the following window appears Ci E q Ci dpm m nci pCi OK Cancel Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Date Functions When touching the screen in a date field the following date selection window appears 44 December 2006 gt Wed Thu Fri 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 File Location Functions When touching the screen in a File Location field the following Drive selection window appears MKEE DD Button Types Button types are listed below 4 Direction Arrows steps through the menu options Drop down lists allows you to select a pre defined option from the list Apply Action button show the process taken Changes when selected User Id Required Tick Boxes show independent options that you can choose to set or mark The choice can be toggled on and off by touching on the box Alpha Radio Buttons show mutually exclusive options choosing one option automatically clears the others The black dot shows the selected option C
144. with significant shielding Articles containing large magnets Articles with known radioactive content Articles containing liquids may have different release criteria Articles of large weight or significant shielding may require different procedures requiring Health Physics intervention Articles with a magnetic pull of more than four pounds may influence the accuracy of the monitor The iPCM12 weights between 0 75 and 1 tonne The monitor should only be installed and used on a suitably robust and stable base The monitor should never be moved with the lead installed WARNING AGAINST IMPROPER USE The protection provided by this equipment may be impaired if used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer The user must adhere to all the safety precautions noted overleaf and to individual warnings contained within this manual iv iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific WARNING SYMBOLS The following is an explanation of the warning symbols seen on the iPCM12 Please read this information before using and or maintaining this equipment As seen on the top of the iPCM12 frame and FHT681 covers CAUTION Isolate the mains supply and wait one minute before removing this cover CAUTION Isolate HV supply to the printed circuit board before removing cover With power connected and unit switched on a max voltage of 1500V DC with a maximum short circuit power of 825 milliwatts is present CAUTION
145. 0 Tmin 6 10 Tron 6 10 To configure an Interface 5 49 create a new Alarm 5 19 U UI Options 5 8 Unpacking and Installation 4 1 UserID 5 79 User Screen 5 67 Using the Touchscreen Functions 5 1 V Version 5 64 Vertical Scans 6 3 Violations during Monitoring 5 83 Voice Prompts 5 69 Weight 3 11 X XChannel 5 19 iPCM User Manual 1 3 Automatic Swing Door Operator DFA 127 _ Operating instructions Ed 4 LEX pf Page 1 General 2 NH 2 Safety instructions 3 lt 3 Technical data and operating conditions 4 N 4 Construction and function 5 6 5 Operating instructions 7 11 6 Configurations 12 13 7 Maintenance instructions 14 8 Action in case of faults 15 20 agtatec Itd Allmendstrasse 24 CH 8320 Fehraltorf Phone 41 0 44 954 91 91 Fax 41 0 44 954 92 00 record Date 11 2006 BU article no 127 109 265 B EN General These operating instructions are intended for the record DFA 127 FP EU or record DFA 127 FP GG EU automatic swing door operator herein after referred to as DFA 127 The operator is the person responsible for the technical maintenance of this door system These instructions describe the use of the record DFA 127 swing door operator They form the basis for satisfactory functioning These operating instructions should be read by the door operator before commis sioning and the safety instructions observed It is recommended to keep these
146. 00 s Default 100 s This is the current background period The value is set at 0 if a background has not been acquired Measurement Confidence All Detector Changing Background c Detector Changing Background 6 Changing Conditions c The instrument uses this figure to calculate the effective alarm level It is the number of standard deviations measured against the Alarms see Alarms page 5 19 The Measurement Confidence is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 10 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 26 This statistical variable is used by iPCM12 to determine if a changing background condition exists on all detectors The All Detector Changing Background is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 5 This statistical variable is used by iPCMI2 to determine if a changing background condition exists on a single detector The Detector Changing Background is expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 7 This statistical variable is used by iPCMI2 to determine if a changing measurement condition exists The Changing Conditions are expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 7 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 15 Operating Instructions 5 16 Calibration Issue 2 0 Field N
147. 08 2008 12 32 07 test2 Detector 2 8000 6000 4000 Net Counts Background 2000 FOM 0 700 800 900 1 000 1 100 Voltage v Voltage Background Source Net Figure Of TI T2 T2 T4 Counts Counts Counts Marit 700 344 2508 2154 215 0 2 164 0 0 0 720 407 2764 2357 205 9 1 178 5 2 0 740 458 2970 2512 1280 0 502 4 5 0 760 520 3197 2677 456 5 892 3 1 0 780 550 3361 2801 S174 233 4 12 0 800 618 3548 2930 574 9 585 0 0 8 820 670 3656 2885 591 1 110 5 135 840 720 3801 3081 632 6 82 0 860 75 3844 3183 690 5 11 8 30 0 990 813 4047 3234 697 5 5 2 69 2 900 86 4223 3362 760 6 33 323 920 932 4388 3455 798 6 2 6 21 0 940 1019 4572 3553 893 7 2 3 78 960 115 4968 3817 362 3 2 1 35 990 1265 5388 4123 2 115 9 2 1 22 1000 137 5751 4380 2243 4 2 1 17 1020 1503 6160 4657 2378 5 2 1 15 1040 1582 6620 5038 2579 7 24 14 1060 1754 7109 5355 2 731 4 2 2 1 3 1080 1859 7582 5723 28213 22 1 3 1100 2005 8072 6067 3 092 1 23 1 3 Detector 3 6000 4000 Net Counts 2000 Background FOM 0 700 800 900 1 000 1 100 Voltage v Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 73 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Voltage Background Source Net Figure Of TUT2 T2 14 Counts Counts Counts Marit 00 401 2471 2070 126 7 2 070 0 0 5 720 470 2748 2278 228 4 2278 0 00 740 520 2974 2454 318 2 1 227 0 2 0 760 bb 3191 2624 405 6 2524 0 00 780 637 3412 2775 474 0 2775 0 00
148. 1 2 Retry switching the unit ON Check the fuse on the 5703A Battery Controller PCB F1 6 3 Amp 3 Check the battery voltage is greater than 12 5 volts Check there is battery voltage on 5703A OUTPUT connector PLA If no output is observed on PLA a fault on the Battery Controller PCB is indicated and it should be replaced as detailed in Replacement of the Battery Controller PCB page 11 9 Check the power connections from the 5703A Battery Controller PCB to the 5714A board and 5712A Check the regulated 12 V 12 V and 5 V outputs from the DC DC converter module 5714C The DC DC module is not user serviceable and if faulty the Converter board should be replaced Switch iPCM12 unit OFF and replace the 5714C DC DC board If the iPCM12 is still faulty change the ETX processor board type 5712A referring to ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 If the iPCMI2 is still dead after changing the 5714C DC DC and 5712A processor boards contact the Thermo Fisher Service department for assistance Starts up but Display is If the iPCM12 starts but fails to chime ding dong within 60 Blank and Fails Self seconds of being switched ON then it has not successfully Tests No Chimes completed the power on Self Tests and a fault is indicated Observe the LCD display If a fault message is displayed refer to subsequent subsections If however the display is blank or the message is uninte
149. 1 891E 28 9642 27 5 1 LB2 D Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 5 1 LB3 A Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 51 LB3 B Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 54 LB3 C Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 5 1 LB3 D Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 51 LB4 A Fail 0 1 891828 9642 27 51 LB4 B Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 5 1 LB4 C Fail 0 1 89128 9642E27 5 1 LB4 D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9642 27 5 1 LF A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9642E27 51 LF B Fail 0 1 891828 9642E27 5 1 LF C Fail 0 1 891828 9642E27 51 1 Of 2 Archives Select DatalArchives to select an 9 GE 0200 00 Archive to be saved me Select the archive s to be written Background SelectAll D 2 Deselect All Save to File Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 77 Operating Instructions To select archives to be saved highlight the archive on the screen by pressing individual names or press the Select All button Press the Save to File button to display the edit options window Select a Start End Date and enter an Archive Name and File Location Select the OK button to write the archives A confirmation displays System Menu Actions iPCM12 out of Contamination Mode quit the application or shutdown the system To clear a contamination press the Contamination Cleared button To backup a Calibration press the Backup Calibration button A confirmation message displays Select OK to close the application 5 78 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Is
150. 1 A 2 CB1 A 2 CB1 B 1 1 CB1 B CB1 B CB1 B 2 4n BR og 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 CB1 C CB1 C CB1 C CB1 C 2 CB1 C 2 CB1 C 2 CB1 C 2 CB1 C 2 CB1 D CB1 D CB1 D CB1 D CB1 D CB1 D 2 CB1 D 2 CB1 D 2 CB1 D 2 CB1 D 2 2 4n e RR e B eu in Operating Instructions p Ey c T Select Data Archives to select an 3 202 202 2700 Archive to be saved Select the archive s to be written Select All Deselect All Save to File iPCM User Manual 5 61 Operating Instructions 5 62 System Menu iPCM User Manual Actions Setup To select archives to be saved highlight the archive on the screen by pressing individual names or press the Select All button Press the Save to File button to display the edit options window Select a Start End Date and enter an Archive Name and File Location Select the OK button to write the archives A confirmation will be displayed Select System Actions to take iPCM12 out of Contamination Mode quit the application or shutdown the system Issue Beta Issue 1 Please edit options for archive file s Start Date 15 04 2009 End Date 15 04 2009 Archive Name File Location
151. 10 less than the inlet flow rate is acceptable A larger discrepancy indicates a leak which may be isolated by linking out sections of the gas circuit referring to Gas Schematic D92591 sheet 4 or ideally by using a gas sniffer The hot spare detector may be utilized to minimize instrument downtime when a detector is changed NOTE The thin detector windows allow a rapid rise in the gas temperature and hence the volume as the gas moves through the system This can cause the outlet flowmeter reading to appear greater than the inlet flow until the gas system has stabilized iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 9 9 Setting up Procedure Issue 2 0 Normal mode High and Low gas flow limits plus purge limits and fault ratios are established by referring to the Setup menu and the Gas Flow sub menu Gas Flow Parameters Typical parameter settings are Normal Mode Low Limit 0 cc min Normal Mode High Limit 75 cc min Purge Mode Low Limit 50 cc min Leak Ratio 50 Averaging Period 5 secs Maximum Stabilization 60 mins Period The real time operational gas status may be observed by referring to the Diagnostic menu and the Gas Flow sub menu The flow rates are shown as a simplified bargraph which is updated in accordance with the average period set Purge and Operational Before the iPCMI2 will function reliably all of the air must be Flow purged from the gas flow detectors A rapid purge of between 200 and 300 cc
152. 12 manual Core parameters are noted here Activity units Ci DPM See Set UplUI Options page 5 9 for more information Quick Scan Period for B y Out of service recovery interval See Set UplOperation page 5 11 for more information Low Background Limit p y Max Zero Count Time a High Background Limit a y Minimum Monitoring Time Maximum Monitoring Time Measurement Confidence All Detector Changing Background Detector Changing Background Changing Conditions Changing Conditions Period Background Stability Factor Background Stability Factor See Set Up IMonitoring page 5 14 for more information iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Setting up Procedure Calibration Required Interval Calibration Warn Period Calibration Confidence typically 26 95 See Set UplCalibration page 5 16 for more information Probability of False Alarm typically 3 16 Probability of Detection typically 1 656 y sumzones See Set uplDetection Options page 5 17 for more information Calibration stream selection la B y Co Alarms See Set UplAlarms page 5 19 for more information Resetting the above parameters will guarantee the integrity of measurements It
153. 1415BB TYP 2 PLACES r of al q ISLAND amp VARIOUS PANELS SECTION B B B39800 A 00075 REMOVED FOR CLARITY al TO ARRAY IN OPEN POSITION 1 5 4 J SE DETAIL D J ou Ze 4 a 12 cag B39800 A 00075 228 B39800 A 00075 amp 701415BB amp 701414BB DETAIL F q FELT 9222 1 2 6258 woz 25u5 F 200m 3828 3288 FOR ARRAY FRAME EE TO ARRAY HINGE S525 EARTH BONDING wes Fi REFER TO G A D92585 A G DETAIL G gues 4 guis DETAIL E ka ISLAND DOOR amp ARRAY REMOVED FOR CLARITY 1 2 3285 1 2 SERVICE DOCR IN OPEN POSITION E 8209 ISLAND DOOR amp ARRAY REMOVED FOR CLARITY ISO THREADS CLASS 6g 6H 2 Eu MATL TOLERANCES UNLESS DRAWN AAS DATE DOWMOD FOE STATED EHE MN LUN 29 09 08 DOboox uj B 855 2080 PL 20185 20 04 09 E 21583 BASIC CABINET PANEL ASSEMBLY EARTHING GUIDE FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE Fess DIMENSIONS IN Fisher Bath Road Beenham Reading EP MILLIMETRES SESS SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND SCALE THLE 2 o untess saten INTERCONNECTION DIA
154. 2 0 Once the background scan is complete the Select Detectors for Scan window displays SELECT DETECTORS FOR SCAN i Select the All button or select individual detectors then press the Continue button ISSUE el CES g When the Ready to Start Source Scan window displays position the source to be scanned in the Position Source iPCM12 and press the Start Sna prese Siart button A source HV scan will be performed recording the counts against each amplifier f threshold for all amplifiers at each HV step over the specified 0 integration period A progress window displays Ready To Start Source Scan stat The source scan begins 5 50 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Once complete the result displays Select the Complete button to display the Scan Description window Select the More Detectors button to scan more detectors aso Ll m B lt Once the Scan is complete and the Complete button has been pressed a Save Scan window appears giving the option to save the scan or Abort the process To Save the Scan press Save to display the Please enter a scan description window Please enter a scan description options Save Abort Enter a Scan Description and press the Save button to display the Scan results
155. 2 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 3 Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 iPCM12 Vertical 36 21 Efficiency 200 cm 180cm 160cm 1200m 100 cm 4 Height 80 cm 60 cm 40 cm J 20 cm r r 0 10 20 30 40 36 1 2 Efficiency Anode Double Sums Figure 8 Cl Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Grille 6 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics iPCM12 Vertical Co60 2rr Efficiency 200 cm i60cm 1200m 100 cm Hieght 80 cm J 60 cm 4 40 cm 4 20 cm J 0 5 10 15 20 60Co 2rr Efficiency Anode Double Sums Figure 9 Co Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 5 Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 Vertical Position cm Vertical Position cm Vertical response to Co 60 Gross window 200 180 160 Max Detector Triple Sum Centroid Av Triple Max Quad Sum o 40 20 0 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 0 30 0 35 0 4pi Efficiency Figure 10 Co Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Vertical response to Cs 137 Gross window 200 180 160
156. 2 RB3A 2 RB3A 2 SL1A2 SL1A 2 LB3A LB3B 2 2 CB3B 2 2 RB3B 2 SL1B2 SL1B 2 LB3B LB3C 2 CB3C2 CB3C 2 RB3C 2 RB3C 2 SL1C 2 SL1C 2 LB3C LB3D 2 CB3D 2 CB3D 2 RB3D 2 RB3D 2 5110 2 SL1D 2 LB3D LB4A 2 4 2 CB4A 2 RB4A 2 RB4A 2 SL2A2 SL2A 2 LB4A LB4B 2 CB4B 2 CB4B 2 RB4B 2 RB4B 2 SL2B2 SL2B 2 LB4B LB4C 2 4 2 CB4C 2 RB4C2 RB4C 2 5126 2 SL2C 2 LB4C LB4D 2 CB4D 2 CB4D 2 RB4D 2 RB4D 2 5120 2 SL2D 2 LB4D Vertical Quadrants Left Vertical Quadrants Centre Vertical Quadrants Right Vertical Quadrants Sid LB1A LB1B CB1A CB1B RB1A RB1B SHA SHB LB1B LB1C CB1B CB1C RB1B RB1C SHB SHC LB1C LB1D CB1C CB1D RB1C RB1D SHC SHD LB1D LB2A CB1D CB2A RB1D RB2A SHD ARA LB2A LB2B CB2A CB2B RB2A RB2B ARA ARB LB2B LB2C CB2B CB2C RB2B RB2C ARB ARC LB2C LB2D CB2C CB2D RB2C RB2D LB2D LB3A CB2D CB3A RB2D RB3A ARD SLIA LB3A LB3B CB3A CB3B RB3A RB3B SL1A SL1B LB3B LB3C CB3B CB3C RB3B RB3C SL1B SL1C LB3C LB3D CB3C CB3D RB3C RB3D SL1C SLID LB3D LB4A CB3D CB4A RB3D RB4A SLID SL2A LB4A LB4B CB4A CB4B RB4A RB4B SL2A SL2B LB4B LB4C CB4B CB4C RB4B RB4C SL2B SL2C LB4C LB4D CB4C CB4D RB4C RB4D SL2C SL2D Vertical Quadrants Left Vertical Quadrants Centre Vertical Quadrants Right Vertical Quadrants Sid LB1A 2 LB1B 2 CB1A 2 CB1B 2 RB1A 2 RB1B 2 SHA 2 SHB 2 LB1B 2 LB1C 2 CB1B 2 1 2 RB1B 2 RB1C 2 SHB 2 SHC 2 LB1C 2 LB1D 2 CB1C 2 1 2 RB1C 2 RB1D 2 SHC 2 SHD 2 LB1D 2 LB2A 2 CB1D 2 CB2A2 RB1D 2 2 2 SHD 2 ARA 2 LB2A 2 LB2B
157. 4 keV Bea 23 M Am Hand amp 5 5 MeV Alpha 14 96 Body Because most of the gamma detectors are hidden hehind the gas flow detectors it is a necessary to identify the center of each detector Two red arrows point to the center of each detector the center of the detector is at the intersection of the direction of the two arrows Duing the calibration process point sources are placed at a reproducible distance from the center of the scintillation detector In practice this will also be a fixed distance from the gas flow detector grille placed about the scintillation detector by the gas flow grille The system will display a list of pre defined point sources For the gamma scintillation detectors a calibration to both Os and should be undertaken NOTE Ensure that each source is at least 20 feet away from the PM12 during the background measurement At the end of the calibration the user is prompted to PASS or FAIL the calibration If the result is not within 15 of the reference values in the table below it may be appropriate to FAIL or Cancel the calibration 10 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Calibration mixes Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Procedure Co Tos 5Co Co Win 1 2 MeV 662 keV 125 keV Co Centroid 24 11 5 8 5 Foot 15 8 8 4 6 7 contact Side of 31 13 5 17 Head Body Top amp
158. 4Bq cm a 150cm assumed area of one side of one hand Enuc 3196 detector efficiency to Co 2 then x 4 x 150 x 0 31 93 241 Am Alpha on Hands standard grille If A 0 4 Bq cm 2 a 150cm assumed area of one side of one hand 28 detector efficiency to 41 Am 2 then C 2 x 0 4 150 x 0 28 8 4 cps Alpha and feta Feet values are calculated similarly using a as 300 2 cm Co Beta on Feet If A 4 gt a 300cm assumed area of sole of one foot Ene 35 Detector Efficiency Co 2 then 6 x 4 x 300 x 0 30 210 cps 241 Am Alpha on Feet If A 04 Bq cm a 300cm assumed area of sole of one foot Ene 32 detector efficiency to 2 then C x 0 4 300 x 0 32 19 cps 6 20 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics Co Beta on Body unsummed standard grille UK limit If A 4 gt a 100cm over body Enuc 5 5 Body Average Efficiency 47 then C 4 x 100 x 0 055 22 cps Co Beta on Body unsummed standard grille US limit If 0 83 gt 100cm over body Enuc 5 5 Body Average Efficiency 47 then 0 83 100 x 0 055 4 6 cps Co Gamma Gross on Body unsummed If A 40 Bq cm 100cm over body Enuc 10 Body Average Efficiency 47 then 40 x 100 x 0 1 400 cps Probability Sigma and Table 1 Probability Sigma
159. 5 64 23 738 127 121 44 18 909 164 151 68 25 699 117 110 39 858 141 133 53 20 953 170 160 72 35 Date Time Integration Period 20 08 2008 10 28 iPCM User Manual 5 53 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 This report lists Calibration History for the iPCM12 It is Calibration Report possible to limit the report by Start and End Date and Full Cal Calibration History ID Calibration Source Types Pass Comments Date Fail 64 08 07 2009 Gamma Fail Calibration Check Only 12 07 52 63 08 07 2009 Gamma Fail Calibration Check Only 12 05 42 62 08 07 2009 Gamma Pass Calibration Check Only 12 00 50 61 08 07 2009 Gamma Pass Calibration Check Only 11 16 40 Page 1 Of 1 Press on one of the ID records to display the Calibration Efficiencies for the selected Calibration ID Calibration Efficiencies Calibration ID 64 Calibration Date 08 07 2009 12 07 52 Confidence 1 00 Accuracy 5 00 96 Calibration Check Only Source Name Nuclide Emission Decayed Type Activity Bq standard Co 60 Gamma 2768 Detector Threshold Activity Efficiency SCFT Centroid 1 0 00 2 0 00 3 0 00 4 0 00 5 0 00 5 54 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions 6 gt Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 of Wh SCHD Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 or wre ja Centroid 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00
160. 5 112 Values 0 to 1000 Leak Ratio Enter the ratio of gas exhaust rate over the gas inlet rate If this ratio is exceeded the iPCM12 becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 112 Averaging Period 5 Enter the smoothing period used to determine the rate figures This will eliminate the peak rates that occur during normal operation Values 2 to 10 Maximum Maximum time that instrument will stay in Stabilisation Period stabilization mode before the iPCM12 becomes out minutes of service see Out Of Service page 5 112 Values 0 to 65000 Purge in Stabilisation Tick this option to instigate the Purge flow when the State stabilization state is entered 5 22 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Barriers Operating Instructions Select Set UplBarriers to customize the Barriers if enabled P Enable Left Barrier F Enable Right Barrier Ingress Closed During RCC Ingress Closed During Out Of Service Ingress Closed When Ready Barrier Settings Entry side let Left Right Mode Bare Transit Time 0 x100ms High Current iJ mA Low Current 0 mA Evaluate Limits Apply Cancel Settings Changes Thermo Description of options Field Name Description Enable Left Barrier Tick this option to enable the Left Barrier see below for Barrier settings Enable Right Bar
161. 5 8 Co Hand 1250 keV Gamma 2 7 Win Co Foot 1250keV Gamma 6 7 Win Co Win refers to efficiency of the Window to Co Gamma Body Average In accordance with IEC 61098 gamma body detection Efficiency efficiencies are measured and quoted as Body Average Typical 4 Efficiency 50 mm gas flow detector windows Source Energy Grille Un Summed Summed Triple Detectors 122keV Gamma Std Rugged 2 3 3 4 137Cs 662keV Gamma Std Rugged 4 9 8 0 Co 1250 keV Gamma Std Rugged 10 0 15 8 Co Win 1250keV Gamma Std Rugged 3 6 96 5 6 96 Co Win refers to efficiency of the Window to Co 3 10 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Mini SAM Efficiency Typical 4 Central Processor Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification Integral Mini SAM efficiencies in accordance with standard SAM calibration procedures are measured in contact with the liner base and also at 75 mm 3 inches above the liner floor approximately the center of the sensitive volume Source Energy Type Liner Base Center Volume 122keV Gamma TBD TBD ICs 662keV Gamma TBD TBD Co 1250 keV Gamma TBD TBD Processing and Communications The iPCM12A has a Central Processing unit based on the ETX standard communicating with a range of remote intelligent peripheral boards over an X Channel network The ETX processor currently in use can be substituted for any ot
162. 57 27 2 409 64 3 208 00 4 6 34 5 0 00 Page 1 Of 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 67 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Configuration Report This report lists the current Instrument Configuration settings NOTE The report below is an example and does not display all the information Configuration Settings on 14 December 2009 Instrument UKFER 2L3MN3J Configuration Item Value Alarm Requires Supervisor Acknowledge No Alpha Body POD 1 65 Alpha Body POFA 1 751 Alpha Detection Enabled Yes Alpha Foot POD 1 65 Alpha Foot POFA a 1 751 Alpha Hand POD 1 65 Alpha Hand POFA 1 751 Alpha High Background Limit cps 100 Alpha Low Background Limit cps 0 AlphaMaxTimeBetweenCounts 200 AlphaRateOverFullBackground No Alpha Background Stability Ratio 10 Portal Approach Time s 2 AttenuationBaselineDate 06 09 2009 00 00 00 BetaHandPodkey 3 1 BetaHandP ofa 1 55 BetaHandPofakey 1 65 BetaHighBackgroundLimit 10000 BetaLowBackgroundLimit BetaQuickScanEnabled Ma Cal Check Required Interval days 0 Default Calibration Accuracy 96 0 5 Default Calibration Confidence 56 3 Page 1 Of 11 5 68 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Gross Changing Background Sigma Changing Conditions Sigma Detector Changing Background Sigma Changing Conditions Check Period Co60 Alarms Enab
163. 5708A detector Open the body detector array frame to gain clear access to the foot plinth It may be necessary to remove the two black hex countersunk transit screws securing the tread plate these need not be replaced but safely stored for future use To remove the foot plinth tread plate assembly use the two foot well lifters located in a slot inside of the service door Insert the two lifters into the two photobeam apertures in the black plastic tread plate nearest you Lift the tread plate up a short distance and tilting the Top of Foot detector backward lift the tread plate over the central foot sensor housing and clear of the foot plinth The gas flow foot detectors are now exposed Prior to lifting out the gas flow foot detectors remove any debris that may have collected a small portable vacuum is ideal Lift out the right gas flow foot detector and place it upside down on the adjacent foot detector to protect the window foil The scintillation foot detector is now exposed e Disconnect the MHV coaxial cable e Carefully lift out the 5708A detector iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 23 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Hand Detector 1 Side of Head Detector Issue 2 0 1 Open the right hand iPCM12 service access panel to reveal the hand detector fitted to the inside face of the door CAUTION THE SCINTILLATION HAND DETECTOR AND ITS LEAD SHIELDING IS A COMPLETE ASSEMB
164. 672A LED Cluster Indicator eerie eee ee tenente 7 1 iPCMI2B or iPCM12C with Gamma Kit including FHT681 Scintillation HV amp END o 7 8 HV amp Amplifier Connections eerte esent then tns tata 7 8 Mains Power Module assembly 702947K J e ceeeee eese eerte 7 9 LCD Display and Controller I F amp Backlight Inverter Module Assembly D92583 A 7 9 iPCM12C option GPIO Controller Card 5707 7 10 General Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Considerations eee 7 11 Routine Dear P rou ba ue Lidia Mechanical Checks iPCM12 Mounting Arrangement Electrical Checks eere Battery Charge state Display Checks cece cence EMC amp Safety Earthing Checks IIO CINDTTIICOI TO CR Regular Source Checks R Cleaning Instructions eee centers eese nennen einen Setting Up Procedure onion on ea ara Ea Initial Setting Up for Use General Initialisation Setting Passwords Setting the Operational Parameters essent eene nennt Selection of Dete
165. 6os THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM D92591 ISO THREADS CLASS 69 6H SEE DRAWING TS ES TOLERANCES UNLESS T SEE DANG O D92585 A SEE BOM D92590 A ANCES U DRAWN DATE Domon 092505 M 05 02 09 DOboox SPEC SEE BOM D92590 A 2DEC PL 0 15 08 04 09 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE PIMENSIONS IN ThermoFisher Bath Road Beenham Reading MILLIMETRES SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND y uNLess STATED mme DRG No D92590 A os MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED GENERAL ASSEMBLY PCM12A ora Z 06S 6d THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION f IF IN DOUBT ASK oN OuG DO NOT SCALE x4 2 ON OPPOSITE FACE SEE DRAWING A10348 1 E E INSTALL BEHIND FACE DF C CUT IN TWO THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH AND AS SHOWN INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM D92591 Qu 2y DETAIL B gog 1 2 Ezg E EREI 229 2885 j B J 82 58 X 28 FACE 2esE INSTALL BEHIND 224 Z FACE S 386 228 5528 535 amp 3oc A gee S ISO THREADS CLASS 6g 6H a STATED 05 02 09 DOIxxxx jj 2 2 SPEC 1 DEC PL 04 Sis SIDE DOOR AND UPPER PLINTH SEE BOM D92590 A 2 DEC PL 20 15 08 04 09 beu COVER NOT SHOWN
166. 7 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 For more information in setting up any of these Plug ins please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific To Configure an Interface Highlight the Interface to Please Select an Interface to Configure configure and select the Configure Interface button Delete The selected type of interface displays in the top left hand corner Back Configure The Create button allows the user to Create a new Interface Enter a name Test EPD ID Reader The user is prompted to enter a name for the new Interface ok To delete an existing interface highlight the Interface and press the Delete button Select OK to continue The Configure button allows the user to configure an existing highlighted interface The Back button returns the user to the previous screen EPD Reader Press the OK button to display eee EA ames the editable parameters for the Enable EPD Id Reader agn Wearer Identification Wearer Id issued EPDs Only Serial COM Port Description of options Field Name Description Enable Tick this option to enable the interface to work with the iPCM12 Location Use the drop down button to select either front rear or either Wearer Identification Use the drop down button to select either Wearer Id or Wearer Name as Wearer Identification Issued EPDs Only Tick this box if the reader is to detect Issued E
167. 8 32 42 11 12 2009 10 06 00 11 12 2009 10 04 34 10 12 2009 14 02 50 10 12 2009 09 59 44 10 12 2009 09 31 46 10 12 2009 08 57 23 10 12 2009 08 57 14 10 12 2009 08 57 14 10 12 2009 08 56 47 09 12 2009 16 02 41 09 12 2009 14 33 09 09 12 2009 14 32 50 09 12 2009 14 32 43 09 12 2009 14 32 43 09 12 2009 14 31 20 09 12 2009 14 30 41 09 12 2009 14 26 46 09 12 2009 14 26 33 09 12 2009 14 22 24 09 12 2009 14 14 50 09 12 2009 14 10 40 09 12 2009 14 10 20 09 12 2009 14 10 03 09 12 2009 14 09 28 09 12 2009 14 07 26 09 12 2009 14 07 20 09 12 2009 14 06 08 09 12 2009 14 06 01 09 12 2009 14 04 42 09 12 2009 12 54 54 09 12 2009 12 49 54 09 12 2009 12 49 53 09 12 2009 12 49 45 10 w Instrument Starting Up Edited Source Details Co 60 Edited Source Details AM 241 Instrument Starting Up Active Calibration Changed UNCAL Alpha Stream Instrument Parameters Changed Recovered From Out Of Service Out of Service Recoverable High a Background Rate TH A Instrument Starting Up Program Exit Instrument Parameters Changed Recovered From Out Of Service Out of Service Recoverable Low Background Rate TH A Background Stable XChannel Node Changed Background Stable Instrument Starting Up Background Stable Instrument Starting Up Alarm Thresholds Changed Instrument Parameters Changed Default Calibration has no Alarms Configured XChan
168. 9 Recovered From Out Of Service Info 11 26 26 07 07 2009 Out of Service Recoverable Info 11 26 05 07 07 2009 Low Background TH A Info 11 26 05 07 07 2009 Instrument Parameters Info 10 48 55 Changed 07 07 2009 Instrument Starting Up Info 10 09 49 Page 1 Of 1 5 58 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Results Report Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions This report lists the Activity Results between the selected Start and End dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Dates by the last n results note enter 0 for unlimited results Alarms Only Person ID and Show Raw Counts Activity Results Summary Result Person ID Result Date Alarmed Result Type ID 68 23 02 2009 09 16 No B 23 02 2009 09 15 Yes Standard 66 19 02 2009 17 31 No 65 05 02 2009 15 06 Yes Standard 64 04 02 2009 16 39 No 63 04 02 2008 16 10 No 62 04 02 2009 16 10 Yes Standard 61 04 02 2009 16 09 No 60 04 02 2009 16 08 No 59 04 02 2009 16 07 No Page 1 Of 1 Press on one of the ID records to display the Activity Results Detail for the selected Results ID Please note that the report below is an example and does not display all the information Activity Results Detail Result ID 67 Date 23 02 2009 09 15 45 Person ID Result Type Contaminated Monitor Time 8 Quickscan Time s 8 Measurement 2 Confidence Measured Values Radiation Meas
169. A are large area solid blocks of plastic scintillator with an integral Photomultiplier Tube PMT embedded in an oil filled cavity Each detector is wrapped in reflective foil and a light tight plastic jacket These detectors can either be specified as separate Associated Equipment AE options if required individually or are supplied as part of the Full Body Gamma Kit fitted to iPCM12 variant AE0222A The smaller 5708A detector is used to detect gamma contamination on the hand foot top of head and side of head Each detector is individually shielded with 10 mm of lead on the rear face and all four sides Six large body detectors type 5717A are large area plastic rhomboid shaped scintillators wrapped in foil and plastic Additionally three rectangular scintillation detectors type 5708A are used for hand foot and head monitoring Connection to the dynode chain assembly is via a light tight gland mounted on the back of the tube A single coaxial cable provides high voltage for the tube and carries the signals to the HV and Amplifier PCB via an MHV connector For further information see Detectors page 5 27 of this manual NOTE Used in iPCM12C variants The Scintillation HV and Amplifier Board type FHT681 is a dual channel high voltage generator scintillation amplifier operating on the X Channel 1 bus protocol The HV generators are sub assemblies type 42543 0202 which are controlled by DACs Digital to Analog
170. A controls DC voltage output of a power converter unit PL4 between the range 11 2 V to 15 6 V in order to maintain the integrity of the 12 V 15 Ah Lead Acid Battery PL3 over the operating temperature range temperature sensor on PL 1 The 5703A has the ability to switch the load PL6 ON OFF as directed by the operator whilst continuing to charge the battery Current and voltage monitoring IC100 101 and control circuitry IC4 always ensure sufficient power is made available to power the iPCM12 even when the battery is exhausted from the primary power source The transfer to battery is automatic However the load will be removed when the battery terminal voltage falls bellow 10 5 V This circuit is required to prevent the battery being damaged by being deeply discharged Hysteresis is built in to this circuit to prevent oscillations It does not allow the battery to re connect as soon as its terminal voltage recovers slightly as a result of having the load removed from its terminals The user is signaled the pending shut down in order that any data can be saved A key switch is connected to the 5703A for manually switching the power ON OFF to the load Keyswitch Operation key switch performs two operations Primarily it allows the instrument to be switched ON if either the mains supply exists or the battery contains sufficient charge or both This is achieved by turning the key clockwise for at least 2 second
171. A replicates the early 5703A and will also have several enhanced functions Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 9 Description X Channel Gas Flow Sensor Board Type 5709A Issue 2 0 Gas Chassis D92610 A The Gas Chassis is mounted at the top of the Electronics Chassis immediately above the Processor and LCD assembly and retained by six hex pillers for easy removal It is comprised of a Gas Flow Sensor board type 5709A gas filter solenoids and manual flow control valves A pressure relief valve located on the gas inlet line vents the gas in the event of over pressure to avoid detector window damage The gas escaping through the valve is included in the inlet flow but not in the outlet flow The Gas Chassis also contains bulkhead connectors for gas supply and exhaust piping Gas Flow Sensor Board type 57094 is located at the top of the Electronics Chassis mounted horizontally on the Gas Chassis and retained by four hex pillars for easy service replacement The 57094 interfaces with the X Channel 2 network protocol It has two green LEDs that show FPGA and Software status plus two X Channel LEDs amber and green that show network communication status LED Color Purpose D8 Red Attention Indicator used during X Channel setup Green Firmware Good Flashing indicates software is running but configuration data is invalid FPGA Good Yellow X Channel Receive Data
172. AGRAM 2 CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED FOR iPCM12A D9259 1 ee T T T T Z CHO STRAP FROM SIDE OF HEAD DETECTOR TO THIS POSITION R m eis Lescead DO NOT SCALE THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION IF IN DOUBT ASK oN OHd NOTE pe eio DEDE MOUN eV i IT o n r 5 o o o A o A E TO ARRAY FRAME SEE DETAIL H T 9 9 n 0 B39800 A 00075 amp 701414BB TYP 6 PLACES N J B39800 A 00160 I we amp 701415BB e LA s HO lt o ojo o o o m Ho DETAIL C SECTION A A B B 12 1 5 f C B35469 B B39800 A 00075 amp 701414 amp 701427BB 7011488 lg le B39800 A 00160 amp 701415BB ARRAY REMOVED FOR CLARITY ARRAY REMOVED FOR CLARITY ISLAND DOOR IN OPEN POSITION B39800 A 00075 amp 701414BB B35469 B amp 70142788 sors DETAIL poer 12 NOTE CHO STRAP FROM SHOULDER DETECTOR 1 TO THIS POSITION B39800 A 00160 amp 701415BB B39800 A 00160 amp 70
173. AMINATION MONITOR Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 24th July 2009 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2009 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN PART OF ALL MATERIAL IN THIS A PUBLICATION INCLUDING DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS IS FORBIDDEN THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL IS CONFIDENTIAL TO THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC AND IS SUPPLIED FOR USE ONLY IN CONNECTION WITH THE OPERATION AND OR MAINTENANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT TO WHICH IT RELATES AS SUPPLIED BY THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THE CONTENTS MUST NOT BE USED FOR OTHER PURPOSES NOR DISCLOSED TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Thermo Fisher Scientific Bath Road Beenham Reading Berkshire RG7 5PR England Tel 0118 971 2121 Fax 0118 971 2835 This manual was produced using ComponentOne Doc To Help NOTICE iPCM12 WARRANTY AND LIABILITY THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to the equipment described herein without notice Considerable effort has been made to insure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions However THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC makes no warranty of any kind including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this manual THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC assumes no responsibility for or liability for errors contained in this manual or for incidental special or consequential damages arising out of
174. ANNEL AMPLIFIER 12 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor QTY Se Se A 20 KIT x x x p X KKK oW oW oW oW Issue 2 0 BUTT HINGE HEAVY DUTY Details on request GAMMA KIT KIT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Accessories List CALIBRATION FIXTURE ALPHA 2 SOURCES CALIBRATION FIXTURE BETA 2 SOURCES CALIBRATION FIXTURE 2 SOURCES CALIBRATION FIXTURE BETA Tc 2 SOURCES CALIBRATION FIXTURE GAMMA Cs CALIBRATION FIXTURE GAMMA Co SECURITY DONGLE GAS FLOW SIDE OF FOOT KIT GAS FLOW HEAD DETECTOR KIT SCINTILLATION HEAD DETECTOR KIT GAMMA SCINTILLATION DETECTOR KIT SPARE PURGED DETECTOR KIT ENCLOSED CABINET INLET BARRIER KIT ENCLOSED CABINET DOOR LH RH KIT ENCLOSED CABINET LH SWING DOOR KIT ENCLOSED CABINET RH SWING DOOR KIT CAMERA KIT USB BARCODE READER Recommended Spares List AE0246A AE0247A AE0247B AE0247C Details on request Details on request A92169 D AE0221A AE0223A AE0224A AE0222A AE0229A AE0237A AE0238A AE0239A AE0240A AE0227A AE0244A iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 12 5 Recommended Spares List Issue 2 0 12 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Drawing Appendix Chapter 13 Drawing Appendix The following pages pro
175. AR LB2 RB2 Ax LB3 a A CB3 RB3 LB3 C83 5811 HP HB si LB2 L TN 4 CB4 RB4 LB4 4 4 512 14 m HB Gy Top of Head Left Body Top Centre Body Top Right Body Top Side of Head Shoulder Left Body Upper Middle Centre Body Upper Middle Right Body Upper Middle Upper Arm Left Body Lower Middle Centre Body Lower Middle Right Body Lower Middle Side of Leg Upper Left Body Bottom Centre Body Bottom Right Body Bottom Side of Leg Lower Hand Palm Hand Back Top of Foot Left Foot Sole Right Foot Sole Side of Foot For further information regarding Detectors see Scintillation Detectors Type 5708A amp 5717A page 2 5 The following options are available depending on the role selected Sub menu Main Menu Physicist Technician Set Up UI ee 52 cimi sis Pats Onions s16 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions See Page OOO xcmme mus ess sa _ mes 5m meses 52 Primes coms 525 _ mima 526 wee e Join sensors 5 28 ums avons s _ Physicist Technician Calibration Efficiencies 5 5 33 Cal Status 5 33 eism 54 _ HV Scan 5 41 jaws 5 62 E Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 7 Operating Instr
176. B Manual Door Inlet and Exit Pair Personnel Flow Controls PFC Doors Barriers Turnstiles S S lt KISIS lt NK AE0223 and 0224 Top of Head Kits are mutually exclusive ui AE0248 is mutually exclusive with standard GF Side of Head Detector TUE AE0248 requires either AE 0222 or AE 0224 Kit to be fitted AE0251A is mutually exclusive with the AE0222A Gamma full body detector kit 3 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification Operational Parameters See Setup MenulMonitoring page 5 14 for information regarding the settings and defaults for the Operational Parameters Software Options See Setup MenulUI Options page 5 9 and Setup MenulOperation page 5 11 for information regarding the settings and defaults for the Software Options Default Messages See Setup MenulMessages page 5 25 for information regarding the settings and defaults for the Software Options Background Capability Background capability is related to alarm threshold and statistical certainty requirements Alpha and Beta Gamma background subtraction is included in the Monitor s measuring routines When any of the Operational Parameters are changed the monitoring time required will be automatically reassessed in relation to the measurement certainty required and the prevailing background conditions Since the gas flow de
177. BDE E or BDE M When using a mechanical BDE control toggle switch With the mechanical control unit it is not possible to display a detailed status sig nal If a fault occurs will be shown by the status signal on the side cover please proceed according to section 8 2 When using an electronic BDE D General Any current operational faults in the drive system will be displayed in the Standard screen If several faults are active they will be numbered e g Fault 1 2 In case of an irregularity the display changes automatically from mode of operation level to error display Every 2 seconds the backlight changes between normal invers Several errors can be displayed e g 1 2 means error no 1 of total 2 er rors After 10 seconds the telephone number of the responsible service centre is indi cated alternating to the fault indication The failure indication and the phone num ber change every 5 seconds while the inverse flashing is remaining The de scribed sequence applies to all failures However previously the phone number must have been given by an authorised specialised person Information about the drive system such as the software version can be read out by pressing the KS After pressing this key once again the phone number of the responsible service centre and the last appeared fault indication is displayed in the screen If the fault message consists of several lines the first line will be displayed only Status
178. Barcode reader e Pull down head detector not yet available e Integrated Small Articles Monitor not yet available e Multiple door and barrier options as follows o Single powered door kit left side o Single powered door kit right side o Double powered door kit Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction o Single manual door kit left side o Single manual door kit right side o Double manual door kit not sure if this is a real option o Barrier arm left side o Barrier arm right side Gas generator and power system Extended life power system See Specification page 3 1 for further information Features Two step operation open and closed versions see Positioning page 5 81 Statistical alarming algorithm with several selectable parameters including MDA confidence level false alarm rate and shielding factors see Setup Menu page 5 8 Large status indicator lights representing READY CLEAR RECOUNT COUNT ALARM and OUT OF SERVICE as well as chime and voice instructions see Five Light System page 5 68 Identification of which detector alarmed with lights is displayed on the monitor see Detector Indicator page 5 68 Low level distributed contamination is indicated by a separate light Battery backup for 6 hours see Battery Mains Supply Indicator page 5 101 iPCM User Manual 1 3 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 2
179. C 32 F to 113 F Storage Temperature Range 10 C to 50 C 14 F to 122 F Humidity Range up to 95 RH non condensing NOTE USE BELOW 0 32 F IS NOT RECOMMENDED THE LCD DISPLAY WILL BECOME SLUGGISH BELOW THIS TEMPERATURE DO NOT STORE ABOVE 60 C 122 F Magnetic Shielding There is no magnetic shielding Large external magnetic fields may reduce the measured value IP rating IP50 Environmental restrictions e Not for use in flammable or explosive atmospheres e For installation in drip free locations only e Do not expose to excessive dust pollution levels Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 3 11 Specification 3 12 Issue Beta Issue 1 Count rate iPCM User Manual 55S Operating point Am 241 Betas in Alpha Channel Beta Backareund 1400 1600 1800 1700 1800 1900 2000 Voltage Figure I Typical Detector Performance Graph Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Unpacking and Installation Chaptr4 Unpacking and Installation This section will be available in a future issue Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 4 1 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 5 Administrator Mode Using the Touchscreen Functions Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Operational States There are two operational states for the iPCM12 ADMINISTRATOR Mode this mode allows the instrument to be configured calibrated and diagnostic chec
180. CM12 User Screen Figure 3 Example of Result display on the iPCM User Screen s Figure 4 Cl Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Figure 5 Co Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Figure 6 Co Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Figure 7 Cs Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Figure 8 Cl Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille Figure 9 Co Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille Figure 10 Co Gamma Horizontal Scan sss Figure 11 Cs Gamma Horizontal Scan sccssssssssesssseesssesesseee Figure 12 Gas Detector Sum Zones sss Figure 13 Monitoring Statistics showing Operational Margin 6 32 Figure 14 Monitoring Statistics showing Minimum Monitoring Time 6 33 iPCM User Manual xiii Introduction xiv iPCM User Manual Manual Revision History Issue Beta Issue 1 Issue Date Name Section s Revision Approval comments Issue July C Hills All Initial M 1 0 2009 Release Pottinger Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Foreword Foreword Throughout this document the term HEALTH PHYSICIST HP is used extensively It refers to the Person Persons or Team responsible for setting up day to day running and maintenance of the iPCM12 This may be
181. Calibration Accuracy 100 Calibration Confidence 200 95450 Advice 1 Select or Create a Calibration Source 2 Select Detector System to calibrate 3 Press Calibrate to create a new calibration 4 Or Press Cal Check to verify against last calibration Cal Check Calibrate NOTE The Calibrate button is not available to the Technician role Description of options Field Name Description Calibration Warning This is a view only field Period days The number of days since that last calibration date This is a copy of the Calibration Warn Period field in Calibration page 5 16 See Out of Calibration page 5 88 to view the message displayed on the unit when out of date Calibration Accuracy This is a view only field 96 A copy of the Default Calibration Accuracy field in Calibration page 5 16 Calibration This is a view only field Confidence o A copy of the Calibration Confidence field in Calibration page 5 16 All calibration results are logged to the database The Calibrate function allows users to overwrite the Calibration factor The Cal Check function informs the user of any discrepancy with the current calibration factor iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 39 Operating Instructions 5 40 To Calibrate or Cal Check against select a Radiation Type a and then press the Calibrate or Cal Check button The following Calibration Single
182. D DO NOT USE message is displayed see Instrument Contaminated page 5 95 for more information Out Of Service 5 94 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions If the portal is entered during the Residual Contamination Check d the WARNING Preparing for Wa Contamination Check message is displayed Preparing For Contamination Check See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions Once the Portal is exited the Residual Contamination Count recommences Instrument Contaminated the Instrument is contaminated it is not possible to use the portal and background monitoring is INSTRUMENT CONTAMINATED suspended Intervention by an Administrator is necessary to clear the contamination See Actions page 5 62 for more information regarding clearing the Contamination Out Of Service Once the contamination has been cleared and User Mode is re instated the IPCM12 performs the System Self Testing see Start Up Checks page 5 71 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 95 Operating Instructions 5 96 Exiting the Portal iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 The iPCM12 is available with the following options to control how personnel exit the portal e Alarm Duration After Exit see Operation page 5 10 e Enable Rear Barrier see Detection Options page 5 16 After a result is displ
183. D If left bank no validation is performed and any barcode is valid See Notes Regarding Regular Expressions for Barcode below for further information Character Timeout The period during which the scanner can receive ms barcode data If the barcode is not detected during this time it resets Default 100 milliseconds Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 59 Operating Instructions 5 60 Notes Regarding Regular Expressions for Barcode Issue 2 0 Field Name Description Rescan Delay ms Once a barcode has been read this is the period before a subsequent barcode can be read Default 500 milliseconds CR terminates If a Carriage Return is to indicate the end of the barcode tick this box Default Ticked Include CR If a Carriage Return is to be included within the barcode tick this box Default Unticked Here are a few common regular expressions that may be used for any of the IDs above Start of line string End of line string Whitespace character s Word character w Digit character d You can specify the type of characters as follows 0 9 numbers only a z any lowercase ASCTI letters A Z any uppercase ASCII letters 0 9A Z alpha numerical note the space following the 7 x y where x is the minimum number of characters and y is the maximum number of characters e g 4 10 would read a minimum of 4 up to a maximum of 10 4 would
184. D FOR iPCM12A D9259 1 OPEN T T T T Z T T 1 ates Lesced DONOTSCALE THIRDANGLE PRovectiON 2 IF IN DOUBT ASK oN OuG DEDERE BODY DETECTOR ARRAY le D SIDE OF HEAD DETECTOR 8 j p Y IN 9 d TOP OF HEAD DETECTOR SPARE OPTIONAL AE0223A t i lore To DETECTORS e A A a FROM DETECTORS EXHAUST HB o o 4 INNER HAND DETECTOR UPPER LEG DETECTOR TOP OF SHOE DETECTOR SHOULDER DETECTOR B s SPARE DETECTOR OPTIONAL AE0229A
185. E ANY EARTH TAGS WIRES CONNECTORS OR COVERS REMOVED FROM ANY PART OF THE IPCM12 IN THE COURSE OF SERVICING MUST BE REFITTED AND FIXINGS SECURELY TIGHTENED CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES NOT TO SHORT THE BATTERY TERMINALS WARNING THERE ARE POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS HAZARDOUS LIVE VOLTAGES IN THE ELECTRONICS HOUSING WITHIN THE HV GENERATOR MODULE MAINS PSU MODULE AND ADJACENT MAINS SWITCH HOUSING THESE ARE FITTED WITH SAFETY SCREENING COVERS SERVICING AND REPAIR OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD ONLY BE UNDERTAKEN BY SUITABLY QUALIFIED AND COMPETENT PERSONNEL AWARE OF THE HAZARDS AND RELEVANT PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO SERVICING AND REMOVAL OF SAFETY SCREENS SHUT THE IPCM12 DOWN USING THE KEYSWITCH IF NECESSARY TURN THE INTERNAL MAINS SWITCH OFF AND ISOLATE THE EXTERNAL MAINS SUPPLY CAUTION THE BATTERY IS STILL CONNECTED WHEN SERVICING THE BATTERY CONTROLLER AND HV GENERATORS DISCONNECT THE BATTERY iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 3 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue 2 0 SUPPLY CONNECTOR FROM THE BATTERY CONTROLLER BOARD Access to the Electronics Housing is via the right hand locked door panel When servicing refer to Interconnection Diagram D92952 Sheet 1 Removal of the Electronics NOTE Before beginning this operation disconnect the two Chassis Top Left Cabinet battery cables B92059 A and 5659B from the 5703A 5720A Corner Battery Controller board located at the bottom l
186. E HANDLED WITH GLOVES WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING REFER TO THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET THAT ACCOMPANIES THE LEAD LEAD IS AN EXTREMELY DENSE MATERIAL SOME OF THE LARGE PIECES OF SHIELDING WEIGH UP TO 35 KGS USE CORRECT HANDLING PROCEDURES TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY Disconnect the mains supply Ensure the iPCM12 is switched OFF 1 Unlock the array panel and hinge outwards to reveal the body detectors 2 Carefully remove Velcro straps CAUTION Each 5717A detector weighs about 10kg 1 Before lifting out the detector disconnect MHV coaxial cable TAKE CARE THAT THE DETECTORS DO NOT FALL 1 Remove the lid panel to reveal the head detector 2 Remove the two lead panels sitting on the detector 3 Disconnect the MHV coaxial cable 4 Carefully withdraw the 5708A detector Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Foot Detector 1 Hand Detector 1 Detector Replacement Setting up Replacement Detectors for Use Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 1 Open outwards the array detector panelling to gain clear access to the foot plinth Unscrew two countersunk screws on the plastic retainer and lift this off over the toe sensor pod e Remove the two Velcro straps e Disconnect the MHV coaxial cable e Carefully lift out the 5708A detector 1 Open the right hand iPCM12 service access panel to reveal the hand detector fitted to the inside door panelling 2 Disconnect
187. E HV BEFORE BEGINNING WORK BE AWARE THAT AFTER INITIAL DISCHARGE DIELECTRIC ABSORPTION IN THE CAPACITORS CAN CAUSE SUBSEQUENT HV REGENERATION 11 12 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Scintillation HV Amplifier Type FHT681 Removal and Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting The Gas Flow HV Generator type 5713A is located on the lower right side of the Electronics Chassis 1 Shut down the iPCM12 using the keyswitch 2 Switch the AC Mains PSU rocker switch OFF 3 Allow two minutes for the HV to discharge before removing the two network cables Carefully disconnect the two red HV output cables and short the connector pins out on adjacent earthed metalwork to discharge the detector system 4 Ensure the red HV Enabled LED is extinguished and the HV is discharged before proceeding to remove the safety cover and handling the board 5 Remove the six retaining screws to remove the safety cover Remove the six hex pillars to release the HV board The 5713A HV Generator is not user serviceable 6 Replace a faulty 5713A board with an identical unit see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 7 When fitting a new board ensure the links are set as follows LK1 OPEN LK2 Open Solder bridge LK3 Open Solder bridge LK4 Open Solder bridge LK5 Open Solder bridge LK6 Fitted HV Enable LK9 Fitted Replacement of the 5713A is th
188. E MOVED IN ANYWAY WHATSOEVER WITH THE LEAD SHIELDING FITTED Mechanical installation directions and concerns are covered in Mechanical Installation page 4 5 1 Remove the wood screws using a Phillips head screwdriver on the roof and front tilt shock meter side of the case assuming these have not already been removed by Customs IRS Leave the rear and side panels in position 3 The front detector array side of the IPCM12 exposed 10 11 is the heaviest face and it should be forked from this side Use a Fork lift of suitable capacity 500 Kg minimum with the fork gate width set as wide as possible to just fit outer span of the iPCM12 fork lift channels this will prevent the iPCM12 from toppling on uneven surfaces Insert the forks as far as possible into the iPCM12 taking care not to damage the back of the pack and carefully lift the iPCM12 just clear of the base pallet Manually push pull the packing case away from the raised iPCM12 rather than pulling the iPCM12 out with the Forklift Retain all packaging materials and fixings etc for future re use Before transporting the iPCM12 ensure that the rear of the unit is against the gate of the fork lift use a sheet of cardboard to protect the rear of the unit and that the jib is tilted backwards Transporting the iPCM12 to the chosen installation site must be done only with a Forklift especially over uneven surfaces and on gradients The
189. ENGLAND unesssrarco E nts INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM 2 OWNED BY ThermoFisher SCIENTIFIC AND MUST BE KEPT IN CONFIDENCE AND USED SOLELY FOR THE OWNER S SPECIFIED PURPOSES THIS DOCUMENT MUST NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED NOR CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE THIS DOCUMENT INCLUDING ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREIN IS DIVULGED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE OWNER S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED FOR iPCM12A D9259 1 ORE T T T T Z 0 T T 1 ar 166662 DO NOT SCALE THIRDANGLE PRovecTION IF IN DOUBT ASK BODY DETECTOR ARRAY d
190. Equipment Alarm Level Body Average Efficiency Effective Background while Monitoring Becquerel Total Average Background Count Rate Counter s Contamination Alarm Level Cobalt Coincidence Monitoring Contamination Alarm Count rate Effective Alarm Count rate Curie Counts per minute Door s Detection limit Disintegrations per minute Efficiency Correction Factor Act of Exiting Electronic Personal Dosimeter Embedded Technology Extended Probability of False Alarm Figure of Merit General Purpose Input Output Person Persons or Team responsible for setting up day to day running and maintenance of the LAM12 Health Physicist High Voltage International Electrotechnical Committee iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor G 1 Glossary of Terms Ingress Ingress kBq Keyboard Emulating Id Provider L LAM LCD LED LVD MAct mCi MDA NBR NE110 equivalent nCi NORM pCi PFC PM PMT PoFA PSU Quickscan RAct RCC SAM Technician tB Tcal ThermoFisher Tmax G 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 Act of Entering Keyboard Emulating Id Provider kiloBecquerel Another term for USB Barcode Reader Lead Large Articles Monitor Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Directive Minimum Detectable Activity Milli Curie Minimum Detectable Activity Natural Background Reduction Term referring to a specification of plastic nanoc
191. FIDENTIALITY NOTICE THIS DOCUMENT INCLUDING ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREIN IS DIVULGED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE OWNER S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT
192. FOR CLARITY ANGULAR 0 5 DEG z gc FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE BESS DIMENSIONS IN ThermoFisher Bath Road Beenham Reading deu MILLIMETRES BEA SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND giog 659 v UNLESS STATED DEG No gees SH2 8558 MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED GENERAL ASSEMBLY 1 2 D92590 OF 3 Z DO NOT SCALE THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION EF IF IN DOUBT ASK THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH SEE 5715A INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM D92591 SEE 5715A ISO THREADS CLASS 6g 6H Shey 08 04 09 SEE BOM D92590 A DIMENSIONS IN ThermoFisher Bath Road Beenham Reading MILLIMETRES SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR ENGLAND y cess STATED THEE DRG No D92590 A os MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED GENERAL ASSEMBLY PCM12A OF 3 T T T T MATL sEE BOM D92590 A TOLERANCETUNLESS DRAwN RES at 05 02 09 DOboox 1 DEC PL 04 6 2 DEC PL 0 15 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG FINISH REMOVE ALL BURRS SURFACE TEXTURE NOTE SIDE DOOR NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY OWNED BY ThermoFisher SCIENTIFIC AND MUST BE KEPT IN CONFIDENCE AND USED SOLELY FOR THE OWNER S SPECIFIED PURPOSES THIS DOCUMENT MUST NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED NOR CON
193. GRAM 283 fo es 9582 MANUFACTURE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN FINISHING ALLOWANCE ALREADY DEDUCTED FOR iPCM12A D9259 1 E T T T T Z 940 pans Lesced DO NOT SCALE THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION Z IE IN DOUBT ASK T open senson fme CABLE ASSY oN OuG B92599 RECEIVER UPPER SENSOR 2 RECEIVER D NOTES z 1 SENSOR IDENTIFICATION 2 RECEIVER BLACK EMITTER CLEAR 2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION RECEIVER CABLE 3 WIRES RED BLACK BLUE ISLAND DOOR ISLAND ASSEMBLY EMITTER CABLE 2 WIRES RED BLACK LEG SENSORS HAND SENSORS 1 e BODY ARRAY ASSEMBLY BODY SENSORS lel l 5 5 RH BODY SENSOR ASSY LH BODY SENSOR ASSY RECEIVER EMITTER 595 606 995 606 H82598 LOWER SENSOR TX CABLE ASSY B92598 PEREN o RX CABLE ASSY B92599 e 5 M VA l fol B92598 LOWER SENSOR EMITTER LOWER PLINTH FEET amp TOE SENSORS LH FOOT RH FOOT ITTI E IT z H af amp z8 Al il 3g 8 el
194. Green X Channel Transmit Data The 5709A controls switching of the Purge and Normal flow solenoid valves under application software control to direct the required level of gas flow through the iPCM12 detectors It also interfaces directly to the electronic gas flow sensors monitoring the Inlet and Exhaust flow rates enabling automatic detection of leaks and low and high flows before iPCM12 efficiency function is degraded or physical damage occurs 2 10 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 User Guidance Display Board Type 5711A Five Way LED Cluster Board Type 5672A Thermo Fisher Scientific Description Display Assemblies All system variants have a User Guidance Display type 5711A and either one or two Five Way LED Cluster Traffic Light Display boards type 5672A The User Guidance Display type 5711A is located in the left side upright of the hinged body detector array frame approximately at eye level It is driven from the bus and is comprised of two colored LED lamps and a two digit numerical timer display The two LED lamp clusters are user positioning aids the Amber Position Body Facing Detectors LED on the first forward measurement and the white Position Back to Detectors LED on the second backward measurement These LED clusters extinguish when the correct position is adopted The two digit Time Remaining display is used durin
195. HIGH VOLTAGES INTERNALLY ON THE ANODE WIRES AND ALSO WITHIN THE COVER ON THE 5704A AMPLIFIER REFER TO THE WARNINGS IN MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING PAGE 11 1 DO NOT REMOVE THE METAL SCREEN IF THE HV IS ENABLED AND FOR TWO MINUTES AFTER THE HV IS REMOVED 2 12 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 X Channel Quad Charge Amplifier Type 5704A Thermo Fisher Scientific Description The Quad Amplifier Type 5704A is mounted directly to the back of the 5710A Quad Detector body and fitted with a metal screening cover It has four identical charge sensitive amplifiers each one connected to a separate anode wire within the 5710A Quad Detector body Centrally generated and distributed high voltage is received via an HV connector and routed to each anode wire via the Quad Amplifier PCB Charge pulses received from the detector are amplified fed through alpha beta descriminators counted and stored on board for subsequent X Channel transmission to the host ETX processor Each detection channel has two beta energy windows two alpha energy windows and a Radon channel An I O port on each Quad Amplifier PCB has the capability to control and read the status of body photobeam position sensors Where this is utilized sensor status data is transmitted back to the host processor via the X Channel network thus simplifying the system wiring It has two green LEDs that show FPGA and Software
196. Head turned Left e Insert Right Foot e Insert Left Foot e Insert Left Hand e Move Left Hip Closer See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions When the user is in the correct position measurement continues Counting Once monitoring commences the iPCM12 displays the Counting message with an indication of the measurement time remaining 53 Seconds Remaining On completion the result displays See Monitoring Result page 5 102 Count Violations during Monitoring If a user exits the portal or moves out of position determined by the optical position sensors before the measurement is complete the instrument sounds an alarm and illuminates the recount lamps If the user re enters the portal or repositions him herself correctly then the measurement will be resumed If the user has exited the portal and does not return to the correct position within a configurable timeout then the measurement is abandoned and the instrument will return to background monitoring 5 98 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions If the Barriers become stuck during the measurement the Barriers Jammed message Barriers Jammed displays If this is recoverable the measurement will continue If not the unit becomes Out of Service see Barrier Error page 5 113 Out Of Service If during measurement the user mov
197. I Options page 5 9 The MDA calculation is detailed in Minimum Detectable Activity MDA and High Background Criterion page 6 16 Rae Activity of Contamination variable unit is the assessed activity of contamination based upon the store efficiency and the net count rate When the instrument is not monitoring a user it will be monitoring background The background is monitored over one second check periods The one second background counts are accumulated over a 10 second period and averaged to derive the Background Sample count rate b for each detector Each 10 second background sample is screened for low beta counts and high alpha counts and compared with the stored average for the user defined Changing Background Level When verified the background sample is accumulated into a Rolling Average Background B for each detector A minimum of ten valid 10 second Background Samples are accumulated for each detector before monitoring is permitted Valid 10 second Background samples subsequent to the 10th are accumulated into the average and the oldest discarded to maintain a 100 second Rolling Average for each detector The Average Background is used in conjunction with other system parameters to calculate the Monitoring Time for each channel and hence screen for High Background conditions before monitoring can commence Because a contaminated user approaching the iPCM12 may affect the background of the instrument background cou
198. ICS AND THE DOOR IS OPENED OPERATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL IS RESTRICTED iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 35 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue 2 0 11 36 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Recommended Spares List Chapter 12 Recommended Spares List The following spares are recommended on the basis that first line service is best performed on iPCM12A by changing modules ETX CONTROLLER BOARD COMPLETE D92615 A W PROCESSOR HDD and FLASH MODULE DC DC CONVERTER BOARD 5714C QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR 5710A ETX PROCESSOR 702964PB SECURITY DONGLE A92169 D BATTERY CONTROLLER BOARD 5703A GAS FLOW CONTROL BOARD 5709A LCD ASSY COMPLETE W TOUCH SCREEN D92583 A CONTROLLER and INVERTER POWER SUPPLY MODULE 150W 702947KJ KEYSWITCH 11705234 GUIDANCE DISPLAY BOARD 5711 PHOTOSENSOR RX TX PAIR 702260ND 5 WAY LED CLUSTER BOARD 5672A PANEL LOCK amp KEY A92452 Spares List Basic Components iPCM12A LCD ASSY COMPLETE W TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER and INVERTER D32983 A GAS FLOW CONTROL BOARD 5709A DC DC CONVERTER 5714C REPLACEMENT HDD OPERATING SYSTEM A92083 A 5 WAY LED CLUSTER 5672A GUIDANCE DISPLAY 5711A BATTERY CONTROLLER BOARD 5703A BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR 5659B HV GENERATOR BOARD 5713A QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR 5710A QUAD GAS PROPORTIONAL AMP BOARD 5704A QUAD GAS FLOW WINDOW FOIL ASSEMBLY B92412 A PHOTOSENSOR RX TX PAIR 702260ND GUIDANCE DISPLAY B
199. ICS and IC6 flash memory device programming PL2 and PL3 provide X channel interfacing 7 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Circuitry 5713A HV Generator Board IC2 DAC calibration circuits and HV clock from the on board processor IC13 provide a step up transformer input to generate the anode voltage for the gas flow detectors Under software control a Cockroft Walton style voltage tripler circuit boosts the generated output HV up to 4kV Two filtered HV outputs are provided for use within the iPCM12 PL1 and PL2 provide X channel interfacing PLS provides connections for initial C13 and IC14 flash memory device programming 5714B DC DC Converter Board Regulated and filtered power lines of 5V 12V and 12V are produced via three DC DC converters mounted on this board These outputs are routed to the adjacent ETX 5712A board 5711A Guidance Display and 5672A LED Cluster Indicator The upper plinth is fitted with 5672A LED cluster board with five indicators showing the real time status of the iPCM12 GREEN Ready Clear WHITE Count YELLOW Recount RED Alarm BLUE Out of service Unbuffered drivers are provided at PL9 on the 5712A control board The 5711A guidance display board has a two digit LED indicator to show the countdown on measurements It also has two indicators showing the real time user status of th
200. IL 0 g _ 00017 SUNEWZA 00 nns BAS Disabled Calibration Due Selected 3 Completed W Position sources Once the iPCM detects the sources the Calibration is about 000 0 to start a message displays The 000 T display indicates where the source has been selected in OUQUUL yellow pogo m nns Source Alpha Disabled B Calibration Due Selected Completed Calibration is about to start The source 1s now measured pea RE Measuring Source Extending Time 00 00 03 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 41 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 a The display indicates which area has been completed in green 000 p O00 D ri D ne Disabled El Calibration Due BM Selected M Completed W Remove sources This process can be repeated as 7 required When completed T E select the Done button to see a review of the process Review Required Wl Calibrated Wi Cal Requeed Acceptea X Failed Exduded BE TNT I EDT Canfirm Back Abort Click on a detector to see the new calibration details b E e Rewew Required 18 Catteated g z i 8 Cat Required X Accepted OAV Excused ur Confirm Back Abort 5 42 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions When all the detectors have b
201. ING OPEN iPCMI2 A VARIANTS WEIGH APPROXIMATELY 350kg 770lbs A FORK LIFT TRUCK OF SUITABLE LIFTING CAPACITY MUST BE USED TO MOVE AND TRANSPORT THE iPCM12 SAFELY USING THE INTEGRAL FORK LIFTING FACILITIES A LOW PROFILE PALLET JACK TRUCK OF SUITABLE LIFTING CAPACITY MAY BE USED TO MOVE OPEN iPCMs LOCALLY OVER FLAT AND EVEN SURFACES FOR FINAL INSTALLATION AND SERVICING ONLY WHEELS SKIDS SKATES AND OTHER DEVICES SHOULD NOT BE USED TO MOVE iPCM12s PARTICULAR CARE MUST BE TAKEN ON GRADIENTS AND UNEVEN SURFACES iPCM12 with Lead Shielding Scintillation Options iPCMI2s TO BE FITTED WITH SCINTILLATION GAMMA OPTIONS ARE SHIPPED AS OPEN UNITS CLOSED EXTENSION LEAD SHIELDING AND SCINTILLATION DETECTORS ARE SHIPPED SEPARATELY OBSERVE THE iPCM12 HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS ABOVE THE CLOSED EXTENSION LEAD SHIELDING AND SCINTILLATION DETECTORS MUST ONLY BE FITTED AFTER THE iPCMI2 HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN ITS PERMANENT LOCATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MECHANICAL INSTALLATION page 4 5 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 4 1 Unpacking and Installation Issue 2 0 iPCM12s FITTED WITH LEAD SHIELDING MUST NEVER BE MOVED AS A COMPLETE ASSEMBLY IN ANY WAY WHATSOEVER REMOVE ALL LEAD amp DETECTORS FIRST DAMAGE TO THE UNIT MAY RESULT ENSURE THE INSTALLATION SITE IS LEVEL AND SUITABLY ROBUST The iPCM12 is shipped as an Open unit complete with factory fitted Gas Flow detector and small
202. INTERCONNECTION D92591 6 DIAGRAM sheets See diagrams at back of document iPCM12 SCHEMATIC FUNCTIONAL Block diagram DRAWING iPCM12A GENERAL ASSEMBLY D92590 A DRAWING iPCM12B INTERCONNECTION D92777 DIAGRAM iPCM12B GENERAL ASSEMBLY D92767 A DRAWING Accessories list CALIBRATION JIG ALPHA 2 SOURCES CALIBRATION JIG BETA 2 SOURCES Details on request CALIBRATION JIG GAMMA Cs Details on request CALIBRATION JIG GAMMA Co Details on request SECURITY DONGLE A92169 D GAS FLOW SIDE OF FOOT KIT AE0221A GAS FLOW HEAD DETECTOR KIT AE0223A SCINTILLATION HEAD DETECTOR KIT AE0224A SCINTILLATION P LM KIT AE0225A GAMMA SCINTILLATION DETECTOR KIT AE0222A SPARE PURGED DETECTOR KIT AE0229A ENCLOSED CABINET INLET BARRIER KIT 0237 ENCLOSED CABINET DOOR LH RH KIT AE0238A ENCLOSED CABINET LH SWING DOOR KIT 0239 ENCLOSED CABINET RH SWING DOOR 0240 CAMERA KIT AE0227A USB PRINTER EPSON LX300 Details on request USB BARCODE READER Details on request Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 12 3 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 13 pCi A Beff Bq Bsum CCM Ccps Ceffect Ci CPM D DL dpm E Egress F FOM Health Physicist HP HV Ingress kBq Keyboard Emulating Id Provider L LAM LCD Thermo Fisher Scientific Glossary of Terms pCi Glossary of Terms micro curie Attenuation Factor or amps Effective Background while Monitoring Becquerel
203. Inverter Removal and R placemeltt det ferte rae m 11 15 User Guidance Display Guidance 5711A and LED Cluster Board 5672A Removal and Replacement eee cepe pr XO e FORCES PS ER XX EC EROR SURE 11 16 X iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Contents Body Sensor Assemblies Removal and Replacement sss 11 17 Gas Flow Quad Detectors Removal and Replacement General Gas Flow Detector Replacement Procedure sse 11 18 Body and Top of Foot Detectors essent enne 11 19 Side of Leg Inner Hand and Side of Foot Detectors ese 11 19 Shoulder Side of Head and Outer Hand Detectors eese 11 20 Overhead Detector l eae rie tette ted ee aee bi OR ege eee Gack Foot Detectors Jinenn aen ai aE E Ie n a e ere ia Replacing Gas Flow Detectors Windows sssseseeeeeeeeeeeentnernrentneennne Configuring a Replacement Detector sessi Scintillation Detector Removal and Replacement enr Detector Replacement iaia ea Setting up Replacement Detectors for Use GPIO Board 5707A GPIO Replacement i 3 55 eret UR e RED He Hr E A R Barrier Arm and Motor Assemblies eere eee eene einen tna tnnnn Barrier Replacement
204. Issue Beta Issue 1 If the Calibration Warn Period has been reached then the Calibration Warning message Out Of Calibration is displayed see Calibration page 5 15 To check the Calibration of the unit see Cal Check page 5 34 Out Of Service If the Calibration Required Interval option has been exceeded then the Out of Out Of Service Service message is displayed note that the reason given for Out of Service is displayed in the Operational Mode Display Bar see Calibration page 5 15 To check the Calibration of the unit see Cal Check page 5 34 A Critical Error Has Occurred Out Of Service If beta detection is enabled see Detection Options page 5 16 the gas flow detectors are tested for stability by increasing to a purge level Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Establishing a new Background Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Once these detectors are proved stable the gas flow is reduced to m ELE normal and the current Background Status is tested g H 8 E JiR E ALLAYALLI LAVI JERE JERE Once the Self Checks have passed iPCM12 will to acquire a new background and the Updating Background Updating Background message is displayed See Notes regarding Changing Background page 5 78 for more information regarding acquiring a background Note If Quick Background is enabled see Operation page 5 10 the length of time taken to
205. LY CONTAINED WITHIN A SHEET METAL HOUSING IT IS DECEPTIVELY HEAVY ENGAGE ASSISTANCE 2 Disconnect the MHV coaxial cable 3 Remove the six M4 detector housing retaining nuts the bottom three first followed by the top outer pair While removing the final top center nut hold the housing onto its retaining studs and stand with feet well clear of the housing 4 Carefully lift the whole assembly off its mounting studs and hold it with the black plastic front face toward the floor to prevent the lead shield and detector from falling from the housing CAUTION TAKE CARE THAT THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY DOES NOT FALL 1 Open the right hand iPCM12 service access panel to reveal the scintillation Side of Head detector fitted in place of the gas flow detector adjacent to the FHT681 Amplifiers CAUTION THE SCINTILLATION SIDE OF HEAD DETECTOR AND ITS REAR LEAD SHIELD ARE MOUNTED IN AN ELEVATED LOCATION AND DECEPTIVELY HEAVY ENGAGE ASSISTANCE 2 Disconnect the MHV coaxial cable 3 Hold the rear lead shielding section in place to prevent it falling while releasing the four M3 knurled retaining knobs Carefully lift the rear lead shield away from the assembly take care it does not fall 4 The remaining lead shielding is fixed to the iPCM12 cabinet and does not require removal Wriggle the 11 24 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Maintenance and Trouble S
206. Links on the 5712A as follows LKI e e LK3 e e e e LK2 LK5 LK4 e e e LK9 11 10 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Replacement of the ETX Processor Module Thermo Fisher Scientific M 10 11 12 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Shut down the iPCM12 using the keyswitch Switch the AC Mains PSU rocker switch OFF Remove the 5712A Processor Motherboard as detailed above Remove the four screws securing the four corners of the ETX processor module to the 5712A PCB Carefully lift the ETX module clear of the PCB It is located on four 100 way high density connectors that create significant contact friction so considerable force may be required to release the ETX module The replacement ETX Module should be of the same type as the original see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 and pre assembled with a heatsink assembly In the event that a heatsink assembly is not fitted it will be necessary to transfer the one from the original ETX module Release the screw in the center of the heatsink and pull it off the processor PCB note its orientation with respect to the thermal pads and major ICs Inspect condition of the thermal pads if damaged apply a small amount of heatsink compound to the damaged area to ensure good thermal conduction Transfer the heatsink to the ETX board ensuring correct orientation and refit the ce
207. M12 unit OFF and replace the 5714A Controller board 7 Ifthe iPCM12 is still faulty change the ETX processor board type 5712A referring to ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 8 Ifthe iPCM12 is still dead after changing the 5714A controller and 5712A processor boards contact Thermo Fisher Service department for further help 11 22 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Starts up but Display is Blank amp Fails Self Tests no chimes Will not run amp displays Out Of Service Low Background Counts Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting If the iPCM12 starts but fails to chime ding dong within 60 seconds of being switched ON then it has not successfully completed the power on Self Tests and a fault is indicated Observe the LCD display if a fault message is displayed refer to subsequent subsections If however the display is blank or the message is unintelligible it is likely the ETX processor board has a serious fault and the microprocessor has I O problems or has crashed Replace the processor board as described in ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 The blue FAULT lamp is lit see Fault Messages page 11 1 for an explanation of the fault messages The Self Tests have detected the background count from the detector channel is below the Low Background Limit value set in Monitoring page 5 12
208. MANUAL IPCM12 INSTALLED PERSONNEL CONTAMINATION MONITOR Thermo Fisher Scientific IPCM12 June 2010 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2010 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN PART OF ALL MATERIAL IN THIS PUBLICATION INCLUDING DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS IS FORBIDDEN THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL IS CONFIDENTIAL TO THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC AND IS SUPPLIED FOR USE ONLY IN CONNECTION WITH THE OPERATION AND OR MAINTENANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT TO WHICH IT RELATES AS SUPPLIED BY THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THE CONTENTS MUST NOT BE USED FOR OTHER PURPOSES NOR DISCLOSED TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Thermo Fisher Scientific Bath Road Beenham Reading Berkshire RG7 5PR England Tel 0118 971 2121 Fax 0118 971 2835 This manual was produced using ComponentOne Doc To Help NOTICE iPCM12 WARRANTY AND LIABILITY THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to the equipment described herein without notice Considerable effort has been made to insure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions However THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC makes no warranty of any kind including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this manual THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC assumes no responsibility for or liability for errors contained in this manual or for incidental special or c
209. Minimum Voltage Step Size Step Size V Enter a step size for the scan Step Duration s Enter the length in seconds for each step Once the above scan parameters have been established two scans will be made against each amplifier threshold for all amplifiers at each HV step over the specified integration period e A background HV Scan e A source HV Scan If Detector System a p is selected the Detectors for Scan See eee ern window is displayed B B C Please select alpha detector Skipa 9 Select an alpha detector and then a beta detector you can skip SERES TDCIECTORSFOR SCAN selecting a second detector by i pressing the Skip a or button 080 Select the Continue button to oad Betabetecor M start the HV Scan oo BEW 7 fad Continue Clear Abort Selection 5 42 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions The background scan commences Once the Background Scan is completed the Ready to Start Source Scan screen is displayed Position Source Position the Source to be scanned prosa atar in the iPCM12 and press the Start button A source HV scan will be m performed recording the counts 0 g 277 against each amplifier threshold 080 for all amplifiers at each HV step d over the specified integration period A progress window is AL na displayed Re
210. Monitor Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics Adjacent Horizontal Adjacent Horizontal Adjacent Horizontal Adjacent Side with Quadrants Left amp Quadrants Centre amp Quadrants Right and Opposing detectors Centre Right Side on next step LB1A CB1A CB1A RB1A RB1A SHA SHA LB1A 2 LB1B CB1B CB1B RB1B RB1B SHB SHB LB1B 2 LB1C CB1C CB1C RB1C RB1C SHC SHC LB1C 2 LB1D CB1D CB1D RB1D RB1D SHD SHD LB1D 2 LB2A CB2A CB2A RB2A RB2A ARA ARA LB2A 2 LB2B CB2B CB2B RB2B RB2B ARB ARB LB2B 2 LB2C CB2C CB2C RB2C RB2C LB2C 2 LB2D CB2D CB2D RB2D RB2D ARD ARD LB2D 2 LB3A CB3A CB3A RB3A RB3A SL1A SL1A LB3A 2 LB3B CB3B CB3B RB3B RB3B SL1B SL1B LB3B 2 LB3C CB3C CB3C RB3C RB3C SL1C SL1C LB3C 2 LB3D CB3D CB3D RB3D RB3D SLID SLID LB3D 2 LB4A CB4A CB4A RB4A RB4A SL2A SL2A LB4A 2 LB4B CB4B CB4B RB4B RB4B SL2B SL2B LB4B 2 LB4C CB4C CB4C RB4C RB4C SL2C SL2C LB4C 2 LB4D CB4D CB4D RB4D RB4D SL2D SL2D LB4D 2 Adjacent Horizontal Adjacent Horizontal Adjacent Horizontal LB1A 2 1 2 CB1A 2 RB1A 2 RB1A 2 SHA2 SHA 2 LB1A LB1B 2 CB1B 2 CB1B 2 RB1B 2 RB1B 2 SHB 2 SHB 2 LB1B LB1C 2 CB1C2 CB1C 2 RB1C 2 RB1C 2 SHC 2 SHC 2 LB1C LB1D 2 CB1D 2 CB1D 2 RB1D 2 RB1D 2 SHD 2 SHD 2 LB1D LB2A 2 2 2 CB2A 2 RB2A 2 RB2A 2 ARA 2 ARA 2 LB2A LB2B 2 CB2B 2 CB2B 2 2 2 RB2B 2 ARB 2 ARB 2 LB2B LB2C 2 CB2C 2 CB2C 2 RB2C 2 RB2C 2 ARC 2 ARC 2 LB2C LB2D 2 CB2D 2 CB2D 2 RB2D 2 RB2D 2 ARD 2 ARD 2 LB2D LB3A 2 2 CB3A
211. Note that this is a view only field Confidence This is a copy of the Calibration Confidence field in Calibration page 5 15 All calibration results are logged to the database The Calibrate function allows users to overwrite the Calibration factor The Cal Check function informs the user of any discrepancy with the current calibration factor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions To Calibrate or Cal Check A against a selecta Radiation sonso TER Type and then press the nerd b Calibrate or Cal Check button DecayedActwty 1888 The following Calibration Single osson Caltxated on 2 1 2008 Source window is displayed elutes F See Sources and Jigs page 5 48 Catron Souro Nuciide c ps 4 for more information regarding RIEN 2l the setting up of Sources and Description Jigs Calbeated on 2 1 2005 Beta plate source Select the Jig radio button to ee display the multiple Sources ens ES follows ome pwm 4 Source Aipha2 Decayed Activity 1655 Bq Source 2 Aphai Decayed Actvity 1886 Bq aaa ERR P L Calibration Jig Nuctide 4 Source 1 Chlodnef 1730 Bq Source 2 Chorine2a DecayedAcivity 1391 Bq Description uu RE ERE Use the direction arrows to select Calibration Source 2 Am 241 Fo
212. OARD 5711A 5 WAY LED CLUSTER BOARD 5672A Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 12 1 Recommended Spares List 12 2 SECURITY DONGLE PANEL LOCK amp KEY SEALED BATTERY LOUDSPEAKER POWER SUPPLY MODULE 150W COMPACT FLASH W PROGRAM amp OS HEX TREADPLATE KEYSWITCH iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 A92169 D A92452 503073KJ 11705242 702947KJ 702275KM C92479 11705234 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Recommended Spares List Spares List Optional Components iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with doors or barrier iPCMI2C only iPCMI2C only iPCMI2C only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with gamma option only iPCMI2B or C with barrier option iPCMI2B or C with barrier option iPCMI2B or C with door option iPCMI2B or C with door option iPCMI2B or C with door option iPCMI2B or C with door option iPCMI2B or C with door option iPCMI2B or C with door option iPCMI2B or C HV amp AMPLIFIER BOARD FHT681 FHT68 1425430223 HAND FOOT SHOULDER SCINTILLATION 5708A DETECTOR BODY SCINTILLATION DETECTOR GPIO CARD 5707 DYNODE CHAIN A3 54040 PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE 35246 GPIO CARD 5707A DYNODE CHAIN A3 54040 PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE 35246 BARRIER ARM MOTOR
213. OSITION CABLE LENGTH 1 e UPPER ISLAND DETECTOR LOWER ISLAND DETECTOR 4550mm H V JUNCTION BOX C92506 A LH amp RH FOOT DETECTOR H V JUNCTION BOX 92506 SIDE OF SHOE DETECTOR OPTIONAL AE0221A n TO H V GENERATOR 5713A i Hi B i E E B39733 A 03150 B39733 A 00850 H V GENERATOR T 5713A SIDE OF SHOE DETECTOR a A ja OPTIONAL AE0221A H V JUNCTION BOX C92506 A Li H TOP OF SHOE DETECTOR 2 C92506 B e D Pat gt o 39733 00850 PART OF AE0221A H V CABLE TABLE CABLES POSITIONED AS LISTED POSITION CABLE LENGTH H V SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM P POSITION 1 POSITION 12 ISO THREADS CLASS 69 6H TOLERANCES UNLESS pRAWN AAS T T 29 09 08 DOIxxxx 1 E 2 DEC PL 0 15 20 04 09 ANGULAR 0 5 DEG DIMENSIONS IN ThermoFisher Bath Road Beenham Reading MILLIMETRES SCIENTIFIC Berkshire RG7 5PR
214. Options page 5 8 instructions are given verbally If Voice Prompts is not enabled an Audible Indication is sounded See Audible Indications page 3 8 for further information Switch On When the iPCM12 unit is powered on the SYSTEM SELF TESTING message is SYSTEM SELF TESTING displayed In this state diagnostics are run to validate the state of the iPCM12 to include Database connectivity check Check local database is available Instrument Configuration Data validation e Instrument Configuration Sarde XChannel device communication test check communication with each peripheral Note that after exiting from Administration Mode when an update to the configuration has been made e g change to detector fit or replacement of an amplifier the Cold Start Mode is entered iPCM User Manual 5 69 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Self Test State Following the Cold Start checks the Self Test checks are run Self Checks Pass In this state additional self tests and configuration are run to validate the state of the iPCM12 to include Selected calibration validity checks Check efficiency factors are available for all detectors and that at least one valid alarm is set Loading detector models with e efficiencies and alarm thresholds Out Of Senice Upon successful completion of the tests and if beta detection is enabled see Detection Options Out O
215. Out Of Service High Background Conditions 11 24 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Ifthe fault remains with the original gas flow channel the fault is in the 5710A counter and this should be replaced using the pre gassed hot spare if available For iPCM12C gamma options swap the faulty scintillation detector MHV connection from the relevant HV Amplifier to that of a working channel Perform a further 10 second count and note the counts in each channel If the fault moves with the detector into a previously working channel the fault is in the detector assembly and should be replaced as defined in FHT681 cards as used in gamma option iPCM12B amp iPCM12C Removal and Replacement page 11 11 If the fault remains with the original HV Amplifier channel the fault is in the HV amp Amplifier PCB and this should be replaced as defined in FHT681 cards as used in gamma option iPCM12B amp iPCM12C Removal and Replacement page 11 11 This condition occurs when the Background activity prevents the IPCMI2 from discriminating the pre set alarm levels a and for gas flow detectors and y for gamma option with the required confidence within the Maximum Monitoring Time allowed It may be necessary to consult Health Physics for clarification Enter a valid password and proceed as follows 1 Select Setup Monitoring page 5 12 and check the Maximum Monitoring Times are set to reasonable values Ad
216. PDs only Serial COM Port This is the COM Port for connection to the interface 5 58 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions IDS Camera Press the OK button to display Please Edit Parameters the editable parameters for the IDS Camera Horizontal Image Size 240 Vertical Image Size 376 Rotation Angle 270 OK Cancel Description of options Field Name Description Tick this option to enable the interface to work with the iPCM12 Horizontal Image Size Enter the horizontal image size in mm Vertical Image Size Enter the vertical image size in mm Rotation Angle Use the drop down button to select either 0 90 180 or 270 Keyboard Emulating Id Provider NOTE A Keyboard Emulating Id Provider is the terminology used for a USB Barcode Reader Press the OK button The box editable parameters for the Enable Keyboard Emulating Id Provider Valid Code RegEx displays Data Match RegEx Character Timeout 80 ms Rescan Delay 300 ms CR terminates Include CR OK Cancel Description of options Field Name Description Enable Tick this option to enable the interface to work with the PM12 Location Use the drop down button to select either front or rear Valid Code RegEx These fields permit validation of a barcode and Data Match RegEx extraction of portions of data within the barcode for the Stream I
217. Proceed as follows 1 Enter a valid password and Setup Monitoring page 5 12 Check that the Low Background Limit is not set to an unreasonably high value for the prevailing background condition 2 Select Calibration HV Scan page 5 41 and check the HV settings for each channel are correct It may be necessary to refer to the original manufacturing configuration print out or to the commissioning configuration print out for the iPCM12 3 Check the cable connections between the 5712A processor board and the HV amp Amplifier pcbs at PL12 and the X channel network cables SK1 6 7 8 13 amp 14 4 Check HV cables red to faulty gas flow detectors 5710A and 5713A HC generator 5 Having performed checks 1 to 4 above select Diagnostics Detectors page 3 4 perform a 10 second count and check the faulty channel s and note the counts Zero counts in a channel usually implies a complete failure in either the 5710A detector or HV Amplifier PCB A few counts suggests either reduced detector efficiency or threshold problems in a gas flow amplifier or HV Amplifier 1 Swap the gas flow HV cable to a working channel if possible Perform a further 10 second count and note the counts in each channel 2 Ifthe fault moves with the detector into a previously working channel the fault is in the detector cable assembly and should be replaced iPCM User Manual 11 23 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Will Not Run amp Displays
218. R ea RE ER E REOR IAN Description of Parameters Used in Calculations Back ground Update ete erbe eee e t DOE OUR Band hte Changing Background ecrire pte esent repere rH PRECIO Re de ned Calculation of the Monitoring Time Teal eene Minimum Detectable Activity MDA and High Background Criterion Changing 5 Contamination Alarm oet e tecti eee ha Me ere ete Zone Summation 1f required 2 nere erede Pere dete ian Calculation of Activity and Associated Uncertainty A a A itn VIG e repe Quick Backgtotid bees RR RE SU A STRE Co 60 Window Residual Contamination Level TE Automatic Calculation of Calibration Monitoring Time Calculation of Alarm Levels essseseseeesesoresesesoeeeorososeeorosocseosoesesooesesessoesesoreresososerorososeeososseseesessose Ex ngu E Probability Sigma and Setting of Alarm Levels False Alarm Rates amp Probabilities eee Effect of Probability of False Alarm F sees ener Effect of Probability of Detection PoD eese enne viii iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Contents Monitonme Mime CT 25 ee esed dd eee ra d
219. RLY IF IN DIAGNOSTICS AND THE DOOR IS OPENED OPERATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL IS RESTRICTED 11 30 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Recommended Spares List Chapter 12 Recommended Spares List Thermo Fisher Scientific The following spares are recommended on the basis that first line service is best performed on iPCM12A by changing modules ETX CONTROLLER BOARD DC DC CONVERTER BOARD QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR ETX PROCESSOR SECURITY DONGLE BATTERY CONTROLLER BOARD GAS FLOW CONTROL BOARD TOUCH SCREEN TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER BACK LIGHT INVERTER PWR MODULE 150W KEYSWITCH GUIDANCE DISPLAY BOARD PHOTOSENSOR RX TX PAIR 5 WAY LED CLUSTER BOARD PANEL LOCK amp KEY 5712A 5714B 5710A 702964PB A92169 D 5703A 5709A 702633ND 702632ND 702549ND 702947KJ 11705234 57 702260ND 5672A A92452 Spares list basic components iPCM12A ETX CONTROLLER BOARD GAS FLOW CONTROL BOARD DC DC CONVERTER ETX PROCESSOR REPLACEMENT HDD OPERATING SYSTEM 5 WAY LED CLUSTER GUIDANCE DISPLAY BATTERY CONTROLLER BOARD BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR HV GENERATOR BOARD QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR QUAD GAS PROPORTIONAL AMP BOARD PHOTOSENSOR RX TX PAIR GUIDANCE DISPLAY BOARD 5 WAY LED CLUSTER BOARD SECURITY DONGLE 5712A 5709A 5714B 702964PB A92083 A 5672A 5711A 5703A 5659B 5713A 5710A 5704A 702260ND 5711A 5672A A92169 D iPCM User Manual 12 1 Recommended Spares List 12 2
220. Save the Scan press Save to display the Please enter a scan description window Please enter a scan description optional Save Abort Enter a Scan Description and press Save button to display the Scan results zl 080 0 Alpha Detector E Beta Detector W DIC U DUDOWZ Tu i B 9 Apply Cancel Select Apply button to save the Scan Press Cancel button to quit without saving or press Back button to return to the Start new scan screen To view the HV Scan as a Table press the Table button to display the scan results To view the HV Scan as a Graph press the Graph button to display the scan results To view the current Scan for all detectors press the Current HV Scan button to display the scan results To view the last saved HV Scan press the Last HV Scan button to display the scan results To view the latest scan for All Detectors press the All Detectors button See Performing the HV Scan page 9 5 for more information regard the HV Scan 5 46 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Thresholds Select Calibration Thresholds to 92303552 set the Detector Thresholds CEMESEAamGgEacUTES E Detector System Ip LE Cance Copy From Copy Selected Apply Cancel Settings This screen allows the individual voltage of any detector to be viewed and updated To change any of the settings press on the detector field and update
221. Scientific s Service department The equipment cannot be used until the fault is removed It must be noted that a failure of the LCD backlight module will leave the display blank even though boot up is taking place correctly In a normal boot up the Bios sequence of tests will be followed by loading the operating system from the disk drive signalled by the Thermo Fisher Scientific log screen Any failure here will result in a blue screen Again you will need to contact Thermo Fisher Scientific s service department if this does occur Finally the application software will be loaded and the iPCM12 User screen will be displayed The application is entered with tests to verify the detection components are working correctly Should a failure occur during these initial checks then the Out of Service message will appear on the message bar and one of the following will be displayed on the message bar 1 Unable to set detector alarms 2 Database Offline 3 Unable to Configure Detector Subsystem 4 Invalid Language Setting iPCM User Manual 11 1 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 11 2 Device Error Messages Operational Self Tests iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Default Calibration has no Alarms Configured Error Failed to Retrieve Sound Data From Database No Default Calibration Selected X Channel Failure 10 X Channel Failure Accessing Node 0 ID 1 Soo nl 9v tn If one of these messages occurs
222. Scientific s service department for repair Replacement of any amplifier will require recording its serial number on the relevant enclosure label and informing the software of this new address NOTE All cards MUST be linked up using the rear ribbon cables grey originally supplied Since removal of any card will have produced an X Channel error the user will need to log out insert the administrator Dongle and log on as Administrator see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 4 You will need to connect a USB keyboard to carry this out 1 Select the shortcut to DevConfig 2 Select Load Devices and highlight the removed card s address 3 Select Change Address to retype the new serial number 4 Press OK to register and Save to store as the new address 5 Exit this routine and log on as Thermo User again Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Setting the FHT681 Current Limits LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller amp Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting When an amplifier card is exchanged it will be necessary to check the Min and Max current levels for each detector are set at 50 and 200 respectively using the HV Scan page 5 41 facility They will need resetting if they are still set to 0 and 255 using the same facility When these values are correctly set the application will be abl
223. Source window displays See Sources and Fixtures page 5 55 for more information regarding the setting up of Sources and Fixtures Select the Fixture radio button to display the multiple Sources as follows Use the direction arrows to select Source a Calibration Source Once selected press the Next button to start the Measurement of the Background iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 Single Source c Jig av Calibration Source 1 241 4 Decayed Activity 1886 Bq Caltxated on 2 1 2008 For alpha cat a a ae Bs al Calibration Source Nuciide Decayed Activity 1730 Bq Descnpbon Beta plate source Single Source Jig aF Calibration Jig Nudide AiphaJig 1 241 4 Source 1 Alpha2 Decayed Activity 1655 Bq Source2 Aiphat Oecayed Activity 1886 Bq Description re m Calibrabon Jig Nudide beta jig gt Source 1 Chlorinet Decayed Activity 1730 Bq Source 2 DecayedAcivity 1381 Bq Description Ghionne Sources Alpha2 Am 241 For alpha cot Measuring Background 00 00 04 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Once the background has been measured position the sources 000 Source Alphat Nudide Am 241 Disabled W Calibration Due Selected 3 Completed W Position sources BEL D
224. TE Before commencing this operation disconnect the two battery cables B92059 A amp 5659B from the battery controller card found at the bottom left side chassis below the electronic display chassis Alternatively see Battery Removal and Replacement page 11 7 for guidance When carrying out major Servicing work on the Electronic display chassis D92520 A it may be advantageous to remove it from the iPCM12 The chassis is removed from the main frame as follows and since the assembly is complete stand alone testing is also possible The door panel stay will need to be un hitched to allow access to the gas chassis at the top left hand corner Before the main chassis can be removed the gas chassis D92610 A must be removed first by unscrewing 4 x M4 hex retaining studs Disconnect the gas lines from the chassis MAKE A NOTE of the gas links for later reconnection if necessary refer to D92591 sheet 4 see Drawings list by assembly page 12 2 Disconnect the following external cables from the boards on the chassis 1 PSU cables B92594 A amp B92597 A USB cable on SK4 Gas chassis cable 703025KF X channel external yellow cables at SK4 6 7 13 amp 14 leaving only SK8 connected Lamp indicator cables B92596 A amp B92165 A Loud speaker cable 11705242 The network cable in SK201 2 x HV red cables on 5713A generator module Bs Aa Ag Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Sc
225. Up Messages to select mammaa a message to configure o Cages 000002 Use the direction arrow to find a Message to configure Once selected the text can be updated by pressing on the Headline Headline 2 and Instruction fields To save the changes press Apply Settings button To set the selected message back to its default setting press the Set Default button Available Messages Headlines and Instructions Message Contaminated Please Contact HP High Level Please Contact HP Clear OK to Leave Portal Normal Alarm High Level Alarm Clear Select Diagnostics Detectors to 000020200 view the Detectors information Gas Flow Scintillation Average Over samples 3 Pan Mode 1 2 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions The Detectors are updated every measurement cycle Note that the Background Count Rate is averaged and updated over the cycle time selected in the Average Over field Description of options Average Over Enter the number of samples from which the samples average is calculated for display Stacked Tick to display the graph as a stacked view Ifthe box is unticked the view is displayed unstacked as follows Alpha cps 5 6 Timed Counts a selected specified period This Detector System sss function allows a count to be 110 made which can be use
226. User Manual 6 17 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 Co 60 Window Monitoring Co 60 window only applies to gamma measurements A specific alarm for Co contamination may be set if enabled in Alarms page 5 18 This alarm is based upon monitoring only those high energy photons which cannot be associated with radionuclides that emit lower energy photons such as Cs Therefore it is also possible for other high energy photon emitters to be monitored using the Co window The method of assessment of background count rates and contamination level applies to the Co window channel in the same way as for gross alarms described in this section However both the background count rate Bc and the efficiency Eco are considerably lower than for the gross sum channel Residual Contamination After a measurement resulting in an Alarm condition Level Residual Contamination Count RCC may be taken if enabled in Operation page 5 10 A count equal to the monitoring time Timon is enforced Residual Contamination is assumed to exist where the following formula is satisfied Ga 7 where Crcc is the average count rate during the Residual Contamination Count period is the RCC threshold variable see Monitoring page 5 12 Bum Nace The default setting for is 7 06 and should never be set to a less that the sum of the probabilities of detection and false alarm P F In the
227. WER IS OFF FAILURE TO DO THIS WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE BUS SYSTEM COMPONENTS The User Guidance Display type 5711A is located at the left inner side of the body detector array assembly at head height 1 Prize off the outer label the face of the display and gain access to the six countersunk fixing screws 2 Remove the fixing screws Ease the display forward and disconnect the six way colored ribbon cable B92596 A DO NOT allow the cable to fall back inside the housing firmly tape the cable for future reconnection 3 Apply a new overlay label B92433 to the 5711A display face 4 Locate the one or optionally two 5672A LED traffic light clusters in the front face s of the cabinet Exact 11 16 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Body Sensor Assemblies Removal and Replacement Replacement of the Sensor Assemblies Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting location is dependent upon either User preference or Closed unit options selected 5 Remove the 6 x M3 hex pillars on the rear paneling and disconnect the 6 way colored ribbon cable Note each board PL1 or PL2 connection There is no need to remove the front labeling The LEDs are proprietor items and therefore are not user serviceable The boards should be replaced with identical parts as detailed in Recommended Spares List page 12 1 The Body Sensor assemblies are conn
228. YSICIST HP is used extensively It refers to the Person Persons or Team responsible for setting up day to day running and maintenance of the iPCM12 This may be an Instrument Maintenance Engineer Radiation Safety Officer local Competent Person Departmental Manager or any other Responsible Person The HEALTH PHYSICIST is the highest level security role uniquely responsible for setting and maintaining all lower order passwords The HP would normally be responsible for installing and setting up the iPCM12 calibrating for user defined nuclides programming operating parameters and verifying correct operation of the instrument The term TECHNICIAN is used to refer to the personnel who normally repair and maintain the instrument in working condition IMP personnel are designated to this role Personnel who are general users of the system and normally carry out routine diagnostic and test functions are allocated to the tTHERMOFISHER role The term USER refers to anybody associated with or operating the instrument in any way For more information on which menu options are available see Menu Roles page 5 7 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 Chapter 1 iPCM12 Overview Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Introduction Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor The Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor type iPCM12 is designed for controlled detection of radioact
229. ace the source at a height of 150cm above the treadplate and select the upper 2 gamma body detectors plus the overhead detector for scanning Another alternative method is to scan each detector individually with the source in close proximity to the centre of each detector i e nominally 3 inches 7 5 cm Thermo Fisher believe the optimum method is the three phase method since this process ensures the source is in close proximity to the detectors being scanned whilst minimizing overall test time On completion of the scan the user is given the option of saving the data by pressing the Save Scan button This data along with its description can be retrieved via the Data tab see HV Scan page 5 41 Once the Save button has been pressed the display changes to show graphs of the scans There are two methods for determining the optimum operating voltage depending on whether the low energy alarm will be used or whether the voltages will be set the classic way by reviewing the Figure of Merit at each voltage setting The recommended method is known as the NBR method which typically will also provide an operating voltage which satisfies the Figure of Merit criteria The NBR method must be used if the Co window or low energy indications are enabled The NBR method requires the use of a Cs calibration source for voltage optimisation iPCM User Manual 9 7 Setting Up Procedure NBR method Figure of Merit FOM m
230. aced with one of an identical type see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 Replacement of the charger PCB is the reverse of the removal procedure 5703A PL7 or 5720A PL9 last Take care to locate all connectors correctly ensure connections are not offset particularly the keyswitch connection to 5703A PL6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 9 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712 Removal and Replacement Replacement of the ETX Motherboard Issue 2 0 Shut down the iPCM12 using the keyswitch Switch the AC Mains PSU rocker switch OFF Disconnect all of the cables from the 5712 Motherboard note connector positions for reference Remove the six hex pillars retaining the PCB to its mounting spacers The PCB can now be lifted away from the Electronics display chassis Replacement of the 5712A ETX Processor Motherboard is the reverse of the removal procedure If the main ETX processor module is thought to be faulty it should be replaced with an identical unit see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 as detailed below 1 Transfer the Compact Flash memory card from the old 5712 PCB to the new one this card contains all the necessary configuration data 2 If using a new Hard Disk on a replacement 5712A Motherboard ensure that all the correct software is pre loaded 3 Set the
231. aces are possible and the parameters described below may vary according to the interface selected Please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific regarding your specific interface requirements e IDS Camera see IDS Camera page 5 49 For further information in setting up any of these Plug ins please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific 5 48 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions To configure an Interface Highlight the Interface to Please Select an Interface to Configure configure and select the Configure Interface button Note that the selected type of interface is displayed in the top left hand corner ome Back Configure The Create button allows the user to Create a new Interface Enter a name Test EPD ID Reader The user is prompted to enter a name for the new Interface Cancel To delete an existing interface Eos highlight the Interface and press 0 the Delete button Select OK to Ex continue i The Configure button allows the user to configure an existing highlighted interface The Back button returns the user to the previous screen Please Eda Parameters IDS Camera Press the OK button to display the editable parameters for the Enable IDS Camera qum Horizontal Image Size 240 Vertical Image Size 376 Rotation Angle 270 OK Cancel Description of options Field Name Description Enable Tick this opti
232. ady To Start Source Scan The source scan commences Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 43 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Once complete the result is displayed Select the Complete button to display the Scan Description window pem 12 1 em and Croate HV Seas Thermo If Detector System y is selected Ready To Start Background Scan the Ready to Start Background Remove scan window is displayed and press Start Press Start to commence the Background scan Once complete the Select Detectors for Scan window is displayed 5 44 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Once the individual or All Ready To Start Source Scan Detectors have been selected osition Source press the Continue button to and press Start display the Ready to Start Source Scan window Position the source and press the Start button The Progress window is displayed as follow 3 FETE Samm By i Once complete the result is displayed Select the Complete button to display the Scan Description window More Detectors _Compiete Once the Scan is completed and the Complete button has been pressed a Save Scan window appears giving the option to save the scan or Abort the process iPCM User Manual 5 45 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 To
233. air and replaced by another FHT681 module of the same type see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 When replacing any amplifier note and record the new FHT serial number this unique node identification must be entered into the X Channel software configuration Ensure the detector cables are re connected to the correct amplifier and connector NOTE All FHTs MUST be linked using the rear gray ribbon cables Replacement of any FHT module will subsequently produce an error message Logout insert the administrator Dongle and logon as Administrator see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 3 Using the touchscreen 1 Select the Set UP Menu 2 Select X Channel tab 3 Select Gamma Detection System radio button 4 The scintillation detectors associated with the newly fitted FHT681 will register as No Connection and show red on the display 5 Touch the red detector graphic to select it 11 14 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Setting the FHT681 Current Limits LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 6 Touch the Address box and enter the new FHT node address FHT serial number 7 Touch the Apply Settings button 8 The detector should now be Connected and the graphic show green 9 Re
234. al WARNING ALL LEAD SUPPLIED IS BLUED LACQUERED FOR HANDLING PURPOSES HOWEVER OBSERVE LOCAL HEALTH amp and SAFETY HANDLING REGULATIONS AT ALL TIMES GLOVES ELIMINATE THE POSSIBILITY OF SURFACE CONTAMINATION BUT MUST BE OF A SUITABLE HIGH GRIP VARIETY TO AVOID LEAD SLIPPING OBSERVE LOCAL REGULATIONS ALWAYS WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING LEAD LEAD SHIELDING IS HEAVY BUT EACH SECTION IS DESIGNED TO MEET THE UK HEALTH amp SAFETY LEGISLATION THE WEIGHT OF EACH SECTION IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LIFTING LIMITS RELATING TO ITS PHYSICAL POSITION NO SECTIONS EXCEED 35 KGS ALWAYS FOLLOW THE CORRECT HANDLING PROCEDURES TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY ENGAGE ASSISTANCE Disconnect the mains supply Ensure the iPCM12 is switched Body Gamma Detectors 6 OFF 1 Unlock and hinge the body array frame open to reveal the body scintillation body detectors 2 Before lifting out the detector disconnect MHV coaxial cable 3 Carefully unbuckle the Velcro straps CAUTION EACH 5717A DETECTOR WEIGHS ABOUT 10KG TAKE CARE THAT THE DETECTORS DO NOT FALL 11 22 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Overhead Detector 1 Foot Detector 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Remove the roof cover to reveal the head detector Remove the two lead shielding sections from the detector Disconnect the MHV coaxial cable Carefully withdraw the
235. al taking care not to short it to the terminal 7 Remove the battery and dispose of it safely as required The battery should be replaced only with one of a similar type or operation of the iPCM12 may be impaired When refitting the battery make sure the mounting bracket is properly secured Reconnect the red wire to the RED terminal first 9 Reconnect the thermistor card to the BLACK terminal last Failure to do this may impair charging control and may lead to premature battery failure iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 7 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Hard Disk Drive Removal and Replacement Replacement of the Hard Disk Battery Controller Board Type 5703A and 5720A Removal and Replacement Issue 2 0 CAUTION THE BATTERY CONTAINS HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES PLEASE TAKE CARE TO DISPOSE OF THE OLD BATTERY IN ACCORDANCE WITH YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS IN EUROPE DIRECTIVE 2006 66 EC The Hard Disk is an integral part of the 5712A Processor Motherboard situated near the top of the Electronics Chassis Shut down the iPCM12 Remove the two screws securing the retaining bracket at the top of the disk casing Unplug the disk drive from the lower PCB connector The Hard Disk should be replaced with an identical unit See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 of 40 Gbyte minimum capacity preloaded with all necessary software Replacement of the disk is the reverse of the remova
236. alarms iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 25 Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 Effect of Probability of This is the probability that exactly one Alarm Level of Detection PoD Contamination will be detected The rate of detecting exactly one Alarm Level of emissions is on average 50 or 0 sigma In Figure 13 the right hand peak represents the distribution about the Contamination alarm level C during the Monitoring Time T In this instance the alarm level C is set 4 6 cps above the average Background B of 5 cps A higher detection rate may be desired and can be achieved by modifying the contamination alarm level set point by the probability of detection P This effectively backs off reduces the alarm level creating a lower contamination count triggering threshold represented by the right hand vertical line in Figure 13 In this instance the alarm level count rate is adjusted to 3 2 cps above the background B to achieve 1 65 sigma 95 probability of detecting exactly one alarm level of contamination Increased probability of detection P effectively reduces the Alarm Level causing a corresponding increase in the monitoring time T to achieve the false alarm rate F When measuring low energy beta emitters and alpha emitters small body movements will drastically affect the sensitivity a movement of a few centimeters may change the sensitivity by up to an order of magnitud
237. ally To test the Lamps press the Balke lamp icon which will light up 606000 HVGen Select DiagnosticsIHV ETT ERHEBEN check the current state of the HV 1 E Giz Hn Generator Measured Values Status HV Fault a Current Overload HV On Attention LED Active HV Shutdown HV Off Configuration Error ADC Alert HV Settling Bru Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 35 Operating Instructions 5 36 Battery Charger Barriers iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 The Status options give an indication if there is an error with the HV Generator Select Diagnostics Battery age o e Charger to view the current ca mmaa status of the battery charger PSU Status Mains On Battery Status Charging Status Battery Fault 71 No Mains Power 7 Charge Current Limited 7 Charge Inhibited 7 The Status options give an indication if there is an error with the Battery Charger When the mains power is ON the system charges the battery When no mains power is present the system operates from the battery NOTE The Barriers have to be enabled in Set UpiBarriers page Emandam gt 5 230 e O Opon O Blocked Open Select DiagnosticslBarriers to CjCksed T Faut Close Bl In Transit check the installed barriers Right O Open Blocked Open O Closed O
238. alternate recommended pallet truck is only intended for use on flat and level ground in the immediate vicinity of the iPCM12 installation The iPCM12 should be raised only just above ground level to prevent tipping The iPCM12 Cabinet keys are in a plastic bag taped to the hand detector assembly Once installed remove the transit packaging from inside the iPCM12 as follows 44 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Positioning Physical Installation All iPCM12 Variants Thermo Fisher Scientific Unpacking and Installation 1 Remove the packing from the Hand Mechanism wedge inside the island assembly 2 Push the body array frame inwards to release the pressure on the lock catches and unlock both top and center catches 3 CAUTION Do not leave the keys in the locks they may fall and damage foot detectors 4 Open the body detector array assembly and remove the top of toe detector packing and the bubble wrap located behind the body detector assembly 5 The two transit screws in the foot plinth do not need to be removed unless service access is required to this area 6 Leave the foot well cardboard foot detector protection in place until the unit is to be demonstrated to prevent dust dirt and punctures 12 Note packing details and retain all packing for future re use Mechanical Installation For best possible performance it is suggested that
239. alue below the graph will now have a Gold background to it This background color highlights that the value has been changed but not yet saved When all operating voltages have been set press the Apply Settings button to save these values NOTE The button must be pressed in order to access the other functions NOTE The following procedure tends to be iterative in nature and is included as a guide only Different operational requirements and background conditions may necessitate a different choice of operating point The final choice should be at the discretion of the senior Health Physicist When the gamma y graphs display select the Gross Counting option and then press the respective graph for a detector which will expand to fill the screen Pressing Table will show the actual FOM and S B values note that S B is proportional to FOM and is included for those users who prefer this quantity For mid and high energies FOM peak is usually evident from the data Determine the maximum value of FOM for each detector as a starting point If no clear peak is visible or several peaks exist select a starting FOM value corresponding to a background value B similar to that of the other detectors Select the detector operating point as follows Test 1 Each background count does not differ by more than 30 from the mean value of all detectors Test 2 When the source to detector distance is the
240. ame Changing Conditions Period s Background Stability Factor ratio detector has a background count that is outside Background Stability Factor ratio Rate Check Over Full Background Rate Check Over Full Background Description This is the length of time used by iPCM12 to determine if a changing measurement condition exists Values 2 to 30 s Default 3 s The stabilization routine triggers when any single limits defined by the current average and these Background Stability Factors Tick this option to enable a rate check to occur during a full background count For more information regarding these options contact Thermo Fisher Scientific Select Set UplCalibration to customize the Calibration Parameters Default a Calibration Source Jig Alpha1 Default 8 Calibration Source Jig Chlorine1 Default y Calibration Source standard Calibration Required interval 0 days Calibration Wam Period 7 days Default Calibration Accuracy 5 Calibration Confidence 1 5 c 68269 Gas Flow Review Tolerance Apply Cancei Settings Changes Thermo Description of options Field Name Default Calibration Source Jig Default Calibration Source Jig Default yCalibration Source Calibration Required Interval days iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Description Use the pre defined window to select a Calibration Source Fixture Th
241. amp 2 Coincident outputs are on BNC connectors X15 amp X16 These connectors provide power supplies to the board and RS485 terminations X16 0V Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Circuitry Mains Power Module assembly 702947KJ The mains power supply is a proprietary high frequency switched mode 150 Watt converter The power module can accept a mains input of 85 V to 264 V 47 Hz to 63 Hz the output is between 12 and 18 V at a maximum of 8 33A The actual output voltage is controlled remotely by the 5703A or 5720A if fitted The power supply is capable of charging the battery at a maximum rate of 3 3 A up to 40 C This module contains AC Mains and dangerous DC switching voltages It should not be operated with the protective cover removed or the mains ground earth conductor disconnected It is not user serviceable and should be returned to Thermo Fisher s Service department for repair LCD Display and Controller I F amp Backlight Inverter Module Assembly D92583 A The LCD module is fitted with an integral Cold Cathode Fluorescent CCFL back light which is replaceable if found faulty The back light is driven from a proprietary inverter mounted in a small screened box within the display The inverter generates dangerous high voltages and RF interference frequencies and should not be operated outside the box or with the display li
242. an Instrument Maintenance Engineer Radiation Safety Officer local Competent Person Departmental Manager or any other Responsible Person The HEALTH PHYSICIST is the highest level security role uniquely responsible for setting and maintaining all lower order passwords The HP would normally be responsible for installing and setting up the iPCM12 calibrating for user defined nuclides programming operating parameters and verifying correct operation of the instrument The term TECHNICIAN is used to refer to the personnel who normally repair and maintain the instrument in working condition IMP personnel are designated to this role Personnel who are general users of the system and normally carry out routine diagnostic and test functions are allocated to the THERMOFISHER role The term USER refers to anybody associated with or operating the instrument in any way For more information on which menu options are available see Menu Roles page 5 6 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Introduction Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor The iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor is a Gas Flow Alpha Beta and optional Gamma whole body monitor based on the X Channel platform Its simplicity of operation reduces the amount of training necessary for users and maintenance personnel An Annunciator Screen audible prompts and
243. anEnabled l2 ROO 3 1 1 65 1 65 10 3 1 3 1 1 65 1 65 3 1 3 1 1 55 1 55 3 1 34 1 55 1 55 10000 30 iPCM User Manual 5 57 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 GasFlowSumZonesEnabled No High amp larmsEnabled No HighAlarrnsMultiplier ID Tirneout s 10 Instrument Contaminated No Language en GB Location Not Set Page 2 of 11 Events Report This report lists the Event History details between the selected Start and End dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Date Please note that the report below is an example and does not display all the information Event History EventTime Description Additional Info Category 08 07 2009 Recovered From Out Of Service Info 15 10 47 08 07 2009 Out of Service Recoverable Info 15 10 45 08 07 2009 High Background Conditions Info 15 10 45 Detected 08 07 2009 7 Instrument Parameters Info 14 50 37 Changed 08 07 2009 Recovered From Out Of Service Info 11 19 40 08 07 2009 Out of Service Recoverable Info 11 19 34 08 07 2009 Low Background TH A Info 11 19 34 07 07 2009 3 Instrument Parameters Info 11 28 25 Changed 07 07 2009 Recovered From Out Of Service Info 11 28 07 07 07 2009 Out of Service Recoverable Info 11 28 00 07 07 2009 Low Background TH A Info 11 28 00 07 07 2009 Recovered From Out Of Service Info 11 27 05 07 07 2009 Out of Service Recoverable Info 11 26 51 07 07 2009 Low Background TH A Info 11 26 51 07 07 200
244. ances where alarm levels up to an order of magnitude lower 0 04 Bq cn are required the alarm count rate C will be around 0 6 cps Although this level is theoretically achievable in practice only 4 Radon events reaching the detector will cause a false alarm The calculations in the instrument are based on a Gaussian model which is valid for gamma and beta measurements However the model used has variation which makes it a closer approximation of the Poisson distribution at the very low count rates associated with alpha measurements This is the probability of a false alarm occurring due to natural background fluctuations The Background B for each detector is continuously monitored on a 100 second rolling average represented by the sharply defined left hand peak in figure 6 10 It is centered about the average background B and is a relatively tight distribution since it is measured over 100 seconds statistically accurately known and thus has a relatively small effect on monitoring time However statistical background fluctuations during the relatively short often less than 10 seconds monitoring time are significant and likely to cause false alarms unless corrected for In figure 6 10 the wider left hand peak represents the distribution about the 5 cps average background B in the monitoring time T False alarm correction is achieved by the probability of false alarm factor F operating on the stored average back
245. ange 1200 to 2 200 Volts DC HV Resolution 5 Volts DC Default HV Setting 1 700 Volts DC 742 Methane in Argon P712 Current Limit Range 5 to 50 uA DC Default Current Limit 20 uA DC Output Protection 22 MQ Series impedance Indefinite Short Circuit 3 12 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Specification Gas Flow Amplifier The Gas Flow Quad Amplifier type 5704A has four identical Thresholds Amplifiers Each Amplifier channel has four programmable thresholds effectively creating four energy windows Threshold Range Step Default Setting 1 0 2000 mV mV 200 mV 2 0 2000 mV mV 1700 mV 3 0 2000 mV mV 2000 mV 4 0 2000 mV mV 2000 mV CAUTION ALTHOUGH ALL THRESHOLDS ARE ADJUSTABLE UNDER SOFTWARE CONTROL SPECIAL PASSWORD AUTHORIZATION IS REQUIRED AND ADJUSTMENT IS NOT RECOMMENDED BECAUSE THE CHANGE IN RESPONSE MAY COMPROMISE MONITORING INTEGRITY Scintillation HV Settings Operating voltages should normally be set up using the NBR Method page 9 6 although they may also be set up using the Figure of Merit FOM Method for Gamma Scintillation Detectors page 9 7 to yield the optimum Photomultiplier operating voltages These settings are determined and set using the HV Scan feature see CalibrationlHV Scan page 5 46 for additional information The recommended values based on the NBR optimization method can be found in the Calibration certif
246. ardless of the calculated Monitoring Time see explanations of Tea and Ton above The Maximum Monitoring Time is set in Monitoring page 5 12 Contamination Alarm Level variable unit is the activity level at which the user requires the alarm to be triggered The alarm level is set in Alarms page 5 18 and the units e g dpm Bq nCi may be selected in UI Options page 5 8 Contamination Alarm Count rate cps is the count rate at which the user requires the alarm to be triggered It is equivalent to the Contamination Alarm Level set by the Administrator modified by the system Efficiency Correction Factor E Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific DL Technical Description Physics Effective Alarm Count rate cps is the effective net count rate at which the iPCM12 normal alarm is triggered The Contamination Alarm Count rate is modified to take account of the monitoring time background statistical fluctuation and user programmed Probability of Detection This ensures the Alarm set point reflects the measurement certainty required The current Effective Alarm count rate may be viewed in Information page 5 26 The Ceffect calculation is detailed in Contamination Alarm page 6 16 Probability of False Alarm is the probability that a false alarm does not occur during a measuring sequence The value of F in terms of sigma is set in Detection Options page 5 16 where
247. arentheses Values 0 to 10 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 1 65 5 18 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarms Select Set UplAlarms to select the Active Calibration Stream and set the alarms Operating Instructions Am 2 i Stream E Active a Calibration 24 Uncalibrated Active B Calibration Active Calibration Cobalt 60 Active Co60 Calibration Cobalt 60 B ry Co60 Calibration Nuclide Uncatbrated xed _4 Make Ac ie t nit Alam pa B Alam ks Body F Enabe 5 F Enable Hands 0 F Enable 10 F Enable Feet Bs Ensbie 2 Enable y Alarm Ba 80 Alarm Body r Enable 0 Enable Hands 0 Enable 0 Enable Feet Enable Enable Centroid 5 T Enable 0 Enable Apply Cancel Settings Changes 5 EU Description of options Field Name Calibration Nuclide Alarm for Body Hands Feet Description These values display if they are selected in the Detection Options page 5 17 Select a Radiation Type in order to activate a Calibration Use the direction arrows to change the Calibration type When the type is correct select the Make Activate button A description of the Calibration Type displays in the field below This is the detected activity at which 12 will indicate an Alar
248. ary serial interface device also mounted in a small screened box within the display Four USB sockets are provided on the base of the assembly Neither the display nor the backlight inverter nor the controller are user serviceable and should be returned to the Thermo Fisher Service department for repair iPCM12C Option GPIO Controller Card 5707A This is an X Channel device that controls and monitors ingress and egress PFCs doors barriers or turnstiles The board is split into two logical halves to control two PFCs with I Os 0 1 2 3 allocated to PFCO and I Os 4 5 6 7 allocated to PFC 1 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 7 9 Technical Description Circuitry Issue 2 0 PLOS 09 Barrier Door Closed Transit Door Closed Closed Open Detected Limit SW PLO8 PLO9 Barrier Lock Lock Tellback IP2 6 PLOS PLO9 Panic Panic Panic Panic _ UN LUN LN pins 7 and 8 Request Request Request Request Relay 1 PLA PL5 Door Open Pin2 Door Unlock Forward Door Unlock pins 1 and 2 Barrier Unlock Drive ve Relay 2 PL4 PLS Pin5 Freewheel Power Assist pins 4 5 6 Barrier Open Mili Drive ve Relay3 PLA PL5 Reverse pins 7 8 9 Unlock POWER PLI pin 1 and PL1 pin 2 X PL6 10 way channel IDC Al FHT68 1s General Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Considerations The overall construction is designed to minimize the effects of mains and airborne interference and emissions pins 1 2
249. ase for later review Only those numerical values that are in excess of the MDA are stored The activity is calculated using the following formula R m B Act Act E mix where Ra refers to the activity in the selected unit For a single nuclide mix Emix Enuc However where the user has created a mix with multiple nuclides E nix where E is the efficiency of the system to a specific nuclide Pauc is the proportion of the specific nuclide within the total mix The uncertainty of the activity measurement is calculated as follows iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 17 Technical Description Physics Quickscan Quick Background Co 60 Window Monitoring Issue 2 0 Ry N conf ef gross T mix tp T non where is the number of confidence levels Quickscan applies to beta and gamma measurements only Quickscan is a method used to identify within the monitoring time Tmon Whether the user is either obviously contaminated or clear referred to as real dirty or real clean Quickscan is enabled in Detection Options page 5 17 It is only activated when Tmon gt Tmin It will never be activated if the alpha monitoring time is greater than or equal to the beta and or gamma monitoring time The Quickscan period is the time period after the beginning of the monitoring cycle at which the first time slice check is undertaken Subsequently
250. at this message is user definable See Messages page 5 24 for more information See Cancel Alarm page 5 93 for more information on clearing the alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 89 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 If the measurement is complete and the Low Background Limit RES is exceeded or when Quick Scan indicates real dirty the Contaminated message display i indicating that contamination is PERENA present Facing In Facing Out If the measurement completes and the y Low Background Limit is exceeded or when Quick Scan indicates real dirty the Contaminated message will display indicating that contamination is present y Result See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal A A instructions Facing In Facing Out Note that this message is user definable See Messages page 5 24 for more information See Cancel Alarm page 5 93 for more information on clearing the alarms 5 90 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Alarm Display Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions If the measurement completes and the Low Background Limit is exceeded or when Quick Scan indicates real dirty the Contaminated message will display indicating that contamination is present Cobalt Result See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for
251. ate 5 69 Configuration Report 5 56 D Data Retention 5 65 Date Functions 5 3 Description 2 1 Detection Options 5 16 Detector Indicator 5 68 Detectors 5 24 Determining the operating voltage for mid high energy nuclides 9 7 DL 6 11 E E 6 11 Efficiencies 5 33 Emergency Mode 5 100 Establishing a new Background 5 73 Events Report 5 58 Exiting the Administration Mode 5 8 F F 6 11 Figure of Merit FOM method for gamma scintillation detectors 9 8 File Location Functions 5 3 Five Light System 5 68 Foot Detector 1 11 19 G Gaining Access to the Administration Mode 5 4 Gamma Body Average Efficiency 3 6 Gas Flow 5 21 5 32 5 98 iPCM User Manual 11 Index H 1 2 iPCM User Manual Gas Flow Detector Standard Grille Beta BodyAverage Efficiency Typical 4 3 6 Guidance System 5 69 H Hand Detector 1 11 19 Hand Foot and Head 3 6 Horizontal Scans 6 5 HVGen 5 30 HV Scan 5 41 IDS Camera 5 49 Information 5 26 Instrument Contaminated 5 95 Introduction 1 1 L Lamps 5 29 M Maa 612 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 11 1 Menu Roles 5 6 Messages 5 24 Monitoring 5 12 Monitoring Area 3 10 Moving through the Menus 5 5 N NBR method 9 8 Non recoverable 5 97 Normal Background Monitoring 5 75 Notes regarding Changing Background 5 78 Notes regarding High Background 5 99 Notes regarding Low Background 5 99 Notes regarding Monitoring 5 88 Notes regarding No
252. ated background For gamma counts this is evaluated for each second background count It will remain in this state until the background count rate once again exceeds the threshold on all detectors Emergency Mode Emergency Mode is displayed if the system is put into Emergency Mode Emergency Mode Out Of Service If the portal is entered during the Emergency Mode the Please leave the Portal message is Emergency Mode displayed See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions Out Of Service 5 100 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Battery Mains Supply Indicator On the main screen an icon is displayed on the bottom edge of the screen which indicates whether the iPCM12 is running on battery or mains supply as follows 1 Indicates that the iPCM12 is running on battery See Battery page 5 31 for more information regarding Battery Status including remaining battery life N This icon indicates that the iPCM12 is running on UJ mains supply Switch Off Only an Administrator is able to exit the iPCM12 application see Actions page 5 62 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 101 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 6 Introduction Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Technical Description Physics Performance Characteristics The iPCM12 utilises 21 identical large gas flow de
253. ator is necessary to clear the message Panic Button has been Pressed Out Of Service Following an abandonment if the RCC after Abandoned Measurement option is ticked Residual Contamination Count see Operation page 5 11 the Residual Contamination Count is performed see Residual Contamination Check page 5 108 4 SECONDS REMAINING 5 100 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions If the user does not fully exit the portal on completion of measurement the Exit message Exit displays See Voice Prompts page 5 85 Please Leave the Portal for information regarding verbal instructions Out Of Service Background Change during If a change in background is Measurement detected during a measurement the user is instructed to exit the Exit portal A new background check is Changing Conditions required before monitoring can resume See Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring page 5 92 New Background Check Required Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 101 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Monitoring Result An example of the result screen displays below Headline 1 Cancel Alarm Result Type a p or y Result Cancel Alarm E LN IN Detector Alarm ENE SER Indicator s LT LAW IL pani Facing In Facing Out User Instr
254. ayed the user must exit the portal Exit Please Leave the Portal Ready Clear ole After an ALARM result the alarm will sound for the length of time set in Alarm Duration after Exit see UI Options page 5 8 Once the user has successfully vacated the portal the Ready message is displayed Ready Clear Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Out Of Service Non recoverable If the Switch On tests fail or a failure is detected during normal operation the Out of Service Out Of Service Critical Error message is displayed note that the reason for the error may be displayed in the message bar at the bottom of A Critical Error Has Occurred the screen See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions To clear this error the state must be cleared in the Administration Mode or will clear automatically g when the Out of Service Recovery Interval is passed see Operation page 5 10 for more information Out Of Service See Actions page 5 62 for more information regarding clearing the Critical Error Temporary Error If a High Background event see Notes regarding High Background page 5 99 or Low Out Of Service Background Count Rate see Notes regarding Low Background page 5 99 is detected the Out of Service A Temporary Error Has Occurred Background Error During this state normal backgro
255. ays and the iPCM12 reverts to Background mode Ready Clear However if residual contamination is detected or the count rate from any detector INSTRUMENT CONTAMINATED exceeds 9596 of the Amplifier dead time then an Instrument Contaminated state exists The INSTRUMENT CONTAMINATED DO NOT USE message displays see Instrument Contaminated page 5 110 for more information Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 109 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If the portal is entered during the Residual Contamination Check the WARNING Preparing for Warn Ing Contamination Check message displays Preparing For Contamination Check See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions Once the Portal is exited the Residual Contamination Count recommences Instrument Contaminated If the Instrument is contaminated it is not possible to use the portal and background monitoring is INSTRUMENT CONTAMINATED suspended Intervention by an Administrator is necessary to clear the contamination See Actions page 5 78 for more information regarding clearing the Contamination Out Of Service Once the contamination has been cleared and User Mode is re instated the iPCM12 performs the System Self Testing see Start up Checks page 5 87 5 110 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scient
256. beam apertures in the black plastic tread plate nearest you 3 Lift the tread plate up a short distance and tilting the Top of Foot detector backwards lift the tread plate over the central foot sensor housing and clear of the foot plinth The foot detectors are now exposed 4 Prior to lifting out the foot detectors remove any debris that may have collected a small portable vacuum is ideal 5 Lift out the foot detector and place it upside down on the adjacent foot detector to protect the window foil Note foot photobeam sensor cable connections prior to disconnecting Foot detectors are serviced as described in the general procedure above Refitting and connection of the foot detectors is the reverse of the removal procedure Ensure that e Photobeam sensor connections are correct e Allexcess cable is securely tucked into the cable tidy e Nocables are trapped under the detector mountings 11 20 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Replacing Gas Flow Detectors Windows Configuring a Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Detector Maintenance and Trouble Shooting e Gas pipes are not trapped under the detector or kinked e The detector sits flat on its mounting tabs it should not rock 1 Ina dust free environment lay the defective detector on a flat work surface so that the window is uppermost 2 Remove the 14 countersunk screws retaining the
257. c iPCM User Manual 5 77 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 If more than 15 minutes of continuous operation have elapsed since Normal Updating Background Background Monitoring has commenced iPCM12 will acquire a new background and the Updating Background 8 Seconds Remaining message is displayed Ready Clear Notes regarding Changing When changing background has been detected or the Background instrument does not have a valid background e g at System Startup the system establishes a new background radiation measurement Each 1 second Background count for each detector is checked against user defined statistical limits for variance from the stored average for that channel If the count is acceptable it is incorporated into the stored average otherwise the stored average for all channels is discarded the blue Alarm lamp will light and Updating Background Please Wait message is displayed while a fresh 100 second Background is accumulated see Background Update page 6 12 for more information Note If Quick Background is selected the length of time taken to acquire a new background will be much shortened see Operation page 5 10 Personnel Monitoring Entering the Portal iPCMI2 can be configured with the following options to control how personnel use the portal see Operation page 5 10 for further information e Isa User ID Required see User ID page 5 79 e Isa in
258. c open cabinet described above to form the Closed Booth Cabinet type 57194 utilized by the iPCM12 and variants It is a sturdy sheet metal folded and welded fabrication with an industrial lightly textured powder coat paint finish to match the basic open cabinet It contains structural fixings to accommodate the lead shielding for gamma detector options and for the powered door and barrier options The iPCM12 variant incorporates the optional cabinet extension forming a Closed cubicle to accommodate a variety of additional Personnel Flow Control PFC options Simple powered swing barriers and full height powered door options can be fitted in any combination controlling user entry to and egress from the monitor thus providing restricted and directional personnel flow control See Option Codes page 1 4 for range of PFC options The iPCM12 variant incorporates the optional cabinet extension forming a Closed cubicle and additionally the Full Body Gamma Option Kit AE0222A Plastic Scintillation detectors are located in the front of the cabinet behind the gas flow body detectors in the service door behind the hand mechanism in the overhead location and beneath the right gas flow foot detector scintillation detectors are shielded on the back and all sides with 10 mm 3 8 of lead shielding The whole closed booth instrument sits on a base tray containing 20 mm 3 4
259. ce a mean background count rate has been calculated the iPCM12 will be ready to monitor users the Minimum Detectable Count Rate also referred to as the detection limit DL is found by solving the following formula for DL Therefore Mact BE Zac E B B B B DL 1 1 DI F L4 9 P _ 4 F P 4 where is the activity unit Detectable Activity and Detection Limit may be viewed on the Information sub menu see Information page 5 29 and will be displayed in the units selected in UI Options page 5 9 NOTE MDA may differ from the Alarm level because Tmon is rounded up Tmin May take effect Changing conditions apply to beta and gamma measurements only During the monitoring cycle the monitoring time is subdivided into time slices Each sum of the count rates on all detectors in a slice is compared to the average count rate in the cycle up to that point Changing Conditions exist where the following formula is satisfied Ca Cui gt Ny Cav where is the rolling average count rate within the monitoring cycle up to the point of the check Cy is the counts registered in the last time slice Ng is the Changing Conditions variable see Monitoring page 5 14 It is not recommended that N should be set below 3 00 The first Changing Conditions check will take place after 2T and then after every second within the monitoring c
260. check for residual contamination if this occurs unexpectedly or persists The lower and more stable the background field the more sensitive stable and accurate user measurements will be A Background Attenuation compensation factor facility is provided This factor compensates for the attenuation and or scatter of background radiation caused by an operator when in the monitoring position 3 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Specification Gas Flow Detectors All iPCM12 A B and C variants are fitted with alpha and beta sensitive large area Gas Flow Detectors as standard All detectors are internally sub divided into four individual Quad detection channels and protected by a separate external protective grille Additionally a number of Scintillation detector AE Option Kits can be fitted to give the iPCM12 gamma detection capability Gas Flow Quad Detector Type 5710A A single size Gas Flow Quad Detector type 5710A is used to monitor all parts of the body A Quad Amplifier type 5704A is mounted directly on the back of the detector body Common features of the 5710A Quad Gas Flow Detector are Overall External Body Dims Total Active Area Quadrant Active Area Mylar Window Foil Density Mylar Window Foil Thickness Standard Rugged Square Grille 468 x 181 x 50 mm inc Window and Amp 445 x 160 mm 712cm 111 x 160 mm 178cm 0 9 mg cm al
261. cintillation Counters Hand Foot and Head Body Array Overall Body Average Response Gas Flow Detector Standard 3 6 Grille Beta BodyAverage Efficiency Typical 4 Gamma Body Average Efficiency iPCM User Manual Type Construction Thickness Area Photomultiplier Shielding Energy Response Type Construction Thickness Area Photomultiplier Shielding Energy Response Issue Beta Issue 1 5708A Large area rectangular cuboid scintillation counter using a plastic phosphor type NE110 equivalent wrapped in foil and plastic 2 25 57 mm 160 mm x 520 832 cm 1 25 mm extended cathode 20 mm of aged lead on all external faces 20 keV upwards minimum detectable depends on liner material 5717 Large area rectangular surfaces with a trapezoid profile scintillation counter using a plastic phosphor type NE110 equivalent wrapped in foil and plastic 2 25 57 mm largest surface 325 mm x 550 mm 1 25 mm extended cathode 20 mm of aged lead on all external faces 20 keV upwards minimum detectable depends on liner material The Body Average Efficiency 50 mm as defined by IEC 61098 is a useful measure 36C 36 Co Co ac 60 Co 410 4 4 4 4 4 9 2 without summing approx 11 5 with summing approx 5 5 without summing approx 6 8 with summing approx 2 3 without summing approx
262. circuit of the 5710A detector Alternatively utilize the Hot spare detector 3 Unfasten earthing straps 4 Each detector is retained with two Velcro straps which must be released when withdrawing the detector Replace detector with Hot spare if required Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Overhead Detector Foot Detectors 2 Repairing Gas Flow Detectors with Leaks Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting This is located facing downwards in the overhead plinth It is retained only by Velcro For removal proceed as previously 1 Disconnect the HT lead red and network cables yellow 2 Using the blue Festo test tubing bypass the gas circuit of the 5710A detector Alternatively utilize the Hot spare detector 3 Unfasten earthing straps 4 Each detector is retained with two Velcro straps which must be released when withdrawing the detector Replace detector with Hot spare if required Open outwards the array detector panelling to gain clear access to the foot plinth Unscrew two countersunk screws on the plastic retainer and lift this off over the toe sensor pod Lift out each foot detector for servicing 1 Disconnect the HT lead red network cables yellow and sensor wiring red black blue 2 Using the blue Festo test tubing bypass the gas circuit of the 5710A detector Alternatively utilize the Hot spare detector 3 Each detect
263. configurable measurement types are used in conjunction with a back lit touch screen LCD and distinctive audible tones to make controlled monitoring fast and simple The iPCM12 uses up to 23 quad detector gas flow detectors giving a maximum of 92 detector channels Each channel will have 4 discriminator thresholds associated with it and 5 counter channels one for each discriminator and an extra one for coincidence counting Each gas flow detector will be serviced by a single XChannel board featuring 4 amplifier channels one for each section of the detector The electronics are housed in a compartment on the right hand side of the instrument for easy maintenance Version A is the Open unit type and Version B is the Closed unit type Version C is the Closed unit type plus the Gamma option This includes an additional 9 scintillation detectors which are serviced by five FHT681 amplifiers as used in the PM12 Measurement results are displayed on a portrait oriented LCD monitor The instrument is fitted with sensors which identify when the user enters or leaves the sensitive part of the instrument and seven position sensors to determine when a user is in the correct monitoring position When the instrument is occupied the instrument suspends background updating and initiates the contamination survey The alarming algorithm in the iPCM12 ensures the maintenance of a user selected Minimum Detectable Activity MDA regardless of backg
264. crease the volume and to the right to increase the volume To test the volume press the loudspeaker icon See Notes Regarding Volume Levels page 5 80 To change the Date press the Date field and select a date Note that the format of the date depends on the Language type selected in the Options screen see UI Options page 5 9 Select the Apply Settings button to save To change the Time use the Up Down buttons to change the hours and minutes Select the Apply Settings button to save To change the Time Zone press the Time Zone field and select a time zone from the pre defined list Select the Apply Settings button to save Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 79 Operating Instructions Notes Regarding Volume Levels Version Passwords Issue 2 0 For guidance 85dBA is obtained at about 35 volume control level and 100dBA at 100 volume control level Select SystemlVersion to view EIE the File version information Be Se including the iPCM12 Issue and PCM 12 Version 15 Database Version 34 Version numbers Select SystemlPasswords to change the passwords for the current User Level and levels below Change Password Select User and enter a new password Select User Health Physicist Enter Password Confirm Password Cance There are three levels of user Health Physicist Technician and ThermoFisher The iPCM12 is supplied with
265. ct the Active button XChannel Select Set Up XChannel to EC configure the XChannel een em Note that the following message E Detector Sytem lain is displayed while node data is Unallocated Nodes Ce a being collected NoComecho Big Collecting node data Please wat B H B E a g Release As each node is selected its data EB B H is displayed Wy Node Name SH A A C Enabled Address 34 x Enabled 7 Node Name Apply Cancel Settings Changes LONE Thermo Note that this section is set by at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 19 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Battery Select Set Up Battery to oS configure the Battery Charger 02700 lt Discharge Timeout 60 5 Max Charge Current 15 A Min Discharge Voltage 0 v Apply Cancel Settings Changes Note that this section is set by at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Description of options Field Name Description Discharge Timeout This is the amount of time after the battery Secs discharges to the minimum discharge voltage before the charger turns off the output power If the charger is already running on battery power the value of the timeout will not e changed The timer can only be stopped if the mains power is
266. cted the operating mode is set by a defined priority structure from the BDE with the highest priority The priority and the code shown in the following table apply to the operating mode whereby BDE2 52 and BDE1 S1 represent the two input terminals of the control unit J7 1 J7 2 p c b BDE M for the mechanical BDE L interruption or OV H 24V Mechanical BDI toggle switch Electronic BDE D BDE2 S2 BDE1 S1 Function Priority 1 highest locked one way continuously open manual automatic The BDE D indicates the current operating mode If an operating mode is set on the BDE D which has no current priority the status message 62 is displayed Reset button After pushing for approx 5 sec a new start of the control is performed software reset After the reset the LED lights up permanently Status signal Remains off if no fault is present Will blink if a fault is present see status and fault signals chapter 8 Does light up permanently during a reset Page 8 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Operating instructions 5 2 Auxiliary controls on the control unit STG 127 General The CONTROL UNIT STG 127 operates with active HIGH level i e a 24 V level must be applied to activate a function Safety inputs are activated during interrup tions The signal ground OV is connected to protective earth Jumpers J14 Master Slave jump
267. cting node data Please wat BERE a q roni Refresh As each node is selected its data BEBH displays Node Name E Ww Node Name SH A A 0 Address 34 Enabled Show Apply Cancel Controllers Settings Changes Press the y option to display the Detector System a6 gamma detectors Connected Ill No Connection BI Disatwed O Edid A Node Name SCA1 Address 21 Enabled Show Apply Cancel Controllers Settings Changes 5 20 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Battery Operating Instructions Press the Show Controllers button to view the Controllers A ERAT details Door Controller ID Annunciator 1 ID Annunciator 2 ID low ance Amplifiers Refresh Settee Select Set UplBattery to m CE EE configure the Battery Charge BERGE GH Discharge Timeout 60 s Max Charge Current 15 A Min Discharge Voltage 10 v Cancel Settings Changes NOTE This section is set at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Description of options Field Name Description Discharge Timeout s This is the amount of time after the battery discharges to the minimum discharge voltage before the charger turns off the output power If the charger is already running on battery power the valu
268. ctor Operating Parameters EN Detector HV Selection etes nene tuac Derivation of the Optimum Operating Voltage essere 9 5 Setting the Gas Flow detector High Voltage 9 10 Gas System eerie 9 10 Gas Supply aute Tapeten ds 9 10 Leakage Checks ores oodd tovtov D Re deep haat Rom nU deter 9 10 Gas flow parametets 2 eer ente ere e hen e d lan ote ette ede de ee edens 9 11 Purge and Operational Flow eese 9 11 Calibration Procedure 2 da rk uaa icri uc 10 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual ix Contents Chapter 11 Issue Beta Issue 1 jer Tiioco BEI P Equipment Required eee eese teen Preparation for Calibration for Other Nuclides S Calibration mixes 3 rei rete eret cn es Cen eee ea esie Pede ee res epa eese dana dh Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Fault Messages POWET UP SCTEGIS eed oto oie ibt teet
269. cussion is intended to draw attention to the issues involved their consequences and practical solutions These scenarios are similar for most common nuclide types and energies but particularly acute in the case of low energy betas A statistical demonstration program available from Thermo Fisher Scientific provides numerical solutions to given 6 22 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Alpha amp Beta on Hands amp Feet Beta on Body Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics conditions and also gives a graphical representation which is a valuable aid to understanding the effects and interactions of parameters Detector efficiency and averaging area are the variables that affect the Alarm set point count rate C above background For beta emitters C Alarm activity per unit area x averaging area x detection efficiency 47 Using the efficiency values from Specification page 3 1 and the US alarm limit 9 Co on C 0 83 Bq cm x 100cm 5 5 4 6 cps Body 4n Consider the graphical representation in Figure 13 The body alarm level of 4 6 cps is the centre of the right hand distribution at 9 6 cps 4 6 cps above the average 5 cps background The hands and feet are in defined positions and in contact with the detector surface and so it is perfectly legitimate to use contact efficiencies when calculating alarm levels values used should be t
270. d 12V for system from unregulated battery backed DC power Reference to General Assembly D92591 and family tree D92425 shows the interconnections between the main iPCM12A modules Electronic display chassis assembly D92520 A see Electronic Display Chassis D92520 A page 7 2 The processing center for the iPCM12 includes the power management circuitry Guidance display assemblies 5711A and 5672A see 5711A Guidance Display and 5672A LED Cluster Indicator page 7 7 This includes LED cluster indicators Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 7 1 Technical Description Circuitry Issue 2 0 e Sensor assemblies and interconnections Gas flow sensor data is produced by flow sensors on the 5709A gas control board that is connected via the auxiliary X channel2 Bus cabling Positioning sensors are powered and monitored via adjacent 5704A detector electronics and data is communicated via the primary X channel2 cabling e Detector assemblies 5710A see 5710A Gas Flow Counter and 5704A Quad Amplifier page 7 6 Each rectangular gas flow detector has four discrete detector regions each wired to the quad amp board mounted on the rear of the detector housing e Touch screen color graphics LCD assembly D92583 A is mounted on the rear of the Electronics display chassis making the display easily visible to the user standing inside the iPCM12 see LCD Display and Controller I F and Backli
271. d page 5 110 Automatic Calculation of The Calibration technique see Calibration Menu page 5 38 Calibration Monitoring uses flash 10 second background and source counts to Time automatically calculate the count time for the user The Calibration Accuracy and the associated confidence level are set in Calibration page 5 16 The count confidence level has a default setting of 3o 99 7 which is a generally accepted Confidence level that produces acceptable count times Then Calibration Count Time where Nor 3 Count Confidence Level of 99 7 Flash source background Count cps b Flash Background Count cps A Calibration Accuracy ratio e g 5 0 05 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 19 Technical Description Physics Assumptions Issue 2 0 The calculated count time is rounded up to the nearest whole second and T is limited to 10 000 seconds T N n nb conf A2 n pp Sec s Calculation of Alarm Levels This section describes the Calculation of Alarm Levels for Parameter data entry Alarm levels may be set in terms of activity or count rate cps To calculate the Alarm Levels in terms of count rate the following assumptions are made The surface emission rate of the clothing or body is assumed to be half of the activity This will only be true for a perfect source with zero backscatter and self absorption In practice the operator may wish t
272. d Mylar light tight window foil on the front sensitive surface A charge sensitive quad channel amplifier is mounted directly onto the back of the detector body This single size of detector is used to monitor all areas of the body so a single purged spare iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 17 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting General Gas Flow Detector Replacement Procedure Issue 2 0 detector located inside the service door will service all detector locations WARNING THE FRONT WINDOW FOIL IS NECESSARILY THIN AND THEREFORE EASILY DAMAGED AND PUNCTURED HANDLE WITH CARE AT ALL TIMES USE A PROTECTIVE WINDOW COVER e g CARDBOARD WHEN TRANSPORTING DETECTORS WHEN FITTING REPLACEMENT DETECTORS TAKE CARE THAT CABLES CONNECTORS EMC STRAPS AND OTHER SHARP OBJECTS DO NOT PUNCTURE THE WINDOW FOIL CAPACITIVE DIELECTRIC ABSORPTION EFFECTS CAN CAUSE HV REGENERATION SUBSEQUENT TO INITIAL DISCHARGE WHEN REMOVING DETECTORS FIT AN HV SHORTING LINK LOCATED ON THE SPARE DETECTOR INSIDE THE SERVICE DOOR TO DISCHARGE THE HV CONNECTOR VIA THE DETECTOR BODY SECURED BY THE KNURLED KNOB 1 Before servicing detectors shut down the iPCM12 and switch OFF the power Allow several minutes for the HV to discharge before handling 2 Prepare a purged spare detector Ensure the replacement detector is thoroughly purged of air and contains a good charge of gas window foil gently plumped
273. d is maintained at all times particularly when replacing parts and during servicing Earthing is particularly important for continued EMC and Safety performance Hard earthing of the mains inlet filter assembly and LCD display tail the HV Amplifier FHT681 screening can and the frame earth are particularly important Refer to the relevant Servicing instructions for details The instrument should only be operated with all earthing connections securely made and all screening covers fitted iPCM User Manual 7 11 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 8 iPCM12 Mounting Arrangement Battery Charge state Thermo Fisher Scientific Routine Checks Routine Checks This section describes the routine checks required to ensure the correct operation of the iPCM12 Most mechanical and electronic failures if they occur will become apparent during normal operation and do not require checking Therefore they are not included in this section Mechanical Checks During calibration or more frequently if required check any mechanical structure on which the iPCM12 may be mounted The iPCM12C with the gamma option kit includes 1cm and 2cm areas of shadow lead shielding is very heavy Mounting arrangements including the base spreader plate should be inspected for signs of deterioration instability or any other factor which may affect safety of operation or maintenance If any such defect is suspected the iPCM12 should be withdrawn from serv
274. d produces a single 18 Volt DC output at 8 Amps 150 Watts The PSU is located on a mounting plate for easy service exchange and is fitted with a proprietary safety cover The AC mains terminals are shrouded by a metal cover which also incorporates the AC mains ON OFF power switch A green LED visible through the case indicates that AC voltage is present and DC output voltage is being generated The DC output is internally fused WARNING THIS AC MAINS POWER SUPPLY CONTAINS DANGEROUS AC MAINS AND HIGH DC SWITCHING VOLTAGE WITHIN THE SCREENING COVERS REFER TO THE WARNINGS IN MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING PAGE 11 1 DO NOT REMOVE THE METAL SCREENS WITH THE AC VOLTAGE APPLIED THIS IS A PROPRIETARY UNIT AND IS NOT USER SERVICEABLE 2 8 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Description Battery Controller PCB Battery Controller Board type 5703A manages the 5703A charging of a 12 volt sealed lead acid battery The 5703A Battery Controller operates on the early X Channel 1 bus and is fitted to early iPCM12 A Open units only It manages charging of the smaller 17 A hr battery only The 5703A will be superseded by the enhanced heavy duty 5720A on all later iPCM12 variants The whole electronics system is powered from the 5703A board which constantly senses the charge discharge state of the battery and controls the charging voltage accordingly The charging voltag
275. d removed The LCD is controlled via a proprietary serial interface device also mounted in a small screened box within the display Four USB sockets are provided on the base of the assembly Neither the display or the back light inverter or the controller are user serviceable and should be returned to Thermo Fisher s Service department for repair iPCM User Manual 7 9 Technical Description Circuitry 7 10 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 IPCM12C option GPIO Controller Card 5707A This is an X channel device which enables the operating system to monitor and control the variant with powered door and barrier arm Up to eight isolated inputs and outputs are available IP4 PLO8 pin 1 amp Door CLOSED status 1 5 PL08 pin 3 amp Door OPEN status PLO8 pin 4 IPO PLO9 pin 1 amp Barrier status DOWN PL09 pin 2 RELAY PL09 pin 3 amp Barrier status UP FOR __ RELAY 4 PL5 pin 2 amp Door control OPEN CLOSED EA imss INTERLOCK PL13 pin 4 amp Emergency OPEN POWER PLI pin 1 amp Barrier power X channel A Current limited supply FHT681s available Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Circuitry General Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Considerations The overall construction is designed to minimise the effects of mains and airborne interference and emissions It is therefore vital that the construction standar
276. d to ascertain the efficiency and zz functionality of the iPCM12 g A A S SP Oabe Bag Detector 10055 B 2 9 2 38 48 01 01 0 44 54 01 01 0 35 361 01 01 0 36 47 0 0 0 Au eno EE Save To Led PCM 12 actore ovar epeciied Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 25 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 To Start the Timed Counts for the Detectors 1 Select the Detector System Alpha Beta or Gamma 1 Select the number of counts to be averaged by selecting a value in the Average Over field If you require a Continuous count to be made tick the Continuous box 2 Toggle between the Thresholds and Windows display by clicking on the relevant radio button Then further select from the options displayed Select a Window type from the list displayed 4 Press Start button The counts may be halted at any time by pressing the Stop button The results can also be saved by pressing the Save to File button and then selecting an directory and file name to save Information Select Diagnostics Information to Gj REL E EL EI view the current Measurement 239 gt Measurement Detector Information EDS Sum Zone Periods Total Measurement 52 s Background 200 Measurement 1 s MDA 0 Effieciency NaN d e Description of options Field Name Description Meas
277. described in LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement page 11 15 3 Ifthe voltage is absent across the pins of PL7 a fault on the Controller board is indicated and it should be replaced as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 If the iPCM12 starts and runs but will not accept a valid password a fault is indicated either in the LCD Touch pad or the Controller board Proceed to LCD Keypad Inoperative or Not Aligned page 11 33 If the iPCM12 starts and runs but will not respond to password entry or returns incorrect characters on the LCD display a fault is likely in the processor board or possibly the touch keypad Proceed as follows 1 Check the cable connections between the Touch screen keypad and the processor board If uncertain try a replacement cable to isolate fault 2 Similarly check the touch control board by replacement 3 If unsuccessful temporarily plug a spare LCD assembly into the control board If this solves the problem the original Touch pad is faulty and should be replaced as described in LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement page 11 15 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 33 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Will not Enter Background Mode Or Locked in Background Mode Locked in Measurement Mode USB Output Data Is Corr
278. detector carefully chosen to suit optimum measurement geometry is used to monitor all parts of the body The single detector size allows an optional on board purged spare to service any detector in the system and reduces spares inventory Detectors are retained with Velcro straps and all gas and electrical connections are manual so detector changing requires no tools A simple O ring seal and disposable pre foiled window carrier makes replacement of damaged windows quick easy and reliably gas tight The detector body is machined from an aluminium extrusion and the window support plate is laser cut and secured with screws Detector windows are protected by a separate rugged square mesh grille or optionally by a high transmission hex grille The large 712 cm detector active area is internally sub divided into effectively four separate detectors quad channel each 178 cm The separate anode wire of each detection channel is connected to the input of a charge sensitive Quad Amplifier type 5704A mounted directly on the back of the detector body A centrally generated high voltage distributed to each detector anode and a low pressure low flow Argon Methane gas mixture are used to produce ionization charge amplification Up to 24 Quad detectors can be fitted creating up to 96 individual counting zones and therefore generating 192 measurements alpha and beta for the whole body WARNING THE 5710A DETECTOR CONTAINS
279. dified by the system Efficiency Correction Factor E iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 11 Technical Description Physics 6 12 DL iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 Effective Alarm Count rate cps is the effective net count rate at which the iPCM12 normal alarm is triggered The Contamination Alarm Count rate is modified to take account of the monitoring time background statistical fluctuation and user programmed Probability of Detection This ensures the Alarm set point reflects the measurement certainty required The current Effective Alarm count rate may be viewed in Information page 5 29 The calculation is detailed in Contamination Alarm page 6 17 Probability of False Alarm is the probability that a false alarm does not occur during a measuring sequence The value of F in terms of sigma is set in Detection Options page 5 17 where the associated probability is shown alongside in parenthesis The value is usually set as high as possible so that false alarms do not occur e g one false alarm in a hundred measurements is a probability of 99 2 4 see Table 1 Probability Sigma and page 6 22 Probability of Detection o is the probability that exactly one Alarm Level of contamination will cause an alarm The value of P in terms of sigma is set in Detection Options page 5 17 where the associated probability is shown alongside i
280. drawing D92620 WARNING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY IT IS IMPORTANT TO INSTALL THE MAINS ON OFF SWITCH CLOSE TO THE EQUIPMENT IN EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR IT SHOULD BE LABELLED AS THE SYSTEM DISCONNECTING DEVICE WARNING ENSURE THE MAINS CABLE IS ISOLATED FROM THE MAINS AT SOURCE AND THE iPCMI2 POWER SWITCH IS IN THE O OFF POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE MAINS INLET iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 4 7 Unpacking and Installation Gas Mixture Gas Connections Issue 2 0 The remaining end of the mains cable should be wired using the following color code BROWN LIVE BLUE NEUTRAL GREEN YELLOW EARTH The BROWN wire must be connected to the LIVE or red terminal The BLUE wire must be connected to the N NEUTRAL or black terminal The GREEN YELLOW wire must be connected to the EARTH GROUND or green yellow terminal WARNING THE iPCMI2 MUST AT NO TIME BE OPERATED WITHOUT THE GREEN YELLOW WIRE CONNECTED TO THE MAINS EARTH Refer to Operating Instructions page 5 1 before switching on 1 12 GAS System Installation The iPCM12 requires Supply and Exhaust connection for the counting gas supply The iPCM12 requires a counting gas supply in one of the following mixtures e 5 5 Methane 95 Argon Non flammable e 7 amp 7 5 Methane 92 5 Argon Non flammable recommended e P10 10 Methane 90 Argon e 10 Carbon dioxide 90 A
281. e page 5 112 the system automatically clears the error after the Out of Service Recovery Interval has passed Select 0 to disable the Recovery Interval Values 0 to 60 mins Default 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Field Name Description Quick Scan Period s This option may be enabled to allow real dirty or real clean to be identified before end of monitoring period Also see Quick Scan Period in Calibration page 5 16 Quick Scan is disabled during automatic and manual recounts This is the length of time in seconds for the Quick Scan to run see UI Options page 5 9 Values 3 to 60 s Default 10 s Camera Mode Note that this option is only available if camera s have been installed see Camera page 53 it is not displayed in the picture above The camera s can be set to save a snapshot on the hard drive on entry to the portal The image of the person is saved to the hard drive only on a successful measurement if the person aborts the measurement e g by reversion out of the portal the image is discarded Use the pre defined window to select an option from one of the following Never a snapshot will never be taken of the user On Alarm a snapshot of the user will only be taken if an alarm occurs Always a snapshot of the user will be taken for all results Default Never Select a Gas Type from one of the following radio buttons Argon
282. e However there will be some parts of the body where there is a small distance to the closest detector For the purpose of this example we use Body Average Efficiencies based on a closest approach to a body detector of 5 cm as defined in IEC 61098 However this model is pessimistic for the sculpted geometry of the iPCM12 Hands Feet and Body which includes the head each have separate Alarm Levels however for any given nuclide energy the body alarm level will always be most stringent dictating the monitoring time and thus user throughput Monitoring time will be significantly increased in higher backgrounds The alpha Alarm Level is generally used as 0 4 Bq cm With a body grille contact efficiency of around 15 4z the body alarm level will be Alarm Level Count rate 0 4 Bq cm 100 cm x 6cps C 0 15 Since the alpha background count is generally low typically 0 025 cps and theoretically no more than 0 1 cps the alarm level is generally easily achievable and the beta body alarm level dictates the Monitoring Time T In instances where alarm levels up to an order of magnitude lower 0 04 Bq cn are required the alarm count rate C will be around 0 6 cps Although this level is theoretically achievable in practice only four Radon events reaching the detector will cause a false alarm The calculations in the instrument are based on a Gaussian model which is valid for gamma and beta measurements However the
283. e This variation would be far more significant than stringent selection of probability of detection Monitoring Time T Judicious setting of the Probability of False Alarm and Probability of Detection as described previously will keep monitoring times to a minimum and maintain personnel throughput Calculation of the Minimum Monitoring Time Consider Figure 17 As discussed earlier the left hand vertical line represents effective background count adjusted to achieve the required measurement False alarm rate F in this instance in 1 000 in the monitoring time T Also as discussed earlier the right hand vertical line is the alarm level count rate adjusted to achieve the required Probability P of detecting exactly one alarm level of contamination in this instance 1 65 sigma 95 in the monitoring time T The positive separation between the modified background and alarm counts indicates that the set of conditions presented in Figure 13 can be achieved in a 15 second monitoring time with an Operational Margin This operational margin would 6 26 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 High Background Operational Margin Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics therefore accommodate a more stringent set of parameters which in practice is likely to be an increase in the background B However for the set of conditions presented the user is bei
284. e overall efficiency of the iPCM12 to the mix Note that even when the iPCM12 is calibrated to a single nuclide such as E this is still treated as a single nuclide stream Only those nuclides to which the iPCM12 has been calibrated may be included in the mix Calibration page 5 15 and Cal Streams page 5 40 shows how to create the mix for a new calibration stream It is not essential that the percentage of all the nuclides entered adds up to 100 In this situation the iPCM12 will assume the unidentified percentage is due to undetectable nuclides such as Fe and adjust the overall percentage efficiency to the mix appropriately iPCM User Manual 10 3 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 11 Power up Screens Self Test Screens Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Fault Messages The fault messages produced whilst in the application are directly controlled by the software written by Thermo Fisher Scientific whereas errors reported from the motherboard Bios or the Window s operating system will be supplier dependent On switching ON the screen will remain blank for several seconds whilst the Bios carries out basic checks on the motherboard The screen will eventually show scripting which details the progress of these initial tests Should a fault be found the process will halt with the fault error detailed This should be recorded and reported to Thermo Fisher
285. e bar to the left to decrease the brightness and to the right to increase the brightness To adjust the Contrast move the orange bar to the left to decrease the contrast and to the right to increase the contrast Tick the Auto button for automatic adjustment of the contrast To adjust the Gain move the orange bar to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain Tick the Auto button to control the gain of a signal automatically 5 62 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Data Menu Reports Select DatalReports to selecta MCG GEE Database Report from a pre mI defined list Please Select a Report C C E H Ri Variance Report Run Report To run a report select one from the list and press the Run Report button The types of Reports available are listed below Each report can be limited by various parameters Please Eda Repon Parameters Stan Date 05 09 2007 End Date 05 10 2007 Each report displays the following button bar Report Button Functions M 4 2 gt Cl Direction Arrows steps through the report m pages Direction Arrows moves the report up and down x Page Page Setup displays the Report Page E settings Report Page Settings Paper Size Ss Paper Orientation Portrait 4 Lem Margin 050 Right Margin in 050 Margin in 100 Bottom
286. e fault has not been eliminated the status message will appear again if the fault occurs again The following list contains the causes of faults in decreasing possibility The fault at the bottom of the list has the smallest probability to occur in the control unit STG Status 3 AKI sensor active longer than 60 s Automatically reset if everything is in order or by service fitter Status 5 AKA sensor active longer than 60 s Automatically reset if everything is in order or by service fitter Status 6 Unlocking error Bolt possibly jammed Reset by service fitter Status 9 Opening unsuccessful after 4 collisions Check the interlock remove obstacle Reset through service fitter Status 11 Faulty motor current Possibly faulty wiring in prefabricated cables Replacement by service fitter Status 23 Slave control unit defective Replacement by service fitter Status 25 Slave connection CAN to Master interrupted Clear by service fitter Status 31 EMERGENCY STOP operated Motor relay de energises Reset by resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button Status 37 Motor current STG or ATE defective Reset by service fitter Status 38 Overheat motor Manual control effective Door leaves possibly too heavy or too much friction Reset by motor cooling down or by service fitter Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 17 of 20 MM Status and fault signals Status 39 Overload on 24 V supply Too many external
287. e iPCM12 ORANGE Position body facing detectors WHITE Position with back to detectors Buffered drivers are provided at PL8 on the 5712A board iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 7 7 Technical Description Circuitry 7 8 HV and Amplifier Connections Issue 2 0 iPCM12B or iPCM12C with Gamma Kit Including FHT681 Scintillation HV and Amplifier The Dual Channel Scintillation and Amplifier board FHT681 provides the high voltages for two scintillation detectors It also receives charge pulses from two detectors amplifies them and discriminates between five energy levels Independent counter values five for each gamma channel are generated every 100 ms and stored in a five second buffer In addition to that one second values are built from the 100 ms values All these values can be polled from the serial interface The HV sections are designed to provide independently adjustable anode voltages for two scintillation detectors with working voltage ranges between 500 V to 1400 V The setting of high voltages and thresholds is done via the serial interface The 1 3 and 4 counters for each channel form Cobalt coincidence pulses that are available on OUT1 and OUT2 connectors The card has six connectors and PMT2 Scintillation detectors are connected via MHV connectors OUTI and OUT2 Coincident outputs are on BNC connectors X15 and X16 These connectors provide power supplies to the boa
288. e is temperature compensated by means of a thermistor located on the battery helping to maximize the life time of the battery Momentary operation of the front panel key switch into the START position allows power to be switched to the electronics This function operates in the absence of AC mains power provided the battery charge voltage status is sufficient 1 e battery is not discharged The key switch needs to be held ON for at least two seconds before the ON state is engaged The 5703A continues to monitor the terminal voltage of the battery during battery operation and will signal a shut down if the battery discharges to a predetermined point beyond which it would suffer permanent deep discharge damage and be difficult to recharge A miniature on board fuse protects against over current conditions The application software would normally regulate shut down In the event of the software losing control an emergency shut down is possible by holding the key switch ON for a minimum of 10 seconds nominal X Channel Battery When available Battery Controller Board type 5720A will Controller PCB manage the charging of Heavy Duty 12 volt sealed lead acid Type 5720A batteries up to a maximum capacity of 38 A hr The 5720A supersedes the original 5703A Battery Controller used in early iPCM12 A Open units The 5720A operates on the later X Channel 2 bus used on all other IPCM12 Gas Flow instrument boards Functionally the 5720
289. e may be useful This will automatically require the user to re monitor in the event of a alarm announcing only the final measurement result This significantly reduces the probability of two consecutive false alarms due to background variation and avoids unnecessary recordable incidents It also has the benefit of automatically confirming real alarms This is the probability that exactly one Alarm Level of Contamination will be detected The rate of detecting exactly one Alarm Level of emissions is on average 50 or 0 sigma In Figure 6 10 the right hand peak represents the distribution about the Contamination alarm level C during the Monitoring Time T In this instance the alarm level C is set 4 6 cps above the average Background B of 5 cps A higher detection rate may be desired and can be achieved by modifying the contamination alarm level set point by the probability of detection P This effectively backs off reduces the alarm level creating a lower contamination count triggering threshold represented by the right hand vertical line in figure 6 10 In this instance the alarm level count rate is adjusted to 3 2 cps above the background B to achieve 1 65 sigma 95 Probability of detecting exactly one alarm level of contamination Increased probability of detection P effectively reduces the Alarm Level causing a corresponding increase in the monitoring time T to achieve the false alarm rate F
290. e of the timeout will not change The timer can only be stopped if the mains power is returned Max Charge Current This is the maximum current allowed for charging A the battery The charge current is monitored constantly and the PSU output voltage is reduced if this current is exceeded Min Discharge This is the voltage at which the timer starts when Voltage V the battery is being discharged iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 21 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Gas Flow Select Set UplGas Flow to configure the Gas Flow 4 Normal Mode Low Limit fio Normal Mode High Limit 1000 ccimin Purge Mode Low Limit fo ccimin Leak Ratio ps Averaging Period Ro os Maximum Stabilisation Period 60 minutes Purge in Stabilisation State Changes 0 Lire NOTE This section is set at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Description of options Field Name Description Normal Mode Low If the Gas Flow falls below this limit the iPCM12 Limit cc min becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 112 Values 0 to 1000 Normal Mode High If the Gas Flow goes above this limit the iPCM12 Limit cc min becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 112 Values 0 to 1000 Purge Mode Low If the Gas Flow falls below this limit when in Purge Limit cc min Mode the iPCM12 becomes out of service see Out Of Service page
291. e reverse of the removal procedure Ensure the safety screen is refitted and screws are securely tightened WARNING THE HV and AMPLIFIER PCBS GENERATE DANGEROUS HAZARDOUS LIVE HIGH DC VOLTAGES EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING ALWAYS ALLOW THE HV TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGIN WORK Up to five Scintillation HV Amplifier modules Type FHT68 1 may optionally be fitted into the upper cabinet bulkhead on the right side of the Electronics Housing The PCB is located within the cabinet bulkhead and only the four front panel connectors are visible iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 13 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Replacement of the FHT681HV Amps Changing the FHT681 Address Issue 2 0 WARNING BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE ANY FHT681 MODULE SWITCH THE iPCM12 OFF AND WAIT 1 MINUTE FOR THE HV TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGINNING WORK 1 Disconnect the front panel MHV co axial connectors note cable connections for re assembly 2 Remove four front panel screws to release the FHT681 module and carefully withdraw the PCB from the bulkhead 3 Disconnect the rear two daisy chained X Channel I gray network ribbon cables that link the assembly to the ETX processor NOTE All the FHT681s are connected via PL12 on 5712A Replacement of any of the boards is the reverse of the removal procedure If any board is thought to be faulty it should be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific s service department for rep
292. e the connectors are correctly mated IPCM12C Barrier Arm and Motor NOTE Whilst the motor actuator has a protective clutch to limit the impact force on any obstacle it is prudent to be aware of its field of play Again work on the unit with the iPCM12 OFF The barrier arm can be replaced by undoing the three retaining bolts that secure it to the motor assembly The motor is accessed by removing the four corner panel retaining bolts revealed by unlocking the relevant detector cover The barrier arm will need removing as will the motor flange visible from the outside of the corner panel by removing the central fixing screw Removal of the motor is possible after undoing the two nyloc nuts rear of motor holding the drive to the holding plate that is secured to the panel work The attached cable can be unplugged locally to allow complete removal of the motor Replacement of the Barrier motor and arm follows the removal procedure in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Normal Start up Boot up Operation Unit dead will not boot up amp charging LED is OFF Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting IPCM12C Powered Doors There are no user serviceable items on this unit Please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific service department for support Troubleshooting Operational This Section covers a number of possible operational problems their likely causes and possible
293. e the correct operation of the detectors One HV scan for a beta source in contact with the detector grille plus one HV scan for an alpha source in contact with the detector grille is normally sufficient to establish the correct gas flow working voltage for the whole instrument This can be repeated for other detectors if deemed necessary Typically for the recommended P7 5 gas 7 5 Methane CH4 92 5 Argon the optimum EHT working point for 5710A gas flow detectors is 1775V 9 6 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Determining the operating voltage for mid high energy Thermo Fisher Scientific nuclides Setting Up Procedure For the gamma detectors the first step is to perform a background scan This is followed by a scan with a Cs source The user has the option of selecting which detectors to scan The quickest method is to place the source in the centre of the portal at a location nominally 100cm above the treadplate and spaced 5cm from the face of the central detector and scan all the detectors simultaneously An alternative method is to scan the detectors in three phases First phase place the source at a height of 50cm above the treadplate and select the lower 2 gamma body detectors plus the foot detector for scanning Second phase place the source at a height of 100cm above the treadplate and select the central 2 gamma detectors plus the hand detector for scanning Third phase pl
294. e to report any detector disconnection or light leak WARNING The Backlight Inverter generates dangerous high voltages Exercise caution when servicing always allow the HV to discharge before commencing work Do not remove the Inverter from its protective screening enclosure Refer to assembly drawing D92563 A for details Switch off the power Ensure the iPCM12 is OFF 1 Itis preferable to remove the whole Electronics display assembly to gain straightforward access to the LCD subsystem 2 Remove the four hex pillar screws from the rear of the display housing and remove the ETX processor board 5712A Undo the back plate 3 The back light and Touch screen controller cards lie beneath removable protection covers on the back of the display 4 Take care in removing the connecting cables Both the Touch Controller module and the Back light Inverter are propriety items and are not user serviceable They should be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific s service department for repair or replacement 1 Toremove the LCD display disconnect all cables 3 2 Undo the display retaining screws located round the periphery of the metalwork 3 Gently pull the front bezel assembly away from the main housing and lay carefully onto a flat surface 4 Four screws attach the LCD shield to the front bezel On removal the LCD and shield can be lifted from the bezel and touch screen itself sitting in a recess of the plastic bezel 6 The
295. e user of progress through the instrument Two cards are involved namely the 5672A with 5 led clusters and the 5711A with 2 led clusters and a numeric display counter 24 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Description Scintillation Detectors Type 5708A amp 5717A Used in iPCMI2B and iPCM12C fitted with gamma option kit AE0222A Each of the six body detectors type 5717A is large area plastic rhomboid shaped scintillators wrapped in foil and plastic Additionally three rectangular scintillation detectors type 57084 are used for hand foot and head monitoring A photomultiplier tube is hydrostatically embedded into each plastic scintillator Connection to the dynode chain assembly mounted on the back of the tube is via a light tight gland A single coaxial cable provides high voltage for the tube and carries the signals to the HV and Amplifier PCB via an MHV connector For further information see Detectors page 3 4 iPCM User Manual 2 5 Issue Beta Issue 1 Specification Chapter3 Specification Thermo Fisher Scientific The standard iPCM12 with lead liners is available with the following options in any combination e Unit Types o Open o Closed o Closed Gamma options e Detector Types o Basic Gas Flow used for ArCH4 ArCO2 or Air alpha o Gas flow with variation for Air beta o Gas Sealed not yet available o Beta plastic not yet available
296. ean 2 14 12 2009 13 39 Clean a 09 12 2009 14 33 Clean Page 1 Of 1 Press on one of the ID records to display the Activity Results Detail for the selected Results ID NOTE The report below is an example and does not display all the information Results Detail Instrument UKFER 2L3MN3J Location Not Set Result ID 2 Date 14 12 2009 13 39 10 Person ID Result Type Clean Monitor Time 5 5 Quickscan Time s 0 Measurement 2 Confidence Measured Values Radiation Measured Uncertainty MDA DL Units Detector Stream Name Type Value Gross 20 6 36 2 cps SCHD Uncalibrated Gamma Beta 0 1 2 05 48 cps AR A Uncalibrated Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 75 Operating Instructions Variance Report 5 76 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 This report lists the Background Variance Test Summary Results between the selected Start and End dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Dates Background Variance Test Summary Test ID Test Date Radiation Pass Cycles Cycle Description Type Fail Duration s 2 14 12 2009 Beta Fail 100 10 13 54 56 1 14 12 2009 Gamma Fail 100 10 13 54 56 Page 1 Of 1 Press on one of the ID records to display the Background Variance Test Results Detail for the selected Test ID Background Variance Test Results Detail Instrument UKFER 2L3MN3J Location Not Set Result
297. ech ThermoFisher Contact Thermo Fisher Scientific To change the Password for a select User press in the Select User field to display the user roles Select a User and select OK Enter a Password and confirm the Password Ensure each password level has a unique Password under no circumstances should all three roles be assigned the same password Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Data Retention Select System Data Retention ENIM EE E save the specified data fora set Madanm number of months Background Data Retention 12 months Results Data Retention 6 months Calibration Data Retention 24 months Cal Check Data Retention 3 months Event Log Data Retention 6 months Apply Cancel Settings nges Enter the length in time months for how long each type of data is to be retained Data is automatically deleted that is older than the specified time The following data types are displayed e Background Data Retention months e Results Data Retention months e Calibration Data Retention months e Cal Check Data Retention months e Event Log Data Retention months Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 65 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 User Mode The basic operation of the iPCM12 is as follows 5 66 iPCM User Manual Upon power up system diagnostics are run see Start Up Checks page 5 71 Upon successful system diagnostics the iPCM12 estab
298. ect safety of operation or maintenance If any such defect is suspected the iPCM12 should be withdrawn from service and safely removed using a suitable forklift and the integral fork lifting facilities provided The mounting should be repaired and made safe before replacing the iPCM12 Electrical Checks During calibration check the general condition of the battery To do this turn the iPCM12 ON by rotating the key switch on the front panel to the ON position Remove the mains power cord Unlock and open the right hand side access panel and locate PL5 on controller card 5703A or 5720A if fitted Connect a suitable Voltmeter set to the DC volts range directly across the terminals of PLS pins 1 and 6 Ensure that the load battery voltage is greater than 12 volts assuming the battery has previously been charged If the battery voltage is low consult Trouble Shooting Operational page 11 26 Alternatively the battery voltage and load can be monitored from within the application see Battery page 5 21 for more information NOTE Only qualified personnel should operate the iPCM12 with the mains connected and the access panel open Make sure all the warnings given at the front of this manual are heeded iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 8 1 Routine Checks Display Checks EMC amp Safety Earthing Checks Issue 2 0 It may be necessary at some time due to replacement of a Touch Screen or Touch Con
299. ected to I O ports on Gas Flow Detector 5704A Quad Amp boards via PL4 TX and PL3 RX Data communication is via the X Channel internal network to the 5712A ETX Processor Motherboard All seven body sensors are infra red photobeam pairs each pair having a separate transmitter light source TX and receiver RX both are in physically identical packages Each Body Sensor connection is via a pre determined detector Quad Amp dedicated and fixed in software body sensor locations are not user configurable The sensor locations and cabling are as shown on interconnection diagram D92591 sheet 6 the sensor housings are listed on the iPCM12A family tree D92525 Individual sensor assemblies are located in either aluminum or plastic housings Remove by unscrewing two M3 countersunk screws unwiring the sensor leads and unplugging the ribbon cable s The sensors are proprietor items and therefore are not user serviceable They should be replaced with identical parts as listed on the family tree D92525 Active RX TX sensors are detailed in Recommended Spares List page 12 1 After renewal connect the individual sensor wiring as indicated on D92591 sheet 6 and remount using two M3 countersunk screws Gas Flow Quad Detectors Removal and Replacement All iPCM12 variants are populated with 21 or optionally 23 Gas Flow Quad Detectors type 5710A The detector body is machined from a solid aluminum extrusion It has a thin aluminize
300. ector SELECT DETECTORS FOR SCAN Clear Selection Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 47 Operating Instructions Select an alpha detector and then a beta detector you can skip selecting a second detector by pressing the Skip a or p button Select the Continue button to start the HV Scan The background scan begins Once the Background Scan is complete the Ready to Start Source Scan screen displays Position the Source to be scanned in the IPCM12 and press the Start button A source HV scan will be performed recording the counts against each amplifier threshold for all amplifiers at each HV step over the specified integration period A progress window displays 5 48 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 SELECT DETECTORS FOR SCAN n gang pem SE Ready To Start Source Scan Position Source and press Start NS 0 7 0000 BB Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions The source scan begins Once complete the result displays Select the Complete button to display the Scan Description window D mum 0 ae Ba Complete If Detector System y is selected the background scan starts immediately Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 49 Operating Instructions Issue
301. ectors give very uniform responses Figure 7 iPCM12 detector layout including gamma detectors The iPCM12 combines the results from adjacent detectors to provide sum zones that monitor for distributed contamination over more than one detection area This leads to an excellent overall spatial response on all regions of the body 6 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Spatial Response Vertical Scans Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Great difficulty is experienced in determining the actual performance of the equipment for the monitoring of personnel because of variation of height and shape of the users The standard IEC 61098 Installed personnel surface contamination monitoring assemblies for alpha and beta emitters published by the International Electrotechnical Committee IEC overcomes these problems by providing a standard technique for combining results from a vertical efficiency scan and horizontal efficiency scan around an elliptical phantom to provide an overall efficiency Using this technique a comparative assessment can be made Figures 8 and 9 show the variation of response for a point Beta source placed at 5 cm from the center of the middle detector and moved in a vertical plane The figures refer to Co 60 and 1 36 respectively Figures 10 and 11 illustrate the vertical response to Co 60 and Cs 137 gamma emissions respectively iPCM1
302. ed over the optimum measurement period which is dynamically determined by the central processor to achieve the programmed alarm and statistical criteria The stored alpha and beta background counts for each detection channel count window are then subtracted from the corresponding measurement count windows to provide the contamination counts The monitor is designed to be automatic quick and easy to use with no user controls and minimal user training User 1 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction operating graphics and guidance are provided on a color LCD display and by spoken instructions in the chosen language A five color traffic light system gives operational status and instrument availability indications to users The monitoring sequences are initiated by hand foot and body sensors that guarantee the user adopts and maintains the correct monitoring position for the duration of the measurement A color LED and count down timer is displayed and audible pips give the user a positive indication of correct positioning measurement progression and time remaining Measurement results are presented on the color LCD If all areas of the body are found to be below the user defined alarm level a CLEAR message displays along with lighting the green status lamp and sounding traditional audible chimes Contamination in excess of the a
303. ed to the quad amp board mounted on the rear of the detector housing Touchscreen colour graphics LCD assembly D92583 A is mounted on the rear of the Electronics display chassis so that the display is easily visible to the user standing inside the iPCM12 see LCD Display and Controller I F amp Backlight Inverter Module Assembly D92583 A page 7 9 Reference to General assembly D92777 for closed booth iPCM12B amp iPCM12C door variants only shows additional interconnections between the following modules 1 3 Power door interface 5707A see iPCM12C option GPIO Controller Card 5707A page 7 10 Barrier Mechanism see iPCM12C option GPIO Controller Card 5707A page 7 10 Swing door interfacing Items only applicable to scintillation versions of iPCM12B and iPCM12C when fitted with gamma detector option kit AE0222A are 1 Scintillation HV amplifier FHT681 see iPCMI2B or iPCMI2C with Gamma Kit including FHT681 Scintillation HV amp Amplifier page 7 8 2 Body scintillator 5717A see Scintillation Detectors 5708A amp 5717A page 2 5 3 Head foot amp hand scintillation detector 5708A see Scintillation Detectors Type 5708A amp 5717A page 2 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Circuitry Electronic Display Chassis D92520 A The majority of the electronics is contained on board this sub structure allowi
304. een cubos gt Cibi cise accepted press the Confirm button to display the Calibration Source description page Optional Add a description for this calibration and Press OK x To Calibrate or Cal Check Calibration Source Nuckde against y select a Radiation A and then press the eee pie ce Calibrate or Cal Check button The following Calibration Single ae Source window displays See Sources and Fixtures page E 5 55 for more information regarding the setting up of Sources and Fixtures Use the direction arrows to select Stn Source standard a Calibration Source Once NET EU ees ea RE selected press the Next button to view the Select Source Position Centroid and Detectors window to include by pressing on All mimic nd Select Contact Centroid cance Source Position and then select seiect Source Position and Detectors to Include NE All or None of the detectors to be 77 included Genel If Allis selected the Detectors Settee are highlighted in green mem sme BS Mis iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 43 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If None is selected the IPCM12 Detector Measurement WS will instruct where the source is Complete to be placed as follows Place Source next to Detector SCHA and Press S
305. eft side of the Power Chassis Alternatively see Battery Removal and Replacement page 11 7 for guidance In exceptional circumstances when carrying out major servicing work on the Electronic display chassis D92520 A it is best to remove it from the iPCM12 Remove the chassis from the main frame as follows because the assembly is complete stand alone testing is also possible Detach the service door stay to allow access to the gas chassis at the top left hand corner Before removing the main chassis first remove the gas chassis D92610 A by unscrewing 4 x M4 hex retaining studs Disconnect the gas lines from the chassis MAKE A NOTE of the gas links for later reconnection if necessary refer to D92591 sheet 4 see Drawings list by assembly page 13 1 Disconnect the following external cables from the boards on the chassis 1 PSU cables B92594 A and B92597 A USB cable on SK4 Gas chassis cable 703025KF X channel external yellow cables at SK4 6 7 13 and 14 leaving only SK8 connected Lamp indicator cables B92596 A and B92781 A Loud speaker cable 11705242 Network cable in SK201 2 x HV red cables on 5713A generator module FY 11 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting The Electronics Chassis can now be freed by removing the 10 x M6 hex retaining studs M10 spanner socket required
306. egarding verbal instructions A Temporary Error Has Occurred Out Of Service As each new set of background count is processed the monitoring time will be determined If the calculated sample monitoring time exceeds the user specified Maximum Monitoring Time see Monitoring page 5 12 a high background condition exists and further measurements are not possible The instrument will enter the Out of Service state with indication of the reason for being out of server e g High Background Conditions Background measurements will continue as described until the background count rate drops to a level where the calculated monitoring time is acceptable It is also possible to exit the high background condition if an administrator increased the Maximum Monitoring Time or decreases the Measurement Certainty Notes regardingLow The Out Of Service Background Temporary Error has Occurred is displayed if Low Background Out Of Service conditions exist See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal A Temporary Error Has Occurred Instructions Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 99 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 If the count rate falls below the Low Background Limit see Monitoring page 5 12 the Out of Service Low Background Counts Detector message is displayed For alpha and beta counts this is evaluated over the 10 second accumul
307. egular Expressions for Barcode page 5 60 for further information This is the period during which the scanner can receive barcode data If the barcode is not detected during this time it resets Default 100 milliseconds Once a barcode has been read this is the period before a subsequent barcode can be read Default 500 milliseconds If a Carriage Return is to indicate the end of the barcode tick this box Default Ticked If a Carriage Return is to be included within the barcode tick this box Default Unticked This is the COM Port for connection to the interface Use the pre defined window to select Baud Rate from one of the following 9600 19200 38400 115200 Default 38400 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 61 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 FieldName Name FieldName Description Data Bits Use the pre defined window to select Data Bits from one of the following 7 8 Default 7 Use the pre defined window to select Parity from one of the following None Even odd Default Even Stop Bits Use the pre defined window to select Stop Bits from one of the following 1 2 Default 7 Camera NOTE This option is only available if camera s have been installed see IDS Camera page 5 59 Rear Camera The current image displays on me rm screen Contrast d Auto Front Camera To adjust the Brightness move the orang
308. ejection the operational Background limit will be dictated by the scintillation detector count rates and proportional to the amount of shielding employed where the gamma monitoring option is fitted An Out of Service High Background indication is given if backgrounds exceed levels required for correct operation Under these conditions the background must either be reduced to an acceptable level or the alarm levels and or measurement certainties required must be relaxed A Background Attenuation factor facility is provided This factor compensates for the attenuation and or scatter of background radiation caused by an operator when in the monitoring position For Alpha and Beta Backgrounds monitoring will be based over a 100 second count in 10 second blocks which is maintained on a rolling average basis For Gamma Backgrounds monitoring will be based over one second check periods each one second period will contribute to a rolling average of up to 100 periods Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification A significant change in the measured background count rate from the mean will cause the iPCM12 to discard the current mean value and restart background monitoring see Changing Background page 6 13 If due to continuous operation the iPCM12 has been unable to measure background for 15 minutes a 10 second background count is performed immediately after the current mo
309. eld at the installation site is directional it is recommended that the iPCM12 be installed so that the front of the Cabinet faces the field source This orientation should minimize the penetration and scatter of background radiation around the inlet and exit apertures iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 4 11 Unpacking and Installation Issue 2 0 4 12 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Chapter5 Operating Instructions Administrator Mode Using the Touch Screen Functions Number Functions Thermo Fisher Scientific Operational States There are two operational states for the iPCM12 ADMINISTRATOR Mode this mode allows the instrument to be configured and calibrated and for diagnostic checks to run Access to this state requires a username and password See Administrator Mode below for further details USER Mode this mode supports the normal monitoring of personnel Any user can operate the instrument in this state See User Mode page 5 82 for more details NOTE Communication with the iPCM12 is via a touch screen and this manual primarily gives instructions for entering touch screen commands It is also possible to use a USB keyboard and mouse to communicate with the iPCM12 This section describes the methods that are common to all the entry and data viewing operations in the Parameter Mode menus When using the touch scree
310. ement of the Sensor Assemblies 11 17 Reports 5 63 Residual Contamination Check 5 108 Results Report 5 75 Routine Checks 8 1 S Scintillation Amplifier Thresholds 3 14 Scintillation HV Generator 3 13 Self Test State 5 86 Serial Barcode Reader 5 61 Servicing Access 3 18 Index O Setting the FHT681 Current Limits 11 15 Setting Up Procedure 9 1 Setup 5 79 Side of Head Scintillator 3 8 Side of Head Detector 11 24 Soft Keys 3 15 Software Shutdown 3 14 Sources and Fixtures 5 55 Specification 3 1 Start Up Checks 5 87 Status Lamps 3 15 Summing 6 9 6 10 Teal 6 11 Technical Description Circuitry 7 1 Technical Description Physics 6 1 Temperature and Humidity 3 19 Temporary Error 5 112 Thresholds 5 54 Timed Counts 5 29 Tmax 6 11 Tmin 6 11 Timon 6 11 To activate the Alarm 5 20 To configure an Interface 5 58 Transit Damage Inspection 4 3 U UI Options 5 9 Unpacking and Installation 4 1 Unpacking IPCM12 4 3 User Guidance Display 3 15 User ID 5 94 User Screen 5 83 Using the Touch Screen Functions 5 1 V Variance Report 5 76 Variance Test 5 32 Version 5 80 Vertical Scans 6 3 Violations during Monitoring 5 98 Voice Prompts 5 85 W Weight 3 19 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 1 3 Index X Issue 2 0 X XChannel 5 20 1 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific MANUAL iPCM12 INSTALLED PERSONNEL CONT
311. en will display The application is entered with tests to verify the detection components are working correctly Should a failure occur during these initial checks then the Out of Service message will appear on the message bar and one of the following will display on the message bar e Unable to set detector alarms e Database Offline e Unable to Configure Detector Subsystem iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 1 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Device Error Messages Operational Self Tests Issue 2 0 e Invalid Language Setting e Default Calibration has no Alarms e Configured Error e Failed to Retrieve Sound Data From Database e No Default Calibration Selected e X Channel Failure e X Channel Failure Accessing Node 0 ID 1 If one of these messages occurs a fault with a peripheral device is indicated Normal operation of the iPCM12 can be continued when action has been taken to rectify or circumvent the problem PRINTER NOT ACCEPTING DATA The printer refused to accept data for over ten seconds This may be due to the printer being disconnected off line or turned off Check the printer and the connection to the iPCM12 see Network Communications page 3 17 While the iPCM12 is in Background Checking mode certain aspects of the instrument s operation are tested repeatedly Ifa fault is detected the IPCM12 will display the appropriate message as follows e Amplifier Failure e Amplifier
312. ent and previous calibration is more than this value the calibration is to be reviewed Values 5 to 10096 Default 5 Detection Options Select Set UplDetection Options M Gi 002002 to customize the Alarm and gt Detection compare Options pA E 7 a Detection Enable a B Sum Zones Enable F B Detection Enable y Sum Zones Enable F Detection Enable Reduce Sum Zone Sensitivity High Alarms Enable High Alarm Multiple 3 False Alarm Detection Alpha Body 4000 1751 510 6 5 o 1000 1757 510 Te AlphaFoot 4000 1757 510 165 c Beta Body Moo 1751 510 65 c Beta Hand Hoo 1757 8510 165 Ho0 1757 o 8510 165 f510 165 fo fies Bs10 165 o Gamma Body 4000 1 757 Gamma Hand 1000 Gamma Foot 4000 Apply Cancel Settings Changes 1751 1751 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 17 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Description of options Field Name Description a Detection Enable Tick this option to enable a detection P Detection Enable y Detection Enable High Alarms Enable a B Sum Zones Enable y Sum Zones Enable Reduce Sum Zone Sensitivity High Alarm Multiple Probability of False Alarm and o for Alpha Body A
313. er at position M1 for master factory setting jumper at position S1 for slave J13 CAN line termination LED s LD1 red control LED for push button operation S1 LD2 green 35V Off for power failure LD3 green 24V Lights if 24V present Caution in the event of a power failure processor reset takes place 1 second after this LED extinguishes Push button S1 This is a multifunctional switch on controller MF The use of this switch is reserved exclusively for trained and authorized persons Top view of the control unit STG STG DFA 127 C agtatec ag CH 8320 Fehraltorf record sis NOT AUS 4 3 ENCODER screw UE 11 12 13 pes 18 19 20 a E 24 esses nnnnn J Sio 4 HES is IN a b MOTOR BOARD E27 Controll LED Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 9 of 20 Operating instructions 5 3 Functions of electronic controller BDE D optional The electronic controller BDE D is an easily op erated input and output device for the control and adjustment of record door operators Logically arranged push buttons allow an intuitive operation and navigation through the operator specific menu The LCD with backlight shows data and information about the door status with symbols and text messages Additional information can be taken from the manual of t
314. era Mode Bs p 1s hours b mins Fs Never _ Gas Type Argon Methane Other Apply Cancel Settings Changes iPCM 12 db Operational Options SCIENTIFIC To move through the menus select the Main menu option on the top line to display the sub menus available Then select the sub option from the second line A full list of menu and sub menu options displays in Menu Roles below iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 5 Operating Instructions 5 6 Issue 2 0 Selecting Detectors some screens an option is available to select Detectors To select individual Detectors press the corresponding designation in the graphic TH 1 CP RB1 rr 2 C82 RB2 al RB3 UNI LI 1 LB4 CB4 RB4 SH AR SL1 SL2 For further information regarding Detectors see Scintillation Gamma Detectors Type 5708A and 5717A page 2 14 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor TH SH LB2 CB2 AR LB3 CB3 511 LB2 CB4 SL4 Top of Head Left Body Top Centre Body Top Right Body Top Side of Head Shoulder Left Body Upper Middle Center Body Upper Middle Right Body Upper Middle Upper Arm Left Body Lower Middle Center Body Lower Middle Right Body Lower Middle Side of Leg Upper
315. ersonnel Contamination Monitor This is the maximum length of time allowed between entering the User ID and entering the portal It is also used as the maximum length of time in seconds allowed for the user to present their ID after entering the portal User Id Required see above must be ticked for this option to be effective Values 0 to 300 s Default 10 seconds Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Operating Instructions Select Set UplOperations to eT c customize the 1iPCM 12 s mc 1 B Quick Scan Enabled operation Quick Scan Enabled T Quick Background Enabled Residual Contamination Check after Alarm RCC after Abandoned Measurement Auto Recount 5 Complete Both Steps Restart Measurement on Sensor Break Disable Body Sensor T Disable Right Toe Sensor Enable Radon Detection Clean On Radon Only Portal Approach Time 2 Exit Barrier Delay bo Background Logging Interval pr hours Out of Service Recovery Interval E mins Quick Scan Period 4 Never Gas Type Argon Methane Other Cancel Settings Changes Description of options Field Name Description uick Scan Enable ese options must be enabled to allow real dirty Quick S Enabled Thi pti b bled llow real dirty y Quick Scan Enabled or real clean identification before the end of the monitoring period Also see Quick
316. es eere eee eerte teste eene entente statua sua sn senses statuta o 3 8 Gamma Detection Efficiencies Processing and Communications HV Generators and Amplifiers eee eee eese eee eee en entente sensa tus en senses enata senses eoe Scintillation HV Settings onim DiSPIAYS T B Audible Indications Network Communications USB Ports eere eee eee ente entente nnn iPCMI2A Power Requirements eee Ee 3 17 Services Required P sains 3 17 Dimensions Approximate eeeeee eese ee eene ene tn etna tne ea enata senses sas enses senses enses etn ces 3 19 Overall Dimensions Excluding LCD but Including Foot plate eese 3 19 Shielding for Full Body Gamma Option IPCM 2C sse 3 19 3 19 Unpacking and iPCM12A Open Units Unpacking n Mechanical Installation eere eee ee eee ee eene eats enatnann Electrical Installation eee GAS System Installation eeeeeee eere eerte tenen tn tate tnn tna Gas Mixture
317. es 0 to 65535 seconds Note that this field is only enabled when Right Barrier Setting is selected This is the Low Current Limit below which the barrier will stall see Evaluate Limits below for further explanation Values 0 to 65535 milliamps Note that this field is only enabled when Right Barrier Setting is selected This is the Low Current Limit above which the barrier will stall see Evaluate Limits below for further explanation Values 0 to 65535 milliamps Note that this button is greyed out unless Barrier Mode is selected Select this button to commence a test sequence for the Barrier Mode which will check the operation of the Barrier and detects the Low and High Current Limits IMPORTANT this button activates the Barrier to open and close The actual values for the Low and High Current Limits are inserted into these fields However it is strongly advised that the Current Limit fields are set to the following values Low Current Limit between 0 and 10 High Current Limit 1 5 x actual High Current Limit This will prevent the stall detection operating on the Barrier during normal usage Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 23 Operating Instructions 5 24 Messages Diagnostics Menu Detectors iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 It is possible to amend the Headline s and Instructions for the following messages e Normal Alarm e High Level Alarm e Clear Select Set
318. es and breaks the sensor see Position Sensors page 5 28 This is the maximum length of time following entry to the portal that the user has to move to the correct position in the portal Values 0 to 300 s Default 2 seconds This is the maximum length of time that the user has to re position themselves in the portal following exit or illegal movement during measurement Values 0 to 300 s Default 2 seconds iPCM User Manual 5 11 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Background Logging Select an interval between and 168 hours for the Interval hours iPCM12 to periodically log the background Select 0 to disable the periodic logging Note that each time a mandatory 100 second background is performed the backgrounds for each detector will be logged to the database Values to 168 hours 0 to disable Default 0 Out of Service When the unit is Out of Service see Out Of Service Recovery Interval page 5 97 the system automatically clears the mins error after the Out of Service Recovery Interval has passed Select 0 to disable the Recovery Interval Values 0 to 60 mins Default 0 Quick Scan Period s This option may be enabled to allow real dirty or real clean to be identified before end of monitoring period Also see Quick Scan Period in Calibration page 5 15 Quick Scan is disabled during automatic and manua recounts This is the length of time in seconds for the Quick
319. es from the specified 7 position a Positioning message Positioning displays asking them to return to position If the user re positions him herself in the portal and Restart Measurement on Sensor Break see Operation page 5 11 is ticked the measurement will restart If Restart Measurement Insert Right Hand on Sensor Break is not ticked the Rene measurement will resume If the 2 user does not return to the correct position within the Exit Barrier Delay see Operation page 5 11 the Measurement Abandoned message sounds See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 99 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If during measurement the user exits the portal before the 2 measurement is complete the Positioning Positioning message displays If the user re enters the portal the measurement resumes If the Face In Head turned Left user does not return to the correct Insert Left Foot position within the Exit Barrier Insert Right Foot Delay see Operation page 5 11 the Measurement Abandoned message sounds See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions If the user presses the panic button during the measurement the Panic Button Pressed Attention message displays and the instrument is disabled Intervention by an Administr
320. es in any single channel while the latter guards against significant drift in all channels Calculation of the After every successful background update the average Monitoring Time background for each channel is updated The eight average backgrounds are then summed and a new monitoring time is re calculated as follows Cos Cac E Zac where Act is one of the units below Zact 18 the corresponding multiplier Units Unit Multiplier Z4 Bq 1 kBq 1000 Dpm 0 01666 pCi 0 037 nCi 37 uCi 3 7E4 mCi 3 7E7 Ci 3 7E10 Tea found by solving B B BAC 1 GE 47 pi e cm e ga S e lp cal f cal 4 B cal In practice the software solves this expression using a numerical substitution for Tea and an iterative binary search technique The value of Tea that provides the solution is then rounded up to the nearest whole second and compared to the user programmed minimum and maximum monitoring times The actual monitoring time Ton used when monitoring is then set according to the following criteria Ton Teal when Toa gt Tmin Tinon Tmin when lt Tmax If Ta gt Tmax then a high background condition exists and monitoring is not possible See Notes Regarding High Background page 5 113 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 15 Technical Description Physics Minimum Detectable Activity MDA and High Background Criterion Changing Conditions Issue 2 0 On
321. ese Sources Fixtures are setup in the CalibrationlSources and Fixtures page 5 55 The number of days since that last calibration date before the unit needs to be calibrated again See Out of Calibration page 5 88 to view the message displayed on the unit when out of date and Cal Check page 5 39 for information of the last Calibration Date Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Field Name Description Values 1 to 400 days 0 to disable Default 0 Calibration Warn The number of warning days that will be given to Period days the user that the unit needs to be calibrated again See Out of Calibration page 5 88 to view the message displayed on the unit when out of date and Cal Check page 5 39 for information of the last Calibration Date Values to 400 days 0 to disable Default 0 Default Calibration This is a view only field Accuracy The default Calibration Accuracy used in the Calibration Check utility see Cal Check page 5 39 Itis used along with the background measurement determines the count time required with the iPCM12 is being calibrated Values 0 5 to 10 in 0 1 steps Default 1 00 Calibration This is a view only field Confidence 6 This factor affects the monitoring time of calibration Values 0 1 to 4 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 2 Gas Flow Review If the percentage difference for the and Tolerance 96 detectors between the curr
322. essed in terms of activity 4 and given by Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 7 Technical Description Physics 6 8 Summing Radon Rejection iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 BAE Mean Peak vertical Ratio x mean Horizontal polar efficiency The BAE for key radionuclides is shown in Gas Flow Detector Standard Grille Beta BodyAverage Efficiency Typical 47 page 3 6 A full type test report is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific on request As can be seen from all Figures 4 to 11 there are areas of low efficiency these are at the interface between two anode zones for the beta detectors for beta and detectors for gamma Therefore if we add the efficiency of two adjacent zones together we achieve a much better efficiency This improvement in efficiency is however off set by the fact that with two zones detectors the background count rate is doubled Since the performance in terms of minimum detectable activity is proportional to the square root of the background summing of the efficiency of adjacent counters is only advantageous if the sum is J2 greater than either of the individual efficiencies Similarly for gamma detectors summing the results of four detectors meeting at a point has only advantages if the scan is twice that due to any individual counter 2 times the sum of two adjacent counters Nuisance Alarms can occur due to naturally occurring Radon gas Radon gas fro
323. etector System 2y Press Back button to return to the Test Parameters window Back Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 33 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Attenuation Select DiagnosticslAttenuation to EE Ga 03 00 view n LM 1 a worker s attenuation details Siac Sade Hil ay TOU alien io Tas User id Samples 0 Description of options Field Name Description Detector System Select a Radiation Type Options B y Use attenuations in Tick this box to use the data in the Information tab Info Tab to be used see Information page 5 29 User Id Enter a User Id to view this worker s attenuation details Samples This is a view only field displaying the number of samples from which the details have been taken Lamps Select DiagnosticslLamps to Fed n e check the visual elements EE LE con cnr Lamps Guidance e T Sequence CG Select the Sequence tickbox to Sequence test the Detector LED and Lamps display 5 34 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions To test User ID select the User User ID ID input box and enter an ID as follows To test the Guidance and LED Guidance tick the Sequence tickbox Each segment of the LED will turn red e sequentially The Detectors and Lamps will also light up sequenti
324. ethod for gamma scintillation 9 8 iPCM User Manual detectors Issue Beta Issue 1 When the graph of the voltage plots is displayed press the detector on the screen mimic and the respective graph for a detector which will expand it to fill the screen Select the NBR button and a ratio against operating voltage graph is displayed The optimum operating voltage is that which has a T1 T2 ratio of between 30 and 35 In order to find this press the Table button and the data will be displayed From the table identify the operating voltage that has the correct T1 T2 If you have to interpolate between two voltages assume a linear change Enter this value into the HV Setting box and then press the Back button The value below the graph will now have a Gold background to it This background colour highlights that the value has been changed but not yet saved When all operating voltages have been set press the Apply Settings button to save these values NOTE The Back button must be pressed in order to access the other functions NOTE The following procedure tends to be iterative in nature and included as a guide only Different operational requirements and background conditions may necessitate a different choice of operating point The final choice should be at the discretion of the senior Health Physicist When the gamma y graphs are displayed select the Gross Counting option and then press the respect
325. ew the two screws retaining the rocker switch cover protective lid Remove the connections of cable B92261 A supply input and B92603 A output and the earth strap to the earth point Unscrew 4 corner screws to extract the assembly for repair on the bench The Power Supply module contains dangerous high switching voltages and is not user serviceable It should be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific s service department for repair or replacement Ensure the correct type of replacement power supply is used See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 Replacement of the Power Supply is the reverse of the removal procedure If the Power Supply is thought to be faulty it should be replaced with an identical unit See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 Replace the connections ensuring all the clamping screws are tight and all GROUND EARTH connections are made Ensure the rocker switch cover is replaced to protect the user from any high voltages There is no PSU adjustment In the event of either part requiring replacement it must be replaced with a unit of identical type When re connecting the mains wiring ensure the mains inlet earth connection is made securely to the Central Earth Point CEP These requirements are mandatory and necessary for continued EMC performance and user safety Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Battery Removal and Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting
326. f Calibration page 5 16 the gas flow detectors are tested for stability while the gas flow is increased to a purge level When all gas flow detectors are proved stable the gas flow is reduced to normal and the current status of the background will be tested If valid normal background e monitoring will resume see Y hamo Normal Background Monitoring page 5 75 If not valid background stabilisation mode will be entered see Background Stability Check page 5 72 5 70 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Start Up Checks If the System Self Testing passes the Self Checks pass message is displayed for a few seconds Self Checks Pass Out Of Service Database connectivity check 1 e check that the local database is available Database Maintenance Out Of Service If the System Self Testing fails the Out of Service Critical Error message is displayed note 87102 that the reason for the error may be displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the screen See Out Of Service page 5 97 See Maintenance and Trouble Shooting page 11 1 for further information regarding the Self Test Failures messages A Critical Error Has Occurred Out Of Service G Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 71 Operating Instructions Out of Calibration Background Stability Check 5 72 iPCM User Manual
327. f Head Side of Head and gamma Hand kits are available as stand alone options Additionally an Integral scintillation gamma Mini SAM Small Articles Empty Pockets Monitor will also be available in a future release The iPCM12 is provided with battery backup as standard allowing continued operation in the event of a short term less iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 1 3 Introduction Issue 2 0 than 30 minute power failure optional powered doors are not battery backed Key Features e Two step operation open and closed versions see Positioning page 5 97 e Statistical alarming algorithm with several selectable parameters including Minimum Detectable Activity MDA confidence level false alarm rate and shielding factors see Setup Menu page 5 9 e Large status indicator lights representing READY CLEAR RECOUNT COUNT ALARM and OUT OF SERVICE as well as audible tones and voice instructions see Five Light System page 5 84 e Identification of which detector alarmed with lights is displayed on the monitor see Detector Indicator page 5 84 Low level distributed contamination is also indicated e Battery backup for 30 minutes see Battery Mains Supply Indicator page 5 115 Nomenclature Codes The build standard nomenclature is as follows iPCM12u 1 where u is Unit Type A B or C 1 is User language ie E English DE German C Chinese Option Codes fol
328. f a measurement cycle see Entering the Portal page 5 94 for more information 2 A change in background is detected see Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring e page 5 92 for more information Mice dim 3 A high background condition is detected see Notes Regarding High Background page 5 113 for more information If the Barrier Enabled and the Ingress Closed When Ready options are selected see Detection Options page 5 17 the user is unable to pass through the barrier while the Ready message displays If there is a problem with the Door Barrier the Barriers Jammed message displays If Barriers Jammed the system is unable to recover the Out of Service message displays see Barrier Error page 5 113 Ready Clear iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 91 Operating Instructions Notes Regarding Normal Background Monitoring Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring Issue 2 0 Alpha and Beta Backgrounds The backgrounds will be monitored over a 100 second period in 10 second blocks At the end of each 10 second accumulation the 10 second background will be compared with the prevailing 100 second background to assess for changing background or counts out of range conditions on the detectors before adding it into the current 100 second background Gamma Backgrounds The background will be monitored over 1 second check periods Each 1 second peri
329. fective Background while Monitoring cps is the mean background of the detector Bsum corrected for the effect of attenuation iPCM User Manual 6 9 Technical Description Physics Teal Ton Tmin Tmax Cops 6 10 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Calculated Monitoring Time seconds is the minimum time required to perform a measurement according to the calculation in Calculation of the Monitoring Time Tcal page 6 14 The specified alarm level must be achieved with the required certainty in the Monitoring Time which will depend upon a number of user programmable variables as well as the Background Actual Monitoring Time seconds is the actual time for which users are monitored The calculated monitoring time is first rounded up to the nearest whole second It is then compared with the user programmed Minimum Monitoring Time Tmin and if Teal lt Tmin then Tmon is forced to be Tmin otherwise Tmon If Ton gt Tmax then a high background condition exists and normal monitoring is not possible see Calculation of the Monitoring Time Tcal page 6 14 Minimum Monitoring Time seconds is the Minimum Time for which users are monitored regardless of the calculated Monitoring Time see explanations of Tcal and Tmon above The Minimum Monitoring Time is set from in Monitoring page 5 12 Maximum Monitoring Time seconds is the maximum time for which users are monitored reg
330. g Access to the Administration Mode page 5 4 Select System and Exit to Administrator Logon e Insert a USB keyboard and LOG ON to Windows as Administrator see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 4 e RUN Restore bat in CMPCM Database scripts e Log off Windows e Log on to Windows as ThermoUser 11 8 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Battery Controller Board Type 5703A Removal and Replacement Replacement of the Charger PCB Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Switch off iPCM12 using the keyswitch and remove the mains power supply The charger PCB is situated at the bottom of the Electronics Chassis Disconnect any cables remove the four M3 hex screws and washers securing the PCB to its mounting spacers The PCB is now free to be removed from the Electronics chassis Replacement of the charger PCB is the reverse of the removal procedure PL7 last Should the Charger PCB be thought to be faulty it should be replaced with an identical unit see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 iPCM User Manual 11 9 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting ETX processor Board type 11 10 5712A Removal and Replacement Replacement of the ETX processor board iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Switch off the power and remove the electronic display chassis after disconnecting external cabling links as listed in previous paragraphs Remo
331. g both measurement cycles to show the user the monitoring count has started and the count time remaining The Five Way LED Cluster Traffic Light Display boards type 56724 are driven from the bus and mounted in the cabinet roof plinth iPCM12 A Open cabinet variants have a single LED cluster mounted in the cabinet roof front face and optionally a second cluster mounted in the left or right side of the roof iPCM12 B and C Closed cabinet variants with or without doors have two LED clusters one mounted in each side of the cabinet roof or in the mechanism header assemblies if doors are fitted Only two LED clusters can be driven from the bus due to power limitations The LED Traffic Light clusters are used to inform users of iPCM12 system status monitoring availability and where doors are fitted control user flows The five color indications are Green Clear Ready White Recount Amber Count Red Alarm Blue Out of Service iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 11 Description Quad Gas Flow Detector Type 5710A Issue 2 0 Gas Flow Alpha Beta Detectors All iPCM12 variants are fitted with twenty one Gas Flow Alpha Beta detectors as standard Optionally three additional Side of Foot Top of Head and Purged Spare detectors can be fitted to suit user requirements The Quad Detector type 5710A is a large area alpha and beta sensitive gas flow detector This single size of
332. g gamma detectors 6 2 Figure 8 Cl Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Figure 9 Co Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Figure 10 Co Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Figure 11 Cs Gamma Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Figure 12 CI Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille Figure 13 Beta Horizontal Scan Rugged Grille Figure 14 Co Gamma Horizontal Scan Figure 15 Cs Gamma Horizontal Scan sccssssssssessssecsseesssecsseceseecssecsses Figure 16 Gas Detector Sum Zones sess Figure 17 Monitoring Statistics showing Operational Margin 6 33 Figure 18 Monitoring Statistics showing Minimum Monitoring Time 6 34 Figure 19 Battery Controller 11 9 Figure 20 DC DC Converter PCB sees 11 12 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor xiii Introduction Issue 2 0 Manual Revision History Section s Revision Approval comments L DeLonais All Initial Release M Pottinger C Hills L DeLonais WEEE RohS Rev 02 J Menge statement add P 10_MSDS to Chapter 13 xiv iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Foreword Foreword Throughout this document the term HEALTH PH
333. ge 5 64 show how the user may change the password Both the Thermo Fisher and the Health Physicist passwords protect the security of the operational Parameters and hence the integrity of the measurement Therefore these passwords should remain confidential their use restricted and above all should not be readily obvious to potential hackers Each user level should have a unique password and under no circumstances should all three levels be assigned the same password Setting the Operational At this point it is strongly recommended that the following Parameters User Programmable Operational Parameters are checked and reset by the Health Physicist before allowing normal monitoring to proceed As noted below it may be helpful to consult the configuration report to view the parameter settings established during the factory test and calibration A configuration printout is also normally provided with the initial documentation and iPCM12 manual Core parameters are noted here Activity units Bq Ci DPM See Set Up Monitoring page 5 12 for more information 9 2 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Setting Up Procedure Low Background Limit p High Background Limit p Minimum Monitoring Time Maximum Monitoring Time Measurement Confidence Gross changing background Detector changing background Changing Conditions Changing Conditio
334. ght Inverter Module Assembly D92583 A page 7 9 Reference to General assembly D92777 for closed booth iPCM12B and iPCM12C door variants only shows additional interconnections between the following modules e Power door GPIO interface 5707A see iPCM12C Option GPIO Controller Card 5707A page 7 9 e Barrier Mechanism see iPCM12C Option GPIO Controller Card 5707A page 7 9 e Swing door interfacing Items only applicable to scintillation versions of iPCM12B and iPCM12C when fitted with gamma detector option kit AE0222A are e Scintillation HV amplifier FHT681 see iPCM12B or iPCM12C with Gamma Kit Including FHT681 Scintillation HV and Amplifier page 7 8 e Body scintillator 5717A see Scintillation Gamma Detectors Type 5708A and 5717A page 2 14 e Head foot and hand scintillation detector 5708A see Scintillation Gamma Detectors Type 5708A and 5717A page 2 14 Electronic Display Chassis D92520 A The majority of the electronics is contained on board this sub structure allowing easy removal for servicing The assembly contains the following modules 7 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Circuitry X channel controller board 5712A see ETX Controller Board Type 5712A page 7 3 Hard disk drive A92083 A Gas flow control chassis including 5709A gas flow board see 5709A Gas Control Board
335. ght Toe Sensor Tick this option to re start a measurement if the user moves and breaks the sensor see Position Sensors page 5 31 Tick this option to disable the Body Sensor see Position Sensors page 5 31 Tick this option to disable the Right Toe Sensor see Position Sensors page 5 31 Enable Radon Detection Clean On Radon Only Portal Approach Time s Tick this option to enable Radon Detection see Radon page 5 26 Tick this option to reject certain Radon specific events see Radon Rejection page 6 9 for further information This is the maximum length of time following entry to the portal that the user has to move to the correct position in the portal Values 0 to 300 s Default 2 seconds Exit Barrier Delay s Background Logging Interval hours Out of Service Recovery Interval mins 5 12 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor This is the maximum length of time that the user has to re position him herself in the portal following exit or illegal movement during measurement Values 0 to 300 s Default 2 seconds Select an interval between 1 and 168 hours for the iPCM12 log the background periodically Select 0 to disable the periodic logging Each time a mandatory 100 second background is performed the background for each detector is logged to the database Values to 168 hours 0 to disable Default 0 When the unit is Out of Service see Out Of Servic
336. ground B This effectively produces a modified value of the background for use in the statistical calculations beyond which the probability of natural fluctuation is known to be acceptably small In Figure 6 10 the modified background used in the statistical calculations is represented by the left hand vertical line In this instance the stored background average B of 5 cps is corrected to 9 8 cps for use in calculation of the optimum monitoring time to give a false alarm rate of at least Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Effect of Probability of Detection PoD Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics the value of F entered The stored average background value of B for each detector is retained unaltered by calculations The False alarm rate is important and should however be kept as low as practicable since high frequency of false positives quickly degrades instrument credibility and user confidence In practice in 1 000 false alarms are widely accepted for personnel monitoring Since a false positive on only one of the detectors in either half of the measurement cycle gives a false alarm the value of F used must reflect the total number of detectors in the whole measurement Depending upon detector options fitted for a maximum of 60 detectors a value of 4 2 sigma ensures a maximum of in 1 000 false alarms for the whole system Use of the Auto recount option in the Softwar
337. h Off Only an Administrator is able to exit the iPCM12 application see Actions page 5 78 5 116 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics Chapters Technical Description Physics Performance Characteristics Introduction The iPCM12 utilizes 21 identical large gas flow detectors with optionally 3 additional detectors There are 12 detectors in a body array which has a sculpted design for best fit around the body In addition there are a side of head and a shoulder as well as two hand and two foot detectors An optional side of foot top of head and spare purged detector are also available The instrument is designed to measure alpha beta and gamma contamination on the body hands and feet of an operator Because an operator s hands and feet are in direct contact with the respective hand and foot detectors performance characteristics for the monitoring of contamination on the extremities is directly related to the efficiency figures given in Specification page 3 1 for hands and feet for the alpha beta detectors This Section is primarily concerned with the performance characteristics of detecting contamination on the body legs torso and head In order to obtain high efficiency from low energy betas and to obtain a good all around spatial response the operator must be close to the detectors The body Sensor ensures this by forcing the
338. h an identical unit see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 WARNING THE HV amp AMPLIFIER PCB S GENERATE DANGEROUS HIGH DC VOLTAGES EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING ALWAYS ALLOW THE HV TO DISCHARGE BEFORE COMMENCING WORK The FHT681 cards 5 maximum are mounted in pairs in the top section of the right side frame behind the lockable right hand side panel Labels on the panel identify how the cards connect with pairs of scintillation detectors and the address of the cards BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE ANY FHT681 BOARD SWITCH THE iPCM12 OFF AND WAIT 1 MINUTE FOR THE HV TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGINNING WORK iPCM User Manual 11 11 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 11 12 Replacement of the FHT681HV Amps Changing the FHT681 iPCM User Manual Address Issue Beta Issue 1 To remove any assembly from the frame unscrew the four front panels from the top righthand framework and then carefully withdraw the amplifier card Disconnect the rear two daisy changed ribbon cables grey that link the assembly to the ETX processor Note that all the FHT681 s are connected via PL12 on 5712 Then release the front MHV coaxial cables from the HV amp amps cards Replacement of any of the boards is the reverse of the removal procedure Ensure the detector cables are matched to the correct amplifier connector as detailed on the enclosure label If any Board is thought to be faulty it should be returned to Thermo Fisher
339. h will depend upon a number of user programmable variables as well as the Background Actual Monitoring Time seconds is the actual time for which users are monitored The calculated monitoring time is first rounded up to the nearest whole second It is then compared with the user programmed Minimum Monitoring Time Tmin and if Tea lt Tmin then Tao is forced to be Tmin otherwise Timon If Tmon gt Tmax then a high background condition exists and normal monitoring is not possible see Calculation of the Monitoring Time Tcal page 6 15 Minimum Monitoring Time seconds is the Minimum Time for which users are monitored regardless of the calculated Monitoring Time see explanations of Tcal and Tmon above The Minimum Monitoring Time is set in Monitoring page 5 14 Maximum Monitoring Time seconds is the maximum time for which users are monitored regardless of the calculated Monitoring Time see explanations of Tea and Ton above The Maximum Monitoring Time is set in Monitoring page 5 14 Contamination Alarm Level variable unit is the activity level at which the user requires the alarm to be triggered The alarm level is set in Alarms page 5 19 and the units e g dpm Bq nCi can be selected in UI Options page 5 9 Contamination Alarm Count rate cps is the count rate at which the user requires the alarm to be triggered It is equivalent to the Contamination Alarm Level set by the Administrator mo
340. hand panel door also provides service access to the main electronics chassis processor HV generator PSU battery controller and battery Refer to Drawing D92591 Sheet 1 see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 For iPCMI2 variants with gamma scintillation detectors the right hand panel door also provides access to the HV amp amplifiers and HV cabling Two box sections are mounted in the base of the frame and run from front to rear These box sections provide access for a Fork Lift truck alternatively a long reach pallet trolley iPCM User Manual 2 1 Description 2 2 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 PLEASE REFER TO UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION page 4 1 FOR THE LIMITATION ON THE USE OF THESE CHANNELS Warning the iPCM12 has a high centre of gravity and must never be moved by pallet or forklift over rough or sloping surfaces or ramps Note that the iPCM12 version without LEAD can only be moved using fork lift or pallet All units containing lead must be dismantled and the lead removed before manoeuvring the cabinet Electronics display chassis D92520 A The Electronic display chassis comprising of gas control chassis ETX processor HV generator DC DC convertor and LCD is mounted within the main corner assembly of the iPCM12 frame The upper gas chassis is retained by 4 hex pillers and studs The ETX board is retained by 6 x MS pillars and provides access to the LCD which may be removed to facilitate ma
341. he BDE D No 903 109 271 5 4 Operation modes e Automatic Normal function Table to signals X marks a release reaction CLOSED OPENING OPEN CLOSING AKI X X X X AKA X X X X SSK X X X X SIO X X x SIS X x TIPP X One way traffic In one way traffic mode people cannot enter the room from the outside but they can leave it from the inside Table to signals X marks a release reaction CLOSED OPENING OPEN CLOSING AKI X X X X AKA X X X SSK X X X X SIO X X X SIS X X TIPP AKA is active as safety device while closing Page 10 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power I Operating instructions Manual operation The door can be opened and closed by hand Open continuously o The door is opened and stays open Locked a In the operation mode Locked the locking is activated Table to signals X marks a release reaction CLOSED OPENING OPEN CLOSING X X X AKA X X X SSK x X X X SIO X X X SIS X X TIPP Reset After pushing on the button for approx 5sec this status message on the display is No Reset Operator Yes Pushing again on the button resets the operator Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 11 of 20 Configurations 6 1 Parameter Overview record pa
342. he MDA Therefore squeezing a few extra source counts at the expense of a significant background increase would be detrimental Refer also to iPCM12 Specification page 3 1 and Technical Description Physics page 6 1 for BAE details and operational alarm level settings Setting the Gas Flow Detector High Voltage Select the Gas Flow Detector Voltage parameter from the main menu and set the correct working voltage to the nominal figures shown This varies with the gas mixture in use the recommended working voltages are indicated in Specification page 3 1 Typically for the recommended gas mixture P7 5 7 5 Methane CH 92 5 Argon the working voltage is 1775V Details are shown on the configuration print out for the instrument at the time of manufacture NOTE The voltage quoted here is valid within 300 m 1000 ft of sea level The working voltage may reduce by as much as 25 V 300 m 1000 ft above sea level 9 8 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Gas Supply Leakage Checks Thermo Fisher Scientific Setting up Procedure Gas System The Gas supply should be regulated 3 to 5 psi or 14 to 35 KPa or 0 15 to 0 35 Bar Gas is Argon Methane at mixture between 90 10 P10 and 95 5 P5 92 5 7 5 P7 5 is recommended Ensure that the Gas flow detector HV settings are correct for the gas mixture as noted in the previous section The gas inlet purge and f
343. he connections of cable B92261 A supply input and B92603 A output and the earth strap to the earth point 4 Unscrew and remove four mounting plate corner screws to extract the PSU assembly The AC Mains PSU including its internal fuse is not user serviceable The Power Supply module contains dangerous Hazardous Live high switching voltages and is not user serviceable It should be returned to the Thermo Fisher Scientific service department for repair or replacement Be sure to use the correct type of replacement power supply See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 Replacement of the Power Supply is the reverse of the removal procedure Replace the connections ensuring all the clamping screws are tight and all GROUND EARTH connections are securely made Ensure the ON OFF rocker switch cover is replaced to protect the user from AC Mains voltage hazards There is no PSU adjustment The combined AC Mains IEC socket and Filter assembly is located in the side section of the roof plinth Switch the iPCM12 OFF at the PSU assembly isolate the external AC Mains supply and disconnect the IEC power cord Remove the two screws securing the safety cover In the event of failure the IEC Filter must be replaced with one of identical type See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 to preserve EMC performance and safety integrity When re 11 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Batter
344. he following possible causes 1 If no output whatsoever is received check the data cable connections see Displays page 3 15 2 If aUSB printer is involved perform a printer self test to determine whether the printer itself is at fault The following section applies to Door and Barrier options only 11 34 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Barriers will not OPEN CLOSE Unreliable Door Operations Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting If the entry Barrier fails to Close UP or DOWN then select the Diagnostic Barriers page 5 23 function to exercise the arm Should this be successful then check that the front barrier has been Enabled and Closed for one of the three options If un successful then it will be necessary to verify that power is reaching the motor by examining the voltages on the motor connector when it is asked to close open see Barriers page 5 23 If power exists examine the motor assembly to decide whether the motor itself is at fault or the integral microswitches are damaged misaligned If no problem is found with the motor assembly and its cabling then suspect the GPIO card Replacing the 5707A GPIO Board should resolve the fault NOTE IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE USER LEAVES THE DOOR IN A CLOSED POSITION OTHERWISE THE CONTROL PANEL OR OPERATION FROM THE iPCM12 APPLICATION WILL BE INHIBITED SIMILARLY IF IN DIAGNOST
345. he name that displays in other fields 5 56 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions To edit an existing Fixture Edit Jig properes select a Fixture and press the Edit button The Edit Fixture Source 1 amze 4115 1 1 1 Nuclide 241 properties window displays ks ee Ua See above for description of field 555m names Source 2 cias Laie Nuclide Decayed Activity 4508 Bq Emission Type Beta Jig Description Cancel Save Changes To delete an existing Fixture rr Are you sure select a Fixture and press the Delete button The confirmation window displays Interfaces Select Interfaces Plug ins to seru es a f Plug ins Configure an interface to another system Please Select an Interface Configure Interface NOTE Interfaces are not limited to the examples given below Other interfaces are possible and the parameters described below may vary according to the interface selected Please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific regarding your specific interface requirements e EPD Id Reader see EPD Id Reader page 50 e DS Camera see 105 Camera page 50 e Keyboard Emulating Id Provider see Keyboard Emulating Id Provider page 51 e Serial Barcode Reader see Serial Barcode Reader page 52 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 5
346. he report by Start and End Date Radiation Type Alpha Beta or Gamma and Statistic Max Min Mean Please note that the report below is an example and does not display all the information Background Measurement Summary Background Rate Trend 6020 m 4020 o o 2020 20 14 08 2008 16 08 2008 18 08 2008 20 08 2008 15 08 2008 17 08 2008 19 08 2008 ID Measurement Date Count Rate Changing Integration Period 126 20 08 2008 10 29 6555 10 125 20 08 2008 09 23 6469 Yes 10 124 20 08 2008 08 41 6564 Yes 10 123 19 08 2008 16 02 6471 No 100 122 19 08 2008 15 05 6469 Yes 10 121 19 08 2008 13 56 6489 No 100 120 19 08 2008 12 56 6527 Yes 10 18 18 08 2008 23 54 6395 No 100 Press on one of the ID records to display the Background Measurement Detail for the selected Measurement ID Please note that the report below is an example and does not display all the information 5 52 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Background Measurement Detail Operating Instructions Background ID Threshold 1 1 1 Ci Ci t t tm do t C CO N NO c 0 00 CO CO TD m 126 1 gt Oo Aa U N gt Oo RR n BR U hl tU RU N WwW gt N gt e Aa A U nan e U N Count Rate cps 727 176 168 74 37 812 147 139 62 24 859 158 15
347. hecks coeno eoe m eiue es in PRO I D SITE IA I US EMC amp Safety Earthing Checks ennt 8 2 Periodic Source Checks Regular Source Checks Cleaning Instructions RR M Setting up PIGCedUleuoi c 9 1 Initial Setting up for Use eee eese esee entente tta tna satos isos 9 1 General InitialiZdtOl iau ERROR Raed het ERRORS E EGER Rr Ge FUROR IER Setting Pass Words eodera o Ir Er ere beret EA Setting the Operational Parameters Selection of Detector Operating Parameters 4 eee eee eres testes Detector HV Selections aee ette ee potente Bro ehe n ie i e ted Derivation of the Optimum Operating Voltage Setting the Gas Flow Detector High Voltage Gas System Gas Supply Leakage Checks Gas Flow Param etets eate Purge and Operational Flow seen nennen Calibration Procedu te iii 10 1 Calibration Plinio P Equipment Required Gas Flow Detectors Gamma Scintillation Detectors Preparation for Calibration eeeeeeeer eret Orn M Gas Flow Detectors inira e Gamma Sintillation Detectors
348. her ETX processor of suitable processing power in the event of obsolescence or to enhance system functionality Form Factor ETX Family Intel Celeron M Speed 1 5 GHz Memory 512 Mbyte SDRAM Hard Disk SerialATA x2 ParallelATA x2 USB 4 x USB 2 0 Ethernet 10 100 Mbit Sound AC97 Video Contr Integrated Intel 82855GME LVDS Resolution up to 1600 x 1200 UXGA LVDS LCD Single and Dual Channel LVDS 2x18 24 bit Com Ports 1 2 TTL Power Supply 5 Volts DC Power 10W Idle Typical Temperature 0 C to 60 C iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 11 Specification Motherboard Communications Gas Flow HV Generator Issue 2 0 Type 5712A Plug In PC ETX Celeron M Hard Disk 40 Gbyte Industrial Compact Flash 256 Mbyte USB 2 0 4 x ports Network 1 x Ethernet 10 100 Mbit X Channel I RS 422 485 2 x ports X Channel II RS 422 485 6 x ports Video 1 x LVDS and 1 x VGA Touch screen 1 x TTL port Keyboard 1 x PS2 Keyboard port Unused Mouse 1 x PS2 Mouse Port Unused Protocol X Channel I and X Channel II Network RS 422 Multidrop HV Generators and Amplifiers A single High Voltage supply centrally generated by 5713A is distributed to all Gas Flow detectors User programmable HV is gas mixture dependent Because all 5710A detectors have a long and stable plateau the 1 700 Volt factory set default is suitable for all detectors running on P7 gas mixture High Voltage R
349. her high energy photon emitters to be monitored using the Co window 6 18 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics The method of assessment of background count rates and contamination level applies to the window channel in the same way as for gross alarms described in this section However both the background count rate Bc and the efficiency Eco are considerably lower than for the gross sum channel Residual Contamination After a measurement resulting in an Alarm condition a Level Residual Contamination Count RCC may be taken if enabled in Operation page 5 11 A count equal to the monitoring time Ton is enforced Residual Contamination is assumed to exist where the following formula is satisfied 22 Lx where Crcc is the average count rate during the Residual Contamination Count period Nacc is the RCC threshold variable see Monitoring page 5 14 Cece Bun gt Nace The default setting for Ngcc is 7 00 and should never be set to a less than the sum of the probabilities of detection and false alarm P F In the event of residual contamination being detected the iPCM12 will enter an Out of Service state and monitoring will not be possible see Notes Regarding Residual Contamination Check page 5 109 Intervention by a password holder will be required to terminate the fault status see Instrument Contaminate
350. hermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions User Screen An example of the iPCMI2 screen displays below Headline 1 Ready Headline 2 Detector Indicator User Instructions e f 1___ Fivedight IPCM S system Ready Clear 2 M By em thermo Fisher es Branding Gas Flow Error Battery Mains Indicator Operational Mode Supply Indicator display bar Figure 2 Example of iPCM12 User Screen The iPCM12 User Screen displays the following e Headlines 1 and 2 note that some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 25 e Detector Indicator displays where contamination occurs if present see Detector Indicator page 5 84 e User Instructions note that some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 25 e Five light system that mimics the Annunciator Overlay display see Five Light System page 5 84 e Thermo Fisher Scientific branding e Operational Mode display bar this also gives a description of the selected menu in Administration Mode e Battery Mains Supply Indicator page 5 115 e Gas Flow Error Indicator page 5 22 e iPCM 12 press here to enter Administrator Mode page 5 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 83 Operating Instructions Detector Indicator Issue 2 0 Following a measurement if a contamination is present the lit detectors identify where the c
351. hich is found within typical contamination levels to be monitored The iPCM12 is designed to monitor radioactivity on the surface of the body to levels less than 83 5000 dpm for beta and 17 1000 dpm for alpha Planar sources of surface area less than or equal to 100 cm and activities between 400 Bq and 6 kBq are used to calibrate detectors In order to speed up the calibration process a two source magnetic jig Thermo Fisher part no AE0246 or AE0247 that attaches to the detector grille may be used This allows calibration of two detection zones on a single detector at the same time A radioactive source of known nuclide and activity which is found within typical contamination levels to be monitored The gamma option is designed to monitor radioactivity on the surface of the body to levels less than 400 11 nCi of Co and quantify significantly larger activities up to and in excess of 5 MBq 130 uCi Because the iPCM12C has a very linear response to activity any source of activity between 185 kBq 5 uCi to 350 kBq 9 5 Ci range may be used Long count times will be required for small sources to maintain statistical accuracy against adverse background influences A source holder to securely retain the source for positioning within the portal Preparation for Calibration First the user must open the Calibration Menu page 5 38 Select HV Scan page 5 46 and ensure that the detector HVs are set correctly fo
352. hooting scintillation detector free from its lead shielding and lift it clear ensure it does not fall WARNING TAKE CARE THAT THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY DOES NOT FALL Detector Replacement Replacement of the Detectors follows the removal procedure in reverse Care must be exercised not to break the light tight seals Once the detectors are in place refit all spacers straps and panels Setting up Replacement Replacement scintillation detectors and detectors with Detectors for Use replacement PMTs will need to be set for optimum performance with the Isotopes of interest Before determining HVs the multi Channel Analyzer Thresholds must be reset to their default settings or erroneous results will be obtained see Thresholds page 5 54 Once this is done select the detector operating point using the HV Scan procedure detailed in Selection of Detector Operating Parameters page 9 3 GPIO Board 57074 The optional General Purpose Input Output GPIO board is fitted to Closed iPCMI2 variants fitted with Door Barrier and Turnstile systems 1 Shut down the iPCM12 and switch the AC mains supply OFF 2 The GPIO board is located at the bottom left corner of the main Electronics and Display Chassis adjacent to the 5713A HV Generator and retained by six M3 hex pillars Disconnect the signal and control cable connectors and the yellow X Channel network cables and then remove the six hex pillars GPIO Replacement b
353. horough testing Automatic swing doors should be operated and maintained to ensure safety at all times 7 2 Care The entire swing door system can be cleaned with a damp cloth and commercially available cleaning agents The cleaning agent must be harmonised to the surface which has to be cleaned It is recommended to select the Continuously open or Locked mode of operation for this purpose so that the door does not continually open and close unnecessar ily 7 3 Maintenance periodic inspection It is recommended to have a technical safety test with servicing performed by a specialist before first commissioning and as required but at least twice a year Regular testing and servicing by our fully trained personnel therefore offers the best guarantee for a long service life and satisfactory operation We therefore recom mend the signing of a maintenance agreement Our service department will be pleased to submit a proposal If nevertheless a fault should occur which you cannot eliminate see section 8 our service organisation or the maintenance personnel of our agents are available 7 4 Service centres In Switzerland Phone 41 0 44 954 92 92 Fax 41 0 44 954 92 00 Alternative service centre Page 14 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Action case of faults 8 1 Fault indication Various indications are given for an irregularity or fault depending on the control unit connected
354. iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 LCD Display and Touch Screen Assembly DC DC Converter Board Type 5714C Thermo Fisher Scientific Description e Ethernet network interface SK201 socket located on cabinet roof e VGA CRT monitor connection on SK3 not used e LCD XGA drive on PL6 with backlight driver on PL7 e RS232 driver for LCD touch screen on PL2 e POWER input connector PL10 Five Way e Loudspeaker connection for sound generator on PL1 e bus comms for Five Way LED cluster displays on PL9 e RS 422 X Channel Comms interface on SK1 6 7 8 13 and 14 e bus comms for 5711A User Guidance Display on PL9 The Color LCD Display and Touch screen Assembly is mounted on the Electronics Chassis located immediately in front of the 5712A Processor board The Display assembly D92583 A used in portrait orientation comprises a number of proprietary parts NEC color TFT 1024 X 768 XGA resolution dual CCFL backlit LCD display dual output Backlight Inverter high voltage generator module resistive five wire laminated touch screen and RS232 touch screen controller PCB type SCA WARNING THE BACKLIGHT INVERTER MODULE GENERATES HAZARDOUS LIVE HIGH VOLTAGES REFER TO THE WARNINGS IN MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING PAGE 11 1 THE BACKLIGHT INVERTER IS A PROPRIETARY MODULE AND IS NOT USER SERVICEABLE A DC DC Converter board type 5714C is mounted on
355. ical 40 3 9 Alpha and Beta on Hands amp Feet 6 24 Alphaon Body 6 24 Alpha numerical Functions 5 2 Archives 5 77 Attenuation 5 34 5 53 Background Change during Measurement 5 101 Background Report 5 65 Background Stability Check 5 88 Barrier Error 5 113 Barriers 5 23 5 36 Battery 5 21 Battery Charger 5 36 Betaon Body 6 24 Body Gamma Detectors 6 11 22 Body Position Sensors 3 14 Body Scintillator 3 7 Body Hand Head Detector 5710 19 22 per iPCM12 3 6 Bin 6 10 Button Types 5 3 C Cabinet Styles 3 1 6 11 Index A Cal Check 5 39 Cal Status 5 38 Cal Streams 5 45 Calibration 5 16 Calibration Procedure 10 1 Calibration Report 5 67 Camera 5 62 5 96 Cancel Alarm 5 108 Cops 6 11 Correct 6 12 Central Processor 3 11 Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring 5 92 Changing the FHT681 Address 11 14 Charging LED 3 16 CLEAR Result 5 103 Cold Start State 5 85 Color LCD 3 15 Communications 3 12 Configuration Report 5 68 Counting Gas Requirement 3 18 D Data Retention 5 81 Date Functions 5 2 Description 2 1 Detection Options 5 17 Detector Indicator 5 84 Detector Types 3 1 Detectors 5 27 Determining Gamma Detectors Operating Voltage for Mid high Energy Nuclides 9 6 DL 6 12 Drawing Appendix 13 1 E E 6 12 Efficiencies 5 38 Emergency Mode 5 115 Environmental Restrictions 3 20 EPD Id Reader 5 58 Establishing a new Background
356. ical Error Has Occurred Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 87 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Out of Calibration If the Calibration Warn Period has been reached then the Calibration Warning message Out Of Calibration displays see Calibration page 5 16 To check the Calibration of the unit see Cal Check page 5 39 Out Of Service If the Calibration Required Interval option has been exceeded then the Out of Out Of Service Service message displays note that the reason given for Out of Service displays in the Operational Mode Display Bar A Critical Error Has Occurred see Calibration page 5 16 To check the Calibration of the unit see Cal Check page 5 39 Out Of Service Background Stability Check If beta detection is enabled see Detection Options page 5 17 the gas flow detectors are tested for stability by increasing to a purge level Out Of Service 5 88 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Once these detectors are proved stable the gas flow is reduced to ides sera normal and the current a rr Background Status is tested B i E E if E gik E LM LIT Out Of Service EstablishingaNew Once the Self Checks have Background passed iPCMI2 will to acquire a new background and the Updating Backg
357. icate for each individual instrument Scintillation HV Generator The Scintillation HV Amplifier type FHT 681 has two identical HV Generator and Amplifier Channels Each HV Generator is User programmed to obtain the optimum operating point for individual detectors PMTs High Voltage Range 500 to 1 400 Volts DC HV Resolution 5 Volts DC Default HV Setting 700 Volts DC Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 13 Specification Issue 2 0 Scintillation Amplifier Scintillation HV Amplifier type FHT 681 has two Thresholds identical HV Generator and Amplifier Channels Each Amplifier channel has four programmable thresholds effectively creating five energy windows Threshold Range Step Default Setting 1 0 4095 mV 1 mV 50 mV 2 0 4095 mV mV 1000 mV 3 0 4095 mV 1 mV 1050 mV 4 0 4095 mV 1 mV 1850 mV 5 0 4095 mV 1 mV 3000 mV CAUTION ALTHOUGH ALL THRESHOLDS ARE ADJUSTABLE UNDER SOFTWARE CONTROL SPECIAL PASSWORD AUTHORIZATION IS REQUIRED AND ADJUSTMENT IS NOT RECOMMENDED BECAUSE THE CHANGE IN RESPONSE MAY COMPROMISE MONITORING INTEGRITY Control The IPCM12 has minimal user controls for ease of use and reliability Power ON OFF Keyswitch momentary RUN START operation Momentary START position auto cold start Software Shutdown 10 second START position forced shut down Body Position Sensors Administration mode System menu Actions sub me
358. ice and safely removed using a suitable forklift and the integral fork lifting facilities provided The mounting should be repaired and made safe before replacing the iPCM12 Electrical Checks During calibration check the general condition of the battery To do this turn the iPCM12 ON by rotating the key switch on the front panel to the ON position Remove the mains power cord Unlock and open the right hand side access panel and locate PL5 on controller card 5703A Connect a suitable Voltmeter set to the DC volts range directly across the terminals of PL5 pins 1 and 6 Check the load battery voltage is greater than 12 volts assuming the battery has previously been charged If the battery voltage is low consult Troubleshooting Operational page 11 21 Alternatively the battery voltage and load can be monitored from within the application see Battery page 5 20 for further information NOTE Only qualified personnel should operate the IPCM12 with the mains connected and the access panel open Make sure all the warnings given at the front of this manual are heeded iPCM User Manual 8 1 Routine Checks 8 2 Display Checks EMC amp Safety Earthing iPCM User Manual Checks Issue Beta Issue 1 It may be necessary at some time due to replacement of Touch Screen or Touch Controller to re calibrate the touch screen This is an Administration function and the facility would be accessed outside of the applica
359. id Amber Ready Clear Solid Red Recount Solid Flashing Count Green Solid Alarm White Blue Solid Flashing Out Of Service Fast Flashing Red Flashing Red 5 68 iPCM User Manual The iPCM12 is READY for operation The result of a measurement is CLEAR A recount is necessary User must exit portal before re entering A measurement is in progress User must move to next measurement position Measurement Complete Result CLEAR An alarm or violation has taken place during measurement OR The iPCM12 is contaminated User must exit portal before re entering accompanied by Alarm Out of Service Portal Occupied The 2 is not in use Out of Service Acquiring new background Out of Service High or Low background Out of Service Portal Occupied Background Acquision suspended accompanied by Alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Guidance System Voice Prompts Cold Start State Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions The Guidance system gives a visual indication of the current operation of the iPCM12 Position Body This LED is lit if the user is not correctly positioned Turn Around This LED is lit when the user is instructed to turn around Time This LED gives an indication of Remaining how much time is remaining for the measurement Time Remaining Note that if Voice Prompts are enabled see UI
360. id Efficiency Results Overall Centroid Efficiency 122 56 Fail Confirm If the calculated efficiency has an illegal value i e no net counts the efficiency will be set to zero Select Details button to view details results If you are satisfied with the result press the Confirm button to display the Add Description for the Calibration page Select OK to complete the process Note that the results are stored in the database and marked as PASS Centroid Efficiency Results Osecee Theeshois 2 scrT 630 Thresteld 3 HA H i1 SCRI Calibration Source Standard Optional Add a description for Ihis calibration and Press OK OK Cancel If you are NOT satisfied with the result press the Fail button The Calibration Source page is re displayed Note that the results are stored in the database and marked as FAIL Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 39 Operating Instructions Cal Streams 5 40 iPCM User Manual Description of Error messages Error Message Unable to calculate a valid monitoring time This is not the default Calibration Source Resolution 1 There is no source available 2 The source does not have enough activity 3 If a cobalt calibration has been activated and the source is not Co60 This is a warning message only Issue Beta Issue 1 Select Calibration Cal Streams to ME 723 002
361. ientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting The Electronics Chassis is now freed by removing the 10 x M6 hex retaining studs M10 spanner required securing the chassis to the panel Hold the assembly and lift out clear of the top left corner frame When refitting the Electronics display chassis into the top left corner frame ensure All the cards are securely screwed down The ETX assembly and heat sink are correctly fixed The disk drive cable is correctly fitted All ten M6 fixing bolts are fitted and tightened All cables are returned to their associated plugs sockets connecting battery cables last refer to D92591 sheet 1 as necessary All earthing points are restored Restore the cable harnesses to their original wrapped condition iPCM User Manual 11 5 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Removal and Replacement of the Power Supply Power Supply Replacement 11 6 Adjustment of PSU Mains Inlet Filter amp Isolator iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 IMPORTANT BEFORE ANY WORK STARTS ENSURE THAT THE MAINS SUPPLY IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE iPCMI2 AND THE iPCMI2 IS POWERED OFF AT THE FRONT PANEL KEYSWITCH Unlock the right hand iPCM12 side access panel The mains PSU power supply for the iPCM12 is mounted in the lower left section of the main frame Having first disconnected the external mains supply on the iPCMI2 top plinth locate the PSU assembly and switch the rocker switch to OFF Unscr
362. if fitted the gamma y There will then be a further choice between performing a New Scan and viewing the Last Scan Press the New Scan button The new screen allows for the setting of the scan parameters Start Stop and Step voltages as well as the counting time iPCM User Manual 9 5 Setting Up Procedure Issue Beta Issue 1 The recommended values for these parameters are For gas flow detectors Start 1400 volts Stop 2000 volts Step 5 volts Time 10 seconds For gamma scintillation detectors Start 600 volts Stop 1100 volts Step 5 volts Time 10 seconds NOTE Short voltage steps are required in order to make the location of the optimum operating voltage easier Using the recommended values this process will take approximately one hour to complete Once there parameters have been set and the Start button has been pressed A series of onscreen instructions are displayed to step the user through the scan process NOTE The scan can be aborted at any time by pressing the Abort button The background scan is performed on all detectors simultaneously For the gas flow detectors it is not obligatory to carry out HV scans unless the gas medium has been changed This is because the characteristics of gas flow detectors have the same optimum working point which is typical of type An HV scan for one gas flow detector is included in the factory testing to ensur
363. ific Issue 2 0 Exiting the Portal Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions The iPCM12 provides the following options to control how personnel exit the portal e Alarm Duration After Exit see Operation page 5 11 e Enable Rear Barrier see Detection Options page 5 17 After a result displays the user must exit the portal Exit Please Leave the Portal Ready Clear 2 Ae After an ALARM result the alarm will sound for the length of time set in Alarm Duration after Exit see UI Options page 5 9 Once the user has successfully vacated the portal the Ready message displays Ready Clear iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 111 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Out Of Service Non recoverable If the Switch On tests fail or a failure is detected during normal operation the Out of Service Out Of Service Critical Error message displays The reason for the error may be displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the screen A Critical Error Has Occurred See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions To clear this error the state must be cleared in the Administration Mode or will clear automatically when the Out of Service 2 Recovery Interval is passed see Operation page 5 11 for more information Out Of Service See Actions page 5 78 for more information regarding clearing the Critical Error
364. ific service department for repair or replacement iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 15 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Replacement of the LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter User Guidance Display Guidance 5711A and LED Cluster Board 5672A Removal and Replacement Issue 2 0 6 To remove the LCD display disconnect all three cables 7 Undo the display retaining screws located round the periphery of the metalwork 8 Gently pull the front bezel assembly away from the main housing and lay carefully onto a flat surface 9 Remove the four screws attaching the LCD shield to the front bezel 10 Lift the LCD and shield from the bezel and touch screen sitting in a recess of the plastic bezel The touch screen is not fixed to the bezel 11 Remove the four screws holding the aluminum shield to the LCD via spacers Replacement of the LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Back light Inverter is the reverse of the removal procedure Should any item be thought faulty replace with an identical part See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 NOTE Take special care in handling the Touch Screen and LCD to keep all faces free of dirt and finger marks If the Touch Screen is replaced it will be necessary to re calibrate it using the software utility provided WARNING BEFORE SERVICING EITHER OF THESE ASSEMBLIES ENSURE THE IPCMI2 IS SHUT DOWN AND THE PO
365. igned to detect activities down to release levels and otherwise as low as reasonably achievable ALARA However the iPCM12 is also very linear in response so a wide range of source activities may be used for set up and calibration For the gas flow detectors typical beta and alpha extended area sources for contact measurements will be required around 0 1uCi 4kBq with a calibrated SER surface emission rate e g 2000 and 20000 5sec Depending upon energy detector efficiency for gamma scintillation detectors source activity should typically be in the 2 Ci 80kBq to 6 wCi 200 kBq range and in any case not more than 10 uCi 370 kBq Long count times will be required for small sources to maintain statistical accuracy against adverse background influences NOTE For all the measurements performed below all sources of radiation other than that used for the specific test should be removed from the immediate area in order to minimise the effect of background fluctuations All counts read from the detectors are corrected to compensate for the amplifier dead time With the iPCM12 and surrounding area free of sources enter the Administrator Mode page 5 1 as Health Physicist From the function tabs on the left side of the screen select the Calibration option Then from the tabs along the top of the screen select HV Scan There is a choice between displaying the gas flow HVscan or
366. in the case of a jig calibration two alpha channels and two beta channels can be calibrated simultaneously After an intial background check the software prompts the user to place the source s over the center of each detection zone The system will count for a period that is evaluated based upon the uncertainties requested by the user At the end of the counting period the detector mimic shows the calibrated detectors in green When all the detectors are green press the Done button The system will undertake another background check to confirm the background count rates are the same as at the beginning of the calibration process and then press each detector to confirm the detector efficiencies are within the required range This process should be repeated for a number of nuclides that would be found in typical contamination At a minimum a calibration to an alpha emitter C Am and a beta emitter Ch should be undertaken NOTE At the end of the calibration the user is prompted to PASS or FAIL the calibration If the result is not within 15 of the reference values in Table below it may be appropriate to FAIL or Cancel the calibration iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 10 3 Calibration Procedure Gamma Sintillation Detectors Issue 2 0 Detector Energy 4T PER Rugged Grille Grille sa Hand amp 709 keV Beta 19 LM Hand amp 514 keV Beta 19 96 TS CEN Cs Foot 51
367. in the case of low energy betas A statistical demonstration program available from Thermo Fisher Scientific provides numerical solutions to given conditions and also gives a graphical representation which is a valuable aid to understanding the effects and interactions of parameters Detector efficiency and averaging area are the variables that affect the Alarm set point count rate C above background For beta emitters C Alarm activity per unit area x averaging area x detection efficiency 4 Using the Co efficiency values from Specification page 3 1 and the U S alarm limit Co on C 0 83 Bq cm x 100cm 5 5 4 6 cps Body iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 23 Technical Description Physics Alpha and Beta on Hands amp Feet Beta on Body Alpha on Body Issue 2 0 Consider the graphical representation in Figure 17 The C body alarm level of 4 6 cps is the center of the right hand distribution at 9 6 cps 4 6 cps above the average 5 cps background The hands and feet are in defined positions and in contact with the detector surface so it is perfectly legitimate to use contact efficiencies when calculating alarm levels values used should be to activity 4 or V Surface Emission Rate as above The use of body positioning systems and the geometry of the instrument force most parts of the body to be in contact with a detector at some point of the measurement cycl
368. ing temperature range temperature sensor on PL1 The 5703A has the ability to switch the load PL6 ON OFF as directed by the operator while continuing to charge the battery Current and voltage monitoring IC100 101 and control circuitry IC4 always ensure sufficient power is made available to power the iPCM12 even when the battery is exhausted from the primary power source The transfer to battery is automatic however the load will be removed when the battery terminal voltage falls bellow 10 5 V This circuit is required to prevent the battery being damaged by being deeply discharged Hysteresis is built into this circuit to prevent oscillations It does not allow the battery to re connect as soon as its terminal voltage recovers slightly as a result of having the load removed from its terminals The user is informed of a pending shut down in order that any data can be saved A key switch is connected to the 5703A or 5720A when fitted for manually switching the power ON OFF to the load Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 7 5 Technical Description Circuitry Keyswitch Operation Issue 2 0 The keyswitch performs two operations Primarily it allows the instrument to be switched ON if the mains supply exists and or the battery contains sufficient charge This is achieved by turning and holding the key clockwise for at least two seconds Secondarily the instrument can be
369. integral options The Closed cabinet extension lead shielding and Scintillation options are shipped in separate packaging The iPCM12 Open unit packing case will contain the following items e Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor type iPCMI2A wrapped in polyethylene e Combined Operational and Maintenance Manual e Calibration Certificate e Keys for Service door cabinet and all hinged panels e Keys for Run Start ON OFF Key switch e Security Dongle for iPCM12 e Set of 2 5 mm 3 mm and 4 mm Allen keys e Foot plinth tread plate lifting tool x 2 e Festo Polyethylene 3mm PL3 gas tubing 3 lengths e Festo Bulkhead Gas Fittings x 2 e power cord with free end Scintillation option AE0222A will be crated separately as follows e Lead shielding Base tray Base lead detector lead and shadow shield lead e Scintillation Detectors body 6 Hand Foot Head 3 4 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Items Required Transit Damage Inspection Unpacking iPCM12 Thermo Fisher Scientific Unpacking and Installation The following items will be required to perform the installation e Fork lift truck 500 Kg 1 000 lbs minimum capacity adjustable gate and trained driver e Optionally a low profile pallet jack truck 27 outer gate width e Counting gas preferably 7 5 or 10 Methane in Argon P7 5 or P10 e Festo PL3 Gas Tubing 25 m
370. intenance The whole electronics chassis is retained by 10 x M6 pillars Main processor board Type 5712A The Controller Board type 5712A is motherboard to an ETX PM C 1 5GHz Processor The ETX assembly provides PC functionality with 512Mb of RAM and the real time clock The motherboard interfaces directly to all other boards and external devices in the system via numerous connectors not all are being used e The application software is retrieved from a 30 gigabyte minimum hard disk drive via SK10 The drive also provides non volatile storage for all data e PL15 provides a flash card storage medium for long term storage of important data e 4x USB connectors on SK4 11 15 16 SK4 is connected to the router on the user interface panel on the underside of the LCD display e x network interface SK201 routed to the user interface panel on the top of the main frame e x CRT monitor connection on SK3 not used e IxLCD drive on PL6 with backlight driver on PL7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Description e Ix RS232 driver for LCD touch screen on PL2 e xPOWER connector PL10 e 1x Loudspeaker connection for sound generator on PLI e x connector on PL9 for communicating with LED cluster display e 1x X channel software interface on SK1 6 7 8 13 amp 14 for detectors sensors gas control HV generator e 1x guidance display drive on PL8 X Channel GPIO Board T
371. intenance DC geared motor with electronic path measurement and integral thermostatic protective switch gear box with adjustable spring tension Power supply NET Compact 230 V power supply with integral input filter and over voltage protection Control unit BDE As required with convenient simple mechanical control unit and or a programmable electronic BDE D Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 5 of 20 lll Construction and Function Arm types Power transmission to the door leaf by use of standard arm pushing or sliding arm pulling pushing Locking VRR optional It is possible to connect an electrical door opener 24VDO to the operator Sensing units Aesthetic actuating and self monitoring safety elements with adjustable sensitivity ensure optimum smooth and reliable operation of the door system 4 3 Functional description In the standard Automatic mode of operation the door system opens by the re sponse of an actuating device e g radar unit to persons or objects approaching The door closes after the door hold open time provided no further opening pulse is received In the Lock mode of operation the door is only opened by actuation of an op tional key operated contact SSK The door closes after the SSK door hold open time provided no further opening pulse is received An obstacle to the swing door leave during Closing leads to an immediate re opening reverse The obstacle p
372. ion Physics 6 1 Performance Characterlstics 5 2 112i eio rin etre eo toi p ra eue cook oro do Feb epa esoo o sedeo reb GE Pes desi ceed 6 1 viii iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Contents IntroduCtloL 2 nerd tente Geass NH toi e nee I M e ER CREE Spatial Response ics re orem pe c ED RON REIN AA Body Efficiencies ise treo emo EO Wr n esas HI e ERR ERE E Ye Radon ReJection i societe eer et E RA UFU A egere Explanation of the Operational Calculations Introduction sne ece Description of Parameters Used in Calculations essent 6 10 Background Update Ite de ete ned e ede 6 13 Changing Background scene eoa eite ec bite reddi 6 14 Calculation of the Monitoring Time T a eese 6 15 Minimum Detectable Activity MDA and High Background Criterion 6 16 Changing Conditions eter rer ro rat at De gre 6 16 Contamination Alarm eee cisterna thee hie ener en ee e Ie eS EXE nien teneo eb iine eet 6 17 Zone Summation if Required sss 6 17 Calculation of Activity and Associated Uncertainty sess 6 17 Q iCcksCani E ER ET ERI SRR Quick Background
373. ion Derivation of the Optimum Operating Voltage Performing the HV Scan Issue 2 0 The Test and Performance Certificate supplied with each instrument lists the recommended High Voltage settings for each detector for the optimum detection HV Scan page 5 46 describes the setting of the detector HVs If it is required to ascertain the optimum operating voltages by measurement e g due to new detectors the procedure described in Derivation of the Optimum Operating Voltage page 9 4 should be followed The iPCM12 is designed to detect activities down to release levels and otherwise as low as reasonably achievable ALARA However the iPCM12 is also very linear in response so a wide range of source activities may be used for set up and calibration For the gas flow detectors typical beta and alpha extended area sources for contact measurements will be required around 0 1uCi 4kBq with a calibrated SER surface emission rate e g 2000p sec and 20000 Depending upon energy detector efficiency for gamma scintillation detectors source activity should typically be in the 2 Ci 80kBq to 6 wCi 200 kBq range and in any case not more than 10 uCi 370 kBq Long count times will be required for small sources to maintain statistical accuracy against adverse background influences NOTE For all the measurements performed below all sources of radiation other than those used for the specific test should be
374. irmware Good Flashing indicates software is running but configuration data is invalid FPGA Good X Channel Receive Data X Channel Transmit Data A single GPIO board provides the necessary power drives and monitoring circuitry required to control any combination of inlet and exit powered doors and barriers Additional wiring specific to the Doors and Barrier option kits is also required iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 7 Description Issue 2 0 Power Chassis D92520 A The Power Chassis is located on the lower left side of the Service Bay immediately below the Electronics Chassis It is a complete sub assembly mounted directly onto the iPCM12 cabinet and retained by six hex pillars facilitating easy removal for servicing The AC power input to the Power Chassis ON OFF switch is via a screened cable from an IEC connector mounted on the top roof plinth The Power Chassis comprises a proprietary AC mains switched mode power supply a mains ON OFF switch and a Battery Controller board type 5720A when fitted currently type 5703A A 12 Volt Gel cell battery is mounted on the cabinet floor immediately below the power chassis Optionally a high capacity 12 Volt battery is mounted behind the right hand bulkhead plate AC Mains Power Supply The AC Mains Power Supply is a proprietary switch mode unit located at the bottom of the power chassis It has a wide auto ranging 110 V 240 V AC input an
375. isable Default 50 cps If a background measurement goes above this value counts per second a detector failure will occur Values 0 to 99 999 cps 0 to disable Default 10000 cps This is the statistical increase during a Residual Contamination Check compared to the background measurement The RCC Contamination Threshold is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 7 o The Minimum monitoring time must be equal to or less than Maximum Monitoring Time This is the Minimum contamination monitoring This field is used in conjunction with the Maximum Monitoring Time Values 3 to 300 s Default 5 s 5 14 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Field Name Description Maximum Monitoring Time s Background Period s The Maximum monitoring time must be equal to or greater than Minimum monitoring time It must be set to a high enough value to prevent a high background fault This is the Maximum contamination monitoring time A monitoring time is calculated by the iPCM12 to meet the background and the statistical requirements For given alarm and statistical requirements this parameter will limit the background count rate allowed To achieve a fixed monitoring time set the minimum and maximum monitoring times to the same value Values 3 to 3
376. isher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Calibration mixes Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Procedure NOTES If the efficiency is very different from the expected value and the background is stable perform an HV scan see Performing the HV Scan page 9 5 and repeat this procedure The Instrument Configuration Report See Reports page 5 50 will provide a hard copy of the set up and calibration results Calibration for Other Nuclides See HV Scan page 5 41 for more information Efficiency factors for other nuclides and mixtures of nuclides can be defined in a similar manner to that for Co described in Preparation for Calibration page 10 2 Before calculating efficiency factors for new nuclides it would be advisable to verify those for Cl ensuring that the iPCM12 s detectors functioning correctly If low energy nuclides need to be monitored such as C then it may be necessary to undertake an HV scan for that particular nuclide Follow the procedure described in Performing the HV Scan page 9 5 specifically for the Figure of Merit method see Figure of Merit FOM method for gamma scintillation detectors page 9 8 in order to find the best operating voltage The iPCM12 will allow calibration streams to be set which will include a number nuclides and their associated percentage in the mix The iPCM12 will take account of the respective efficiency of the nuclide and the percentage to evaluate th
377. it would indicate that the iPCM12 is dead LED OFF indicates the AC mains supply is OFF and instrument cannot run off the battery 1 Check the fuse on the 5703A Battery Controller PCB F1 6 3Amp 2 Ifthe fuse is intact the battery is probably discharged Check the voltage at PL7 on the charger PCB If it is below 11 2 volts the battery is discharged and the charging supply must be restored before further operation is possible Restoring the AC mains charging supply should light the LED and allow the system to run while charging the battery 3 Check the AC mains IEC connector power cord is connected side face of roof plinth 4 Check the fuse in the AC mains power cord connector Gf fitted 5 Check that rocker switch is ON and power supply is receiving the mains supply 6 Check the power supply output on 5703A PL1 temporarily remove from PCB to check no output indicates the internal fuse has blown and the power Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 27 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue 2 0 supply should be replaced see Removal and Replacement of the Power Supply page 11 6 Check the output on PL7 of the 5703A Battery Controller PCB it should be greater than 12 5 volts Unit Dead Will Not Boot Front panel LED ON indicates that AC mains supply is ON up and Charging LED is should be powering the instrument while charging the ON battery
378. ithin the Max Zero Count Time the instrument will go Out of Service with a Low Alpha Background Values 0 to 99 999 cps 0 to disable Default 50cps If a background measurement goes above this value counts per second a detector failure will occur Values 0 to 99 999 cps 0 to disable Default 10000cps This is the statistical increase during a Residual Contamination Check compared to the background measurement Note that the RCC Contamination Threshold is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 7 o This facility utilizes information on the ratio between count rates above thresholds to decide whether the radioactivity present is emitting photon radiation of low energy i e 400 keV Any ratio of TI T2 which exceeds this threshold will be deemed low energy See NBR Method page 9 8 for further information Values 50 to 10 000 Default 100 Note that the Minimum monitoring time must be equal to or less than Maximum Monitoring Time This is the Minimum time for which contamination is monitored This field is used in conjunction with the Maximum Monitoring Time Values 3 to 300 s Default 5s iPCM User Manual 5 13 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Maximum Monitoring Note that the Maximum monitoring time must be equal to or greater than Minimum monitoring time It must be set to a high enough value to prevent a high background fau
379. its Emission Rate The Emission Rate is calculated as P Factor Activity Enter an Emission Rate Comment Enter a comment if required Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 55 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 To edit an existing Calibration Source select a Calibration Source and press the Edit button Nuclide d 2 Source Name 241 The Edit Source properties LastCaliraton Date 10 December 2000 window displays i De P factor 2 See above for description of field Fe 2 Emission Rate 2385 5 names Comment Cancel Save Changes To delete an existing amano eae Are you sure Calibration Source select a Em Calibration Source and press the Delete button The confirmation window displays To create a new Fixture press D LER NY the New button The New Name Fixture window displays Source 1 AM 261 ali Nuclide Am241 Decayed Activity 4770 Bo Emission Type Source 2 AM 241 14 gt Nuclide Am241 Decayed Activity 4770 84 Emission Type Alpha Jig Description Save Description of options Field Name Description Enter a name for the Fixture Source 1 2 Select a Source from the list see above for description on how to create Source Nuclide These fields are auto entered according to the Decayed Activity Source selected above Emission Type Jig Description Enter a descriptive name this is t
380. itter Status 61 SSK active longer than 60 s Automatically reset if in order or by service fitter Status 62 BDE has no priority Because a higher level signal is present Automatically reset on release of BDE button Status 72 Slave connection Master has no connection to Slave operator Reset by service fitter Status 88 Difference parameter The common parameters of M S operators do not correspond to each other Reset by service fitter Status 89 Master connection Slave has no connection to master operator Reset by service fitter Status 90 Railbeam active 60 sec Automatically reset if everything is in order or by service fitter Status 91 Bodyguard active 60 sec Automatically reset if everything is in order or by service fitter Status 92 STG relay defective Replacement by service fitter Status 93 Overvoltage 24 V from 27V Status 94 Spring calibration Automatic reset Status 95 Error in sense of rotation Status 96 EEPROM void Status 99 Operator rotates The grease in the gear will be dispersed Automatic reset Status 105 Test brake Automatic reset Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 19 of 20 Status and fault signals Status 106 Brake defective Reset or reset by service fitter Status 107 SIS defective A safety sensor with test input in closing direction is defective Reset by service fitter Status 108 SIO defective A safety sensor with test input i
381. ive contamination on all parts of the body and clothing Should contamination exceed an Alarm Level AL an audible alarm is given and a visual indication of the location and severity of contamination is displayed Surface alpha and beta contamination are detected simultaneously using up to 24 large area gas flow proportional detectors Each detector is internally divided into four separate detection channels creating up to 96 individual counting zones and giving maximum detection sensitivity and background rejection A pair of detectors is used to detect contamination on each hand and another pair monitors the sole of each foot individually Two more detectors cover the side of foot optional and top of shoes Two detectors provide coverage for the side of legs and an additional three detectors provide coverage for the upper arm shoulder back of shoulder optional and side of head Another twelve detectors arranged in three closely positioned vertical arrays configured in a half hexagon are used with an optional overhead detector to detect contamination on the rest of the body Optionally large area plastic scintillation detectors and lead shielding can be fitted to simultaneously detect gamma contamination Two vertical arrays with three detectors each are arranged behind the gas proportional detectors to measure contamination on the body Two separate detectors are used to check for contamination on the hands and soles of shoes Optio
382. ive graph for a detector which will expand it to fill the screen Pressing Table will show the actual FOM and S B values note that S B is proportional to FOM and is included for those users who prefer this quantity For mid and high energies an FOM peak is usually evident from the data Determine the maximum value of FOM for each detector as a starting point If no clear peak is visible or several peaks exist select a starting FOM value corresponding to a background value B similar to that of the other detectors Select the detector operating point as follows Test 1 Each background count does not differ by more than 30 from the mean value of all detectors Test 2 When the source to detector distance is the same calculate the Mean Source Counts Sm for all detectors The value of the net source counts S for each detector does not differ by more than 25 from the mean value of Sm for all Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Setting Up Procedure If any detector exceeds any of these limits alter the relevant HV by 10 V and check the FOM is not significantly different than the original A total adjustment of 75 V is permissible This is a rough guide and individual circumstances may demand wider variations Test 3 If and when the background and source values are satisfactory calculate the 47 gamma detector efficiencies at the chosen HV setting Calculate the
383. just upwards if necessary Select Setup Alarms page 5 18 and check the Normal Alarm levels are set to reasonable values Adjust upwards if necessary Select Setup Detection Options page 5 16 and check the Probability of False Alarm is set to a reasonable value Typically 3 16 Reduce it if necessary Select Setup Detection Options page 5 16 and check the Probability of Detection is set to a reasonable value Typically 1 650 Reduce it if necessary Select Calibration HV Scan page 5 41 Check that the High Voltage setting for the gas flow detectors a and selection is correct typically 1700V for P7 5 Argon Methane gas For gamma detectors selection if fitted check that High Voltage settings of ALL eight detector channels are correct typically ranging from 800V to 1100V Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 6 Select Setup Monitoring page 5 12 and set a 10 second Minimum Monitoring Time Check the counts in all gas flow detector channels and all scintillator channels are reasonable for the expected ambient background level using Diagnostics Detectors page 3 4 If a single channel shows a background count significantly greater than the other detectors a noisy channel or a scintillator light leak is likely Proceed as follows e Swap the faulty gas flow detector for the pre gassed hot spare It will be necessary to e
384. k Communications An RJ45 connector provides for compliance with EEE 02 11 and is located in the roof access All instruments present this connector at the main cable entry on the roof of the assembly USB Ports A four port USB version 1 1 hub is available and these ports are presented below the LCD display for peripheral interfaces such as memory sticks security dongle keyboard mouse etc Services Required Voltage 85 to 264 volts AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Maximum power 65 Circuit Protection Integral mains fuse in Power supply 250V 2A Mains Isolation Anlsolator thermal trip 230V 5A capacity Battery type Sealed lead acid Battery capacity 12 volts 17Ah Battery support typically up to 8 hours Battery Fuse 4Amp PTC self resetting iPCM User Manual 3 9 Specification Issue Beta Issue 1 Gas Requirement Gas Type Argon Methane Mixture P10 10 Methane 90 Argon P7 5 7 5 Methane 92 5 Argon Non flammable recommended P5 5 Methane 95 Argon Non flammable 10 Carbon Dioxide 90 Argon Non flammable Flow Minimum 25cc min Beta only operation Normally 50cc min Recommended for Peak alpha performance Purge 500cc min Pressure 14 to 34 5 kP or 2to 5 psi or 0 15 to 0 35 Bar Consumption Gas Bottle Small Bottle Large Bottle Life days 1 27 6 38m 25cc min 30 days 175 days 1 5 L hr 50cc min 15 days 87 days 3 0 L hr Bottle Life includes initial System
385. ked the alarm will display sound until the Supervisor acknowledges the alarm note that the Alarm Duration After Exit timeout is ignored in this case Following an alarm if the Residual Contamination Check after Alarm option is ticked see Operation page 5 10 the Residual Contamination Count is performed 4 SECONDS REMAINING See Notes regarding Residual Contamination Check page 5 94 for more information iPCM User Manual 5 93 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Notes regarding Residual The Residual Contamination Contamination Check Check is run under the following circumstances Residual Contamination Count If the Residual Contamination Check after Abandoned Measurement option is set see Operation page 5 10 5 SECONDS REMAINING If Residual Contamination Check after Alarm option is set see Operation page 5 10 Count The Residual Contamination Check will verify that the current background count rate does not exceed the Background Count Rate before the alarm by a statistically significant amount If no contamination is found the Ready OK to Enter message is displayed and the iPCM12 reverts to Background mode Ready Clear However if residual contamination is detected or the count rate from any detector INSTRUMENT CONTAMINATED exceeds 95 of the Amplifier dead time then an Instrument Contaminated state exists The INSTRUMENT CONTAMINATE
386. key 1 65 BetaHandPod 3 1 BetaHandPodkey 3 1 BetaHandPofa 1 65 5 56 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific BetaHandPodkey BetaHandP ofa BetaHandPofakey BetaHighBackgroundLimit BetaLowBackgroundLimit BetaQuickScanEnabled Cal Check Required Interval days Default Calibration Accuracy Default Calibration Confidence 56 Operating Instructions 1 Of 11 Configuration Item Value Gross Changing Background Sigma Changing Conditions Sigma Detector Changing Background Sigma Changing Conditions Check Period Alarms Enabled Complete All Steps Background Data Retention months Calibration Check Data Retention months Calibration Data Retention months Event Log Data Retention months Results Data Retention months DefaultAlphaBetaCalCheckSourceType DefaultAlphaCalibrationSource DefaultBetaCalibrationSource Default Calibration Source DefaultCalReviewTolerance DefaultGammaCalibrationSource Probability of False Alarm Probability of Detection Probability of Detection Alarm Duration After Exit s GammaAlarmsEnabled GammaBodyPod GammaBodyPodkey GammaBodyPafa GammaBodyPafakey GammaDetectionEnabled GammaF ootPod GammaF ootPodkey GammaF ootPofa GammaF ootPofakey GammaHandPad GammaHandPaodkey GammaHandPafa GammaHandPafakey GammaHighBackgroundLirnit GammaLowBackgroundLimit Gamma ptionFitted GammaGuickSc
387. ks to be run Access to this state requires a username and password See Administrator Mode page 5 1 for further details USER Mode this mode supports the normal monitoring of personnel Any user can operate the instrument in this state See User Mode page 5 66 for further details Note that communications with the iPCM12 is viaa touchscreen and this manual has been written primarily giving instructions for the touchscreen commands It is also possible to use a USB keyboard and mouse to communicate with the iPCM12 This section describes the methods that are common to all the entry and data viewing operations in the Parameter Mode menus When using the touchscreen directly touch the menu options on the screen when selecting a function CAUTION IT IS ADVISED TO USE A CLEAN FINGER TO TOUCH THE SCREEN DO NOT USE SHARP OBJECTS ON THE TOUCHSCREEN SUCH AS PENCILS PENS SCREWDRIVERS ETC iPCM User Manual 5 1 Operating Instructions Number Functions Alpha numerical Functions Pre defined Functions 5 2 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 When touching the screen in a numerical field the following number pad appears lt FunctionName gt SSS VE Bea a FE ERST 2 e ee om Min lt minimum value gt Max maximum value gt Note that the Function Name minimum and maximum values are displayed depending on the function selected If an illegal value is entered the
388. l procedure When the instrument is first started with the replacement disk the application will signal out of service because of missing calibration data This data which is held in flash memory also found on the 5712A Processor Motherboard needs to be transferred to the new disk by invoking the following procedure 1 Access the Administration Mode see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 3 Select System and Exit to Administrator Logon 2 Insert a USB keyboard and LOG ON to Windows as an Administrator see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 3 3 RUN Restore bat in CMPCM Database scripts 4 Log off Windows 5 Log on to Windows as Thermo User 1 Shut down the iPCM12 using the keyswitch Switch the AC Mains PSU rocker switch OFF 3 The Battery Controller PCB is situated at the bottom of the Electronics Chassis First disconnect orange black Battery Supply from the PCB 7503A PL7 or 5720A 11 8 12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Replacement of the Battery Controller PCB Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Figure 19 Battery Controller PCB 4 Disconnect all other cables and remove the four M3 hex pillars and washers securing the PCB to its mounting spacers The Battery Controller PCB is now free to be removed from the Electronics chassis The Battery Controller PCB should be repl
389. l requirements always program Tmax to cope with the worst case background condition expected The iPCM12 will dynamically adjust T to achieve the required statistical certainty in the minimum monitoring time to maximise throughput and minimises HP guardian intervention With fairly short monitoring times e g 3 to 5 seconds each way user throughput largely depends upon ease of entry and exit familiarity and ease of use of the monitor A 5 second each way monitoring time will allow familiar users to pass through the iPCM12 within 20 seconds i e 3 plus personnel per minute iPCM User Manual 6 27 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 Detector Naming Gas Flow Detector Naming gas flow detector map is shown below _ LB1 LB4 CB1 RB4 SH CB2 ng2 AR CB3 511 m CB4 RB4 SL2 Mnemonic Detector TH Top of Head Left Body Array Level 1 Top Centre Body Array Level 1 Top Right Body Array Level 1 Top Side of Head Shoulder Left Body Array Level 2 LB3 Centre Body Array Level 2 Right Body Array Level 2 Left Body Array Level 3 Centre Body Array Level 3 Right Body Array Level 3 6 28 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics Side of Leg Upper Left Body Array Level 4 Bottom Centre Body Array Level 4 Botto
390. la Detection Enable Note that changes made to fields are highlighted until applied or cancelled P Detection Enable Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 3 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Gaining Access tothe Administration mode is entered by pressing on iPCM12 in the Administration Mode bottom left hand corner of the touchscreen when the iPCM12 is in Background Checking mode The Entering Admin Mode window is displayed requesting to select a User Entering Admin Mode Select User ThermoFisher To select a different user to the one displayed press the User field of the touchscreen Select Health Physicist Technician or ThermoFisher using the Up Down arrow and select OK See Foreword page xv for more information regarding the roles Technician ThermoFisher Lins ee In the Entering Admin Mode window select OK for the ENTER PASSWORD window see below and the Alpha numeric keyboard to be displayed ENTER PASSWORD Select User Technician Password Enter the password using the keyboard and select OK to enter the Administration Mode note that the Diagnostics Detector window is initially displayed see Passwords page 5 64 for details The various options available in the Administration Mode are displayed in Menu Roles page 5 6 Entering an invalid password will display the following message Invalid Password Press OK to re display the Enter Admin Mode screen 5 4 iPCM U
391. larm is set Loading detector models with efficiencies and alarm Out Of Service thresholds Upon successful completion of the tests and if beta detection is enabled see Detection Options Out Of Calibration page 5 17 the gas flow detectors are tested for stability while the gas flow is increased to a purge level When all gas flow detectors are proved stable the gas flow is reduced to normal and the current status of the background is tested If valid normal background monitoring resumes see Normal tac Background Monitoring page 5 e 91 If not valid background stabilization mode will be entered see Background Stability Check page 5 88 5 86 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Startup Checks If the System Self Testing passes the Self Checks pass message displays for a few seconds Self Checks Pass Out Of Service Database connectivity check i e check that the local database is available Database Maintenance Out Of Service If the System Self Testing fails the Out of Service Critical Error message displays the Out Of Service reason for the error may display in the message bar at the bottom of the screen See Out Of Service page 5 112 See Maintenance and Trouble Shooting page 11 1 for more information regarding the Self Test Failures messages A Crit
392. larm level is indicated on a pair of detector array mimics one for each step with alarming detectors colored red accompanied by an ALARM message and audible dual tone alarm siren Numeric indication in Alarm Level multiples indicates contamination severity A user programmable High Alarm action level may be automatically triggered in case of severe contamination having an independent audible alarm to initiate external action A number of user defined monitoring software features are available including quick background update interrupted measurement re start mode measurement quick scan early exit mode and Radon compensation The iPCM12 is available in two basic physical styles The Open A cabinet style PCM124A allows free user entry and egress in any direction The Closed cabinet style has a rear portal like structural cabinet extension that accommodates door barrier system options PCM 12B controlling user flow and lead shielding for the full body gamma option iPCM12C The Gas Flow Top of Head Side of Foot and Back of Shoulder detectors are available as stand alone options on all iPCM12 variants 2011 onwards A number of other options are available for all variants including integral EPD and ID Bar code readers USB Camera kit and calibration source jigs Closed 1PCM12C versions accommodate gamma scintillation detectors and significant lead shielding In addition to the Full Body gamma kit Top o
393. lease re If the user exits the portal during enter the portal measurement see Violations during Monitoring page 5 98 Clear Please leave the If the measured contamination is below portal alarm levels the user is advised to leave the portal see CLEAR Result page 5 103 Measurement abandoned If the user exits the portal on the ingress side before the measurement is complete see Violations during Monitoring page 5 98 3 16 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 iPCM12A Power Requirements iPCM12A Battery Backup Thermo Fisher Scientific Specification Instrument Out of If the portal is entered when the unit is Service out of service the user is advised to leave the portal see Out Of Service page 5 112 Measurement Incomplete If the user exits the portal on the egress Please re enter the portal side before the measurement is complete and start again see Violations during Monitoring page 5 98 Please leave and re enter If the user does not fully exit the portal the portal to start on completion of measurement see measurement Violations during Monitoring page 5 98 Note The speaker volume is user adjustable in SystemlSetup Menu page 5 9 Network Communications An RJ45 network connector is located adjacent to the AC Mains connector in the roof plinth perimeter USB Ports A four port USB version 1 1 hub is
394. led Complete All Steps Background Data Retention months Calibration Check Data Retention months Calibration Data Retention months Event Log Data Retention months Results Data Retention months DefaultAlphaBetaCalCheckSourceType DefaultAlphaCalibrationSource DefaultBetaCalibrationSource Default Calibration Source DefaultCalReviewTolerance DefaultGammaCalibrationSource Probability of False Alarm Probability of Detection AttenuationLowerLimit AttenuationUpperLimit AutoRecount Background Monitoring Period s Background Logging Interval hours Beta Body POD Beta Body POFA Beta Detection Enabled Beta Foot POD Beta Foot POFA Beta Hand POD Beta Hand POFA Beta High Background Limit cps Beta Low Background Limit cps Beta Quickscan Enabled BetaRateOverFullBackground Beta Background Stability Ratio Cal Check Required Interval days Default Calibration Accuracy Default Calibration Confidence iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Operating Instructions ROO 3 1 1 65 100 1 65 1 751 Yes 1 65 1 751 1 65 1 751 10000 Yes Y a O N 5 69 Operating Instructions Events Report 5 70 Beta Foot POD Beta Foot POFA Beta Hand POD Beta Hand POFA Beta High Background Limit cps Beta Low Background Limit cps Beta Quickscan Enabled BetaRateOverFullBackground Beta Background Stability Ratio Cal Check Required Interval
395. les Enter the number of samples from which to calculate the average for display If a B is selected the graph displays in Pan Mode Average Over samples 3 Pan Mode 5s Ip 3 7 If y is selected the graph displays as follows Average Over samples 3 D Stacked If the Stacked option is ticked the graph displays as follows Average Over samples 3 2 Stacked pals 5 28 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Timed Counts Thermo Fisher Scientific Information Operating Instructions Select DiagnosticsITimed Counts EI CECI to view Detectors averaged over 126098690520 gt a selected specified period This Ma Detector System ai function allows a count to be Average Over s F0 made that can be used to Ein ascertain the efficiency and functionality of the iPCM12 Show Details As Thresholds Windows lef Window ra r hia r abc HPA 37 51 o4 03 0 HPB 37 51 o4 03 0 HP C 3T 51 04 03 0 37 51 04 03 0 AN countries in cos ENEEEEEEEEEEEEEE a File Stat Stop To Start the Timed Counts for the Detectors 1 Select the Detector System Alpha Beta or Gamma 2 Select the number of counts to be averaged by selecting a value in the Average Over field If you require a Continuous count to be made tick the Continuous box 3 Toggle between the Thresholds and Windows display by clicking on the re
396. levant radio button Select from the options displayed 4 Select a Window type from the list displayed 5 Press Start button The counts can be halted at any time by pressing the Stop button The results can also be saved by pressing the Save to File button and then selecting a directory and file name to save Select DiagnosticslInformation to EE Ga i EI view the current Measurement SGC 8201 06 gt Measurement Type Detector Type Information gt Detector Co60 Sum Zone Periods Total Measurement 52 s Background 200 Measurement 11 s Damar Background Detecbon Net Rate cps Limit Alarm cps o Effieciency NaN iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 29 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Description of options Field Name Description Measurement Type Click on one of the radio buttons to select one of the following a displays the Alpha count for the select Detector Group see below displays the Beta count for the select Detector Group see below y displays the Gamma count for the select Detector Group see below Co60 displays the Cobalt 60 count for the select Detector Group see below Detector Type Click on one of the radio buttons to select one of the following Detector displays the counts for each individual detector Sum Zone displays the counts for all detectors Total Measuremen
397. light inverter is indicated These items are not user serviceable and should be replaced as described in LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller amp Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement page 11 13 If the voltage is absent across the pins of PL7 a fault on the Controller board is indicated and it should be replaced as described in ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 If the iPCM12 starts and runs but will not accept a valid password a fault is indicated either in the LCD Touch pad or the Controller board Proceed to LCD Keypad Inoperative or Not Aligned page 11 27 If the iPCM12 starts and runs but will not respond to password entry or returns incorrect characters on the LCD display a fault is likely in the processor board or possibly the touch keypad Proceed as follows 1 Check the cable connections between the Touch screen keypad and the processor board If uncertain try a replacement cable to isolate fault 2 Similarly check the touch control board by replacement 3 Ifunsuccessful temporarily plug a spare LCD assembly into the control board If this solves the problem the original Touch pad is faulty and should be replaced as described in LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller amp Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement page 11 13 iPCM User Manual 11 27 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue Beta Issue 1 4 Ifthe problem still persists the fault is likely
398. lishes a new Background see Establishing a new Background page 5 73 The system enters the Background Monitoring Mode see Normal Background Monitoring page 5 75 To commence monitoring the user enters the portal see Entering the Portal page 5 78 Monitoring starts when the user is correctly positioned in the portal see Commence Monitoring page 5 81 At end of the first monitoring position the instrument may either 1 Indicate any contamination and halt the measurement 2 If Complete Both Steps is selected see Operation page 5 10 monitoring continues Monitoring may be interrupted due to the result of a Quick Scan assessment see Operation page 5 10 or if a significant change in background conditions is detected during the measurement see Background Change during Measurement page 5 86 At the end of the Monitoring period activity is calculated and compared against a set of alarm thresholds for any combination of alpha beta or gamma A simple GO NO GO indication is given optional display of the details of the location and level of contamination see Monitoring Result page 5 87 Upon completion of monitoring the user exits the portal see Exiting the Portal page 5 96 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions User Screen example of the iPCM12 screen is displayed below Headline 1 Ready Headline 2 Detector Indicator User Instr
399. lit The HV output is current limited and short circuit protected The PCB has two green LEDs that show FPGA and Software status plus two X Channel LEDs amber and green that show network communication status 2 6 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 X Channel GPIO Board Type 5707A Thermo Fisher Scientific Description LED Color Purpose DI5 Red Attention Indicator used during X Channel setup D17 Green Firmware Good Flashing indicates software is running but configuration data is invalid Green FPGA Good 14 Yellow X Channel Receive Data D13 Green X Channel Transmit Data D Red HV On WARNING THE 5713A HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR PRODUCES DANGEROUS HIGH VOLTAGES AND HAZARDOUS LIVE VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE METAL SCREEN REFER TO THE WARNINGS IN MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING PAGE 11 1 DO NOT REMOVE THE METAL SCREEN IF THE RED HVENABLED LED IS LIT AND FOR TWO MINUTES AFTER THE LED IS EXTINGUISHED NOTE Optional used in conjunction with AE Door and Barrier Kits An optional GPIO board type 5707A is mounted at the bottom of the Electronics Chassis located immediately to the left of the HV Generator It is retained by six hex pillars for easy servicing Two green LEDs show FPGA and Software status and two X Channel LEDs amber and green show network communication status Purpose Attention Indicator used during X Channel setup F
400. lligible it is likely the ETX processor board has a serious fault and the microprocessor has I O problems or has crashed Replace the processor board as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 11 28 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Starts up Passes Self Tests and Runs but Display is Blank Will Not Run and Displays Out Of Service Low Background Counts Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting If the iPCM12 starts up passes Self Tests chimes and appears to run normally but the LCD display appears blank it is likely the Backlight Inverter Module has failed the LCD has dual CCFL backlights The immediate and characteristic LCD backlight flash will be absent when the processor boots up The 5712A Processor must be removed to gain access to the LCD display assembly which must be disassembled to access the Backlight Inverter Module WARNING THE BACKLIGHT INVERTER MODULE GENERATES DANGEROUS HAZARDOUS LIVE HIGH VOLTAGES AND IS NOT USER SERVICEABLE IT MUST BE REPLACED ONLY WITH AN IDENTICAL MODULE The blue FAULT lamp is lit see Fault Messages page 11 1 for an explanation of the fault messages The Self Tests have detected the background count from the detector channel is below the Low Background Limit value set in Monitoring page 5 14 Proceed as follows 1 Enter a valid
401. located immediately below the LCD Facilitates keyboard mouse memory stick and security dongle connection without requiring key access to the electronics service bay Services Required Voltage 85 to 264 Volts AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Maximum power 185 V A Circuit Protection Integral Power supply fuse 250V 2A Not User serviceable Mains Isolation ON OFF switch adjacent to PSU Battery type Sealed lead acid Gel Cell Battery capacity 12 volts 17Ah standard 38 Ah Optional Battery support Typically up to hour standard 1 hr Optional Battery Fuse 6 34 Slow Blow 5703A iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 17 Specification Counting Gas Requirement 25 Type Mixture Flow Purge Pressure Consumption Servicing Access Rear Front Left Side Right Side Top 3 18 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Issue 2 0 Argon Methane P10 10 Methane 90 Argon P7 5 7 5 Methane 92 5 Argon Non flammable recommended P5 596 Methane 9596 Argon Non flammable 10 Carbon Dioxide 90 Argon Non flammable Minimum 25 cc min Beta only operation Normally 50 cc min Recommended for Peak alpha performance 500 cc min 14 to 34 5 kP or 2 to 5 psi or 0 15 to 0 35 Bar Gas Bottle Small Bottle Large Bottle Life days UK UK 1 27 m 6 38m 25cc min 30 days 175 days 1 5 L hr 50cc min 15 days 87 days 3 0 L hr UK Bottle
402. low rates are set using needle valves on the gas control chassis Both needle valves need to be adjusted to bring the gas system fully into service Asa default the gas controller can only deliver gas at the reduced normal gas flow rate even if the purge rate has not been set This avoids any possibility that the purge rate is inadvertently set at maximum so if an iPCM12 is switched on without any gas adjustment there is no gas detector damage due to overpressure The gas controller board holds the exhaust solenoid open and the restrictor is bypassed indefinitely Select Diagnosis and Gas Flow sub menu to view the current gas status With the Purge Mode selected on screen adjust the manual needle valve labeled PURGE on the gas chassis to set an INPUT PURGE flow of 200 cc min 5 In this Mode the restrictor circuit is bypassed by solenoid Note that turning the valve clockwise reduces the flow rate Allow the gas system to stabilize for 10 minutes With Normal Mode selected on screen the iPCM12 gas circuit reverts to normal flow rates Adjust the manual needle valve labeled NORMAL on the gas chassis to set an INPUT NORMAL flow of 25 cc min 20 After allowing the gas system to stabilize for 20 minutes the inlet and outlet flow meters should indicate identical flow rates In practice however small discrepancies due to calibration errors pressure changes and very small leaks are likely to exist An outlet flow rate up to
403. lowing Associated Equipment AE Option kits are available Gas Flow Quad Detectors e AE0223A Gas Flow Fixed Top of Head Detector Kit e AE0221A Gas Flow Side of Foot Detector Kit e AE0251A Gas Flow Back of shoulder Kit Future e AE0229A Gas Flow Spare Purged Detector Kit e AE0245A High Efficiency Hex Grille Kit 1 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Plastic Scintillation Gamma Detectors incl heavy lead shielding e AE0222A Gamma Body Head Hand and Foot Detector Kit e AE0243A Gamma Hand Detector Kit e AE0224A Gamma Top of Head Detector Kit e AE0248A Gamma Side of Head Detector Kit e AE0253A Gamma Integral Small Articleas Monitor SAM Future AE0223 AE0224 Top of Head Kits are mutually exclusive EF AE0248 mutually exclusive with standard GF Side Head Detector ET AE0248 requires either AE0222A or 0224A kit to be fitted A AE0251A mutually exclusive with AE0222A full gamma kit Personnel ID Access and Data Recording e AE0227A USB Camera Kit e AE0255A EPD Reader Basic UserID Future e AE0244A USB Bar Code Reader Kit Personnel Flow Controls PFCs Inlet PFC only is not a software supported option Otherwise the following Inlet Exit and Exit only PFC options are available in any combination of Doors Barriers and Turnstiles e AE0239B Manual Swing Door Kit
404. lowing criteria Tron when gt Trin Tron Tmin when Teal lt Tmax If Tea gt Tmax then a high background condition exists and monitoring is not possible See Notes regarding High Background page 5 99 6 14 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics Minimum Detectable Once a mean background count rate has been calculated the Activity and High iPCMI2 will be ready to monitor users and the Minimum Background Criterion Detectable Count Rate also referred to as the detection limit DL is found by solving the following formula for DL Therefore DL Zda E B B B D 1 DI F Z pp 9 F P ty mon ty E 4 where is the activity unit Detectable Activity and Detection Limit may be viewed on the Information sub menu see Information page 5 26 and will be displayed in the units selected in UI Options page 5 8 NOTE MDA may differ from the Alarm level because Tmon 18 rounded up may take effect Changing Conditions Changing conditions applies to beta and gamma measurements only During the monitoring cycle the monitoring time is subdivided into timeslices Each sum of the count rates on all detectors in a slice is compared to the average count rate in the cycle up to that point Changing Conditions exist where the following formula is satisfied
405. lpha Hand Alpha Foot Beta Body Beta Hand Beta Foot Gamma Body Gamma Hand Gamma Foot Probability of Detection for Alpha Body Alpha Hand Alpha Foot Beta Body Beta Hand Beta Foot Gamma Body Gamma Hand Gamma Foot Tick this option to enable p detection Tick this option to enable y detection Tick this option to enable High Level alarms Default OFF Tick this option to enable two zones added together See Zone Summation if required page 6 17 for more information Tick this option to enable the y zones to sum together Tick this option to decrease the sensitivity when Sum Zones is ticked Enter a multiple against the normal alarms levels at which the high alarm levels will detect Values 1 to 1000 Default 5 This value is the probability that a false alarm will NOT be given during a measurement This probability is used by iPCMI2 to determine the monitoring time and the Effective Alarm Level and Minimum Detectable Activity For further information see Description of Parameters Used in Calculations page 6 10 The Probability of False Alarm is expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 to 10 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 3 16 This is the probability that exactly one alarm Level of contamination will cause an alarm For further information see Description of Parameters Used in Calculations The Probability of Detection is also expressed as a percentage in p
406. ls to light in sequence except the charging LED proceed as follows using DiagnosticslLamps page 5 34 to re test lamps as required 1 Check the connections to the lamp assemblies and to the 5712A processor board 2 Any device failure will need a replacement board 3 If there are two lamp assemblies and neither are functioning then a fault on the processor board is indicated and it should be replaced as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 Fails Loudspeaker Test power on Self Test produces a single chime ding dong upon satisfactory completion If no sound is heard proceed as follows 1 Enter a valid password and select SystemlSetup page 5 79 increase the volume The speaker should produce a series of beeps that gradually get louder or quieter when the volume control is dragged 2 If no sound is heard check the speaker connection to the processor board 3 Since the speaker is unlikely to have failed a fault on the Controller board is indicated and it should be replaced as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 Fails the LCD Display Test A power on Self Test switches on the back light and produces a series of Self Test Messages and beeps If the display fails to show any message or is totally blacked out proceed as follows 4 Check the multi cable connections from the display to PL6 and PL7 on
407. lso see Quick Scan Period below Default OFF Quick Background Enabled Residual Contamination Check after Alarm RCC after Abandoned Measurement Auto Recount Complete Both Steps Restart Measurement on Sensor Break Portal Approach Time s Exit Barrier Delay s Tick this option to reduce the time taken to establish a background i e background is considered valid as soon as alarm requirements are met If this option is not ticked the time taken to establish a background is 100 seconds Default OFF Tick this option to enable a Residual Contamination Check to be automatically performed following an Alarm For further information regarding Residual Contamination Checks see Residual Contamination Check page 5 93 Tick this option to enable a Residual Contamination Check to be automatically performed following an abandoned measurement see Violations during Monitoring page 5 83 For further information regarding Residual Contamination Checks see Residual Contamination Check page 5 93 Tick this option to enable an automatic recount to take place if the measurement is recorded as an alarm During a measurement the first step is the user facing the detector array and the second step is where the user rotates 180 degrees to face away from the detector array Tick this option for the user to perform the second step of the measurement Tick this option to re start a measurement if the user mov
408. lt This is the Maximum time for which contamination is monitored A monitoring time is calculated by the IPCMI2 to meet the background and the statistical requirements For given alarm and statistical requirements this parameter will limit the background count rate allowed To achieve a fixed monitoring time set the minimum and maximum monitoring times to the same value Values 3 to 300 s Default 100 s Background Period s This is the current background period The value is set at 0 if a background has not yet been acquired Measurement The instrument uses this figure to calculate the Confidence 6 effective alarm level It is the number of standard deviations measured against the Alarms see Alarms page 5 18 Note that the Measurement Confidence is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 10 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 2 Gross Changing This statistical variable is used by iPCM12 to Background determine if a changing background condition exists on all detectors Note that the Gross Changing Background is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 5 o Detector Changing This statistical variable is used by iPCM12 to Background determine if a changing background condition exists on a single detector Note that the Detector Changing Background is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma i
409. ly small In Figure 13 the modified background used in the statistical calculations is represented by the left hand vertical line In this instance the stored background average B of 5 cps is corrected to 9 8 cps for use in calculation of the optimum monitoring time to give a false alarm rate of at least the value of F entered The stored average background value of B for each detector is retained unaltered by calculations The false alarm rate is important but should however be kept as low as practicable because high frequency of false positives quickly degrades instrument credibility and user confidence In practice 1 in 1 000 false alarms is widely accepted for personnel monitoring Because a false positive on only one of the detectors in either half of the measurement cycle gives a false alarm the value of F used must reflect the total number of detectors in the whole measurement Depending upon detector options fitted for a maximum of 60 detectors a value of 4 2 sigma ensures a maximum of 1 in 1 000 false alarms for the whole system Use of Auto recount option in the Software may be useful This will automatically require the user to re monitor in the event of an alarm announcing only the final measurement result This significantly reduces the probability of two consecutive false alarms due to background variation and avoids unnecessary recordable incidents It also has the benefit of automatically confirming real
410. m Right Body Array Level 4 Bottom Side of Leg Lower Hand Palm Hand Back Left Foot Sole Right Foot Sole Side of Foot Top of Foot Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 29 Technical Description Physics 6 30 iPCM User Manual Adjacent Horizontal Quadrants Left amp Centre LB1A LB1B LB1C LB1D LB2A LB2B LB2C LB2D LB3A LB3B LB3C LB3D LB4A LB4B LB4C LB4D CB1A CB1B CB1C CB1D CB2A CB2B CB2C CB2D CB3A CB3B CB3C CB3D CB4A CB4B CB4C CB4D Adjacent Horizontal LB1A 2 LB1B 2 LB1C 2 LB1D 2 LB2A 2 LB2B 2 LB2C 2 LB2D 2 LB3A 2 LB3B 2 LB3C 2 LB3D 2 LB4A 2 LB4B 2 LB4C 2 LB4D 2 CB1A 2 CB1B 2 CB1C 2 CB1D 2 CB2A 2 CB2B 2 CB2C 2 CB2D 2 CB3A 2 CB3B 2 CB3C 2 CB3D 2 CB4A 2 CB4B 2 CB4C 2 CB4D 2 Vertical Quadrants Left LB1A LB1B LB1C LB1D LB2A LB2B LB2C LB2D LB3A LB3B LB3C LB3D LB4A LB4B LB4C LB1B LB1C LB1D LB2A LB2B LB2C LB2D LB3A LB3B LB3C LB3D LB4A LB4B LB4C LB4D Vertical Quadrants Left LB1A 2 LB1B 2 LB1C 2 LB1D 2 LB2A 2 LB2B 2 LB2C 2 LB2D 2 LB3A 2 LB3B 2 LB3C 2 LB3D 2 LB4A 2 LB4B 2 LB4C 2 LB1B 2 LB1C 2 LB1D 2 LB2A 2 LB2B 2 LB2C 2 LB2D 2 LB3A 2 LB3B 2 LB3C 2 LB3D 2 LB4A 2 LB4B 2 LB4C 2 LB4D 2 Right Hand Palm HPA HPB Left Hand Palm HPA 2 HPB 2 Top Left Toe TTA TTB Full Toe Left TTA TTB Sole Left step 1 LFA LFB Sole Left step 2 RFA 2 RFB 2 Side Foot Left SFA 2 SFB 2 T
411. m Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit p Alarm for Body Hands Feet This is the detected activity at which 12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit y Alarm for Body Hands Feet Centroid Co60 Alarm for Body Hands Feet Centroid This is the detected activity at which iPCM12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit This is the detected activity at which 12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 19 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 To Activate the Alarm 1 Select a y or Co60 2 Select a Calibration type using the Left and Right Arrows 3 Select an Alarm rate from the drop down box e g Activity Units or cps 4 Enter the Alarm levels for Body Hands Feet and Centroid if displayed 5 To use this alarm for Calibration select the Active button XChannel NOTE This section is set at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Select Set Up X Channel to configure the XChannel The following message displays WB rs imp while node data is being SEE Unallocated Nodes Connected W collected No Disabled CI Bem 8 Colle
412. m the ground and concrete constructions tends to be statically attracted to hair and clothing particularly in dry and poorly ventilated areas The primary alpha and beta daughter emissions are readily detected by gas flow counters in close proximity to the body Radon alpha decay typically has two associated beta daughter emissions within approx 62 us of each alpha emission This beta alpha ratio of 2 1 is only approximate since the precise nature of radon changes with its age area of origin and climatic conditions throughout the course of the day Alarms detected with a Beta alpha radio of approximately 2 1 can therefore be associated with nuisance Radon In addition if the system identifies the timing between the alpha and beta events filtering should be possible to remove Radon Thoron events In practice site specific Beta alpha Radon ratios are determined and a minimum maximum ratio may be set as a parameter within the application Genuine Alarms take precedence over possible Radon alarms Alarms within the defined ratio range area deemed Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Introduction Description of Parameters Used in Calculations Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics possible nuisance alarms triggering an ALARM possibly due to Radon message to the user Usually re monitoring after 15 20 minutes will allow any Radon to decay and a clear result to be obtained Ex
413. marizes the calculations employed by the system in determining whether the parameters selected by the user allow the monitor to operate correctly The parameters used in the calculations are summarized and abbreviated as follows tg Background Update Time seconds is the time over which the average background counts have been accumulated This time is usually fixed at 100 s but when Quick Background is enabled this time is flexible and may be significantly lower than 100 s Background measurements can only occur when the portal is not occupied Average Background Count Rate cps is the mean background of the detectors measured over the background Update time tg This is a fixed 100 second rolling average in the iPCM12 unless Quick Background is enabled See Notes Regarding Normal Background Monitoring page 5 92 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Bar Teal T mon Tmin T max Cact Cops Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Effective Background while Monitoring cps is the mean background of the detector Bsum corrected for the effect of attenuation Calculated Monitoring Time seconds is the minimum time required to perform a measurement according to the calculation in Calculation of the Monitoring Time Tcal page 6 15 The specified alarm level must be achieved with the required certainty in the Monitoring Time whic
414. minimum e Power source 110 V or 220 V AC for the iPCMI2 e EC Power cord e Wire cutters e Scissors e USB keyboard with NO multimedia keys e USB Mouse if touch screen doesn t work e VGA monitor if display doesn t work e Gas sniffer TIF 8800A or equivalent Inspect the external wooden packaging for signs of transit damage Inspect the tilt and shock meters on the front of the packing case for signs of handling abuse normally clear these turn red if the package has been tipped significantly or dropped too hard Record their status if damage is indicated or suspected ideally photograph To unpack the iPCM12 remove the top and side packing panels and peel off the polyethylene wrapping The iPCM12 should be left on the base pallet until it is at the installation site in order to reduce the risk of damage during transportation The base is designed to allow easy Fork Lift access The floor of the installation site must be level and suitably robust in order to support the weight of the iPCM12 When at the installation site the iPCM12 may be lifted off its base using the fork lifting channels provided and placed on the floor WARNING CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN LIFTING THE STANDARD iPCMI2 WEIGHS 350 kg iPCMI2S iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 4 3 Unpacking and Installation Issue 2 0 FITTED WITH FULL LEAD SHIELDING WEIGH IN EXCESS OF 1300 kg ARE POTENTIALLY UNSTABLE AND MUST NEVER B
415. mmence earlier and as more background counts are subsequently acquired monitoring times will fall On the gamma option because the FHT681 has an upper threshold that is typically configured as a cosmic threshold the gross counts are defined as counts in the energy band between the lower and upper thresholds This is referred to as the gross counts window Changing Background In relatively stable background conditions 100 second rolling average accumulates an accurate background count It is however slow to respond to sudden background disturbance and drift making it is necessary to screen each count before incorporating it into the rolling average Consequently to guard against inaccurate measurements and false alarms the iPCM12 reads and checks the counts from each detector every second A changing background conditions exists if either of the following conditions are true Any one detector count shows a Mo change from the stored average for that channel Ba Ca 2 MV Bar where Buy is the rolling average for any one detector C is the counts registered in the last one second background update M is the Detector Changing Background variable see Monitoring page 5 12 The default value for M is 7 It is not recommended that M should be set below 4 06 In addition for the gamma option all nine detector counts show a No change from their relevant stored averages in the same direction Bs Ca gt VBav
416. mum M8 Diameter HILTI style bolt expansion anchors should be first put into the floor at the install site to correspond to the 8 12 mm Diameter holes in the fork channels The choice of length and material brand of anchors should be made by a site planning engineer Thermo Fisher Scientific only lists the anchors as a suggestion e The iPCM12 should then be lowered to the floor and the hex nuts added to the anchors and tightened to the floor iPCM12C Installations Fitted 12 5 to be fitted with gamma scintillation options with Lead Shielding for shipped as standard units and the lead shielding and Scintillation Options scintillation detectors shipped separately Observe the iPCM12 lifting and handling instructions in Unpacking page 4 1 iPCM 12s to be fitted with lead shielding PCM12C should ideally be installed against a robust wall or instruments located back to back if possible iPCM12 s base MUST be sited in its permanent installation location first BEFORE the iPCM12C unit is installed on top of the pan Installation of Lead Shielding Lead shielding must only be installed AFTER the 2 is sited in its permanent location and AFTER it has been fixed to the base shadow shield pan as described above All lead shielding supplied is blued lacquered to seal the surface but appropriate local health and safety precautions should be observed when handling and lifting lead shielding A minimum of two people
417. n Activity of Contamination Residual Contamination Count Small Article Monitor Personnel who normally repair and maintain the instrument in working condition Background Update Time Calculated Monitoring Time Personnel who are general users of the system and normally carry out routine diagnostic and test functions Maximum Monitoring Time Minimum Monitoring Time Actual Monitoring Time Anyone associated with or operating the instrument voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Index Thermo Fisher Scientific A A 6 11 Actions 5 62 Adjustment of PSU 11 6 Administrator Mode 5 1 Alarm Check 5 27 Alarm Display 5 91 ALARM Result 5 89 Alarms 5 18 Alpha amp Beta on Hands amp Feet 6 23 Alpha on Body 6 24 Alpha numerical Functions 5 2 Archives 5 61 B Background Change during Measurement 5 86 Background Report 5 52 Background Stability Check 5 72 Barrier Error 5 98 Barriers 5 22 5 31 Battery 5 20 Battery Charger 5 31 Ber 6 Betaon Body 6 23 Body Array 3 6 Body Gamma Detectors 6 11 18 6 9 Button Types 5 3 Cact 610 Cal Check 5 34 Cal Status 5 33 Cal Streams 5 40 Calibration 5 15 Calibration Procedure 10 1 Calibration Report 5 54 Camera 5 81 Cameras 5 50 Cancel Alarm 5 93 Cops 6 10 6 11 Index Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring 5 76 Changing the FHT681 Address 11 12 CLEAR Result 5 88 Cold Start St
418. n directly touch the menu options on the screen when selecting a function CAUTION IT IS ADVISED TO USE A CLEAN FINGER TO TOUCH THE SCREEN DO NOT USE SHARP OBJECTS ON THE TOUCHSCREEN SUCH AS PENCILS PENS SCREWDRIVERS ETC When touching the screen in a numerical field the following number pad appears Function Name BERA E felele Selef EI Enter Cancel Min lt minimum value gt Max lt maximum value gt iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 1 Operating Instructions Alpha numerical Functions Pre defined Functions Date Functions Issue 2 0 NOTE The Function Name minimum and maximum values displayed depend on the function selected If an illegal value is entered the value is highlighted in red Arange Ov sam When touching the screen in an alpha numerical field the following keyboard appears OS pp spere aep su ESSEN ESL Een cem n When touching the screen in a pre defined field the following window appears E E OK Cancel When touching the screen in a date field the following date selection window appears 44 December 2006 pj 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 OK Cancel 5 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions File Locatio
419. n parenthesis The minimum allowable probability is 50 zero sigma Increasingly higher probabilities become increasingly subject to other parameters particularly background level The interrelationship will be discussed in the Calculation stages Efficiency Correction Factor is the system efficiency either sum zone efficiency for multiple detectors or individual detector contact efficiency to the nuclide Enuc or mixture of nuclides Egi being monitored E is given by the contamination count rate in a given time and divided by the activity E is determined by calibrating with a known radionuclide source as detailed in Calibration for Other Nuclides page 10 5 Attenuation Factor is an allowance for attenuation of a background field by users being monitored Values of A can be determined for each detector and body position by following the test procedure in Detectors page 5 27 Detection limit or Minimum Detectable Count Rate cps Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Background Update Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics Mac Minimum Detectable Activity variable unit is the minimum Activity the system can detect within the calculated monitoring time It is very dependent on the programmed False Alarm rate and the prevailing background conditions and thus will continuously vary The current Minimum Detectable Activity MDA may be viewed in Information page 5 29 in the units specified in U
420. n 0 1 sigma steps Default 7 Changing Conditions This statistical variable is used by iPCM12 to c determine if a changing measurement condition exists Note that the Changing Conditions are also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 1 to 7 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 7 6 5 14 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Changing Conditions This is the length of time used by iPCM12 to Period s determine if a changing measurement condition exists Values 2 to 30s Default 3 s Background The stabilization routine is triggered when any Stability Factor ratio single detector has a background count that is outside limits defined by the current average and these Background Stability Factors a Background Stability Factor ratio For further information regarding these options contact Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Select Set Up Calibrationto Mmmm customise the Calibration operason od Parameters Default a Calibration Source Jig Default Calibration Source Jig iei Default y Calibration Source tanara Calibration Required Interval fo days Calibration Wam Period 7 days Default Calibration Accuracy 5 Calibration Confidence R 68269 Gas Flow Review Tolerance B Apply Cancel Settings Changes Description of options Field Name Desc
421. n Functions When touching the screen in a File Location field the following Drive selection window appears MKEEDD Button Types The Button types are listed below 4 Direction Arrows step through the menu options Drop down lists allow you to select a pre defined option from the list Apply Action buttons show the process taken Changes when selected User Id Required Tick Boxes show independent options that you can choose to set or mark The choice can be toggled on and off by touching on ly the box Alpha Radio Buttons show mutually exclusive ene options choosing one option automatically clears the others The black dot shows the selected option Detection Enable Note that changes made to fields are highlighted until applied or cancelled P Detection Enable Gaining Access to the Administration mode is entered by pressing on 1 12 in the Administration Mode bottom left hand corner of the touch screen when the iPCM12 is in Background Checking mode The Entering Admin Mode window requesting a User selection displays Entering Admin Mode Select User ThermoFisher ET Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 To select a different user to the one displayed press the select User field of the touch screen Select Health Physicist Technician or ThermoFisher using the Up Down arrow
422. n opening direction is defective Reset by service fitter Status 109 Factory settings Status 110 No motor No motor detection during initialisation motor temperature sensor Check motor temperature sensor Reset or reset by service fitter 39 Astatus number with a W is a warning Page 20 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Z
423. n regarding user acknowledgement of alarm see Cancel Alarm page 5 93 e Result Type e Detector Alarm Indicator see Detector Indicator page 5 68 e User Instructions Note that some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 24 For more information regarding the options available to display results see UI Options page 5 8 and Operation page 5 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 87 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 CLEAR Result If the measured contamination is below the alarm level or when Quick Scan indicates real clean the user is informed audibly and visually of the result with instructions to exit the portal The Clear message is displayed See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions Note that this message is user e definable See Messages page Ready Clear Count 5 24 for more information At the end of the measurement sequence the stored total background count is subtracted from the total measured count to give the net count which is compared with the effective alarm level CAUTION THE iPCM12 CANNOT DISTINGUISH BETWEEN A GRADUAL BUILD UP OF CONTAMINATION AND SMALL BACKGROUND CHANGES THEREFORE IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT A REGULAR FRISKING PROCEDURE IS ADOPTED AND OR AN INSPECTION OF THE BACKGROUND REPORT SHOULD INDICATE A BUILD UP OF ACTIVITY SEE Reports PAGE 5 50 Notes regarding Monit
424. nable the replacement detector node address B see XChannel page 5 19 e Swap the faulty scintillation detector MHV connection from the relevant HV Amplifier to that of a working channel Perform a further 10 second count and note the counts in each channel N B Bear in mind the different operating voltages e Ifthe scintillator fault moves with the detector into a previously working channel the fault is in the detector assembly and should be replaced as defined in Error Reference source not found page Error Bookmark not defined If the scintillator fault remains with the original HV Amplifier channel the fault is in the HV and Amplifier PCB and this should be replaced as defined in FHT681 cards as used in gamma option iPCM12B amp iPCM12C Removal and Replacement page 11 11 If all channels show a background count significantly greater than that expected the iPCM12 is experiencing an elevated background Proceed as follows e Check the area immediately around the iPCM12 for sources of any possible contamination e Measure the ambient background level with a suitable survey monitor If the background is high it must be reduced or the iPCM12 moved for normal monitoring operation to resume IF THIS CONDITION PERSISTS and the background and measurement limits seem to be reasonable frisk inside the monitor cubicle for a possible build up of contamination iPCM User Manual 11 25 Maintenance and Tr
425. nally two other detectors can be fitted in place of gas flow detectors to detect gamma on the top and side of the head The body and sole of foot gamma detectors require the optional closed cabinet extension to be fitted to accommodate the lead shielding The gas flow detector size and the mechanical configuration of the hand foot and body detector geometry has been carefully chosen for optimum detection efficiency The body is monitored in two separate stages In the first stage forward measurement the whole front of the body top of head iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 1 1 Introduction Issue 2 0 right hand side of the right leg and right arm shoulder and side of head are monitored Also the soles of both feet the tops of both shoes and the side of the right foot are simultaneously measured for alpha and beta contamination If optional scintillation detectors are fitted the front of the body top and right side of head right hand and right foot are simultaneously measured for gamma contamination In the second stage reverse measurement the whole back of the body top of head left hand side of the left leg left arm shoulder and side of head are monitored Also the soles of both feet and the side of the left foot are simultaneously measured for alpha and beta contamination If optional scintillation detectors are fitted the back of the body top and left side of head left hand and left foot are
426. nel Node Changed Default Calibration has no Alarms Configured Instrument Starting Up Default Calibration has no Alarms Configured Instrument Starting Up Unable To Open XChannel Interface Instrument Starting Up Unable To Open XChannel Interface Unable To Open XChannel Interface Instrument Starting Up Page Operating Instructions Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Error Info Error Info Error Info Error Info Error Error Info Of 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 71 Operating Instructions 5 72 Issue 2 0 HV Scan Report This report lists the HV Scan details between the selected Start and End dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Date HV Scan List ID Scan Date System Start End Step Step Description system HV HV HV Period s 3 10 12 2009 Alpha 400 1800 20 10 Test 2 10 17 03 Beta Z 10 12 2009 Gamma 400 1800 20 10 Testi 10 13 07 1 10 12 2009 Alpha 600 2800 20 10 10 09 08 Beta Page 1 Of 1 Press on one of the ID records to display the HV Scan Detail for the selected Scan ID NOTE The report below is an example and does not display all the information iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions HV Scan Detail Scan ID 2 Scan Date 13
427. nformation regarding the HV Scan Attenuation These are factors applied to measurements to compensate for background changes due to changes in background count rates caused by the insertion of a body into the portal As each user identifies him herself to the instrument the instrument will calculate a new background attenuation factor for all the beta and gamma detectors based on the mean counts attenuation for the last Minimum Clean Samples for the user If there are insufficient clean measurements then the default attenuation factors will be used Select CalibrationlAttenuation to DINE Scan view and set Attenuation ZEE Options 7 Apply Attenuation Factors This section is only used if User AE E Use Id Specific Factors Id Required is selected in Fall back to Global Attenuation when no Id SetuplUI Options page 5 9 Minimum Clean Samples 20 Maximum Clean Samples 50 Baseline Date 09 06 2009 20 5 gt Apply Cancet Settings Changes Description of options Field Name Description Apply Attenuation Tick this box to apply Attenuation Factors Factors depending on the settings in this window Use Id Specific Tick this box to apply the factors depending on the Factors user s Id Fall back to Global This option displays if Use Id Specific Factors Attenuation when no above is ticked Id Tick this option to apply global factors if the user s Id is not recognized see also Attenuation
428. ng O Configuration Error Mode Normal 17 9 Purge Resume Stabilisation on exit from Admin Mode blame b Status The Status options indicate whether there is an error with the Gas Flow Mode The Mode option indicates whether the Gas Flow is in Normal or Purge Mode Resume Stabilisation on exit This will be ticked if the from Admin Mode Stabilisation was interrupted by access to the Administration Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Calibration Menu Efficiencies Select Calibration Efficiencies to 3273028202 view the Current Detector eee efficiencies Detector System a P CyContact Oy Centroid Calibration Source Nuctide Am 241 Calibration Stream Am 241 4 Am241 Calibration Stream Am 241 4 Detects a Select a Radiation Type from a B y Contact or y Centroid Once a Radiation Type has been selected it is possible to select a Calibration Source Cal Status Select Calibration Cal Status to HGS view the Detector calibration EA Pm pa status Calibration Wam Period 7 days Y SERE SERE Select a Radiation froma Bl Disabled or y The Calibration status of the Detectors is displayed Bl Out of Calibration o Calibration Due 0 In Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 33 Operating I
429. ng control and may lead to premature battery failure The battery contains hazardous substances please take care to dispose of the old battery in accordance with your local regulations in Europe Directive 2006 66 EC iPCM User Manual 11 7 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue Beta Issue 1 Hard Disk Drive Removal The Disk Drive is situated near the top of the Electronics and Replacement Chassis Switch off the power and remove the electronic chassis as described in Removal of the Electronics Chassis from the Corner Frame page 11 4 The disk may be removed with the chassis in situ but care will be needed in refitting the holding screws Disconnect the ribbon cable 11705206 remove the four screws and washers securing the drive to its anti vibration mounts The disk is now free to be removed from the Electronics chassis Replacement of the Hard Disk Replacement of the disk is the reverse of the removal procedure Should the disk be thought to be faulty it should be replaced with an identical unit See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 preloaded with all necessary software When the instrument is first started with the replacement disk the application will signal out of service because of missing calibration data This data which 15 held in flash memory also found on the 5712A control board needs to be transferred to the new disk by invoking the following procedure e Access the Administration Mode see Gainin
430. ng easy removal for servicing The assembly contains the following modules 1 channel controller board 5712A see ETX Controller Board type 5712A page 7 3 Hard disk drive A92083 A Gas flow control chassis including 5709A gas flow board see 5709A Gas Control Board page 7 6 DC DC converter 5714B see 5714B DC DC Converter Board page 7 7 HV Generator module 5713A see 5713A HV Generator Board page 7 7 150W PSU module 7 Battery control board 5703A see Battery Controller Board Type 5703A page 7 5 Quad USB outputs ETX Controller Board type 5712A This controller board comprises all the interface buffers and connections necessary to communicate between all peripherals and the proprietary on board plug in ETX processor The assembly has the following facilities used by the system 1 2 ET 4 Real time clock supported by an off board Lithium Soo ug uw 1 5GHz Pentium M processor 512 megabytes of RAM Dual RS232 Serial communication interface battery The RTC provides microprocessor access to year month day hour minute seconds It also provides several interrupt periods from one year down to 0 01 seconds Quad USB hub Single Ethernet interface LCD and CRT drivers Dual IDE ports Flash Card interface 10 Audio synthesizer iPCM User Manual 7 3 Technical Description Circuitry Issue Beta Issue 1 Summary of 5712A Function Source Destination Comments functi
431. ng incorporated into the main background of the instrument When a person is detected entering the instrument these pre buffered background counts are discarded Quick Background The background accumulation period is dynamic The instrument will remain Out of Service for as long as it takes to acquire a stable background and results in a count time lower than the Maximum Monitoring Time see Monitoring page 5 12 If a change in the Normal Background Monitoring is detected or the instrument does e T e not have a valid background iPCMI2 will acquire a new background and the Updating Background message is displayed 97 Seconds Remaining See Notes regarding Changing Background page 5 78 for more information regarding acquiring a background Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions If the portal is entered when the iPCMI2 is updating the background background Exit counting stops the Warning Portal is busy message is displayed and an audible alarm will sound To continue with the process the portal must be vacated Please Leave the Portal Alarm Out Of Service When a new Background has been established the Ready OK to Enter message is Ready displayed The iPCM12 is now ready to start monitoring See Entering the Portal page 5 78 for more information Ready Clear Thermo Fisher Scientifi
432. ng monitored beyond the precision and certainty required thus effectively wasting time which reduces throughput Therefore the iPCM12 software continuously adjusts the monitoring time T to the minimum required to achieve the statistical requirements as the background changes This is reflected in Figure 18 which shows that the monitoring requirements can be achieved in less than 11 s Note that the iPCM12 rounds the monitoring time up to the nearest whole second The point where the two vertical lines just meet is the absolute limit of detection effectively the alarm trigger point above the average background Any change in background B will result in a monitoring time adjustment If a background increase requires the monitoring time to exceed the iPCM12 user programmed maximum Tmax a high background condition exists In graphical terms the two vertical lines have crossed over into a negative separation condition and the monitoring time can no longer be increased to restore the balance In this situation the maximum monitoring time Tmax must be increased the Alarm count must be increased or the statistical requirements P and or F must be relaxed for the instrument to resume operation This is a non fatal condition from which the iPCMI2 will automatically recover if the background B falls to an acceptable level In Figure 17 the positive separation between the modified background and alarm c
433. ngth of time that the alarm displays sounds after the user has exited the portal See Cancel Alarm page 5 93 for more information on clearing the alarms Values 0 to 300 s Default 2 seconds This is the maximum length of time allowed between entering the User ID and entering the portal It is also used as the maximum length of time in seconds allowed for the user to present their ID after entered the portal Note that User Id Required see above has to be ticked for this option to be effective Values 0 to 300 s Default 10 seconds Select Set Up Operations to EXECO OC customise the iPCM 12 s operation momo r B Quick Scan Enabled Quick Scan Enabled F Quick Background Enabled Residual Contamination Check after Alarm F RCC after Abandoned Measurement F Auto Recount F Complete Both Steps 5 Restart Measurement on Sensor Break Portal Approach Time 2 s Exit Barrier Delay Rs Background Logging Interval f hours Out of Service Recovery Interval b j mins Quick Scan Period B s Gas Type Argon Methane Other Apply Cancel Settings Changes Ec Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Description of options Field Name Quick Scan Enabled y Quick Scan Enabled Description These options may be enabled to allow real dirty or real clean to be identified before end of monitoring period A
434. nitoring sequence If no significant change is detected the machine will be available for further monitoring If a change in background is detected further background measurements are performed until the iPCM12 detects a stable background see Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring page 5 76 When the mandatory 100 second background count has been accumulated the monitoring time required to achieve the specified alarm level is calculated Providing the monitoring time calculated falls within the maximum and minimum limits see Monitoring page 5 12 the instrument will be ready for monitoring If however the monitoring time calculated is greater than the maximum allowed a high background condition exists and monitoring will be inhibited A high background condition indicates that the alarm level set and statistical certainties required are not achievable under the current background conditions This may be overcome when either the background falls or more suitable operational parameters are entered by the Health Physicist It is advisable to check for residual contamination if this occurs unexpectedly or persists The lower the background field the more sensitive stable and accurate the measurements will be A Background Attenuation factor facility is provided This factor compensates for the attenuation and or scatter of background radiation caused by an operator when in the monitoring position iPCM User Manual 3 3
435. ns page 6 9 Detail Note that this is a view only field The Minimum Detection Activity MDA and Alarm Check Select Diagnostics Alarm Check MACAE to check the operation of alarms 9 0097769 gt Detector System Clear LV mnn 000 pious OU 0 nna npa C LL L sj Stop Continuous Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 27 Operating Instructions Position Sensors 5 28 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 To test the operation of alarms select a Detector Type from a Bory At this point if required you can insert a source in the monitor Press the Start Button The Seconds Remaining will count down until an alarm is detected or until the Quick Scan is triggered see Operation page 5 10 or until the Maximum Monitoring Time has passed see Monitoring page 5 12 Tick the Continuous box for the Alarm Check to run constantly Click the Stop button to halt the continuous mode The instrument will have seven sensors for detecting the user s position in the portal as follows e Body e Side of Leg e Hand e Left Sole e Right Sole e Left Top of Foot e Right Top of Foot Select Diagnostics Position ag rn Cs GS Sensors to check the sensors and 35528800 visual elements rem The green arrows in the diagram indicate the Position Sensors on the portal These will detect when the user is correctly positioned prior to a measurement being taken see Posi
436. ns period See Set Up Monitoring page 5 12 for more information Calibration Required Interval Calibration confidence typically 20 95 See Set Up Calibration page 5 15 for more information Quick Scan Period for p y See Set Up Operation page 5 10 for more information Calibration stream selection B y Co Alarms See Set Up Alarms page 5 18 for more information Probability of False Alarm typically 3 16 Probability of Detection typically 1 650 y sumzones See Set up Detection Options page 5 16 for more information Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 9 3 Setting Up Procedure Issue Beta Issue 1 Resetting the above Parameters will guarantee the integrity of measurements It is also important to reset the time and data see Setup page 5 62 since these are used when check the calibration due dates and also by the Data option A listing of all the parameters is available by selecting Configuration Report page 5 56 This report should be either printed or saved to USB memory stick when the instrument is first set up and when significant changes of configuration are undertaken The iPCM12 will be delivered optimised with a valid HV Scan and optimum operating voltages stored If the HV Scan needs to undertaken for any reason follow the procedure described in HV Scan page 5 41 The details of the current
437. nstructions 5 34 iPCM User Manual Cal Check Issue Beta Issue 1 Calibration Warn Period days Set the number of days that the Calibration Warn Period information is displayed to the user Enter 0 to disable this feature This option allows the user to edit existing Calibration sources and create new ones There are also functions available to allow the user to check or overwrite the current calibration factor Select Calibration Cal Check to m edit the Calibration setting against a selected source and to conduct a calibration check Calibration Waming Period 7 Days Calibration Accuracy 5 00 Calibration Confidence 100 c 68 269 Advice 1 Select or Create a Calibration Source 2 Select Detector System to calibrate 3 Press Calibrate to create a new calibration 4 Or Press Cal Check to verify against last calibration Cal Check Calibrate Note that the Calibrate button is not available to the Technician role Description of options Field Name Description Calibration Warning Note that this is a view only field Period days This is the number of days since that last calibration date See Out of Calibration page 5 72 to view the message displayed on the unit when out of date Calibration Accuracy Note that this is a view only field This is a copy of the Default Calibration Accuracy field in Calibration page 5 15 Calibration
438. ntenance and Trouble Shooting software However continued occurrence of this fault would suggest a serious problem that needs reporting to Thermo Fisher Scientific s service department Servicing of the Electronic Assemblies The Electronic display chassis D92520 A contains the ETX processor 5712A HV generator 5713A DC DC converter 5714B Gas flow control chassis and LCD sub assembly They are all mounted on the steel chassis above the PSU module and battery controller and battery NOTE AS A MATTER OF GENERAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND FOR CONTINUED EMC PERFORMANCE ANY EARTH TAGS WIRES CONNECTORS OR COVERS REMOVED FROM ANY PART OF THE iPCMI2 IN THE COURSE OF SERVICING MUST BE REFITTED CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES NOT TO SHORT THE BATTERY TERMINALS NOTE THERE ARE POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS VOLTAGES IN THIS COMPARTMENT ON THE HV GENERATOR MODULE AND ON THE MAINS PSU MODULE THESE ARE NORMALLY SCREENED HOWEVER IT IS WISE TO SWITCH THE iPCMI2 FRONT PANEL KEY TO OFF AND THE INTERNAL MAINS UNIT ISOLATOR TO OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY CABLES OR REMOVING CARDS BUT REMEMBER THE BATTERIES ARE STILL CONNECTED To gain access to the Electronics display chassis components the iPCM12 right hand side panel must be unlocked and hinged open iPCM User Manual 11 3 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Removal of the Electronics Chassis from the Corner Frame 11 4 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 NO
439. nter screw Place the 5712A Motherboard on a flat and even surface and align the ETX module s four 100 way connectors Place the palm of the hand on top of the heatsink and push down evenly and firmly until the module clicks into place on all four connectors Secure the ETX module to the 5712 PCB with the four corner fixings Refit the 5712A ETX Processor Motherboard into the Electronics chassis as detailed above iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 11 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting DC DC Converter Type 5714C Removal and Replacement Replacement of the DC DC Converter Board Gas Flow HV Generator Type 5713A Removal and Replacement Issue 2 0 1 Shut down the iPCM12 using the keyswitch 2 Switch the AC Mains PSU rocker switch OFF 3 The DC DC Converter board type 5714C is located immediately below the 5712A Processor Motherboard Release the four power cables B92597 A B92603 A B91918 A and B92604 A from the 5714C PCB noting their positions 4 Remove the six hex pillars securing the PCB to the Electronics Chassis Figure 20 DC DC Converter PCB Replacement of the 5714C is the reverse of the removal procedure If the converter is thought to be faulty it should be replaced with an identical unit see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 WARNINGS THE HV 5713A BOARD GENERATES DANGEROUS HAZARDOUS LIVE HIGH DC VOLTAGES EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING ALWAYS DISCHARGE TH
440. ntersunk Screws Gas flow detector Removal and Replacement All variants of iPCM12 contain gas flow detectors type 5710A The front face of these detectors is a conductive sheet of gas tight mylar melinex sheeting which is easy to puncture Handle the detectors only from the sides and rear and do not place the detectors face down on a rough surface Disconnect the mains supply and switch off the iPCM12 using the keyswitch Array Detectors 12 Top 1 Unlock the array detector panelling and hinge the of Foot Detector 1 detector arrays outward to the left hand side Clear access to the Top of foot detector is also provided 2 Disconnect the HT lead red network cables yellow and any sensor wiring red black 3 Using the blue Festo test tubing bypass the gas circuit of the 5710A detector Alternatively utilize the Hot spare detector 4 Unfasten earthing straps 5 Each detector is retained with two Velcro straps which must be released when withdrawing the detector Replace detector with Hot spare if required Island Doors Leg Detectors 1 Unlock the detector paneling and hinge the detector 2 arrays outward to the left hand side 2 Disconnect the HT lead red network cables yellow and sensor wiring red black 3 Using the blue Festo test tubing bypass the gas circuit of the 5710A detector Alternatively utilize the Hot spare detector 4 Unfasten earthing straps 5 Each detecto
441. ntly monitor the soles of each foot Facility is provided to secure the instrument to the floor see Unpacking and Installation page 4 1 Two lifting channels are formed on the underside to allow lifting and moving with both a low profile Pallet Jack truck and standard industrial forklift CAUTION PLEASE REFER TO LIFTING amp MOVING WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS IN UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION page 4 1 BEFORE MOVING IPCM12 A sculpted welded fabricated steel body detector array frame accommodates twelve gas flow detectors in the center of the cubicle The body detectors are arranged in a half hexagon formation in the horizontal plane to accommodate the body torso The body detector array is sculpted angled in the center in the vertical plane to accommodate body contours particularly of rotund users The body array frame is raised above the foot plinth accommodating users feet beneath the frame to bring the front of their legs into close contact with the body detectors The whole body detector array hinges open allowing access to all body detectors for easy servicing A hinged detector behind the body array makes close contact to monitor the tops of both feet shoes A User Guidance display comprising two colored lamps and a digital count down status display is fitted on the left side of the array frame iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 1 Description Issue 2 0 A fabricated waist high vertical island a
442. nto the average and the oldest discarded to maintain a 100 second Rolling Average for each detector The Average Background is used in conjunction with other system parameters to calculate the Monitoring Time for each channel and hence screen for High Background conditions before monitoring can commence As a contaminated user approaching the iPCM12 may affect the background of the instrument background counts are pre buffered for 2 seconds before being incorporated into the main background of the instrument When a user is detected entering the instrument these pre buffered background counts are discarded To increase the availability of the iPCM12 the background update time tg may be set to be dynamic by utilizing the Quick Background option see Error Reference source not found page Error Bookmark not defined When a new background count rate needs to be acquired the instrument will only stay out of service for as long as it takes to acquire a background that results in a count time lower than the Maximum Monitoring Time Tmax set for the instrument At Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics this point the instrument is capable of making measurements that meet the Probability of False Alarm and Detection criteria albeit with a longer Actual Monitoring Time Tmon than would be possible with a longer Background Counting Time tg This technique will allow monitoring to re co
443. nts are pre buffered for two seconds before being incorporated into the main background of the instrument When a user is detected entering the instrument these pre buffered background counts are discarded To increase the availability of the iPCM12 the background update time tg may be set to be dynamic by utilizing the Quick Background option see Quick Background page 6 18 When a new background count rate needs to be acquired the instrument will only stay out of service for as long as it takes to acquire a background that results in a count time lower than the iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 13 Technical Description Physics 6 14 Changing Background Issue 2 0 Maximum Monitoring Time Tmax set for the instrument At this point the instrument is capable of making measurements that meet the Probability of False Alarm and Detection criteria albeit with a longer Actual Monitoring Time T mon than would be possible with a longer Background Counting Time tg This technique will allow monitoring to re commence earlier and as more background counts are subsequently acquired monitoring times will fall On the gamma option because the FHT681 has an upper threshold that is typically configured as a cosmic threshold the gross counts are defined as counts in the energy band between the lower and upper thresholds This is referred to as the gross counts window In relatively stable background condition
444. nu Shutdown Password protected touch screen closes Application shuts down Windows performs auto hardware auto power off 3 14 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Specification All iPCM variants have seven automatic body sensor photobeams Photobeam Function Location Left Foot Sole Toe to Heel Beneath Left Tread Plate Right Foot Sole Toe to Heel Beneath Right Tread Plate Left Toe Top of Left Shoe Toe Behind Left Body Array Right Toe of Right Shoes Toe Behind Right Body Array Leg Side of Leg Trousers Vertical Surface Island Assy Body Body Torso Stomach Mid Body Array Horiziontal 50 mm Toe sensors uniquely define correct forward monitoring Position Soft Keys Touch screen Soft Keys available to use in some functions Displays Color LCD The integral back lit LCD display provided is used in conjunction with the touch screen for data entry and diagnostic functions As well as duplicating any front panel LED display the LCD also provides comprehensive user friendly operational guidance measurement results and instrument fault messages LCD Resolution 640 x 480 Backlight Dual CCFL Touch Screen Five Wire Status Lamps Five LED Cluster Lamps Instrument Status and User Guidance One or optionally two LED cluster boards type 5672A User Guidance Display Dual LED ClusterLamps and Dual Digit Count Down Timer User Guidance Display Type 5711A
445. o Enter the ratio of gas exhaust rate over the gas inlet rate Ifthis ratio is exceeded the iPCM becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 97 Average Period s Enter the smoothing period used to determine the rate figures This will eliminate the peak rates that occur during normal operation Values 2 to 10 Maximum Maximum time that instrument will stay in Stabilisation Period stabilization mode before the iPCM becomes out of minutes service see Out Of Service page 5 97 Values 0 to 65000 Purge in Stabilisation State iPCM User Manual 5 21 Operating Instructions 5 22 iPCM User Manual Barriers Issue Beta Issue 1 Select Set Up Barriers to customise the Barriers if lt enabled F Enable Left Barrier F Enable Right Barrier Ingress Closed During RCC Ingress Closed During Out Of Service Ingress Closed When Ready Barrier Settings Entry side Len Left Right Mode Barrier Transit Time fo x 100ms High Current D m9 Low Current fo mA Evaluate Limits Apply Cancel Settings Changes Description of options Field Name Description Enable Left Barrier Tick this option to enable the Left Barrier see below for Barrier settings Enable Right Barrier Tick this option to enable the Rear Barrier see below for settings Ingress Closed Note that this option is greyed out unless the Enable During RCC Front and or Rear Barrier options are
446. o activity 4 or 2 Surface Emission Rate as above The use of body positioning systems and the geometry of the instrument force most part of the body to be in contact with a detector at some point of the measurement cycle However there will be some parts of the body where there is a small distance to the closest detector For the purpose of this example we use Body Average Efficiencies based on a closest approach to a body detector of 5 cm as defined in IEC 61098 However this model is pessimistic for the sculpted geometry of the iPCMI2 Hands Feet and Body which includes the head each have separate Alarm Levels but for any given nuclide energy the body alarm level will always be most stringent dictating the monitoring time and thus user throughput Monitoring time will be significantly increased in higher backgrounds iPCM User Manual 6 23 Technical Description Physics 6 24 Alpha on Body Effect of Probability of False Alarm F iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 The alpha Alarm Level is generally used as 0 4 Bq cm With a body grille contact efficiency of around 15 4 the body alarm level will be Alarm Level Count rate 0 4 Bq cm x 100 cm x 6 cps C 0 15 Since the alpha background counts is generally low typically 0 025 cps and theoretically no more than 0 1 cps the alarm level is generally easily achievable and the beta body alarm level dictates the Monitoring Time T In inst
447. o make allowances for these effects when setting the count rate alarm levels especially where alpha and low level beta contamination is being monitored The following formula is used to calculate the Alarm Countrate C for alpha beta and gamma Contamination C Ad Bc where 15 alarm Activity per unit area required to give an alarm typically in UK 40 Bq cm 2400 for y dpm cm 4 Bq cm 240 dpm cm for B 0 4 24dpm cm for a Bq cm In USA a typical beta activity alarm limit is 5000 dpm averaged over 100 cm i e 0 83 Bq cm ais the area over which the Contamination activity is averaged normally 300 cm for both sides of the Hand and sole of the foot and 100 cm for Body including the head is detector efficiency to nuclide of interest For Hand and Feet alpha and beta detectors this is expressed in terms of S E R 2x Body average efficiencies for Beta and Gamma body detectors are expressed in terms of activity 47 therefore Aa Ee 6 20 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics Examples Co Beta on Hands standard grille If 4 150cm assumed area of one side of one hand Ewe 31 detector efficiency to Co 2n then 2 x 4 x 150 0 31 93 cps 1 Am Alpha on Hands standard grille If A 0 4 Bq cm 2 150cm assumed area of one side of one hand Ewe
448. oard replacement follows is the reverse of the removal procedure Ensure the connectors are correctly mated Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 25 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Barrier Replacement Issue 2 0 Barrier Arm and Motor Assemblies NOTE The motor drive system has a protective clutch to limit the impact force and stop the motor in the event an obstacle is encountered However when servicing beware its field of travel 1 Shut down the 2 and switch the AC mains supply OFF 2 Remove the barrier arm by releasing three retaining bolts that secure it to the motor assembly 3 The barrier motor assembly is located within the iPCM12 closed extension frame and accessed via the rear locked panels To remove the motor assembly the barrier arm must first be removed as described above The motor flange visible externally can then be removed by withdrawing the central fixing screw 4 Detach the motor assembly by removing the two nyloc nuts rear of motor retaining the drive to the holding plate that is secured to the panel work Unplug the control cable to allow removal of the motor Replacement of the Barrier arm and motor assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure Trouble Shooting Operational This Trouble Shooting section covers a number of possible operational problems their likely causes and possible remedial action WARNING EXERCISE
449. od will contribute to a rolling average of up to 100 periods Because a contaminated user approaching the instrument may affect the background of the instrument all background counts are pre buffered for the Portal Approach Time see Operation page 5 11 before being incorporated into the main background of the instrument When a person is detected entering the instrument these pre buffered background counts are discarded Quick Background The background accumulation period is dynamic The instrument will remain Out of Service for as long as it takes to acquire a stable background and results in a count time lower than the Maximum Monitoring Time see Monitoring page 5 14 If a change in the Normal Background Monitoring is detected the instrument does EUe Eae Msro not have a valid background the iPCM12 will acquire a new background and the Updating Background message displays 97 Seconds Remaining See Notes Regarding Changing Background page 5 94 for more information regarding acquiring a background Out Of Service 5 92 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions If the portal is entered when the iPCM12 is updating the background background Exit counting stops the Warning Portal is busy message displays and an audible alarm sounds To continue with the process the portal must be vacated Please Leave the Portal
450. of Foot Detector 1 Overhead Detector E Foot Detectors 2 dte rte rtr tre Repairing Gas Flow Detectors with Leaks Scintillation Detector Removal and Replacemennt eese eee esee eene esee etta tn sn nao Removal Detector Replacement irato hob nate ster ted hates ebore i bees Setting up Replacement Detectors for iPCM12C GPIO 5707A GPIO Replacement 12 Barrier Arm and MOtot ssscsssscsscssccescessssssessssssecsccscescsesssscseeseessesessesssecsossses Barrier Replacement iPCM12C Powered Doors Troubleshooting Normal Start up Boot up nennen Unit dead will not boot up amp charging LED is OFF eene Unit dead will not boot up amp charging LED is ON Starts up but Display is Blank amp Fails Self Tests no chimes Will not run amp displays Out Of Service Low Background Counts 11 23 Will Not Run amp Displays Out Of Service High Background Conditions 11 24 FailsEamp or LED Tests eee eee et mE ER 11 26 Fails Loudspeaker Test eer Rr ete e d EP ERE rta 11 26 Fails the LCD Display coe ec ete cote EET CROIRE S 11 26 Display Backlight Failure ertt rep edere dr he ero 11 27 Will Not Accept Valid Passwords
451. of the battery charger PSU Status Mains On Battery Status Charging Status Battery Fault O No Mains Power O Charge Current Limited O Charge Inhibited O The Status options give an indication if there is an error with the Battery Charger When the mains power is ON the system charges the battery When no mains power is present the system operates from the battery Barriers Select Diagnostics Barriers to Bmc check the installed barriers co 4 Left O Open Blocked Open O Closed O Fault Close W In Transit Right Open Blocked O Closed O Fault Close Ili In Transit Activations O Emergency 1 Panic Entry Request To test the opening closing of the barriers tick the Open Close iic eed buttons The display will I In Transit indicate with a green box if the barrier has opened closed or is in Transit or whether the barrier is Blocked Faulty as follows Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 31 Operating Instructions 5 32 iPCM User Manual Gas Flow Issue Beta Issue 1 Activations To test the Activations press the Emergency Panic or Entry Panic Request buttons Note that this is a view only arraga table 2 Con Select Diagnostics Gas Flow to Measured Values o view the current status of the Gas Tus Flow Controller HighFiow Leak Detected O Compressor Runni
452. ology to maximize coverage and minimize dead areas Common sizes are used where possible to minimize spares inventory Common construction specification Plastic Thickness Photomultiplier Construction Shielding Energy Response Type No Construction Profile Overall Size Detection Area Detection Vol Type No Construction Profile Overall Size Detection Area Detection Vol NE110 or equivalent 57 mm 2 25 inches Type B9900 B07 25 mm 1 inch Extended Photo cathode Embedded PMT and Dynode Foil wrapped with light tight plastic jacket 10 mm Low Background lead on external face and sides 20 keV 2 Mev photons 5708A As detailed above Rectangular Universal Use 520 mm long x 160 mm wide x 57 mm thick 832 cm 129 in 4 742 cm 290 5717 As detailed above Rhomboid Left and Right Body Reversible 520 mm long x 325 mm at widest x 57 mm thick 1690 cm 262 in larger face 9 632 cm 589 in iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 7 Specification 3 8 Issue 2 0 Side of Head Scintillator No Construction As detailed above Profile Rectangular Universal Use Overall Size Detection Area Detection Vol 430 mm long x 158 mm wide x 57 mm thick 679 cm 105 in 3873 cm 236 in Mini SAM Scintillator No Construction As detailed above Profile Rectangular Universal Use Overall Size 430 mm
453. on The Seconds Remaining will count down until an alarm is detected or the Quick Scan is triggered see Operation page 5 11 or until the Maximum Monitoring Time has passed see Monitoring page 5 14 Tick the Continuous box for the Alarm Check to run constantly Click the Stop button to halt the continuous mode Position Sensors instrument will have seven sensors for detecting the user s position in the portal as follows e Body note that this sensor can be disabled see Setup Operation page 5 11 e Side of Leg e Hand e Left Sole e Right Sole e Left Top of Foot e Right Top of Foot note that this sensor can be disabled see Setup Operation page 5 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 31 Operating Instructions 5 32 Variance Test Issue 2 0 Select DiagnosticslPosition umuman Sensors to check the sensors and 8 2 a visual elements A The green arrows in the diagram indicate the Position Sensors on the portal These will detect when the user is correctly positioned prior to a measurement being taken see Positioning page 5 97 for more information The variance check is a method by which the overall stability of the background can be assessed by running a sequence of background measurements and then assessing the variance of the measured backgrounds over the sequence Select DiagnosticslVariance Test to setu
454. on the rear panelling and disconnecting the 6 way coloured ribbon cable There is no need to remove the front labelling The LED s are propriety items and therefore are not user serviceable The 5711A display label will need to be replaced with a new label B92433 after the board has been refitted The boards should be replaced with identical parts as detailed in Recommended Spares List page 12 1 The sensor assemblies are connected to the detector 5704A Quad Amp boards via PL4 TX and PL3 RX and communication is via the X channel internal network to the 5712A ETX processor Various sensor housings are fitted although the infrared TX and RX components are identical 702260ND The sensor locations and cabling is as shown on interconnection diagram D92591 sheet 6 and the sensor housings are listed on the iPCM12A family tree D92525 Individual sensor assemblies may be removed by unscrewing two M3 countersunk screws unwiring the sensor leads and unplugging the ribbon cable s The sensors are propriety items and therefore are not user serviceable They should be replaced with identical parts as listed on the family tree D92525 Active RX TX sensors are detailed in Recommended Spares List page 12 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Replacement of the Sensor After renewal connect the individual sensor wiring as indicated Assemblies D92591 sheet 6 and remount using two cou
455. on to enable the interface to work with the iPCMI2 Use the drop down button to select either front or rear Horizontal Image Size Enter the horizontal image size in mm Vertical Image Size Enter the vertical image size in mm Rotation Angle Use the drop down button to select either 0 90 180 or 270 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 49 Operating Instructions 5 50 Cameras Data Menu iPCM User Manual Reports Issue Beta Issue 1 Note that this option is only available if camera s have been installed see IDS Camera page 5 49 The current image is displayed on EB screen EN OS _ Em _ EM mE a EE o m To adjust the Brightness move the orange bar to decrease the brightness and to the right to increase the brightness To adjust the Contrast move the orange bar to decrease the contrast and to the right to increase the contrast Tick the Auto button for automatic adjustment of the contrast To adjust the Gain move the orange bar to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain Tick the Auto button to automatically control the gain of a signal Select Data Reports to selecta HZ GG aa Database Report from a pre mcm defined list Please Select a Report Run Report o EC To run a report select one from the list and press the Run Report button The types of Reports available are listed below Each report can be limited by vario
456. ons VGA CRT SK3 Display interface available for diagnostics LCD drive Touchscreen LVDS cable LED control PL8 9 5711A amp 5672A Visual indicators Backlight Touchscreen Fixed intensity Touchscreen RS232 interface USB power Lower LCD Provides independent controllers panelling power sources with current limiting for USB peripherals External Upper mainframe Network X channel SK1 6 7 Gas detectors HV Internal network cabling network 8 13 14 generator gas controller Loudspeaker pper mainframe Loudspeaker drive from the on board ETX sound generator Power PL10 DC DC converter 5714B switching Power PL5 Battery controller 5703A switching Primary IDE SK10 Electronic chassis 44 pin 2 5 Disk Interface Secondary PL15 Compact flash 40 pin CD Rom IDE Interface Power PL20 DC DC converter 5714B COM port RS232 voltage levels on PL2 as follows Label Connection Function PL2 Transmit Data Receive Data Data Terminal Ready Ready to Send Data Carrier Detected Clear to Send Data Set Ready 7 4 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Circuitry Battery Controller Board Type 5703A This is an X channel device which enables the operating system to monitor the charging process and remotely shut down the load Later iPCM12 s may be fitted with 5720A controllers The Battery Controller Board type 5703
457. onsequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this manual or the use of this manual in operating the equipment or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated IMPORTANT NOTICE All units produced after the 1st January 1996 must by law conform to the rules and regulations governing Electro magnetic compatibility EMC In order to meet the requirements and CE mark the units described in this manual any maintenance carried out must ensure the correct re assembly of all parts especially the earth straps Furthermore particular attention should be made to the correct mounting of the mains filter Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor iii WARNING Personnel may trigger an alarm on an iPCM12 who have recently been subject to radiotherapy treatments that involve the injection or ingestion of radioactive isotopes The monitor is not able to distinguish these isotopes from those generated via on on site process However the monitor does have the ability to indicate the presence of low energy photon emitting isotopes which are typical of radiotherapy treatments The iPCM12 monitor should be primarily used for monitoring personnel Other objects and articles should be monitored with a monitor that is designed for their monitoring such as a SAM12 However if articles are passed through the monitor operational procedures should contain warnings regarding inappropriate articles
458. ontamination has occurred see Selecting Detectors page 5 6 for more information regarding detectors Five Light System The Five Light system gives a visual indication of the current operation of the iPCM12 Solid Amber Ready Clear Solid Red Recount Solid Flashing Count Green Solid Alarm White Blue Solid Flashing Out Of Service Fast Flashing Red Flashing Red 5 84 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor The iPCM12 is READY for operation The result of a measurement is CLEAR A recount is necessary User must exit portal before re entering A measurement is in progress User must move to next measurement position Measurement Complete Result CLEAR An alarm or violation has taken place during measurement OR The iPCM12 is contaminated User must exit portal before re entering accompanied by Alarm Out of Service Portal Occupied The iPCM12 is not in use Out of Service Acquiring new background Out of Service High or Low background Out of Service Portal Occupied Background Acquisition suspended accompanied by Alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Guidance System Guidance system gives a visual indication of the current operation of the IPCM12 Position Body This LED is lit if the user is not correctly positioned Turn Around This LED is lit when the user is instructed to turn ar
459. operator to interrupt a photo beam with his torso to initiate monitoring To obtain good spatial response the detectors must fit the operator The general shape of the body is Figure 4 Elliptical phantom This requires a detection layout of six vertical arrays Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 1 Technical Description Physics Issue 2 0 Figure 5 Perfect layout of alpha beta detector By having three pseudo vertical arrays and a half full height leg array and by instructing the operator to turn around the six vertical array system is achieved around the upper half of the body and eight vertical arrays surround the lower half of the body The size of the operator has little effect on sensitivity Figure 6 iPCM12 alpha beta detector layout in one step In the case of alpha monitoring the range of alpha particles in the air is only a few centimeters dependent on alpha energy so many parts of the body will not be close enough to allow detection of contamination However alpha monitoring may be thought worthwhile for those parts of the body and legs in near contact with the detectors The form of detector layout again provides the best arrangement for the detection of alpha contamination with a static system In the case of gamma monitoring although good counting geometry is required closeness of the body to avoid air absorption is not required so detector arrays behind the beta det
460. or is retained with two Velcro straps which must be released when withdrawing the detector Replace detector with Hot spare if required Lay the defective detector on a flat work surface so that the window is uppermost Unscrew 14 countersunk screws retaining the window replace with new window B92412 A carefully position over O ring and replace all screws in the outer grille Connect the detector to the spare or test output of the gas chassis and purge the detector prior to re use Restart iPCM12 ensuring that the iPCM12 Dongle is placed in the USB connection Reselect NODE address of detector if the Hot spare has been used This requires the iPCM12 to automatically reboot and by selecting Setup and Xchannel the new HP address of the detector can be identified and enabled on screen iPCM User Manual 11 17 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Removal Body Gamma Detectors 6 11 18 Overhead Detector 1 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Scintillation Detector Removal and Replacement This section only applies for iPCM12B and iPCM12C when fitted with the gamma option kit AE0222A NOTE The detectors are light sensitive and because of this are contained in a light tight enclosure Care must be exercised at all times not to damage the enclosure as subsequent damage to the photomultiplier tube may result due to light leaks CAUTION TO AVOID LEAD CONTAMINATION THE LEAD PIECES SHOULD B
461. or to show the count down on measurements It also has 2 indicators showing the real time user status of the IPCMI2 ORANGE Position body facing detectors WHITE Position back to detectors Buffered drivers are provided at PL8 on the 5712A board Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 77 Technical Description Circuitry 7 8 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 IPCM12B or iPCM12C with Gamma Kit including FHT681 Scintillation HV amp Amplifier The Dual Channel Scintillation HV and Amplifier board FHT681 provides the high voltages for two scintillation detectors It also receives charge pulses from two detectors amplifies them and discriminates between five energy levels Independent counter values five for each gamma channel are generated every 100ms and stored in a 5 second buffer In addition to that 1s values are built from the 100ms values All these values can be polled from the serial interface HV amp Amplifier Connections The HV sections are designed to provide independently adjustable polarising voltages for two scintillation detectors with working voltage ranges between 500V to 1400V The setting of high voltages and thresholds is done via the serial interface The 1 3 and 4 counters for each channel form Cobalt coincidence pulses which are available on OUTI amp 2 connectors The card has six connectors PMTI amp 2 The scintillation detectors are connected via MHV connectors OUTI
462. or weekly source checks are advisable using a Calibration check as described in Cal Check page 5 39 For detector calibration the check source needs to be placed in calibration positions coinciding with the geometric center of all detectors Typically Cl or extended area sources are used for beta checking and 4 Am is used for alpha checking An alternative is to undertake an Alarm Check where a source of activity marginally greater than alarm level setting should be 8 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Routine Checks held against each detector in turn Each detector should alarm within the typical monitoring time Cleaning Instructions WARNING ENSURE THE MAINS SUPPLY IS ISOLATED BEFORE CLEANING The display can be wiped clean with a dry cloth Smudges may require the application of the Screen cleaner provided when the instrument was delivered The cubical should be cleaned using a mild detergent Make sure the equipment is completely dry before re connecting the supply Dust and accumulated lint can be cleaned from the detectors using a weak vacuum cleaner Use care to ensure the detectors are not damaged by the vacuum cleaner iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 8 3 Routine Checks Issue 2 0 8 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Setting up Procedure Cha
463. oring Measurement Cycle During the measurement a display of the measurement time remaining will be displayed on screen see Personnel Monitoring page 5 78 and on the Guidance System page 5 69 QuickScan It is possible to determine quickly during a measurement that the sample id either clean or contaminated if the count rate is sufficiently low or high This is known as QuickScan This feature is enabled separately for beta and gamma it is not applicable to alpha see Operation page 5 10 5 88 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Recount Required the user moves out of position during the measurement cycle the count is halted and the user is Recount prompted to move back into position The following Recount Required message is displayed If the user moves back into 1 Seconds Remaining position then the count is resumed If the user leaves the portal then the measurement is abandoned ALARM Result See Alarms page 5 18 and Alarm Display page 5 91 for further information regarding the Alarm displays If the measurement is partially complete and the a Low Zs Background Limit is exceeded or epe when Quick Scan indicates real dirty the Contaminated gun message display indicating that contamination is present ALLY See Voice Prompts page 5 69 pu for information regarding verbal lt instructions Facing In Facing Out Note th
464. osition is recorded in the door operator and this position is approached slowly when next closing An obstacle to the swing door leaf when Opening results in an immediate stop Page 6 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power El Operating instructions 5 1 Mech control elements and indication 1 Mechanic BDI with 3 positions control toggle switch 2 Reset button 3 Status signal Mechanical BDI control toggle switch The following operational modes can be set up with the 3 position toggle switch on the side cover Manual operation In this operation mode the DFA works as a normal door closer It can easily be opened manually and then closes automatically The connected actuating ele ments are inactivated Automatic The door opens and closes automatically either by activation of an actuating ele ment or by pushing with activated touch control Continuously open o The door opens and remains in the open position If an obstacle is encountered while opening the DFA will attempt during the next few seconds to get the door into the set open position If the obstacle is still present the current position will be accepted as the continuously open position Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 7 of 20 Operating instructions The mechanical BDI is by factory default always connected and active on a DFA 127 If an additional electronic BDE D is conne
465. ostics Menu page 5 27 and Gas Flow page 5 22 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 4 9 Unpacking and Installation Gas Flow Rate Normal Operation Issue 2 0 NOTE Purging with the restrictor bypassed purge Switch ON at flow rates up to 500 cc min is permissible Do not exceed 500 cc min or detector window damage may result Purge the system at between 300 and 500 cc min for at least two hours to ensure all air is flushed from the system Rapid purging is recommended because this creates turbulence within the detector volume which tends to disperse air pockets The iPCM12 is now ready for use Read the following section regarding the normal operational flow rate issues It will take sometime for the outlet flow to settle down to that of the inlet flow In a reasonably leak free system the inlet and outlet flow meters should read within 10 In some circumstances elevated temperatures the outlet flow may appear to be greater than that of the inlet which is normal Gas consumption and flow rates are very low Flow rates involved are a few tens of ccs per minute a small fraction of human lung capacity and just sufficient to maintain the gas mixture quality against any minor air ingress A nominal flow rate of 50 cc min 3 L hr is recommended This is sufficient to overcome any minor air ingress due to micro porosity of the window foils and small leaks pin size hole while maintaining peak alpha and
466. otal Head Step 1 THA THB Left Top Head THA Figure 12 Gas Detector Sum Zones THB HPC HPC 2 LFA LFC RFC 2 SFC 2 THC THC 2 Adjacent Horizontal Quadrants Centre amp Right CBIA CB1B CBIC CB2A CB2B CB2C CB2D CB3A CB3B CB3C CB3D CB4A CB4B CB4C CB4D RB1A RB1B RB1C RB1D RB2A RB2B RB2C RB2D RB3A RB3B RB3C RB3D RB4A RB4B RB4C RB4D Adjacent Horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 CB1D 2 CB2A 2 CB2B 2 CB2C 2 CB2D 2 CB3A 2 CB3B 2 CB3C 2 CB3D 2 CB4A 2 CB4B 2 CB4C 2 CB4D 2 Vertical Quadrants Centre CB1A CB1B CB1C CB1D CB2A CB2B CB2C CB2D CB3A CB3B CB3C CB3D CB4A CB4B CB4C Vertical Quadrants Centre CB1A 2 CB1B 2 CB1C 2 CB1D 2 CB2A 2 CB2B 2 CB2C 2 CB2D 2 CB3A 2 CB3B 2 CB3C 2 CB3D 2 CB4A 2 CB4B 2 CB4C 2 HPD HPD 2 LFB LFD RFD 2 SFD THD THD 2 RB1A 2 RB1B 2 RB1C 2 RB1D 2 RB2A 2 RB2B 2 RB2C 2 RB2D 2 RB3A 2 RB3B 2 RB3C 2 RB3D 2 RB4A 2 RB4B 2 RB4C 2 RB4D 2 CB1B CB1C CB1D CB2A CB2B CB2C CB2D CB3A CB3B CB3C CB3D CB4A CB4B CB4C CB4D CB1B 2 CB1C 2 CB1D 2 CB2A 2 CB2B 2 CB2C 2 CB2D 2 CB3A 2 CB3B 2 CB3C 2 CB3D 2 CB4A 2 CB4B 2 CB4C 2 CB4D 2 Adjacent Horizontal Quadrants Right and Side RB1A RB1B RB1C RB1D RB2A RB2B RB2C RB2D RB3A RB3B RB3C RB3D RB4A RB4B RB4C RB4D SHA SHB SHC SHD ARA ARB ARC ARD SL1A SL1B SL1C SLID SL2A SL2B SL2C SL2D
467. ouble Shooting Issue Beta Issue 1 Fails Lamp or LED Tests power on Self Test lights each lamp amp LED in turn If any lamp or LED fails to light in sequence except the charging LED proceed as follows using Diagnostics Lamps page 3 8 to re test lamps as required 1 Check the connections to the lamp assemblies and to the 5712A processor board 2 Any device failure will need a replacement board 3 If there are two lamp assemblies and neither are functioning then a fault on the processor board is indicated and it should be replaced as described in ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 Fails Loudspeaker Test power on self Test produces a single chime ding dong upon satisfactory completion If no sound is heard proceed as follows 1 Enter a valid password and select System Setup page 5 62 and increase the volume The speaker should produce a series of beeps which gradually get louder or quieter when the volume control is dragged 2 If no sound is heard check the speaker connection to the processor board 3 Since the speaker is unlikely to have failed a fault on the Controller board is indicated and it should be replaced as described in ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 Fails the LCD Display Test A power on self Test switches on the back light and produces series of Self Test Messages and beeps If the display fails to show any mes
468. ound Time This LED gives an indication of Remaining how much time is remaining for the measurement Time Remaining Voice Prompts NOTE If Voice Prompts is enabled see UI Options page 5 9 instructions are given verbally If Voice Prompts is not enabled an Audible Indication sounds See Audible Indications page 3 16 for more information Switch On Cold Start State When the iPCMI2 unit is powered on the SYSTEM SELF TESTING message SYSTEM SELF TESTING displays In this state diagnostics are run to validate the state of the iPCM12 to include Database connectivity check check local database is available Instrument Configuration Data validation Instrument Configuration XChannel device communication test check communication with each peripheral NOTE After exiting from Administration Mode when an update to the configuration has been made e g change to detector fit or replacement of an amplifier the Cold Start Mode is entered Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 85 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Self Test State Following the Cold Start checks the Self Test checks are run Self Checks Pass In this state additional self tests and configuration are run to validate the state of the iPCM12 to include Selected calibration validity checks Check efficiency factors are available for all detectors and that at least one valid a
469. ounts indicates that an operational margin exists for the given parameters Figure 18 shows the monitoring time T adjusted to 11 seconds just balancing the statistical equation with variables F P B and C the positive separation is approaching zero If Tmax is greater than T then an operational margin exists and allows T to increase dynamically to compensate for any variable changes usually background If however T increases to the point where it is verging on Tmax the system is at the absolute statistically allowable limit effectively balanced on a statistical knife edge and there is no Operational Margin to compensate for change in any quantity A fractional increase in the background B from any one detector will force the IPM into a High background state In practice programming Tmax to just balance the statistical parameters in the prevailing background condition leaves no iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 27 Technical Description Physics 6 28 User Throughput Issue 2 0 operational margin and should be avoided It will cause the iPCM12 to switch between normal operation and High Background with the slightest background drift from any detector effectively rendering it unusable Having decided on statistical requirements always program Tmax to cope with the worst case background condition expected The iPCM12 will dynamically adjust T to achieve the required statis
470. p the background monitoring over a number of Background Stability Check cycles to obtain a figure of Enter Test Parameters stability Number Of Cycles 100 Cycle Duration 10 Y Upper Variance Limit 15 15 Lower Variance Limit 0 67 0 67 Description Stat iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Description of options Field Name Description Number of Cycles Enter the number of background measurements to be used in the test Cycle Duration Enter the duration of each measurement seconds Upper Variance Limit Enter the Upper Variance Limit for the result Note that this value should initially be set to 1 5 Lower Variance Limit Enter the Lower Variance Limit for the result Note that this value should initially be set to 0 67 Enter a description of the test Once the options have been set Gabkgrotind Stability Check press Start to run the Background moet Stability Check A progress window displays Cycles Completed 74 of 100 Time Remaining ce EEEEEEEEEE 8 Overall 00 04 10 Abort Press the Abort button to OS ae ey abandon the check If the check Monet of Giclee 10 Cycle Duration Sac 100 completes the results display as follows rm Select one of the Detector Group options to highlight the results for the relevant group LIMIT D
471. password and SetuplMonitoring page 5 14 Check that the Low Background Limit is not set to an unreasonably high value for the prevailing background condition 2 Select CalibrationIHV Scan page 5 46 and check the HV settings for each channel are correct It may be necessary to refer to the original manufacturing configuration print out or to the commissioning configuration print out for the iPCM12 3 Check the cable connections between the 5712A processor board the HV and Amplifier PCBs at PL12 and the X Channel network cables SK1 6 7 8 13 and 14 4 Check HV cables red to faulty gas flow detector s 5710A and 5713A HV Generator 5 Having performed checks 1 to 4 above select DiagnosticslDetectors page 5 27 perform a 10 second count and check the faulty channel s Make note of the counts Zero counts in a channel usually implies a complete failure in either the 5710A detector or HV Amplifier PCB A few counts suggests either reduced detector efficiency or threshold problems in a gas flow amplifier or HV Amplifier iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 29 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting 10 11 Issue 2 0 Swap the gas flow HV cable to a working channel if possible Perform a further 10 second count and note the counts in each channel If the fault moves with the detector into a previously working channel the fault is in the detector cable assembly and this should be replaced
472. peat until all detectors are connected 10 Exit this routine and log on as Thermo User again When an FHT681 is exchanged it will be necessary to check that the Min and Max current levels for each detector are set at 50 and 200 respectively using the HV Scan page 5 46 facility If they are still set to 0 and 255 they will need resetting with the same facility NOTE When these values are correctly set the application will be able to report any detector disconnection or light leak WARNING THE BACKLIGHT INVERTER GENERATES DANGEROUS HAZARDOUS LIVE HIGH VOLTAGES EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING ALWAYS ALLOW THE HV TO DISCHARGE BEFORE COMMENCING WORK DO NOT REMOVE THE INVERTER FROM ITS PROTECTIVE SCREENING ENCLOSURE Refer to assembly drawing D92563 A for details 1 Shut down the iPCM12 and ensure the AC Mains Switch is OFF 2 Remove the whole Electronics and Display assembly to gain access to the LCD display subsystem 3 Remove the six hex pillar screws from the rear of the display housing and remove the ETX processor board 5712A as detailed above Release the back plate 4 The back light and Touch screen controller cards lie beneath removable protection covers on the back of the display 5 Take care in removing the connecting cables Both the Touch Controller module and the Back light Inverter are proprietary items and are not user serviceable They should be returned to the Thermo Fisher Scient
473. perating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Configurations Configurations of the DFA 127 can only be made with the electronic BDE D If a toggle switch is connected a BDE D must be connected briefly for the configura 6 2 tion Further information for parameter changes can be taken from the user manual of the BDE D no 903 109 271 Please always leave the configuration review sheet in the drive Parameter description Parameter Setting Factory Description range default DRIVING CYCLE Closing speed 0 40 18 Slider control with 40 steps 5 20 s Opening speed 0 40 36 Slider control with 40 steps 8 20 s TIME DELAY OPEN Time delay open 0 40 2 Effective with AKA AKI and push to 0 60 s actuate 0 20 Stepsofis 21 40 Steps of 2s Time delay SSK 0 40 4 Effective with SSK 0 60 s 0 20 Steps of 1s 21 40 Steps of 2s DRIVE Opening angle 0 40 35 The opening angle is estimated dur ing the calibration run and is equiva lent to the value of 40 6 3 Different factory defaults for door types Low Energy Parameter Factory Parameter Factory default default DRIVING CYCLE Closing speed 10 Opening speed 20 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev 11 2006 Page 13 of 20 Maintenance instructions 7 1 General The record DFA 127 swing door operator is a product of the latest technology It has been carefully made and only leaves the factory following t
474. planation of the Operational Calculations It is a requirement to measure personnel contamination as quickly and accurately as possible Optimum detection efficiencies are required with minimum statistical error in giving alarm indications Measurement of contamination is dependent on ambient background level Accuracy of measurement of both background and contamination is dependent on respective background and contamination monitoring times self absorption and also on chosen probability of false alarm and probabilities of detection This section summarises the calculations employed by the system CPU in determining whether the parameters selected by the user allow the monitor to operate correctly The section then shows the criteria used to determine The parameters used in the calculations are summarised and abbreviated as follows tp Background Update Time seconds is the time over which the average background counts have been accumulated This time is usually fixed at 100s but when Quick Background is enabled this time is flexible and may be significantly lower than 100 s Background measurements can only occur when the portal is not occupied Bgum Average Background Count Rate cps is the mean background of the detectors measured over the background update time tg This is a fixed 100 second rolling average in the iPCM12 unless Quick Background is enabled See Notes regarding Normal Background Monitoring page 5 76 Ber Ef
475. pter 11 Power up Screens Self Test Screens Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Fault Messages The fault messages produced while in the application are directly controlled by the software written by Thermo Fisher Scientific whereas errors reported from the motherboard BIOS or the Window s operating system will be supplier dependent When switching the system ON the screen will remain blank for several seconds while the BIOS carries out basic checks on the motherboard A momentary white flash on the LCD is a positive indication of a good initial boot The screen will eventually show scripting that details the progress of these initial tests Should a fault be found the process will halt with the fault error detailed This should be recorded and reported to the Thermo Fisher Scientific Service department The equipment cannot be used until the fault is rectified NOTE A failure of the LCD backlight module will leave the display blank even though boot up is taking place correctly In a normal boot up the BIOS sequence of tests will be followed by loading the operating system from the disk drive signalled by the Thermo Fisher Scientific log screen Any failure here will result in a blue screen Again you will need to contact Thermo Fisher Scientific s service department if this occurs Finally the application software will load and the iPCM12 User scre
476. pter9 Setting up Procedure General Initialization Setting Passwords Thermo Fisher Scientific Initial Setting up for Use After the initial installation and before switching on the iPCM12 read Operating Instructions page 5 1 Connect the mains lead to the iPCM12 and turn the keyswitch clockwise until the unit switches On a click is heard after about 1 2 seconds and then release it see Keyswitch Operation page 7 6 The iPCM12 will power up and load up the Windows XP Embedded operating system followed by the iPCM12 application During this time the Thermo Scientific banner displays see below the application has loaded the application will initialize see Start Up Checks page 5 87 The system will automatically pass into the User Mode In this mode the user will not have access to any operational parameters In order to set up the instrument the user requires a security dongle which should be placed in the USB port of the iPCM12 When this dongle is in place the touch screen is activated and the user will have access to the Administrator Mode page 5 1 There are three user levels Technician Health Physicist and Thermo Fisher The lowest level is Technician and allows the user to view some parameters and undertake calibration checks The Health Physicist level gives access to all parameters that are used for calibration and setup of the instrument The top level Thermo Fisher i
477. ption of Parameters Used in Calculations page 6 9 Note that the Probability of False Alarm is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 to 10 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 3 16 This is the probability that exactly one alarm Level of contamination will cause and alarm For further information see Description of Parameters Used in Calculations Note that the Probability of Detection is also expressed as a percentage in parentheses Values 0 to 10 sigma in 0 1 sigma steps Default 1 65 iPCM User Manual 5 17 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Alarms Select Set Up Alarms to select 5 18 iPCM User Manual the Active Calibration Stream and set the alarms Active a Calibration Am 241 Calibration Stream Active Calibration Uncalibrated Active y Calibration Cobalt 60 Active Co60 Calibration Cobalt 60 ca B cy Calibration Nuclide Uncaiibrated Mixed 4 gt Make Active SS a Alarm B Alarm eps Body 50 F Enable 55 F Enable Hands 30 F Enable 10 F Enable Feet 35 F Enable 12 Enable y Alarm eq 60 Alarm fps _ Body 201 Enable 40 Enable Hands 0 Enable Enable Feet x0 mabe 0 r Enable Centroid 5 F Enable 0 F Enable Apply Cancel Settings Changes Description of options Field Name Description These values are displayed if they are selected in the Detection Op
478. r Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions This report shows the Background Rate Trend between the selected Start and End Dates It is possible to limit the report by Start and End Date Radiation Type Alpha Beta or Gamma and Statistic Max Min Mean Background Report NOTE The report below is an example and does not display all the information Background Measurement Summary Background Rate Trend 6020 o m a 4020 gt o o 2020 14 08 2008 16 08 2008 18 08 2008 20 08 2008 15 08 2008 17 08 2008 19 08 2008 ID Measurement Date Count Rate Changing Integration Period 125 20 08 2008 10 29 555 10 125 20 08 2008 09 23 6469 Yes 10 124 20 08 2008 08 41 6564 Yes 10 123 19 08 2008 15 02 471 100 122 19 08 2008 15 05 6469 Yes 10 121 19 08 2008 13 56 6489 No 100 120 19 08 2008 12 56 6527 Yes 10 119 18 08 2008 23 54 6395 No 100 Press on one of the ID records to display the Background Measurement Detail for the selected Measurement ID Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 65 Operating Instructions 5 66 Background Measurement Detail Issue 2 0 NOTE The report below is an example and does not display all the information Background ID Threshold 1 1 1 t ee Q CO sds YY NY CO Ny Ny c TTD iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Moni
479. r alpha cal a Calibration Source Once selected press Next button to start the Measurement of the Background Measuring Background 00 00 04 Once the background has been measured position the sources 000 NL nn Source Alpha Nudide Am 241 Disabled Calibration Due Il Selected 3 Completed W Position sources Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 35 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 O00 BEL 000 D NN DLGDWZ SURNEWZ 00 Source Alphat Source Chlonnet Nuclide Am 241 Nuclide CI 36 Disabled B Calibration Due BM Selected 3 Completed B Position sources Once the iPCM detects the mum sources the Calibration is about DD to start message is displayed ooo The display indicates where the source has been selected in DEDI a ids DUO Source 2 Nuclide Am 241 Disabled Calibration Due 8 Selected O Completed Calibration is about to start Ei LL LLL The source is now measured Calibration Source Alpha Am 241 Eg Measuring Source Extending Time 00 00 03 The display indicted which area has been completed in green 000 0 Disabled Calibration Due W Selected E Completed Remove sources 5 36 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific This process can be repeated as required When completed select the Done button to view a review of the proce
480. r is retained with two Velcro straps which must be released when withdrawing the detector Replace detector with Hot spare if required Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 11 15 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Shoulder Side of Head Inner amp Outer Hand Detectors 4 Side of Foot Detector 1 11 16 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 These are accessible via the right hand service panel and the island door A bracket retains the Outer Hand detector so unscrew the knurled nuts and remove this bracket before lifting out the detector All the other detectors are held in place only by the Velcro straps For removal proceed as previously 1 Disconnect the HT lead red network cables yellow and any sensor wiring red black 2 Using the blue Festo test tubing bypass the gas circuit of the 5710A detector Alternatively utilize the Hot spare detector 3 Unfasten earthing straps 4 Each detector is retained with two Velcro straps which must be released when withdrawing the detector Replace detector with Hot spare if required This is accessible via the right hand service panel and the island door Two small brackets retain this detector Unscrew the knurled nuts holding the brackets and withdraw the detector via the inner For removal proceed as previously 1 Disconnect the HT lead red and network cables yellow 2 Using the blue Festo test tubing bypass the gas
481. r syn 2 4 when Quick Scan indicates real gun 9 dirty the Contaminated TN message displays indicating that contamination is present LLLA T See Voice Prompts page 5 85 pu A for information regarding verbal Wu instructions Facing In Facing Out This message is user definable See Messages page 5 25 for more information See Cancel Alarm page 5 108 for more information on clearing the alarms 5 104 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions If the measurement is complete and the B Low Background Limit B Result is exceeded or when Quick Scan T indicates real dirty the Contaminated message displays ITE indicating that contamination is present LELA YI LLL lt Facing In Facing Out If the measurement completes and the y Low Background Limit is exceeded or when Quick Scan indicates real dirty the Contaminated message displays indicating that contamination is present y Result See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal A instructions Facing In Facing Out This message is user definable See Messages page 5 25 for more information See Cancel Alarm page 5 108 for more information on clearing the alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 105 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If the measurement completes and the
482. r the following messages e Normal Alarm e High Level Alarm e Radon Alarm e Clear Select Set UplMessages to select mammaa a message to configure Message High Level Alarm Headine HIGH ALARM EZI Hesdine2 Contamination Present Instuction Please Cal HP Set we Use the direction arrow to find a Message to configure Once selected update the text by pressing on the Headline Headline 2 and Instruction fields To save the changes press the Apply Settings button To set the selected message back to its default setting press the Set Default button Available Messages Message Headlines and Instructions Normal Alarm Contaminated Please Contact HP High Level Alarm High Level Please Contact HP Radon Alarm Probable Radon Please Contact HP Clear Clear OK to Leave Portal Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 25 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Select Set UplHV Gen to set HV 9 0200020203 Generator values magadang Current Overload 100 pA Gas Type Settings Min Seting Max Argon Methane 1400 1700 2000 Volts Other 2800 3200 3700 Volts Correction HVGain ooo HVOfset HVFeedbackGain 1000 HV Feedback Offset 5 Apply Cancel Settings Changes More information can be found at Performing the HV Scan page 9 4 For further information on
483. r the Calibrating isotope If these are not known they must be determined as described in Detector HV Selection page 9 4 before proceeding with the calibration The iPCM12 is then ready for calibration 10 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Gas Flow Detectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Procedure Calibration Ensure the background is stable and any calibration sources are well away from the iPCM12 1 Ensure the portal is empty and the unit is on and ready 2 Login to the Administration mode using the Health Physicist role see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 3 then select Calibration followed by Cal Check See Cal Check page 5 39 for more information If the gamma option is fitted the user must select the radiation type either o D or y detectors To check the calibration select the Cal Check button This does not allow the calibration factor to be changed but makes a comparison between the old and new factor To recalibrate the instrument i e to adjust the calibration factor for a particular nuclide select the Calibrate button An option is available to use either a single source or a jig where the jig includes two sources In both cases the user may undertake either a single radiation type calibration alpha or beta or calibrate different channels both alpha and beta at the same time on different detectors Therefore
484. rameter overview sheet DFA 127 swtromvi 30 Master or Slave STG is replaced Please always leave the parameter overview sheet in the operator even when the D Value will reset after default parameter loading 51 Slave 1 or Slave 2 Change in parameter only with multifunctional button on control unit technical level Parameter number Parameter value factory settings printed bold Speedo parameter value X mark All parameter modifications must be marked as follows in the relevant box programmed value 51 Description 1 2 3 DRIVING CYCLE Closing speed Speedo Opening speed Speedo Acceleration Speedo Different accelerations Latch check Speedo Start latch check by closing TIME DELAY OPEN Time delay open Time delay SSK DRIVE Opening angle Collision Brake Without Closing position Opening position Open Clos pos Types of arms Standard arm Sliding pullling Sliding pushing Inheader Invers Enabled Spring type Limit open ENTRANCE SYSTEM Fire alarm Disabled Enabled Control Single control Master control Slave control Interlock type Without inter lock Master Slave single leaf inter Jock control Master Master double leaves interlock control Door type MS 2 LEAVES Basic operator USA USA Low Energy EU Low Energy Function AKA Master slave Master only Overlap Speedo 0 No overlap
485. raps are clear of the immediate repair area prior to fitting the replacement detector Ensure the protective grille is fitted inside the iPCM12 frame and located correctly Carefully fit the replacement detector observe correct orientation of the amplifier and HV connector Ensure the replacement detector is correctly seated in its frame and in contact with the protective grille Buckle and secure the Velcro straps re fit all connectors and ensure the EMC strap is fitted and the knurled knob securely tightened Quickly re fit the gas tubing to the gas connection at each end of the detector fit the collets afterwards and ensure they are securely finger tight Access to specific Gas Flow Detectors is as follows 1 Unlock the body detector array frame top and center 2 Hinge the detector arrays outward to the left hand side This gives access to the rear of all 12 body detectors Clear access to the Top of Foot detector Unlock the body detector array frame top and center Hinge the detector arrays outward to the left hand side Unlock the Island Assembly and hinge it outward toward the body array frame This gives access to the two Side of Leg detectors the Inner Hand Palm detector and the Side of Foot detector Each side of foot detector is located against the protective grille by two swivel clamps each released by a knurled knob Remove the detector vertically Note that the protective grille used
486. rces with current limiting for USB peripherals Upper mainframe All 5704 gas RS422 using RJ45 amplifiers cables 5709A Gas RS422 using RJ45 Control Board cables 5713A HV Generator 5703A Battery Controller FHT681 Scintillation Amplifiers Loudspeaker Power Switching Fan Control Primary IDE Secondary IDE PL10 pper mainframe Loudspeaker drive from the on board ETX sound generator DC DC converter 5714B Electronic chassis 44 pin 2 5 Disk Interface 40 pin CD ROM Interface Compact flash Power DC DC converter 5714B iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Circuitry COM1 Ports RS232 voltage levels on PL2 COM portlare as follows Connection Function PL2 TXD Transmit Data RX EXT Receive Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RTS Ready to Send DCD Data Carrier Detected CT Clear to Send RI Ring Indicator DSR Data Set Ready Battery Controller Board Type 5703A This is an X channel device that enables the operating system to monitor the charging process and remotely shut down the load GPCM12s will be fitted with 5720A controllers in the future The Battery Controller Board type 5703A controls the DC voltage output of a power converter unit PL4 between the range 11 2 V to 15 6 V in order to maintain the integrity of the 12 V 15 Ah Lead Acid Battery PL3 over the operat
487. rd and X Channel Interface X16 6 xe fs 9 5V iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Circuitry Mains Power Module Assembly 702947 The mains power supply is a proprietary high frequency switched mode 150 Watt converter The power module can accept a mains input of 85 V to 264 V 47 Hz to 63 Hz the output is between 12 V and 18 V at a maximum of 8 33 A The actual output voltage is controlled remotely by the 5703A or 5720A if fitted The power supply is capable of charging the battery at a maximum rate of 3 3 A up to 40 C This module contains AC Mains and dangerous DC switching voltages It should not be operated with the protective cover removed or the mains ground earth conductor disconnected It is not user serviceable and should be returned to Thermo Fisher s Service department for repair LCD Display and Controller I F and Backlight Inverter Module Assembly D92583 A The LCD module is fitted with an integral Cold Cathode Fluorescent CCFL backlight which is replaceable if found faulty The backlight is driven from a proprietary inverter mounted in a small screened box within the display The inverter generates dangerous high voltages and RF interference frequencies and should not be operated outside the box or with the display lid removed The LCD is controlled via a propriet
488. re accessed through a touch screen but access is password protected Displays The integral back lit LCD display provided is used in conjunction with the touch screen for data entry and diagnostic functions As well as duplicating any front panel LED display the LCD can also provides comprehensive user friendly operational guidance measurement results and instrument fault messages iPCM User Manual 3 7 Specification Issue Beta Issue 1 Lamps Five bright front and rear panel lamps show the instrument status at all times and give the user clear indication of the measurement result Green READY CLEAR White RECOUNT Yellow COUNT Red ALARM Blue OUT OF SERVICE Charging LED steady green LED on the side panel indicating that the mains is on and charging the battery Audible Indications Chime Measurement with a CLEAR result Single Dong End of a parameter counting sequence OR Measurement Aborted Periodic Dongs Operator sequence ERROR Rapid Dongs Measurement exceeding ALARM ACTIVITY Two Tone Measurement exceeding HIGH LEVEL ALARM Warble Measurement Aborted In addition to the audible indications given above the following voice prompts are given if enabled see UI Options page 5 8 Enter identification If User ID Required is ticked the user is requested to enter their ID before entering the portal see User ID page 5 79 Illegal Entry Please leave If User ID Required is ticked and the user the
489. rea 6 26 Calculation of the Minimum Monitoring 6 26 High a etre EUREN GRE RR TORTE EEG M Operational Margin User Throughput Detector Gas Flow Detector Naming Scintillation Detector nre nnne entente 6 31 Technical Description Circuitry 7 1 Ditrod cti i 7 1 Electronic Display Chassis D92520 A 7 3 ETX Controller Board type 5712A eeeeeeee eee eres eene en tns in tna tn sens ta tuse ts estne 7 3 Summary OL 57 12A TUnCllOTis e 7 4 Battery Controller Board Type 57034 eee esses eese entes tna intu atn tns tn 7 5 Keyswitch Operation i m rre tpe eerte p Eid e eT Tar Gp det pens 7 5 5710A Gas Flow Counter and 5704A Quad Amplifier eese restent enne enn tn stanno 5709A Gas Control Board eese ee esee eese entes ts sensa 5713A HV Generator Board eee ee eee sens enata 5714B DC DC Converter Board 5711A Guidance Display amp 5
490. read exactly 4 characters and 4 would read a minimum of 4 with no maximum Named capture group lt name gt Examples User ID AU lt id gt 0 9A Z 4 Numbers from 0 to d 1 6 999999 e g 123 123456 US Social Security d 3 d 2 d 4 number e g 123 12 1234 For more information on setting up valid barcode expressions contact Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Serial Barcode Reader Press the OK button The Operating Instructions Please Edit Parameters editable parameters for the Serial sns Barcode Reader displays Location front Use scroll bar to view last two parameters Valid Code RegEx Data Match RegEx Character Timeout 100 ms Rescan Delay 500 ms CR terminates Include CR Serial COM Port COM1 Serial Baud Rate 38400 Data Bits 7 OK Cancel Description of options Field Name Description Enable Valid Code RegEx Data Match RegEx Character Timeout ms Rescan Delay ms CR terminates Include CR Serial COM Port Serial Baud Rate Location Tick this option to enable the interface to work with the iPM12 Use the drop down button to select either front or rear These fields permit validation of a barcode and extraction of portions of data within the barcode for the Stream ID If left bank no validation is performed and any barcode is valid See Notes Regarding R
491. regarding High Background page 5 99 for more information If the Barrier Enabled and the Ingress Closed When Ready options are selected see Detection Options page 5 16 the user is unable to pass through the barrier while the Ready message is displayed If there is a problem with the Door Barrier the Barriers Jammed message is displayed Barriers Jammed If the system is unable to recover the Out of Service message is displayed see Barrier Error page 5 98 Ready Clear iPCM User Manual 5 75 Operating Instructions Notes regarding Normal Background Monitoring Changes to the Normal Background Monitoring 5 76 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Alpha and Beta Backgrounds The backgrounds will be monitored over a 100 second period in 10 second blocks At the end of each 10 second accumulation the 10 second background will be compared with the prevailing 100 second background to assess for changing background or counts out of range conditions on the detectors before adding it into the current 100 second background Gamma Backgrounds The background will be monitored over 1 second check periods Each 1 second period will contribute to a rolling average of up to 100 periods Because a contaminated user approaching the instrument may affect the background of the instrument all background counts are pre buffered for the Portal Approach Time see Operation page 5 10 before bei
492. remedial action WARNING EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING There are dangerous mains voltages around the power supply module and very dangerous high voltages on the HV and amplifier boards High voltage also exists on the LCD backlight and in the inverter enclosure The 12 v battery stores considerable energy so care should be taken not to short the terminals Please read the cautionary notes in Servicing of the Electronic Assemblies page 11 3 In general a successful start or boot up when the iPCM12 key switch is turned is indicated by e aseries of System Self Test display messages e a series of lamp tests each accompanied by a beep tone e a series of internal invisible self tests e asingle chime ding dong on satisfactory completion If the display remains blank and unlit no lamps are lit and no sound is heard assuming the volume has not been turned off it would indicate that the IPCMI2 is dead LED OFF indicates the AC mains supply is OFF and instrument cannot run off the battery 1 Check the fuse on the 5703A charger PCB F1 6 3Amp 2 Ifthe fuse is intact the battery is probably discharged Check the voltage at PL7 on the charger PCB If it is below 11 2 volts the battery is discharged and the charging supply must be restored before further operation is possible iPCM User Manual 11 21 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue Beta Issue 1 Restoring the AC mains charging suppl
493. rement continues Counting Once monitoring commences the iPCM12 displays the Counting message with an indication of the measurement time remaining 53 Seconds Remaining On completion the result is displayed See Monitoring Result page 5 87 Count om Thermo Violations during Monitoring If a user exits the portal or moves out of position determined by the optical position sensors before the measurement is complete the instrument will sound an alarm and illuminate the recount lamps Ifthe user re enters the portal or repositions themselves correctly then the measurement will be resumed If the user has exited the portal and does not return to the correct position within a configurable timeout then the measurement is abandoned and the instrument will return to background monitoring If the Barriers become stuck during the measurement the Barriers Jammed message is Barriers Jammed displayed If this is recoverable the measurement will continue If not the unit becomes Out of Service see Barrier Error page 5 98 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 83 Operating Instructions 5 84 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 If during measurement the user moves from the specified T UE position a Positioning message Positionin 9 is displayed asking them to return to position If the user re positions themselves in the portal and Restart Measurement on Sensor Break see Operation
494. removed from the immediate area in order to minimize the effect of background fluctuations All counts read from the detectors are corrected to compensate for the amplifier dead time With the iPCM12 and surrounding area free of sources enter the Administrator Mode page 5 1 as Health Physicist From the function tabs on the left side of the screen select the Calibration option Then from the tabs along the top of the screen select HV Scan There is a choice between displaying the gas flow HVscan a p or if fitted the gamma HVscan y In that case there will be a choice between performing a New Scan and viewing the Last Scan Press the New Scan button The new screen allows for the setting of the scan parameters Start Stop and Step voltages as well as the counting time The recommended values for these parameters are 9 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Setting up Procedure For gas flow detectors Start 1400 volts Stop 2000 volts Step 20 volts Time 10 seconds For gamma scintillation detectors Start 600 volts Stop 1100 volts Step 5 volts Time 10 seconds NOTE Short voltage steps are required for the gamma scan in order to make the location of the optimum operating voltage easier to determine Using the recommended values this process will take approximately one hour to comple
495. required to instructions enter your Id If the User does not enter the portal within the Id Timeout Period see Operation page 5 No 1 11 the user is asked to leave the portal You are required to See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions enter your Id Ready Clear Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 95 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If User ID Required is not ticked the iPCM12 displays the Ready OK to Enter message Ready The user enters the portal to commence the measurement process Ready Clear When the user steps into the portal and is in position correctly the count commences Countin 9 See Positioning page 5 97 7 Seconds Remaining Count b Camera If Camera s is are installed see IDS Camera page 5 59 a digital picture of the user is automatically taken as they enter the portal depending on the Camera on Alarm option set in UI Options page 5 9 The iPCM12 is able to recognize when the camera is used by detecting which beam is broken see Position Sensors page 5 31 Commence Monitoring Personnel Monitor can be configured to use a two step measurement with the user facing the detector array for the first step and then rotating 180 degrees to face away from the measurement array for the second step See Positioning below 5 96 iPCM12 Installed Personnel
496. reshold values 5 54 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Sources and Fixtures Select CalibrationlSources and Fixtures to create the calibration HSS 4 sources and fixtures pea Calibration Source Nuclide C36 C136 4 Decayed Activity 4508 Bq New Emission Type Beta Source Description pote 10 12 2009 Jigs Name Jig1 4 Edit New Delete Source 1 241 Nuclide 241 Source2 Am 241 2 Nuclide Am241 Emission Type Alpha Jig Description To create a new Calibration Select a Nuclide and complete fields below Source press the New button a Nuclide Am241 The Select a Nuclide window displays Last Calibration Date 15 December 2009 Emission Type P factor Activity Ba Emission Rate 5 Comment Cancel Save ci di Description of options Field Name Description Select a Nuclide type from the drop down box Source Name Enter a descriptive name this is the name that displays in other fields Last Calibration Date Select the last calibration date the Save button is not enabled unless this date is in the past Emission Type Select a type from the drop down list Gamma Alpha or Beta P factor If left empty this will cause the value to default to 1 Activity The Activity is calculated as P Factor Emission Rate Enter an Activity value NOTE It is possible to alter the default Activity Un
497. returned Max Charge Current This is the maximum current allowed for charging A the battery The charge current is monitored constantly and the PSU output voltage is reduced if this current is exceeded Min Discharge This is the voltage at which the timer starts when Volume V the battery is being discharged 5 20 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Flow Operating Instructions Select Set Up Gas Flow to configure the Gas Flow 4 Normal Mode Low Limit Normal High Limit 1000 cc min Purge Mode Low Limit 60 ccimin Leak Ratio pe Averaging Period flo s Maximum Stabilisation Period 60 minutes F Purge in Stabilisation State Apply Cancel Settings Changes Note that this section is set by at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Description of options Field Name Description Normal Mode Low If the Gas Flow falls below this limit the iPCM Limit cc min becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 97 Values 0 to 1000 Normal Mode High If the Gas Flow goes above this limit the iPCM Limit cc min becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 97 Values 0 to 1000 Purge Mode Low If the Gas Flow falls below this limit when in Purge Limit cc min Mode the iPCM becomes out of service see Out Of Service page 5 97 Values 0 to 1000 Leak Rati
498. rgon e 20 Carbon dioxide 80 Argon not recommended See Quad Gas Flow o f Detector Type 5710 page 2 12 Operational Voltage settings iPCM12 gas services are via bulkhead connections located in the top Right corner of the Gas chassis Inlet and Exhaust bulkhead connections are for Festo Polyethylene PL3 tubing 4 3 mm O D 3 0 mm I D A Festo Polyethylene supply system is recommended for distributing gas directly from the regulator to all iPCM12s if site is equipped with multiple iPCM12s Because the normal operational flow rate is only 25 4 8 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Gas Pressure Purging the System Thermo Fisher Scientific Unpacking and Installation 50 cc min a large number of iPCM12s can be supplied with a single PL3 network Alternatively Nylon or stainless steel distribution systems can be used provided compression fittings are used exclusively throughout and the system is free from grease lubricants flux and other contaminants WARNING DO NOT USE COPPER SOLDER JOINTS FLUX OR OTHER MATERIALS INCLUDING SILICON RUBBERS AND POLYURETHANE The iPCM12 Exhaust gas Bulkhead connector is suitable for Festo Polyethylene PL3 tubing 4 3 mm 3 0mm I D While the exhaust gas is not toxic and both P5 and P7 are non flammable it should be piped well away from the iPCM12 ideally outside the building This is necessary because
499. rier Tick this option to enable the Rear Barrier see below for settings Ingress Closed This option is grayed out unless the Enable Front During RCC and or Rear Barrier options are ticked Tick this option to prevent entry into the iPCM12 while the Residual Contamination Count is performed see Residual Contamination Check page 5 108 Ingress Closed This option is grayed out unless the Enable Front During Out Of and or Rear Barrier options are ticked Service Tick this option to prevent entry into the iPCM12 while the unit is Out of Service see Out Of Service page 5 112 Ingress Closed When This option is grayed out unless the Enable Front Ready and or Rear Barrier options are ticked Tick this option to prevent entry into the iPCM12 while the unit is Ready see Normal Background Monitoring page 5 91 NOTE The Barrier Settings only display when logged in as ThermoFisher see Menu Roles page 5 7 The Barrier Settings display if the Enable Left and or Right Barrier option is ticked Entry Side Set either Left or Right as the Entry side for the iPCM12 Entry Settings Left and Right iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 23 Operating Instructions 5 24 Issue 2 0 Field Name Transit time x 100ms High Current Limit mA Low Current Limit mA Evaluate Limits iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Description Use the pre defined window to
500. ription Default Calibration Use the pre defined window to select a Calibration Source Jig Source Jig These Sources Jigs are setup in the Default Calibration Calibration Sources and Jigs page 5 48 Source Jig Default yCalibration Source Calibration Required This is the number of days since that last calibration Interval days date before the unit needs to be calibrated again See Out of Calibration page 5 72 to view the message displayed on the unit when out of date and Cal Check page 5 34 for information of the last Calibration Date Values 1 to 400 days 0 to disable Default 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 15 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Calibration Warn This is the number of warning days that will be Period days given to the user that the unit needs to be calibrated again See Out of Calibration page 5 72 to view the message displayed on the unit when out of date and Cal Check page 5 34 for information of the last Calibration Date Values 1 to 400 days 0 to disable Default 0 Default Calibration Note that this is a view only field Accuracy This is the default Calibration Accuracy used in the Calibration Check utility see Cal Check page 5 34 It is used along with the background measurement determines the count time required with the iPCM12 is being calibrated Values 0 5 to 10 in 0 1 steps Default 1 00 Calibration Note that this
501. ription Tick this option to enable a detection Tick Poisson for discrete probability distribution and Gaussian for normal distribution of results Note that this section is set by at production and should only be changed in consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific Tick this option to enable p detection Tick this option to enable two zones being added together See Zone Summation if required page 6 16 for further information Tick this option to enable y detection Tick this option to enable the y zones to be summed together Reduce Sum Zone Sensitivity High Alarms Enable High Alarm Multiple Probability of False Alarm and o for Alpha Body Alpha Hand Alpha Foot Beta Body Beta Hand Beta Foot Gamma Body Gamma Hand Gamma Foot Probability of Detection 96 and c for Alpha Body Alpha Hand Alpha Foot Beta Body Beta Hand Beta Foot Gamma Body Gamma Hand Gamma Foot Tick this option to decrease the sensitivity when Sum Zones has been ticked Tick this option to enable High Level alarms Default OFF Enter a multiple against the normal alarms levels at which the high alarm levels will detect Values 1 to 1000 Default 5 This value is the probability that a false alarm will NOT be given during a measurement This probability is used by iPCMI2 to determine the monitoring time and the Effective Alarm Level and Minimum Detectable Activity For further information see Descri
502. rmal Background Monitoring 5 76 Notes regarding Residual Contamination Check 5 94 Notes regarding Volume Levels 5 63 Number Functions 5 2 Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions 5 1 Operation 5 10 Out of Calibration 5 72 Overhead Detector 1 11 18 6 11 Passwords 5 64 Performing the HV 9 5 Plug ins 5 48 Position Sensors 5 28 Positioning 5 81 Power Supply Replacement 11 6 Pre defined Functions 5 2 R Ract 6 12 Recommended Spares List 12 1 Recount Required 5 89 Replacement of the Charger PCB 11 9 Replacement of the DC DC Converter board 11 11 Replacement of the ETX processor board 11 10 Replacement of the FHT681HV Amps 11 12 Replacement of the Hard Disk 11 8 Replacement of the LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter 11 14 Replacement of the Sensor Assemblies 11 15 Reports 5 50 Residual Contamination Check 5 93 Results Report 5 59 Routine Checks 8 1 S Self Test State 5 70 Setting the FHT681 Current Limits 11 13 Setting Up Procedure 9 1 Setup 5 62 Shielding for Gamma Monitoring Version Option 3 11 Sources and Jigs 5 48 Specification 3 1 Start Up Checks 5 71 Summing 6 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Index T Thermo Fisher Scientific ta 69 Teal 6 10 Technical Description Circuitry 7 1 Technical Description Physics 6 1 Temporary Error 5 97 Thresholds 5 47 Timed Counts 5 25 Tmax 6 1
503. round Updating Background message displays See Notes Regarding Changing Background page 5 94 for more information regarding acquiring a background If Quick Background is enabled see Operation page 5 11 the length of time taken to acquire a new background will be much shorter see Notes Regarding revi if Normal Background Monitoring page 5 92 If the background changes during the establishment of a new background the process will be restarted 93 Seconds Remaining Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 89 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 If the portal is entered when the iPCM12 is establishing a new background background Warnin 9 counting stops the Warning Please leave the Portal message displays and an audible alarm sounds To continue with the Rega Enty process the portal must be vacated Alarm Out Of Service When a new Background has been established the Ready OK to Enter message displays Ready The iPCM12 is now ready to start monitoring contamination Ready Clear 5 90 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Normal Background Thermo Fisher Scientific Monitoring Operating Instructions This is the normal dormant state of the system Normal Background Monitoring is continuous until 1 One or more of the position sensors are triggered probably as part o
504. round radiation level by continually adjusting count time and verifying user residence time in the portal The instrument is available in open and closed variants with the closed variant featuring either powered or unpowered doors iPCM User Manual 1 1 Introduction 1 2 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 The instrument will utilise a two step measurement with the user facing the detector array for the first step and then rotating 180 degrees to face away from the measurement array for the second step The instrument is provided with battery backup for continued operation in the event of a power failure The iPCM12 can have the following options in any combination iPCM12 Type Detector Types Open Unit A Basic Gas Flow GF used for ArCo2 or N2 alpha g Closed Unit B Gas sealed GS Closed Unit Beta plastic SC Gamma option The instrument build standard is therefore identified using the following nomenclature iPCM12u d 1 where u is Unit Type d is Detector Type is additional suffix of which signifies the user language may also be used e g DE for German speaking or C for Chinese The following AE kits are also available e AE0223A Gas Flow Head detector kit e AE0221A Gas Flow Side of Foot detector kit e AE0229A Spare purged detector kit e AE0224A Top Head gamma scint kit e AE0222A Side head gamma scint e EPD reader either basic Userld or full exit reader e
505. s 3277 02 view the Current Detector an 1 8 efficiencies Detector System 99 8 yContact Oy Centoid Calibration Source Nuelide Am 241 Calibration Stream Am 241 4 ig B Am 241 Calibration Stream Am 241 gt Detector B Select a Radiation Type from a y Contact or y Centroid Once a Radiation Type is selected it is possible to select a Calibration Source Cal Status Select CalibrationlCal Status to view the Detector calibration status Calibration Wam Period 7 days JEn E SERE gum HE gH d BERENS SERE Select a Radiation Type from a Bl Disabled or y The Calibration status of the Detectors displays Bl Out of Calibration E Calibration Due In Calibration 5 38 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Cal Check Operating Instructions Calibration Warn Period days This is a copy of the Calibration Warn Period field in Calibration page 5 16 This option allows the user to edit existing Calibration sources and create new ones There are also functions available to allow the user to check or overwrite the current calibration factor Select CalibrationlCal Check to edit the Calibration setting against a selected source and to conduct a calibration check Radiation Type Darf Calibration Waming Period 2 Days
506. s Secondly the instrument can be switched OFF should the operating software fail to carry out the Shut down task by holding the key clockwise for at least 10 seconds Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 7 5 Technical Description Circuitry 7 6 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 5710A Gas Flow Counter and 5704A Quad Amplifier The 5710A gas counter comprises 4 separately wired rectangular detector zones within an aluminium body and an aluminized conductive mylar window A 5704A quad amplifier is mounted on the rear of the 5710A The single input HV has filtered HV connections to each of four anode terminals within the counter Four separate amplifiers buffer and shape the alpha and beta pulses then pass these to discriminators High low beta and alpha pulses are processed via IC13 prior to X channel interfacing at network connectors PL1 and PL2 PL5 provides connections for initial IC13 and IC14 flash memory device programming Optical TX RX input and control at 5V are provided via PL3 and PLA for the user positioning sensors on the iPCM12 5709A Gas Control Board The 5709A is mounted on the gas flow chassis located above the ETX processor board The X channel processor IC13 accepts data from the adjacent inlet flow and exhaust flow sensors and controls up to 4 gas solenoids Inlet Exhaust Gas On Off System bypass Under normal usage with Argon Methane gas the inlet solenoid is activated Under gas
507. s 100 second rolling average accumulates an accurate background count It is however slow to respond to sudden background disturbance and drift making it necessary to screen each count before incorporating it into the rolling average Consequently to guard against inaccurate measurements and false alarms the iPCM12 reads and checks the counts from each detector every second A changing background condition exists if either of the following conditions are true Any one detector count shows a Mo change from the stored average for that channel Bay Ca 3 MV Bay where B is the rolling average for any one detector C is the counts registered in the last one second background update M is the Detector Changing Background variable see Monitoring page 5 14 The default value for M is 7 It is not recommended that should be set below 4 0 In addition for the gamma option all nine detector counts show an No change from their relevant stored averages in the same direction IL al gt N VBa where B is the rolling average for any one detector C is the counts registered in the last one second background update N is the Gross Changing Background variable see Monitoring page 5 14 Itis not recommended that N should be set below 3 00 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics The former expression detects gross chang
508. s ID 2 Test Date 14 12 2009 13 54 56 Lower Limit 0 67 Upper Limit 1 5 Beta Detector Pass Alarm VT Variance Of Mean cps Fail Count Counts AR A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 AR B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 AR C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 AR D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB1 A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB1 B Fail 22 2661 2235000 84 CB1 C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 a1 CB1 D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB2 A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB2 B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB2 C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions CB2 D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 51 CB3 A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642 27 5 1 CB3 B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB3 C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 51 CB3 D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB4 A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB4 B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB4 C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 CB4 D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 HB A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 HB B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 HB C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 HB D Fail 0 1 891828 9642E27 5 1 HP A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 51 HP B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 4 HP C Fail 0 1891E28 9 642 27 5 1 HP D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 LB1 A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 LB1 B Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 LB1 C Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 23 LB1 D Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642E 27 5 1 LB2 A Fail 0 1 891E 28 9 642 27 5 1 LB2 B Fail 0 1 891828 9642E27 51 LB2 C Fail 0
509. s are broken see Position Sensors page 5 28 Face In Head turned Left Insert Left Foot Insert Right Foot e Face In Head turned Left e Insert Left Foot e Insert Right Foot e Insert Right Hand Pieds e Move Right Hip Closer See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 81 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 When the user is in the correct position measurement starts Counting Once monitoring commences the iPCM12 displays the Counting message with an indication of the measurement time remaining Seconde Remaining If Complete all Steps see Operation page 5 10 is not ticked and contamination is detected the result is displayed at this stage and the measurement process is terminated see ALARM Result page 5 89 If the front measurement is satisfactory then the user is EE instructed to turn around One or Positioning a combination of the following messages are displayed depending on whether the sensors are broken see Position Sensors page 5 28 e Face In Head turned Left e Insert Right Foot e Insert Left Foot e Insert Left Hand e Move Left Hip Closer See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions 5 82 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions When the user is in the correct position measu
510. s as follows Upon power up system diagnostics are run see Start up Checks page 5 87 Upon successful system diagnostics the iPCM12 establishes a new Background see Establishing a New Background page 5 89 The system enters the Background Monitoring Mode see Normal Background Monitoring page 5 91 To commence monitoring the user enters the portal see Entering the Portal page 5 94 Monitoring starts when the user is correctly positioned in the portal see Commence Monitoring page 5 96 At the end of the first monitoring position the instrument may either 1 Indicate any contamination and halt the measurement 2 If Complete Both Steps is selected see Operation page 5 11 monitoring continues Monitoring may be interrupted due to the result of a Quick Scan assessment see Operation page 5 11 or if a significant change in background conditions is detected during the measurement see Background Change during Measurement page 5 101 At the end of the Monitoring period activity is calculated and compared against a set of alarm thresholds for any combination of alpha beta or gamma A simple GO NO GO indication is given optional display of the details of the location and level of contamination see Monitoring Result page 5 102 Upon completion of monitoring the user exits the portal see Exiting the Portal page 5 111 5 82 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor T
511. s reserved for the expert user because it gives access to specialized calibration settings that fundamentally affect the performance of the instrument these iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 9 1 Setting up Procedure 9 2 Setting the Operational Parameters Issue 2 0 should only be set at the Thermo Fisher factory or by a Service Engineer See Passwords page 5 80 for details regarding the default passwords The menu options that are available to each user levels are summarized in Menu Roles page 5 7 Passwords page 5 80 show how the user can change the password Both the Thermo Fisher and the Health Physicist passwords protect the security of the operational parameters and hence the integrity of the measurement Therefore these passwords should remain confidential their use restricted and above all should not be readily obvious to potential hackers Each user level should have a unique password and under no circumstances should all three levels be assigned the same password At this point it is strongly recommended that the following User Programmable Operational Parameters are checked and reset by the Health Physicist before allowing normal monitoring to proceed As noted below it may be helpful to consult the configuration report to view the parameter settings established during the factory test and calibration A configuration printout is also normally provided with the initial documentation and iPCM
512. s to be placed in calibration positions coinciding with the geometric centre of all detectors Typically or extended area sources are used for beta checking and Am for alpha checking An alternative is to undertake an Alarm Check where a source of activity marginally greater than alarm level setting should be Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Routine Checks held against each detector in turn Each detector should alarm within the typical monitoring time Cleaning Instructions WARNING Ensure the mains supply is isolated before cleaning The display can be wiped clean with a dry cloth Smudges may require the application of the Screen cleaner provided when the instrument was delivered The cubical should be cleaned using a mild detergent Make sure the equipment is completely dry before re connecting the supply iPCM User Manual 8 3 Issue Beta Issue 1 Chapter 9 General Initialisation Thermo Fisher Scientific Setting Up Procedure Setting Up Procedure Initial Setting Up for Use After the initial installation and before switching on the iPCM12 read Operating Instructions page 5 1 Connect the mains lead to the IPCM12 and turn the keyswitch clockwise until the unit switches on a click is heard after about 1 2 seconds and then release it see Keyswitch operation page 7 5 The iPCM12 will power up and load up the Windows XP operating
513. sage or is totally blacked out proceed as follows 1 Check the multi cable connections from the display to PL6 amp PL7on the processor board 5712A 2 If check 1 above has not revealed the problem a fault in the LCD module or Controller board 5691A is indicated 3 Temporarily connect a spare LCD module to the Controller board PL6 amp PL7 the back light is required 11 26 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Display Backlight Failure Will Not Accept Valid Passwords LCD Keypad Inoperative or Not Aligned Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting If the message becomes visible the fault is in the LCD display module This is not user serviceable and should be replaced with the back light as described in LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller amp Backlight Inverter Removal and Replacement page 11 13 If no message appears the fault is in the processor board which should be replaced as described in ETX processor Board type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 A power on self Test switches on the back light and produces a series of Self Test Messages and beeps If the back light fails to light proceed as follows 1 Check the cabling from the back light inverter enclosure to PL7 on the processor board Check that 5 volts appears across the pins of PL7 when the back light should be on If 5 volts is apparent then a fault in the LCD or back
514. select the type of Barrier that can be attached to the unit PCF Disabled Doors Barrier Un powered Doors Turnstile Normally Locked Turnstile Normally Unlocked This is the time that is allowed for the worker to pass through the barrier Values 0 to 65535 seconds This field is only enabled when Right Barrier Setting is selected The barrier will stall see Evaluate Limits below for more explanation above this High Current Limit Values 0 to 65535 milliamps This field is only enabled when Right Barrier Setting is selected The barrier will stall see Evaluate Limits below for more explanation below this Low Current Limit Values 0 to 65535 milliamps This button is grayed out unless Barrier Mode is selected Select this button to commence a test sequence for the Barrier Mode which will check the operation of the Barrier and detect the Low and High Current Limits IMPORTANT This button activates the Barrier to open and close The actual values for the Low and High Current Limits insert into these fields However it is strongly advised that the Current Limit fields are set to the following values Low Current Limit between 0 and 10 High Current Limit 1 5 x actual High Current Limit This will prevent the stall detection operating on the Barrier during normal usage Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Messages Itis possible to amend the Headline s and Instructions fo
515. ser Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Moving through the Menus Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions lt Quick Scan Enabled O y Quick Scan Enabled Quick Background Enabled O Residual Contamination Check after Alarm O RCC after Abandoned Measurement Complete Both Steps C Restart Measurement on Sensor Break User Id Required User Can Cancel Alarm Sound Failure Display Requires Supervisor Acknowledge Portal Approach Time 2 Exit Barrier Delay 2 s Background Logging Interval 2 hours Out of Service Recovery Interval 5 mins Quick Scan Period 4 Gas Argon Methane O Other Apply Cancel Settings Changes PCM 12 O Operational Options To move through the menus select the Main menu option on the top line to display the sub menus available Then select the sub option from the second line Note that a full list of menu and sub menu options is displayed in Menu Roles below iPCM User Manual 5 5 Operating Instructions 5 6 Selecting Detectors Menu Roles iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 On some screens an option is available to select Detectors To select individual Detectors press the corresponding number in the graphic TH TH LBI p CBI CB1 SH idc LB1 RB1 LB2 98 i CB2 RB2 CB2
516. setting up HV Generator values contact Thermo Fisher Scientific Radon When a contaminated result is produced from the gas flow detectors a check will be made on the alarming detectors for evidence of Radon Thoron presence If indicated then a message displays along with the alarm data indicating that Radon Thoron may be present Select Set UplRadon to set mcd Radon detection values Beta Alpha Upper 8 Beta Alpha Ratio Lower 2 5 Count Extension Time 100 Settings Changes 5 26 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Description of options Field Name Description Beta Alpha Ratio See Radon Rejection page 6 9 for more Upper information regarding the setting of these values Beta Alpha Ratio Lower Count Extension Time s Diagnostics Menu Detectors Select DiagnosticslDetectors to M7 ESSE view asec ces testo cs Secor the Detectors information Average Over samples B PanMode 08 1 1 The Detectors are updated every measurement cycle NOTE The Background Count Rate is averaged and updated over the cycle time selected in the Average Over field Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 27 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 Description of options Field Name Description Average Over samp
517. simultaneously measured for gamma contamination Electronics and control are provided by a central ETX micro PC interfacing with distributed intelligent processing at the detector nodes via an X Channel network The system is programmed to take into account the statistical variables associated with contamination monitoring and includes intelligent auto recovering self testing routines System operational parameters and options are user programmable by means of a password protected LCD touch screen Multiple level password protection prevents unauthorized access to system operational and diagnostic parameters Detectors operate on low flow rate Argon Methane or optionally Argon CO gas mixtures Setting of gas purge and operational flows is by manual valves while flow switching and flow measurement is electronic Automatic start up purging monitors detector stability and switches to normal low operational flow when all detector backgrounds are stable User programmable high and low flow rate alarms and automatic leak detection provides early puncture alerts Each detection channel has the following five count windows low energy beta high energy beta low energy alpha high energy alpha and Radon Prior to monitoring operation the background counts for each detection channel count window are accrued over a preset background monitoring time When an operator is correctly positioned in the monitor all detector channels are integrat
518. ss Operating Instructions E E E E Review Required Wl Calibrated Wi Cal Required Y Accepted X Failed Excluded a Confirm Back Abort Click on a detector to see the new calibration details n E E Review Required Bl Caltrated E 5 3 18 Cal Required Th x Failed ULL Fa B E 3 Deteeter State cana 3730 off loco Confirm Back Abort When all the detectors have been amp cesetenseuce accepted Confirm button be pressed to display the Calibration Source description page To Calibrate or Cal Check against y select a Radiation Type y and then press the Calibrate or Cal Check button The following Calibration Single Source window is displayed See Sources and Jigs page 5 48 for more information regarding the setting up of Sources and Jigs Beta plate source Optional Add a description for this calibration and Press OK a Calibration Source Nuclide standard coo 4 Decayed Activity 2826 Bq Source Description Calbrated or 11 26 2008 first time iPCM User Manual 5 97 Operating Instructions 5 38 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Use the direction arrows to select Calter Source standard caso a Calibration Source Once Beet Baca poston end Delect UN Inch selected press Next buttonto view the Select Source Posi
519. ssemblies for alpha and beta emitters published by the International Electrotechnical Committee overcome these problems by providing a standard technique for combining results from a vertical efficiency scan and horizontal efficiency scan around an elliptical phantom to provide an overall efficiency Using this technique a comparative assessment can be made 6 2 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Technical Description Physics Vertical Scans Figures 4 and 5 show the variation of response for a point Beta source placed at 5cm from the centre of the middle detector and moved in a vertical plane The figures refer to Co 60 and CI 36 respectively Figures 6 and 7 illustrate the vertical response to Co 60 and Cs 137 gamma emissions respectively iPCM12 Vertical 36 21r Efficiency 200 cm 180 om t60cm 140 om 1200m 100 cm Height 80 cm 60 cm 40 cm 20 cm 0 om Haana l 0 10 20 30 40 36 21r Efficiency Anode Double Sums Figure 4 Beta Vertical Scan Rugged Grille Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 6 3 Technical Description Physics Issue Beta Issue 1 iPCM12 Vertical Co60 2 Efficiency 200 cm i80 om 160 40cm 120 om 100 em J Hieght 80 cm 60 cm 40cm 20cm r 0 5 10 15 20 60 21r Efficiency
520. ssembly is located immediately to the right of the hinged body array frame It accommodates three large area gas flow detectors on the outer face to measure the side of the leg and the side of the foot shoe An additional detector located on the upper inner face provides coverage for the palm of the hand and the inner wrist and forearm A hinged pivoting mechanism accommodates the outer hand detector This mechanism accessible from within the side service bay ensures close contact monitoring of the back of the hand wrist and forearm A bulkhead fabrication located to the right of the body arrays above the island assembly accommodates up to three gas flow detectors and the user color LCD touch screen USB ports and optional EPD and bar code ID scanners The detectors serviced from the side Service Bay monitor the upperarm shoulder and side of head The detector serviced from behind the main body array monitors the back of the shoulder A light gauge steel roof plinth fabrication connects the body panels bulkheads and body array frame to provide structural rigidity and to accommodate a fixed geometry gas flow top of head detector Fixing facilities are also provided for a speaker two user traffic light clusters AC mains power socket Ethernet network connector and a USB camera option A narrow door on the right side of the cabinet allows access to the Service Bay which contains the main electronics gas assemblies and
521. st enter his or her ID using the barcode reader before the portal will operate The following message displays See User ID page 5 94 for information on how this is implemented in the Monitoring process Default OFF iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 9 Operating Instructions 5 10 Issue 2 0 Field Name Voice Prompts Enabled Description Tick this option to enable voice prompts to be audible For more information regarding the prompts and where they are used see Audible Indications page 3 16 Default OFF User Can Cancel Alarm Sound Failure Display Requires Supervisor Acknowledge Alarm Duration After Exit This option allows the user to press the Alarm Acknowledge button when an alarm has taken place See Cancel Alarm page 5 108 for more information on clearing the alarms Default OFF This option ensures that a supervisor has to insert a dongle and press the Alarm Acknowledge button when a failure or alarm has taken place The alarm will continue to display and sound until the supervisor acknowledges it See Cancel Alarm page 5 108 for more information on clearing the alarms Default OFF This is the length of time that the alarm displays sounds after the user has exited the portal See Cancel Alarm page 5 108 for more information on clearing the alarms Values 0 to 300 s Default 2 seconds Id Timeout Period s iPCM12 Installed P
522. stalled to take a picture of the user see Cameras page 5 50 e Complete Both Steps see Positioning page 5 81 5 78 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Userp iPCMI2 may be fitted with an external device on either or both sides of the portal to provide identification of the user This device may include but not be limited to one of the following device types e Barcode scanner e Magnetic swipe card reader e RFID reader e Electronic Dosimeter reader e Keypad Note that when a device is fitted the user must enter the portal from the same side as the reader If User ID Required is ticked see Operation page 5 10 the user is requested to enter their ID Ready before entering the portal See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions The user scans their identification at the barcode reader The measurement process will not continue until this is successful If the user enters the portal without entering their ID the No ID error message is displayed Enter Id See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal You are required to instructions enter your Id Ready Clear Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 79 Operating Instructions 5 80 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 If the User does not enter the portal within the Id Timeout Period see Operation page
523. status plus two X Channel LEDs amber and green that show network communication status Attention Indicator used during X Channel setup Firmware Good Flashing indicates software is running but configuration data is invalid Green FPGA Good X Channel Receive Data X Channel Transmit Data WARNING THE 5704A QUAD AMPLIFIER CONTAINS HIGH VOLTAGES WITHIN THE SCREENING COVER REFER TO THE WARNINGS IN MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING PAGE 11 1 DO NOT REMOVE THE METAL SCREEN IF THE HV IS ENABLED FITAN HV SHORTING LINK PROVIDED WITH THE SPARE DETECTOR TO THE HV CONNECTOR PRIOR TO HANDLING OR REPLACING THE DETECTOR OR REMOVING THE METAL SCREENING COVER BE AWARE THAT DIELECTRIC RECOVERY CAN RE GENERATE SIGNIFICANT STORED CHARGE LEAVE THE HV SHORTING LINK IN PLACE DURING SERVICING iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 13 Description Scintillation Gamma Detectors Type 5708A and 5717A Scintillation HV and Amplifier Type 42543 0223 FHT681 Issue 2 0 Scintillation Gamma Detectors Optionally all iPCM12 variants can be fitted with various Scintillation Gamma Detectors The Hand Top of Head and Side of Head Scintillation AE kits can be fitted to all variants including the A Open version The Full Body Gamma Kit AE0222A can be fitted to Closed versions PCM 12 The iPCM12 variant includes the gamma kit Scintillation Gamma Detectors Types 5708A and 5717
524. sue 2 0 Please edit options for archive file s Start Date 15 04 2009 End Date 15 04 2009 Archive Name File Location The archive files were successfully written to EX Select SystemlActions to take the 1 EZS Emm T reye Contaminated Instrument Contamination Cleared Database Backup Backup Calibration System Actions System Exit To Shutdown Administrator Login Ku Calibration and Configuration data has been backed up successfully Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions To exit the iPCM12 This action will close the application application press the Exit to Application Login button A confirmation message displays icel Select OK to close the application To shutdown the entire system press the System Shutdown button displays Select OK to shut the entire system down This action will shut the entire system down Are you sure you want to do this Setup Select SystemlSetup to set the i location volume date time and RM CERE time zone Location Not Set IP Address 10 210 107 30 Volume SS Date Time 14 12 2009 5 5l Time Zone Greemaich Mean Teme Dublin Edinburgh Listen Loagon Apply Cancel Settings Changes To change the Location enter the location using the alpha numeric field NOTE The IP address displays on the screen To adjust the volume move the orange bar to the left to de
525. sue Beta Issue 1 Operational Margin User Throughput Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics the iPCM12 will automatically recover if the background B falls to an acceptable level In Figure 13 the positive separation between the modified background and alarm counts indicate an operational margin exists for the given parameters Figure 14 shows the monitoring time T adjusted to 11 seconds just balancing the statistical equation with variables F P B and C the positive separation is approaching zero If Tmax is greater than T then an operational margin exists and allows T to increase dynamically to compensate for any variable changes usually background If however T increases to the point where it is verging on Tmax the system is at the absolute statistically allowable limit effectively balanced on a statistical knife edge and there is no Operational Margin to compensate for change in any quantity A fractional increase in the background B from any one detector will force the IPM into a High background state In practice programming Tmax to just balance the statistical parameters in the prevailing background condition leaves no operational margin and should be avoided It will cause the iPCMI2 to switch between normal operation and High Background with the slightest background drift from any detector effectively rendering it unusable Having decided on statistica
526. switched OFF should the operating software fail to carry out the Shut down task by turning and holding the key clockwise for at least ten seconds 5710A Gas Flow Counter and 5704A Quad Amplifier The 5710A gas counter comprises four separately wired rectangular detector zones within an aluminum body and an aluminized conductive mylar window A 5704A quad amplifier is mounted on the rear of the 5710A The single input HV has filtered HV connections to each of four anode terminals within the counter Four separate amplifiers buffer and shape the alpha and beta pulses then pass these to discriminators High low beta and alpha pulses are processed via IC13 prior to X channel interfacing at network connectors PL1 and PL2 PLS provides connections for initial IC13 and IC14 flash memory device programming Optical sensor input and supply at 5V are provided via PL3 and PLA for the user positioning sensors on the iPCM12 5709A Gas Control Board The 5709A is mounted on the gas flow chassis located above the ETX processor board The X channel processor 5 accepts data from the adjacent inlet flow and exhaust flow sensors and controls up to two gas solenoids Inlet and Exhaust Under normal usage with Argon Methane gas the inlet solenoid is activated Under gas purge conditions controlled via the iPCM12 menu the inlet and exhaust solenoids are activated thus bypassing the gas restrictor tubing PL7 provides connections for initial
527. t Rate cps iPCM User Manual 6 11 Technical Description Physics 6 12 Background Update iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Mac Minimum Detectable Activity variable unit is the minimum Activity the system can detect within the calculated monitoring time It is very dependent on the programmed False Alarm rate and the prevailing background conditions and thus will continuously vary The current Minimum Detectable Activity MDA may be viewed in Information page 5 26 in the units specified in UI Options page 5 8 The MDA calculation is detailed in Minimum Detectable Activity MDA and High Background Criterion page 6 15 Ract Activity of Contamination variable unit When the instrument is not monitoring a user it will be monitoring background The background is monitored over one second check periods The one second background counts are accumulated over a 10 second period and averaged to derive the Background Sample countrate b for each detector Each 10 second background sample is screened for Low beta counts high alpha counts and compared with the stored average for the user defined Changing Background Level When verified the background sample is accumulated into a Rolling Average Background B for each detector A minimum of ten valid 10 second Background Samples are accumulated for each detector before monitoring is permitted Valid 10 second Background samples subsequent to the 10th are accumulated i
528. t This is a view only field Period s This is the length of time for the sample to be calculated from the current alarm conditions and background measurement Alpha Measurement This is a view only field Period s This is the length of time for the alpha only sample to be calculated from the current alarm conditions and background measurement Background Period s This is a view only field This is the current background period The value is set at 0 if a background has not yet been acquired Detector Information This is a view only field This is the Background Rate Detection Limit and Effective Net Alarm display for each Detector For more information see Description of Parameters Used in Calculations page 6 10 This is a view only field The Minimum Detection Activity MDA and or depending on the Measurement Type selected above the Efficiency percentage are displayed 5 30 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Alarm Check Select Diagnostics Alarm Check 2330301089 to check the operation of alarms iG GaGa gt Detector System 0 Clear 088 O00 D pot DUDBWZ ggg 0200 nps aya Start Stop Continuous 2 fo Tte To test the operation of alarms select a Detector System from a or y At this point if required you can insert source in the monitor Press the Start Butt
529. t a new HV scan or 3 View the last performed scan 4 View the latest scan for all detectors New HV Last HV Scan Scan All Detectors 5 46 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions To start anew HV Scan press Please enter scan parameters the New HV Scan button to 2 Minimum Voltage 1600 display the Please enter scan Maximum Voltage 3600 M parameters window Step Duration 10 5 Start Back Press the Start button to display Redv Te Start Background Scan the Remove Source instruction Remove Source and press Start wi Ensure that there is no source near the iPCM12 and press Start Description of options Field Name Description Minimum Voltage V Enter a minimum voltage Maximum Voltage Enter a maximum voltage V This value should be at least Minimum Voltage Step Size Step Size V Enter a step size for the scan Step Duration s Enter the length in seconds for each step Once the above scan parameters have been established two scans will be made against each amplifier threshold for all amplifiers at each HV step over the specified integration period e A background HV Scan e Asource HV Scan If Detector System p 15 selected pressing the Start button will display the Select Detectors E for Scan window DUE as BEBEW 7 2500 B d Plense select alpha det
530. t flowmeter reading to appear greater than the inlet flow until the gas system has stabilised Normal mode High and Low gas flow limits plus purge limits and fault ratios are established by referring to the Setup menu and the Gas Flow sub menu Typical parameter settings are Normal Mode low limit Occ min Normal Mode high limit 75cc min Purge Mode low limit 50cc min Leak ratio 50 Average period 5 secs Maximum stabilization 60mins period The real time operational gas status may be observed by referring to the Diagnostic menu and the Gas Flow sub menu The flow rates are shown as a simplified bargraph which is updated in accordance with the average period set Before the iPCM12 will function reliably all of the air must be purged from the gas flow detectors A rapid purge of between 200 and 300 cc min for at least 4 hrs is preferable or alternatively a minimum purge of 12 hours overnight at 50 cc min may be used Proceed as follows e Via the HP menu access select the Diagnosis menu and Gas Flow submenu Observe that the INLET PURGE flow is now set at about 200cc min and although the restrictor is bypassed it will take about 10 minutes before the EXHAUST flow reaches this level Note that temporarily a gas leak fault will be indicated e Wait 10 minutes and check the outlet flow is gt 50 cc min iPCM User Manual 9 11 Setting Up Procedure 9 12 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 If this is not the case
531. tart NextDetectorto Calibrate Press the Start button to continue Ready To Start Remove all items from the Portal and Press Start Press the Start button to Measuring Background commence the background Sa EON measurement Tee Once the Backgr ound Measuring Source Extending Time Measurement has been 0243 58 completed place the Source as instructed and press Start Once the Source Measurement Measuring Background has been completed remove the 00 00 03 Source as instructed and press i Start Once the second Background roars Merge Measurement has been completed the Results display pewe eseemymese During a Cal Check only an OK button displays which returns to the Calibration Cal Check screen Overall Centroid Efficiency 22 2256 Details Fail Confirm Cancel If the calculated efficiency has an illegal value i e no net counts the efficiency will be set to zero 5 44 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions Select Details button to view nA aro details results Ee a Uus UE 8 T 45 4 4 473 4 a a ans If you are satisfied with the Calbeton Source Standerd cox result press the Confirm button to display the Add Description mionat rddadescrpton toris canon and Press ox for the Calibration page Select OK to comple
532. te Once the parameters have been set and the Start button has been pressed a series of onscreen instructions displays to step the user through the scan process NOTE The scan can be aborted at any time by pressing the Abort button The background scan is performed on all detectors simultaneously For the gas flow detectors it is not obligatory to carry out HV scans unless the gas medium has been changed This is because the characteristics of gas flow detectors have the same optimum working point which is typical of type An HV scan for one gas flow detector is included in the factory testing to ensure the correct operation of the detectors One HV scan for a beta source in contact with the detector grille plus one HV scan for an alpha source in contact with the detector grille is normally sufficient to establish the correct gas flow working voltage for the whole instrument This can be repeated for other detectors if deemed necessary Typically for the recommended P7 5 gas 7 5 Methane 92 5 Argon the optimum EHT working point for 5710A gas flow detectors is 1775V For the gamma detectors the first step is to perform a background scan This is followed by a scan with a Cs source The user has the option of selecting which detectors to scan The quickest method is to place the source in the center of the portal at a location nominally 100 cm above the treadplate and iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamina
533. te the process The results are stored in the database and marked as PASS Sar OK Cancel If you are NOT satisfied with the result press the Fail button The Calibration Source page is re displayed NOTE The results are stored in the database and marked as FAIL Description of Error messages Error Message Resolution Unable to calculate a 1 There is no source available valid monitoring time 5 The source does not have enough activity 3 If a cobalt calibration has been activated and the source is not Co60 This is not the default This is a warning message only Calibration Source Cal Streams Select CalibrationlCal Streams to IG Gi view current Calibration and GES E 77 E31 create new customized Active Calibration Anv241 Calibration Stream x Active Calibration 1 36 Calibration Stream alibrations j Active Calibration y Co 60 Calibration acd Nuclide Am 241 Calibration Stri Am 241 A Cakbrated For a Make Active Calibration Nuclide Percentage Calibrated Creste New Mix Delete Mix Apply Settings Ed NOTE The Active Calibration displays in the top box Cance Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 5 45 Operating Instructions Issue 2 0 To change the Active Calibration use the direction arrows to select a Calibration Once selected press the Make Active b
534. tector MHV connection from the relevant HV Amplifier to that of a working channel Perform a further 10 second count and note the counts in each channel Keep the different operating voltages in mind e If the scintillator fault moves with the detector into a previously working channel the fault is in the detector assembly and should be replaced as defined in Scintillation Detector Removal and Replacement page 11 21 9 If the scintillator fault remains with the original HV Amplifier channel the fault is in the HV and Amplifier PCB and this should be replaced as defined in FHT681 Removal and Replacement page 11 13 10 If all channels show a background count significantly greater than expected the iPCM12 is experiencing an elevated background Proceed as follows e Check the area immediately around the iPCM12 for sources of any possible contamination e Measure the ambient background level with a suitable survey monitor If the background is high it must be reduced or the iPCM12 moved for normal monitoring operation to resume IF THIS CONDITION PERSISTS and the background and measurement limits seem to be reasonable frisk inside the monitor cubicle for a possible build up of contamination Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 31 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Issue 2 0 Fails Lamp or LED Tests A power on Self Test lights each lamp and LED in turn If any lamp or LED fai
535. tectors have a high gamma rejection the operational background limit will be dictated by the scintillation detector count rates and proportional to the amount of shielding employed where the gamma monitoring option is fitted An Out of Service High Background indication is given if backgrounds exceed levels required for correct operation Under these conditions the background must either be reduced to an acceptable level or the alarm levels and or measurement certainties required must be relaxed and or the maximum monitoring time must be increased A Background Attenuation Compensation Factor facility is provided This factor compensates for the attenuation and or scattering of background radiation caused by a user when in the monitoring position For Alpha and Beta Backgrounds monitoring will be based over a 100 to 300 second count in 10 second segments which is maintained on a rolling average basis For Gamma iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 3 Specification Issue 2 0 Backgrounds monitoring will be based over one second check periods each one second period will contribute to a rolling average of up to 300 periods An optional Quick Start software function allows monitoring to commence more quickly after a minimum of 20 seconds provided background stability criteria are met by using an increased monitoring time to meet the statistical and alarm level requirements A significant change
536. tectors with optional 3 further detectors There are 12 detectors in a body array which has a sculpted design for best fit around the body In addition there are a side of head shoulder two hand and two foot detectors An optional side of foot top of head and spare purged detector are also available The instrument is designed to measure alpha beta and gamma contamination on the body hands and feet of an operator Since an operator s hands and feet are in direct contact with the respective hand and foot detectors performance characteristics for the monitoring contamination on the extremities is directly related to the efficiency figures given in Specification page 3 1 for hands and feet for the alpha beta detectors This Section is then primarily concerned with the performance characteristics of detecting contamination on the body legs torso and head In order to obtain high efficiency from low energy betas and to obtain a good all round spatial response the operator must be close to the detectors The body Sensor ensures this by forcing the operator to interrupt a photo beam with his torso to initiate monitoring To obtain good spatial response the detectors must fit the operator The general shape of the body is 2 This requires detection layout of six vertical arrays D N N f By having three pseudo vertical arrays and a half full height leg array and instructing the operator to turn round the six vertical
537. the Electronics Chassis immediately below the 5712A Processor board It is retained by four hex pillars facilitating easy removal and replacement The 5714C board produces stabilized low voltage output supplies from the primary system DC supply It has a wide primary input range of 9 V to 18 V DC allowing the iPCM system to run from either the normal AC mains PSU 18 Volt DC output or otherwise from the discharging 12 Volt battery output in the event of AC mains power failure Three proprietary DC DC converter modules produce stabilized 5 Volt 12 Volt and 12 Volt outputs Low voltage power is supplied to the 5712A Processor board iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 5 Description User Accessories Panel Universal USB Hub X Channel HV Generator PCB Type 5713A Issue 2 0 and the USB hub Power is also available at auxiliary sockets to supply additional options for example EPD and Bar Code readers The User Accessories Panel is mounted on the Electronics Chassis located immediately below the 5714C DC DC Converter board It is supplied as a standard blank plate with a Thermo label on the front It is intended to accommodate user defined options including Electronic Dosimeter EPD readers and Bar code ID badge scanners The standard blanking panel is replaced by a suitably customized and labelled panel that physically accommodates the mechanical and electronic hardware of the required option Power is a
538. the Residual Contamination Count is performed see Residual Contamination Check page 5 SECONDS REMAINING 93 If the user does not fully exit the portal on completion of measurement the Exit message Exit is displayed See Voice Prompts page 5 69 Please Leave the Portal for information regarding verbal instructions Ready Clear Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 85 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Background Change during Ifa change in background is Measurement detected during a measurement the user is instructed to exit the portal A new background check is 20 required before monitoring can B 11 VJ a Result resume See Changes to the saul Normal Background Monitoring LI page 5 76 Aa Facing In 5 86 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Monitoring Result An example of the result screen is displayed below Headline 1 Cancel Alarm Result Type a B or y Result Alarm irm EHE Detector Alarm Baa E TE E Indicator s 3 t E 8 A g E E X i LLL pani Facing In Facing Out User Instructions Figure 3 Example of Result display on the iPCM User Screen The iPCM12 result screen displays the following e Headline 1 displaying the type of Alarm Note that some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 24 e Cancel Alarm for more informatio
539. the associated probability is shown alongside in parenthesis The value is usually set as high as possible so that false alarms do not occur e g one false alarm in a hundred measurements is a probability of 99 2 40 see Table Probability Sigma and page 6 21 Probability of Detection is the probability that exactly one Alarm Level of contamination will cause an alarm The value of P in terms of sigma is set in Detection Options page 5 16 where the associated probability is shown alongside in parenthesis The minimum allowable probability is 50 zero sigma Increasingly higher probabilities become increasingly subject to other parameters particularly background level The interrelationship will be discussed in the Calculation stages Efficiency Correction Factor is the system efficiency either sum zone efficiency for multiple detectors or individual detector contact efficiency to the nuclide Enuc or mixture of nuclides being monitored E is given by the contamination count rate in a given time and divided by the activity E is determined by calibrating with a known radionuclide source as detailed in Calibration for Other Nuclides page 10 3 Attenuation Factor is an allowance for attenuation of a background field by users being monitored Values of A can be determined for each detector and body position by following the test procedure in Detectors page 3 4 Detection limit or Minimum Detectable Coun
540. the MHV coaxial cable Remove the detector support housing six M4 nuts 4 Carefully lift out the 5708A detector TAKE CARE THAT THE DETECTOR DOES NOT FALL Replacement of the Detectors follows the removal procedure in reverse Again care must be exercised not to break the light tight seals Once the detectors are in place refit all spacers straps and panels Replacement detectors or detectors with replacement PMT s will need to be set for optimum performance with the Isotopes of interest Before determining HV s the Single Channel Analyser Thresholds must be reset to their default settings or erroneous results will be obtained see Thresholds page 5 47 Once this is done select the detector operating point using the HV scan procedure detailed in Selection of Detector Operating Parameters page 9 4 iPCM User Manual 11 19 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting GPIO Replacement Barrier Replacement 11 20 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 iPCM12C GPIO 5707A This section only applies for iPCM12B and iPCM12C when fitted with doors inlet barrier or turnstile controls Disconnect the mains supply and switch the iPCM12 OFF This interface unit is housed on the left side next to the HV generator module The board can be removed from the chassis by unscrewing the M3 hex studs and disconnecting all the control cables and the Xchannel network cable yellow The replacement follows the removal in reverse Ensur
541. the operating units all values may be entered in these units Of course the equations remain unchanged though care must be taken to ensure that the units are consistent Calibration Validity The iPCM12 is capable of undertaking a calibration validity check This check will evaluate the number of days between the last valid PASS calibration check If this number of days exceeds the maximum acceptable recalibration interval then the iPCM12 will put itself Out of Service see Out of Service page 5 97 To define the period between calibrations checks set the Calibration Required Interval parameter in Calibration page 5 15 If the user Fails the calibration check then this is not treated as a calibration and is disregarded when assessing whether the iPCM12 is within its recalibration interval iPCM User Manual 10 1 Calibration Procedure 10 2 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Equipment Required 1 A radioactive source of known nuclide and activity which is found within typical contamination to be monitored The iPCM12 is designed to monitor radioactivity on the surface of the body to levels less than 83 5000 dpm for beta and 17 Bq 1000 dpm for alpha Planar sources or surface area less than or equal to 100 cm and activities between 400 and 6 kBq are used to calibrate detectors 2 In order to speed up the calibration process a 2 source jig to allow calibration of two detection zones on a
542. the value Press Apply Settings button to save or Cancel Changes button to quit without saving To copy from a selected Detector highlight the detector to copy from Then press the Copy From Selected button Select the detector s to paste to and press the Paste to All Selected button Note that no threshold value should be set to a voltage that is less than that of the preceding threshold For example Threshold 5 must be set greater than or equal to Threshold 4 Failure to follow this advice may invalidate measurements Please contact Thermo Fisher Scientific before changing threshold values Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 47 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Sources and Jigs Select Calibration Sources and HG ESSE Jigs to create the calibration roa Naa sources and jigs pap Source Nuclide 139 Am241 4 gt Edit Decayed Activity 600 Bq Zu uw Emission Type Alpha 1 Source Description Dente Celibrated 31 03 2009 Jigs Name alpha stick jig 4 gt Edit New Delete Source 1 EY139 Nuclide Am 241 Source2 EY140 Nuclide Am 241 Emission Type Alpha Jig Description two sources on a stick Interfaces Plug ins Select Interfaces Plug ins to adna configure an interface to another ffl system Please Select an Interface Configure Interface o Thermo Note that interfaces are not limited to the examples given below Other interf
543. tical certainty in the minimum monitoring time to maximize throughput and minimizes HP guardian intervention With fairly short monitoring times such as 3 to 5 seconds each way user throughput largely depends upon ease of entry and exit familiarity and ease of use of the monitor A five second each way monitoring time will allow familiar users to pass through the iPCM12 within 20 seconds i e three or more personnel per minute iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Technical Description Physics Detector Naming Gas Flow Detector Naming The EE flow detector map is shown below LB1 2 LB2 LB3 LB4 Hi JE JE k AE RB1 SH RB4 512 Top of Head Left Body Array Level 1 Top Center Body Array Level 1 Top Right Body Array Level 1 Top Side of Head Shoulder Left Body Array Level 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Center Body Array Level 2 Right Body Array Level 2 Upper Arm Left Body Array Level 3 Center Body Array Level 3 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 6 29 Technical Description Physics Mnemonic Right Body Array Level 3 Side of Leg Upper Left Body Array Level 4 Bottom Center Body Array Level 4 Bottom 511 RB4 Right Body Array Level 4 Bottom TF Top of Foot 6 30 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination
544. tion Centroid and Detectors window Seleci to include by pressing on All mimic Select Contact or Centroid Sources as Source Position and then select Detectors to Include All or None detectors to be Mem gt included Centroid Bill If All has been selected the __ Detectors are highlighted in seii Mns E green Lj If None has been selected the Detector Measurement iPCM will instruct where the compete source is to be placed as follows Place Source next to Detector SCHA and Press Start Lj Next Detector to Calibrate Pammi Press the Start button to continue Ready To Start Remove all items from the Portal and Press Start Press the Start button to Measuring Background commence the background PES measurement C Once the Background Measuring Source Measurement has been MOTOR completed place the Source as LE instructed and press Start Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Once the Source Measurement has been completed remove the Source as instructed and press Start Once the second Background Measurement has been completed the Results are displayed Note that during a Cal Check only an OK button is displayed which returns to the Calibration Cal Check screen Operating Instructions Measuring Background 00 00 03 LL Calibration Source Source Name Centro
545. tion Monitor 9 5 Setting up Procedure Determining Gamma Detectors Operating Voltage for Mid high Energy Nuclides NBR Method Issue 2 0 spaced 5 cm from the face of the central detector and scan all the detectors simultaneously An alternative method is to scan the detectors in three phases Phase 1 Place the source at a height of 50 cm above the treadplate and select the lower two gamma body detectors plus the foot detector for scanning Phase 2 Place the source at a height of 100 cm above the treadplate and select the central two gamma detectors plus the hand detector for scanning Phase 3 Place the source at a height of 150 cm above the treadplate and select the upper two gamma body detectors plus the overhead detector and side of head detector if fitted for scanning Another alternative method is to scan each detector individually with the source in close proximity to the center of each detector i e nominally three inches 7 5 cm Thermo Fisher believes the optimum method is the three phase method because this process ensures the source is in close proximity to the detectors being scanned while minimizing overall test time On completion of the scan the user is given the option of saving the data by pressing the Save Scan button This data along with its description can be retrieved via the Data tab see HV Scan page 5 46 Once the Save button has been pressed the display changes to show
546. tion program Periodically and after Servicing check all Earth connections are fitted and tight to ensure continued EMC performance and User Safety These checks should include the screws and washers securing the mains inlet filter assembly in the top chassis all connections to the central earth point CEP and the connection to the main and side frames Also check that all screening covers are fitted and all fixings tightly secured Periodic Source Checks During calibration after repairs or once a year the detection efficiency of the iPCM12 should be checked using a Calibration check as described in Cal Check To perform these checks small area sources of the nuclides that the 1PCM12 is required to detect should be used A stable background is essential for an accurate result The calibration check will be performed to an accuracy defined by Default Calibration Accuracy The overall Efficiency calibration factor should be within 10 of the existing programmed value Should the results be outside these limits the iPCM12 operational parameters require revision see Setting Up Procedure page 9 1 Calibration procedures are described in Calibration Procedure page 10 1 Carry out a regular source check after a 100 sec background update Regular Source checks Daily or weekly source checks are advisable using a Calibration check as described in Cal Check page 5 34 For detector calibration the check source need
547. tioning page 5 81 for further information Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Lamps Select Diagnostics Lamps to check the visual elements Select the Sequence tickbox to test the Detector LED and Lamps display To test User ID select the User ID input box and enter an ID as follows To test the Guidance and LED tick the Sequence tickbox Each segment of the LED will turn red sequentially Note that the Detectors and Lamps will also light up sequentially Operating Instructions Lamps Guidance O Sequence Q Sequence User ID 1234 Guidance e e iPCM User Manual 5 29 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 To test the Lamps press the Lamps lamp icon which will light up HVGen SelectDiagnostic HV Gento 00002 check the current state of the HV EE RT Generator Measured Values Status O Current Overload O Attention LED Active O HV Shutdown l HV On HV Off Configuration Error O Alen O HV Seting O G The Status options give an indication if there is an error with the HV Generator 5 30 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Battery Charger Select Diagnostics Battery ge ed 01 Charger to view the current status eee a
548. tions page 5 16 Select a Radiation Type in order to activate a Calibration Calibration Nuclide a Alarm for Body Hands Feet P Alarm for Body Hands Feet y Alarm for Body Hands Feet Centroid Co60 Alarm for Body Hands Feet Centroid Use the direction arrows to change the Calibration type When the type is correct select the Activate button Note that a description of the Calibration Type is displayed in the field below This is the detected activity at which iPCM12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit This is the detected activity at which iPCM12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit This is the detected activity at which iPCM12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit This is the detected activity at which iPCM12 will indicate an Alarm Tick the Enable box to enable the alarm Values 0 to 10 000 000 Any unit Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions To create a new Alarm 1 Select a B y or Co60 2 Select a Calibration type using the Left and Right Arrows 3 Select an Alarm rate from the drop down box e g Activity Units or cps 4 Enter the Alarm levels for Body Hands Feet and Centroid if displayed 5 use this alarm for Calibration sele
549. tor 126 1 2 3 4 5 1 OF U N gt A AU CH be ONY n C 4 C N CO nan BC N Count Rate cps 727 176 168 74 37 812 147 138 62 24 859 169 155 64 23 738 127 121 44 18 909 164 151 68 25 699 117 110 38 858 141 133 53 20 953 170 160 72 35 Date Time Integration Period 20 08 2008 10 28 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions This report lists Calibration History for the iPCM12 It is Calibration Report d possible to limit the report by Start and End Date and Full Cal Calibration History ID Calibration Source Types Comments Date Fail 10 14 12 2009 Beta Pass 15 12 55 9 14 12 2009 Beta Pass 15 09 43 8 14 12 2009 Beta Pass 15 07 48 7 14 12 2000 Gamma Pass 14 56 37 amp 14 12 2000 Gamma Pass 13 34 22 5 14 12 2009 Alpha Pass 11 49 47 4 1412 2009 Alpha Pass 11 49 20 3 14 12 2009 Alpha Pass 11 48 49 14 12 2009 Alpha Pass Calib_1 11 48 00 1 14 12 2009 Gamma Pass 11 39 22 Press on one of the ID records to display the Calibration Efficiencies for the selected Calibration ID Calibration Efficiencies Instrument UKFER 2L3MN3J Location Not Set Calibration ID 7 Calibration Date 14 12 2009 14 56 37 Confidence 2 00 Accuracy 1 00 Source Name Nuclide Emission Decayed Type Activity Bq Co 60 Co 60 Gamma 2996 Detector Threshold Activity Efficiency SCL1 Contact 1 15
550. tors Gas Flow Proportional Counters eese nete entente eene nre nenne Gas Flow Counter 5710A 21 per 12 Gas Flow Foot Counter type 5710A 2 per iPCM12 Optional Plastic Scintillation Counters sese Overall Body Average Response ssseeeeeeeeeneenne ener eene nennen entren Scintillation Detectors m HV Setting Siamo a rm REGE OE EG ROTG I Enctgy cocotte deett ambit ares ten E NL c cer cries Control Displays LCD Lamps oo oe OREGON im re o ee daa dd ERO ddr aes BUD Ne RS Audible Indications Network Communications D DIE i I snsaces Services Required Power Requirements sere Battery Backup Gas Servicing P Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual vii Contents Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Issue Beta Issue 1 Dimensions approximate scccsccsssesscsscsssscsecssscsesssscessessscessesssssssesssssssssssssssssnsssesessessesees Overall Dimensions excluding LCD but including foot plate Environmental isanne naiean noesa eonia aa Eea aseo ee oeno aaa TESES Temperature and Humidity Magnetic Shielding
551. touch screen is not fixed to the bezel Another four screws hold the aluminium shield to the LCD via spacers iPCM User Manual 11 13 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Replacement of the LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Backlight Inverter Display guidance 5711A and LED cluster board 5672A Removal amp Replacement Sensor Assemblies Removal amp Replacement 11 14 iPCM User Manual Issue Beta Issue 1 Replacement of the LCD Display Touch Screen Touch Controller and Back light Inverter is the reverse of the removal procedure Should any item be thought faulty they should be replaced with an identical unit See Recommended Spares List page 12 1 It is necessary to take special care in handling the Touch Screen and LCD to keep all faces free of dirt and finger marks The 5711A is located at the left inner side of the iPCM12 at user chest head height The outer label must initially be prised off the face of the display to gain access to the 6 countersunk fixing screws After removal the display may be eased forward and the 6 way coloured ribbon cable B92596 A disconnected DO NOT allow the cable to fall back inside the housing firmly tape the cable for future reconnection The 5672A LED cluster is located on the top plinth front face of the iPCM12 or optionally on the right hand face depending on the site configuration requirement The board may be removed by unscrewing 6 M3 hex pillars
552. troller to re calibrate the touch screen This is an Administration function and the facility would be accessed outside of the application program Periodically and after Servicing ensure that all Earth connections are fitted and tight to ensure continued EMC performance and User Safety These checks should include the screws and washers securing the mains inlet filter assembly in the top chassis all connections to the central earth point CEP and the connection to the main and side frames Also check that all screening covers are fitted and all fixings tightly secured Periodic Source Checks During calibration after repairs or once a year the detection efficiency of the iPCM12 should be checked using a Calibration check as described in Cal Check page 5 39 To perform these checks small area sources of the nuclides that the iPCM12 is required to detect should be used A stable background is essential for an accurate result The calibration check will be performed to an accuracy defined by Default Calibration Accuracy The overall Efficiency calibration factor should be within 10 of the existing programmed value Should the results be outside these limits the iPCM12 operational parameters require revision see Setting Up Procedure page 9 1 Calibration procedures are described in Calibration Procedure page 10 1 Carry out a regular source check after a 100 sec background update Regular Source Checks Daily
553. ture motor Wait until motor has control cooled 39 take Overload on 24 V supply Reset by service fitter 41 Door stops Motor 1 thermal sensor defective Reset by service fitter 43 Door stops Incremental transmitter defective Reset by service fitter 45 Minimum hold open time Motor current tine preduetiee Wait until motor has increased to 20 secs p 9 cooled 46 Door stops Control unit defective Reset by service fitter 47 Remove obstacle from Door remains closed SIO sensor longer activ than 60 sec surveillance range of sensor 50 Door stops Control unit defective Reset by service fitter 52 No valid drive parameter Initiate calibration run 53 Door stops Interruption motor Reset by service fitter 54 W possibly while Calibration run Initiate 1 opening cycle 59 Remove obstacle from Door stops SIS sensor longer activ than 60 sec surveillance range of sensor 60 Door stops Parameter memory defective Reset by service fitter 61 Door remains open ia operated contact active longer than 60 Release key contact Higher order mode of ee Cancel higher order 62 W Spetation presen Control unit BDE has no priority modeofoperation Page 16 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Status and fault signals 8 3 Detail description of status indications General A status can usually be deleted by pressing the key for 5 s Reset This produces a new start in the control unit If however the cause of th
554. uctions IPCM ___ Five light system Ready Clear thermo Fisher Ed Branding Gas Flow Error Battery Mains Indicator Operational Mode Supply Indicator display bar Figure 2 Example of iPCM12 User Screen The iPCM12 User Screen displays the following e Headline 1 and 2 note that some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 24 e Detector Indicator displays where contamination occurs if present see Detector Indicator page 5 68 e User Instructions note that some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 24 e Five light system which mimics the Annunciator Overlay display see Five Light System page 5 68 e Thermo Fisher Scientific branding e Operational Mode display bar this also gives description of the selected menu in Administration Mode e Battery Mains Supply Indicator page 5 101 e Gas Flow Error Indicator page 5 21 e iPCM12 press here to enter Administrator Mode page 5 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 67 Operating Instructions Detector Indicator Issue Beta Issue 1 Following a measurement if a contamination is present the lit detectors will identify where the contamination has occurred see Selecting Detectors page 5 6 for more information regarding detectors Five Light System Five Light system gives a visual indication of the current operation of the iPCM12 Sol
555. uctions _ Figure 3 Example of Result display on the iPCM12 User Screen The iPCM12 result screen displays the following e Headline 1 displays the type of Alarm Some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 25 e Cancel Alarm For more information regarding user acknowledgement of alarm see Cancel Alarm page 5 108 e Result Type e Detector Alarm Indicator see Detector Indicator page 5 84 e User Instructions Some of these messages are user definable see Messages page 5 25 For more information regarding the options available to display results see UI Options page 5 9 and Operation page 5 11 5 102 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions CLEAR Result If the measured contamination is below the alarm level or when Quick Scan indicates real clean the user is informed audibly and visually of the result with instructions to exit the portal The Clear message displays See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions This message is user definable See Messages page 5 25 for e more information Ready Clear Count At the end of the measurement sequence the stored total background count is subtracted from the total measured count to give the net count which is compared with the effective alarm level CAUTION THE iPCM12 CANNOT DISTINGUISH BETWEEN A GRADUAL BUILD
556. uctions Issue Beta Issue 1 Exiting the Administration To exit Administration mode press on PCM 12 in the Mode bottom left hand corner of the touchscreen Login to the Administration mode see Gaining Access to the Administration Mode page 5 4 Select the System main menu option and then the Actions sub menu option Select the Exit Application button A warning message is displayed asking for confirmation This action will close the application Are you sure you want to do this EX Select OK to exit and Cancel to abandon the exit process For further information see Actions page 5 62 Upon exiting from the Keypad Parameter Mode a Cold Start mode will be run if a change to the configuration has been made see Cold Start State page 5 69 Setup Menu Ul Options Select Set Up UI Options to em customise the iPCM12 s m EE CE 6 operation Mere m Language English United Kingdom F User ld Required F Voice Prompts Enabled F User Can Cancel Alarm Sound F Failure Display Requires Supervisor Acknowledge Alarm Duration After Exit s 19 Timeout Period 10 s Apply Cancel Settings Changes 5 8 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Description of options Field Name Activity Units Language User Id Required Voice Prompts Enabled User Can Cancel Alarm Sound Thermo Fisher Scientific Description Use the pre defined window
557. ue Converter on the main PCB The HV generator has a range of between 0 and 1400 Volts with a resolution of approximately 1 Volt The charge pulses arriving along the high voltage cable from the scintillation detectors are amplified each is fed to five 2 14 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Description discriminators and five associated counters all controlled by the microprocessor on the main board The cards are interrogated via the X Channel bus to retrieve counter values generated every 100 ms from a five second buffer iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 2 15 Description Issue 2 0 2 16 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Specification Chapter3 Specification Cabinet Styles Detector Types Language Options Thermo Fisher Scientific The Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor type iPCM12 is available in two basic mechanical cabinet styles Open and Closed e Unit Type Style o iPCMI24A Open Cabinet Style Basic Instrument o IPCMI2B Closed Cabinet Style PFC options o iPCM12C Closed Cabinet Style Gamma options Three types of detector technologies are also available e Detector Types o Gas Flow All Variants Ar CH4 and Ar CO Gas Mixtures o Gas Sealed Variants Future Option o Scintillation Gamma Options Variant Restrictions An
558. uire a new background will be much shorter see Operation page 5 11 Personnel Monitoring The iPCM12 can be configured with the following options to control how personnel use the portal see Operation page 5 11 for further information e Isa User ID Required see User ID page 5 94 e 5 a camera installed to take a picture of the user see Camera page 5 62 The iPCM12 may be fitted with an external device on either or both sides of the portal to provide identification of the user This device may include but is not limited to one of the following device types e Barcode scanner e Magnetic swipe card reader e RFID reader e Electronic Dosimeter reader e Keypad NOTE When a device is fitted the user must enter the portal from the same side as the reader 5 94 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Operating Instructions If User ID Required is ticked see Operation page 5 11 the user is requested to enter their ID Ready before entering the portal See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal instructions The user scans their identification at the barcode reader The measurement process will not continue until this is successful Ready Clear If the user enters the portal without entering their ID the No ID error message displays Enter Id See Voice Prompts page 5 85 for information regarding verbal You are
559. uminized both sides 6 microns 0 006 mm 1 mm thick 50 Transmission Standard Hex Foot Tread 3 mm thick 70 Transmission Plate Optional High Eff Hex 1 mm thick 70 Transmission Grille Gamma Response Per Detection Quadrant Active approx 55 cps in a uniform field of luSv h due to 662 keV photons Area Operating 1 650 V for 5 Methane in Argon P5 Voltage 1 700 V for 7 5 Methane in Argon P72 at Sea recommended Level 1 750 V for 10 Methane in Argon P10 1800 V for 10 in Argon 1850 V for 20 CO in Argon Window Single Mylar sheet aluminized both sides Material Standard weight is 0 9 mg cm Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 3 5 Specification Body Hand Head Detector 5710A 19 22 per iPCM12 Foot Detector Type 5710A 2 per iPCM12 Issue 2 0 Typical performance to sources with 100 cm of traceable Surface Emission Rate SER placed in contact with the protective Grille Smaller sources will yield higher efficiencies Standard Rugged Grille 50 Transmission Alpha Efficiency Americium 241 28 of SER Beta Efficiency Carbon 14 22 of SER Cobalt 60 31 Chlorine 36 37 Strontium Yttrium 90 39 High Efficiency Grille 70 Transmission Alpha Efficiency Americium 241 4096 of SER Beta Efficiency Carbon 14 3096 96 of SER Chlorine 36 50 Typical performance to sources with 100 cm of traceable surface
560. und monitoring will continue If the fault clears without intervention the instrument will resume normal operation Out Of Service See Voice Prompts page 5 69 bl for information regarding verbal instructions Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM User Manual 5 97 Operating Instructions 5 98 Gas Flow Barrier Error iPCM User Manual If a Low or High Gas Flow is detected see Gas Flow page 5 21 the Out of Service Gas flow is too low high If the fault clears without intervention the instrument will resume normal operation See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions If a the iPCM detects an error with the Door Barrier the Out of Service Door Barrier Failure error message 15 displayed During this state normal background monitoring will continue If the fault clears without intervention the instrument will resume normal operation See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information regarding verbal instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Out Of Service Gas flow is too low Out Of Service fA Out Of Service Door Barrier Failure Out Of Service Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Notes regarding High The Out Of Service High Background Background message is displayed if High Background Out Of Service conditions exist See Voice Prompts page 5 69 for information r
561. units possibly connected Reset by service fitter Status 41 Motor temperature sensor defective Motor possibly not connected Sensor in motor possibly defective or cable break in sensor lead Reset by service fitter Status 43 Incremental encoder fault Input cable possibly not connected or cable break in the lead Motor possibly blocked Reset by service fitter Status 45 Motor current time product to high Motor relay de energises Manual control effective Automatic reset by motor cooling or by service fitter Status 46 Control unit STG defective Includes the following individual faults EPROM RAM Watchdog Imax ImaxT difference on SHE EXT Reset by service fitter Status 47 SIO sensor active longer than 60 s Automatically reset if in order or by service fitter Status 50 CPU2 is defective Reset by service fitter Status 51 Software version Software version of Master and Slave do not correspond to each other Software update by service fitter Status 52 No running parameter Start calibration run Status 53 Interruption motor Possibly no connection to motor Reset by service fitter Status 54 Calibration run Reset automatically Status 59 SIS sensor active longer than 60 s Automatically reset if in order or by service fitter Page 18 of 20 Rev B 11 2006 Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power MM Status and fault signals Status 60 Parameter memory EEPROM defective Change control unit Reset by service f
562. upted Issue 2 0 4 If the problem still persists the fault is likely to be in the 5712A board which should be replaced as described in Replacement of the ETX page 11 10 If after power up or after exiting from the main menu the iPCM12 displays Cannot Measure Background Please Exit the Portal a fault with the Infra Red links is likely Proceed as follows 1 Ensure that the Links are working correctly by selecting Diagnostics Sensor The switch and links can be tested for correct operation 2 Check the continuity of the cable connecting the Sensor s to the adjacent 5710A detector boards 3 Replace the processor board as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 if the switches are working correctly If the iPCM12 becomes stuck in a monitoring cycle with the display showing Count Time Remaining xx seconds it is likely that microprocessor has crashed Power down and check again Continual crashing may indicate that the processor board needs to be replaced as described in ETX Processor Motherboard Type 5712A Removal and Replacement page 11 10 Itis possible that the hard disk may have suffered some damage in this area of the program If the problem persists even after changing the processor board a new disk should be considered If USB data output from the iPCM12 to a serial printer or external computer contains spurious characters or is corrupted in any way check t
563. ured Uncertainty Detectio Units Stream Name Type Value Li 11 Bq Alpha 0 751 2 67 Co 60 Calibration Beta 3 53 2 16 5 92 By Co 60 Calibration iPCM User Manual 5 59 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Alarms Detector Position Background Net Count Effective Alarm Alpha Zone Rate cps Alarm Multiple RB3 A Facing Alpha 0 1 1 1 1 Front Raw Counts Detector Threshold Gross Count Rate Background Net Count Rate cps Count Rate cps eps AR A 1 5 9 5 5 03 AR A 2 21 1 6 0 5 AR A 3 0 0 0 AR A 4 0 0 0 AR A 5 0 0 0 AR A 2 1 6 9 5 5 1 3 AR A 2 2 1 8 1 6 0 2 AR A 2 3 0 3 0 0 2 AR A 2 4 0 3 0 0 2 AR A 2 5 0 0 0 AR B 1 7 5 6 1 4 AR B 2 2 6 1 6 1 AR B 3 0 1 0 0 1 AR B 4 0 1 0 0 1 AR B 5 0 0 0 AR B 2 1 5 5 5 6 0 9 AR B 2 2 2 4 1 6 0 8 AR B 2 3 0 4 0 0 4 AR B 2 4 0 4 0 0 4 AR B 2 5 0 0 0 AR C 1 7 6 5 7 1 9 AR C 2 1 8 1 5 0 2 AR C 3 0 1 0 0 1 AR C 4 0 1 0 0 1 AR C 5 AR C 2 1 48 5 7 0 8 AR C 2 2 11 1 5 0 4 AR C 2 3 0 0 0 AR C 2 4 0 0 0 AR C 2 5 0 0 0 AR D 1 6 5 5 9 0 6 AR D 2 18 1 8 0 AR D 3 0 1 0 AR D 4 0 0 1 0 AR D 5 0 0 0 AR D 2 1 5 8 5 8 0 AR D 2 2 14 1 8 0 5 AR D 2 3 0 1 0 AR D 2 4 0 1 0 AR D 2 5 0 0 0 CB1 A 1 6 4 5 4 0 9 CB1 A 2 1 5 1 4 0 1 3 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 CB1 A 2 1 4 1 5 4 1 3 5 60 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Archives CB1 A 2 CB1 A 2 CB
564. urement Type Click on one of the radio buttons to select one of following displays the Alpha count for the select Detector Group see below displays the Beta count for the select Detector Group see below y displays the Gamma count for the select Detector Group see below Co60 displays the Cobalt 60 count for the select Detector Group see below 5 26 iPCM User Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Operating Instructions Detector Type Click on one of the radio buttons to select one of the following Detector displays the counts for each individual detector Sum Zone displays the counts for all detectors Total Measurement Note that this is a view only field Period s This is the length of time for the sample calculated from the current alarm conditions and background measurement Alpha Measurement Note that this is a view only field Period s This is the length of time for the sample calculated from the current alarm conditions and background measurement Background Period s Note that this is a view only field This is the current background period The value is set at 0 if a background has not yet been acquired Detector Information Note that this is a view only field The Background Rate Detection Limit and Effective Net Alarm are displayed for each Detector For further information see Description of Parameters Used in Calculatio
565. urer for resulting damage 2 2 General safety and accident prevention regulations In general no safety devices sensors may be dismantled or put out of service During the learning cycle which must only be performed by trained per sonnel the safety devices sensors are switched off It must be en sured therefore before initiating the learning cycle that no persons or objects are situated in the danger zone of the moving door leaves dur ing the operation in order to avoid injury or damage to avoid crushing and shearing points The safeguard for crushing and shearing strains at the side edge must be provided by the manufacturer No objects must be placed in the opening zone path of the swing door Operating instructions DFA 127 Full Power Rev B 11 2006 Page 3 of 20 Technical Data Dimensions Operator 600 x 85 x 124 mm wx h x d Operating voltage 230V Power consumption Standby 13 W rated power 67 W Max torque 50 Nm Opening angle Adjustable from 70 to 115 Time delay Adjustable from 0 to 20 seconds Opening speed Adjustable from 3 to 20 seconds Closing speed Adjustable from 5 to 20 seconds Noise emission 18 dB Environment conditions Temperature range 15 to 50 C Humidity range Up to 85 relative humidity non bedewing 3 1 Permissible door leaf weights and door widths 600 200 E Max door leaf weight kg 100 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 1 1 12 13 14 Door leaf width
566. urie Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material Probability of Detection Printed Circuit Board picocurie Personnel Flow Control Personnel Monitor or Portal Monitor Photomultiplier Tube Probability of False Alarm AC mains Power Supply Method used to identify within the monitoring time see Tmon whether the article is either clearly contaminated or clear referred to as real dirty or real clean Activity of Contamination Residual Contamination Count Small Article Monitor Personnel who normally repair and maintain the instrument in working condition Background Update Time Calculated Monitoring Time Personnel who are general users of the system and normally carry out routine diagnostic and test functions Maximum Monitoring Time Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Glossary of Terms Tmin Minimum Monitoring Time Tmin Tmon Actual Monitoring Time User Anyone associated with or operating the instrument V Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor G 3 Glossary of Terms V Issue 2 0 G 4 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Index Thermo Fisher Scientific A A 6 12 AC Mains Power Supply Replacement 11 6 Actions 5 78 Adjustment of PSU 11 6 Administrator Mode 5 1 Alarm Check 5 31 Alarm Check Report 5 64 Alarm Display 5 106 ALARM Result 5 104 Alarms 5 19 Alpha Beta Body Average Efficiency Typ
567. us parameters e g Pieasa Edi Repon Parameters Stat Date 05 09 2007 End Date 05102007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Instructions Each report displays the following button bar 1 E Page getup Print Save Stop Back e Jil Lv Page Setup g Lb Save Back HIE Report Button Functions Direction Arrows steps through the report pages Direction Arrows moves the report up and down Page Setup display the Report Page settings Report Page Settings Paper size TE Paper Orientation Portrait Left Margin in 050 Right Margin in 050 Top Margin in 100 Bottom Margin in 100 i Cancel Settings Changes Enter the required settings and press OK The Print button sends the report to the printer The Save button displays the Drive selection window to allow you to select a Drive for the saved report The report will be saved as an Excel spreadsheet with the following name Report Type gt lt Y YMMDDHHMM gt xls e g ResultsReport0902261151 xls Stop cancels the processing of the report Back returns the user to the previous screen iPCM User Manual 5 51 Operating Instructions Issue Beta Issue 1 Background Report This report shows the Background Rate Trend between the selected Start and End Dates It is possible to limit t
568. utton The selected Calibration will display in the top box To edit a Calibration Mix select a Calibration Press in the Calibration field to edit the Calibration name In the Calibration Mix section use the drop down list to change the Nuclide Press in the Percentage field to edit the percentage When complete press the Apply Settings button to save or the Cancel button to quit without saving To create a new Calibration Mix highlight in an empty Calibration Mix window or an existing Calibration Mix to overwrite and click on the Create New Mix button Press in the Calibration field to create a new Calibration name In the Calibration Mix section use the drop down list to add a new Nuclide Press in the Percentage field to edit the percentage When complete press the Apply Settings button to save or the Cancel button to quit without saving To delete an existing Calibration Mix highlight the Calibration Mix for deletion and press the Delete Mix button HVScan SelectCalibrationIHV Scan to HEC ERE view and create HV Scans It is AS c E also possible to set HVs for EX UR detector amplifiers The scan Pu allows repeated counts at an increasing or decreasing to J Sater Detects erat be recorded to ascertain detector lee operating point and efficiency New HV Last HV Sean Scan If Detector System y is selected the following window displays 1 Select Detector system to scan 2 Star
569. vailable via auxiliary connectors on the immediately adjacent 5714C DC DC Converter board Custom software will be required depending upon the application A proprietary four port USB Hub is mounted on the Electronics Chassis located immediately below the User Accessories Panel The primary USB feed is via SK4 on the 5712A Processor board The four USB sockets are accessed from inside the iPCM12 booth allowing keyboard mouse security dongle memory sticks and other USB devices to be used in conjunction with the LCD display The sockets are fitted with protective rubber plugs to prevent accidental contact and are also short circuit protected A High Voltage Generator board type 5713A is mounted at the bottom of the Electronics Chassis located immediately below and to the right of the USB Hub It is retained by six hex pillars and protected by a metal screen The PCB generates a single High Voltage supply specifically for use with gas flow detectors typically around 1700 Volts DC for argon methane gas mixtures but is capable of generating in excess of 3500 Volts DC for other applications and gas mixtures The single high voltage output is supplied at two insulated front panel connectors each having series current limiting impedances required to limit the stored charge in each arm of the HV circuits A red HV Enabled LED indicates the status of the HV generator the HV is being demanded when the enabled LED is
570. ve all the screws retaining the PCB to their mounting spacers Disconnect remaining internal cabling links at SK8 PL10 PL7 PL6 and PL2 The PCB can now be lifted away from the Electronics display chassis Replacement of the Controller PCBs is the reverse of the removal procedure If the main processor is thought to be faulty it should be replaced with an identical unit see Recommended Spares List page 12 1 Remember to transfer the Flash memory from the old card to the new one as this contains all the necessary configuration data Set the Links on the 57124 as follows e e e LK2 e e e LK5 LK4 e e e LK9 e e LK3 e e Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue Beta Issue 1 DC DC Converter 5714A Removal and Replacement Replacement of the DC DC Converter board FHT681 cards as used in gamma option iPCM12B amp iPCM12C Removal and Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Switch off the power and power down the iPCM12 The 5714A is located below the ETX processor board and may be unscrewed 4 screws and removed with without removal of the Electronic display chassis from the left side frame Four cables need disconnecting B92597 A B92603 A B91918 A amp B92604 A Replacement of the 5714A is the reverse of the removal procedure Should the converter thought to be faulty it should be replaced wit
571. vide the drawings listed below Drawings List by Assembly iPCM12 FAMILY TREE D92425 OUTLINE DRAWING iPCM12A D92620 A 5713A HV GENERATOR E92359 A 5659B TEMPERATURE SENSOR BRD C91794 B 5703A BATTERY CONTROLLER BRD D92313 A 5672A 5 WAY LED CLUSTER D91956 A 5714B DC DC CONVERTER BOARD C92356 A ETX PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY D92615 A 5712 ETX PROCESSOR BOARD E92353 A GAS CONTROL CHASSIS D92610 A 5709A GAS FLOW BOARD E92362 A 5711 GUIDANCE DISPLAY BOARD C92349 A 5707A iPCM12C GPIO CARD E92343 A 5710A QUAD GAS FLOW DETECTOR D92413 A ASSEMBLY iPCM12A INTERCONNECTION D92591 6 DIAGRAM sheets See diagrams at back of document iPCM12A GENERAL ASSEMBLY D92590 A DRAWING iPCM12B GENERAL ASSEMBLY D92767 A DRAWING AE0222A AE0222A GAMMA KIT D92513A SCINTILLATOR CENTRE D92842 CALIBRATION POSITIONS IPCMI2B C ENCLOSED UNIT FAMILY 92675 TREE IPCMI2 SERIES OUTLINE DRAWING D92620 2 sheets MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET P 10 MSDS AIRGAS Thermo Fisher Scientific iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 13 1 Drawing Appendix Issue 2 0 13 2 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Glossary of Terms pCi Chapter 14 Glossary of Terms pCi A AE AL BAE Beff Bq Bsum C CAct CCM Ccps Ceffect Ci CPM D DL dpm E Egress EPD ETX F FOM GPIO Health Physicist HP HV IEC Thermo Fisher Scientific micro curie Attenuation Factor or amps Associated
572. wards if necessary Select Setup IDetection Options page 5 17 and check that the Probability of False Alarm is set to a reasonable value Typically 3 1o Reduce if necessary Select Setup IDetection Options page 5 17 and check that the Probability of Detection is set to a reasonable value Typically 1 650 Reduce if necessary Select Calibration HV Scan page 5 46 Check that the High Voltage setting for the gas flow detectors a and p 11 30 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting selection is correct typically 1700V for P7 5 Argon Methane gas For gamma detectors y selection if fitted check the High Voltage settings of ALL eight detector channels are correct typically ranging from 800 V to 1100 V 6 Select Setup IMonitoring page 5 14 and set a 10 second Minimum Monitoring Time Check the counts in all gas flow detector channels and all scintillator channels are reasonable for the expected ambient background level using DiagnosticslDetectors page 5 27 7 Ifa single channel shows a background count significantly greater than the other detectors a noisy channel or a scintillator light leak is likely Proceed as follows 8 Swap the faulty gas flow detector for the pre gassed hot spare It will be necessary to enable the replacement detector node address a B see XChannel page 5 20 e Swap the faulty scintillation de
573. which it would suffer permanent damage and be difficult to recharge A miniature fuse protects against over current conditions iPCM User Manual 2 3 Description Issue Beta Issue 1 The application software would normally regulate shut down In the event of the software losing control an emergency shut down is possible by holding the key switch ON for a minimum of 10 seconds nominal DC DC Converter Board Type 5714B A proprietary DC DC Converter pair produces regulated 5V and 12V which outputs via the Battery Controller Board type 5703A Scintillation HV and Amplifier Type 42543 0223 FHT681 Used in iPCM12C variants The Scintillation HV and Amplifier Board type 1 is a dual channel high voltage generator scintillation amplifier pair The HV generators are sub assemblies type 42543 0202 which are controlled by DACs Digital to Analogue Converter on the main pcb The HV has a range between 0 and 1400 Volts with a resolution of about 1 Volt The charge pulses arriving along the high voltage cable from the scintillation detectors are amplified and each fed to five discriminators and five associated counters all controlled by the microprocessor on the main board The cards are interrogated via the X channel bus to retrieve counter values generated every 100ms from a 5 second buffer Annunciators Type 5711A and 5672A These assemblies provide the front side and internal left visual displays necessary to inform th
574. with the side of foot detector one of three grilles is smaller than all other body grilles iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor 11 19 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Shoulder Side of Head and Outer Hand Detectors Overhead Detector 1 Foot Detectors 2 Issue 2 0 These detectors are all accessible via the right hand service door Note that the Shoulder and Side of Head detector protective grilles are two of three grilles smaller than all other body grilles A bracket with integral hand mechanism bumpstops retains the Outer Hand Back of Hand detector and is retained by two knurled knobs Remove this bracket before releasing the detector body from its lower spring clip and withdrawing it vertically from the hand mechanism This is located inside the roof section facing downwards and retained by two Velcro straps It is necessary to first remove the roof cover to gain access to the overhead detector Ensure the earth and EMC straps are refitted to the underside of the roof cover 1 Open the body detector array frame to gain clear access to the foot plinth It may be necessary to remove the two black hex countersunk transit screws securing the tread plate these need not be replaced but safely stored for future use 2 To remove the foot plinth tread plate assembly use the two foot well lifters located in a slot inside of the service door Insert the two lifters into the two photo
575. y Removal and Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Maintenance and Trouble Shooting connecting the mains wiring ensure the mains inlet earth connection is made securely to the Central Earth Point CEP Ensure the metal safety cover is re fitted and tightly secured These requirements are mandatory and necessary for continued EMC performance and user safety IMPORTANT Care should be taken at all times not to short the battery terminals The battery is a sealed lead acid Gel Cell type construction and does not require regular maintenance The battery should be periodically tested for capacity Charging is carefully temperature and voltage current controlled so the battery generally has a long life typically in excess of five years If it requires replacement proceed as follows 1 Switch OFF the following iPCM12 keyswitch and PSU Rocker switch 2 Disconnect the following external mains supply top plinth and the battery cables from the Battery Controller Board 5703A PL5 and PL7 or 5720A PL7 and PL9 3 Remove the angle bracket two screws covering the battery holder remove the battery compartment top cover four screws Lift out metal brackets 4 Tilt the battery out to reveal the connecting cables Disconnect the thermistor assembly from the negative BLACK terminal marked taking care not to short it to the terminal 6 Disconnect the red wire from the positive RED termin
576. y should light the LED and allow the system to run while charging the battery 1 Check the AC mains power cord is connected at the top face of the plinth 2 Check the fuse in the mains adapter if fitted 3 Check that rocker switch is ON and power supply is receiving the mains supply 4 Check the power supply output on 5703A PL1 temporarily remove from pcb to check no output indicates the internal fuse has blown and the power supply should be replaced see Removal and Replacement of the Power Supply page 11 6 5 Check the output on PL7 of the 5703A charger PCB it should be greater than 12 5 volts Unit dead will not boot Front panel LED ON indicates that AC mains supply is ON up amp charging LEDisON and should be powering the instrument while charging the battery 1 Retry switching the unit ON 2 Check the fuse on the 5703A charger PCB 3 Check the battery voltage is greater than 12 5 volts 4 Check there is battery voltage on OUTPUT connector PL4 If no output is observed on PLA a fault on the charger PCB is indicated and it should be replaced as detailed in Replacement of the Charger PCB page 11 9 5 Check the power connections from the 5703A Charger PCB to the 5714A board and 5712A 6 Check the regulated 12 V 12 V amp 5 V outputs from the DC DC converter module 5714A The DC DC module is not user serviceable and if faulty the Converter board should be replaced Switch iPC
577. ycle where Tsis the Changing Conditions period time slice variable see Monitoring page 5 14 6 16 iPCM12 Installed Personnel Contamination Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Issue 2 0 Contamination Alarm Zone Summation if Required Calculation of Activity and Associated Uncertainty Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Description Physics After monitoring a user for the prescribed monitoring time Ton the effective contamination alarm level 15 calculated as follows 1 1 Cos Ceffect m Bef t E fs T ON Ty ON The total system background count rate Berf is then subtracted from the total system gross contamination count rate Cgross and the remaining net contamination count rate compared with the alarm level So an alarm condition exists if Cys Ba 2 Ceffect The alarm count rate for two zones summed together is the square root of the sum of the squares of the alarm count rate of the individual zones therefore the new summed alarm count rate Csum is given by the following formula Cus Camas MA Figure 16 shows the alpha beta sum zones The system displays the level of radioactive contamination both on and in the user The activity is displayed in multiples of the Alarm level along with the zone that triggered the alarm on the body mimic The derived activity in the appropriate activity units and its associated uncertainty are stored in the instrument datab
578. ype 5707A Used in iPCM12C variants This card provides the necessary drive and monitoring circuitry required for controlling doors and barrier arm motors Communication with the card is established via the X Channel bus picked up from the nearest HV amp Amp assembly When fitted 5707A is fitted adjacent to the HV generator module on the lower part of the electronics display chassis Wiring and cabling is specific to the use of the monitor with doors barriers or external turnstile controls Battery Controller Board Type 5703A The Battery Controller Board type 5703A manages the charging of a 12 volt sealed lead acid battery The whole electronics system is powered from the 5703A board which constantly senses the charge discharge state of the battery and controls the charging voltage accordingly The charging voltage is temperature compensated by means of a thermistor located on the battery helping to maximise the life time of the battery A momentary key switch located on the front of the right hand panel allows power to be switched to the electronics provided the battery voltage is above a safe value i e not discharged even when mains power is absent The key switch needs to be held ON for at least two seconds before the ON state is engaged The 5703A continues to monitor the terminal voltage of the battery during battery operation but will signal a shut down if the battery discharges to a predetermined point beyond

Thermo iPCM12-Rev 2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents